Copyright: Copyright © 1999 Deneba Systems Inc.
Citation: Canvas 6 Help


Welcome
Click Help Topics above to open the topics window

The Contents tab shows topics organized in books:

  Double-click a book to display the topics in the book.

  Double-click a topic page to display the topic.

The Index tab lets you search for topics. Type a keyword in the text box. The first index entry that matches is highlighted in the list. Click Display to view the indexed topic. Or, double-click an index entry to display its topic.

Keeping Help on top

If the Help window disappears when you choose a topic, it could be behind the Canvas window. Close or move the front window and select the Help Window. Choose Options > Keep Help On Top > On Top. This will keep the Help window in front of all open windows.


Using the Toolbar

The Toolbar contains buttons you can click to choose commands, tools, inks, strokes, and styles. The Toolbar appears above the document, under the menu bar.

To display the Toolbar: Choose Window > Palettes > Show Toolbar.

To hide the Toolbar: Choose Window > Palettes > Hide Toolbar.

To select an item: Click a button on the Toolbar.

To arrange Toolbar buttons: Press Shift and drag a button.

A standard set of commands appears on the Toolbar when you first run Canvas. You can choose File > Customize to change the buttons on the Toolbar. You can add buttons to the Toolbar for commands, tools, text attributes, inks, strokes, and object styles.

You can identify Toolbar items by displaying tool tips. Point to a button and a tool tip shows the name of the item. If tool tips don’t appear, choose File > Preferences, and then select “Command Information Tool Tips” on the General tab.


Using the Docking bar

You can use the Docking bar to customize the Canvas interface. The Docking bar can be displayed near the top of the screen under the Menu bar. If the Toolbar is displayed, the Docking bar appears under it.

To display the Docking bar: Choose Window > Palettes > Show Docking Bar. When you display the Docking bar, the palettes that were docked and have not been removed will still be docked.

To hide the Docking bar: Choose Window > Palettes > Hide Docking Bar.

  How to dock palettes


Docking palettes

You can “dock” Canvas palettes on the Docking bar. When you dock a palette, a tab with the palette’s name appears on the Docking bar. Docked palettes give you quick access to features that you use often. Docked palettes also leave more space available on screen.

To dock a palette: Drag its title bar onto the Docking bar and drop the palette when a tab outline appears.  To dock a tool palette from the toolbox, first drag the palette out from the toolbox and drop it on the desktop so its title bar appears. Then drag the palette onto the Docking bar.

To move a docked palette: Drag the palette’s tab to another position on the Docking bar.

To remove a docked palette: Drag its tab away from the Docking bar.

What can be docked

You can dock most Canvas palettes, including tool palettes that you drag away from the toolbox, such as the Painting, Rectangles, and Text palettes. You can dock other palettes from the toolbox, including the Inks, Strokes, Transparency, and Brushes palettes. You can also dock command palettes such as Align, Blend, Envelope, Object Specs, and Type. Dialog boxes that require you to click OK or Cancel before continuing can’t be docked.

You can dock as many palettes as you want on the Docking bar, depending on the size of your screen. If you dock all available palettes, their tabs will probably overlap.


Using the Status bar

The Status bar is at the bottom of the screen (Mac) or the bottom of the Canvas window (Windows). The Status bar provides information about commands, tools, objects, and program operations.

To hide the Status bar (Mac OS only): Choose Window > Palettes > Hide Status Bar. To display the Status Bar, choose Window > Palettes > Show Status Bar.

Message area

The Message area displays tool names, tips, and status messages. When you move the pointer over a tool icon or other item, the Message area shows the tool’s name and function. You can use this feature to take a tour of the Canvas tools and interface.

During certain actions, such as saving a document, Canvas displays a progress bar in the Message area.

Coordinates data

When you move the pointer, draw, resize, or rotate objects, Canvas displays measurement and position information in the Coordinates area. The type of data displayed depends on whether you are drawing, resizing objects, or moving the pointer or objects.

To change the unit of measurement for this data, use the Rulers command in the Layout menu.

If you set a drawing scale in the Rulers dialog box, the Coordinates data conform to the drawing scale. For example, if you set a drawing scale of 1 centimeter = 1 meter, and you draw an object 5 centimeters square on screen, the Coordinates area displays the scaled dimension.

Dimensions

As you drag the pointer to draw or resize objects, the Status bar displays the width (W) and height (H) of the object’s bounding box. When you draw or resize some types of objects, including lines and rounded rectangles, Canvas displays specialized data.

Pointer position

When you move the pointer, the Status bar shows the position of the pointer using X and Y coordinates. The horizontal (X) coordinate is the distance measured horizontally from the ruler’s zero point; the vertical (Y) coordinate is the distance measured vertically from the ruler’s zero point. When you move objects, Canvas shows the change in position from the original X and Y coordinates.

Information area

Canvas displays information about selections in the Information area of the Status bar. When an object is selected, the Information area displays a description of the type of object selected. When multiple objects are selected, this area shows the number of objects selected.

When you select an object group, the Information area displays “Group of n objects,” with n as the number of objects.

Data pop-up menu

When a single object is selected, you can press the pointer on the Information area to open a pop-up menu showing the height, width, area, and perimeter of the selected object.

To paste a measurement from the data pop-up menu: With a single object selected, choose an item in the Data pop-up menu. Canvas pastes the measurement you select as text next to the object.


Using numeric expressions

You can type basic mathematical expressions to specify numeric values in Canvas dialog boxes and palettes. You can use addition, subtraction, division, and multiplication operators in simple expressions.

For example, you can type a fractional value, such as 2/3, in place of a decimal value.

To type an expression

To enter operators in expressions, type a plus sign (+) for addition; a minus sign (-) for subtraction; a slash (/) for division; and an asterisk (*) for multiplication.

You can type parentheses to nest values and operators in expressions.

You do not type an equal sign in an expression.

Canvas calculates the result of a mathematical expression when you press Tab or Enter, or click an Apply button, or move to another value in a dialog box.

To modify a value

To use an existing value in an expression, click after the number to place an insertion point. Then, type the remainder of the expression. For example, to make the width of an object 3 times larger, click after the existing value, type * 3, and then press Enter. To make the value one-third as large, type / 3.

By entering expressions after existing values in the Transform palette, you can move objects incrementally. For example, to move an object 3/4 inch to the right, type + 3/4 after the X value.

Specifying measurement units

In the Object Specs palette and the Offset Path dialog box, you can type abbreviations to specify measurement units. You can use this feature to override a document’s measurement units or the specific measurement units used in these dialog boxes.

For example, when inches is a document’s unit of measurement, you can type 1 cm to specify 1 centimeter. Canvas converts 1 cm and displays it as .3937 inches.

The following are the abbreviations you can type to specify a unit of measurement. In a text box that accepts numerical values, type a value followed by the abbreviation for the measurement unit. Canvas converts the numerical value to the measurement units you are using in the document when you press Tab or Enter, or click an Apply button, or click in another edit box.

in	inches
ft or  f	feet
y	yards
mi	miles
p	picas
pt	points
mm	millimeters
m	meters
km	kilometers
cm or c	centimeters
Note: You cannot type a mathematical expression using more than one measurement unit. For example, you cannot type 1 in * 1 cm.


Using context menus

Canvas has context menus that you can pop up in the drawing area, giving you quick access to common commands. The menus are context-sensitive; the available commands depend on the current operation.

You can choose common editing commands, such as Cut, Copy, and Paste, when an object is selected. Other commands are available when an object is in edit mode. For example, image-editing commands appear in the context menu when you edit a paint object. Path-editing commands appear when a vector object is in edit mode.

When no objects are selected, you can choose view commands such as Zoom In, Zoom Out, Show Rulers, and Show Guides. If the Clipboard contains objects or text, you can choose Paste. You can choose Undo after performing an action that can be undone.

To use context menus

To apply a command to an object, select the object first. To use other commands, you do not need to select an object before displaying the context menu.

Windows: Click the right mouse button. A context menu appears. Click a command in the menu to choose it.

Mac: Press Control and the mouse button. A context menu appears. Highlight a command in the menu and release the mouse button to choose the command.

When you are editing an object, you can point to a specific item to display commands for editing that item. For example, if you point to an anchor point on a path, you can choose commands to modify the anchor point in the context menu.


Changing view magnification

You can change your view of a document by changing the view magnification. This is called “zooming,” and you can zoom in to make objects appear larger or zoom out to see a larger area. Zooming changes the view on screen, but doesn’t change the actual size of anything in the document.

You can zoom with the Magnifying Glass tool, the Zoom bar, the Zoom palette, and Zoom commands. You can use magnification levels from 3.12 to 3,200 percent. Normal magnification is 100 percent.

To use a command to zoom: Choose Layout > Views > Zoom In or Zoom Out. Zoom In increases magnification to the next higher preset level; Zoom Out decreases magnification to the next lower preset level.

To enter a zoom percentage: Choose Layout > Views > Zoom, or press Command (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and the slash key (/). Enter a zoom percentage from 3.12 to 3,200 in the dialog box and press Enter or click OK.

Using zoom shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to access the Magnifying Glass tool and to zoom directly.

Mac

To zoom in with the Magnifying Glass tool, press Option+Tab or Option+Spacebar or Command+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom out, press Option+Tab+Shift or Option+Shift+Spacebar or Command+Shift+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom in directly, press Command+Option +Plus (+). To zoom out directly, press Command+Option+Minus (-).

Windows

To zoom in with the Magnifying Glass tool, press Ctrl+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom out, press Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom in directly, press Ctrl+Alt+Plus (+). To zoom out, press Ctrl+Alt+Minus (-).

Using the Zoom bar and Zoom palette

You can use the Zoom bar at the bottom left of the document window to adjust the view magnification. The Zoom bar displays the current magnification and lets you change magnification in preset increments. You can also use the Zoom bar to open the Zoom palette.

To zoom to the next preset magnification level: Click the Zoom-in or Zoom-out button on the Zoom bar. The Zoom-in button increases magnification and narrows the view. The Zoom-out button decreases magnification and widens the view.

To select any magnification percentage: Press the center of the Zoom bar and drag the slider in the Zoom palette. The box at the lower left shows the magnification level percentage.

If you drag the Zoom palette away from the Zoom bar, it stays open and you can click the preset magnification levels or click anywhere on the slider bar. For example, click the slider bar between 50 and 100 to set the magnification level to approximately 75 percent.

Tip: To quickly magnify an object, select the object and click the Zoom-in button.


About documents

Canvas lets you create three kinds of documents: Illustrations, Publications, and Presentations. Each document type has its own layout and options.

Tell me about...

  Layers

  Pages, Slides, and Sheets

  Illustration documents

  Presentation features

  Publications


About layers

Layers are available in all Canvas documents. Layers are like transparent overlays that you can use to arrange objects in a document.

Layers are clear. A layer does not block anything behind it, but objects on higher layers can block objects on lower layers. On the same layer, objects that are higher in the stacking order can block objects that are lower in the stacking order.

Layers can help you work more efficiently by separating objects. You can hide, print, and save layers individually. You can share layers among multiple pages. Special layers let you add guides and grids to pages.

To work with layers, you use the Document Layout palette and commands in the Layout menu.


About pages

All Canvas documents can contain multiple pages. In the Canvas documentation,  “page” is a general term used to refer to the separate parts of a document.

Publication documents can have multiple pages that are single or double-sided. Illustration documents can have multiple single-side pages, called “sheets.” Presentation documents can have multiple presentation pages, called “slides.”

A page, sheet, or slide consists of one or more layers. Objects that are on a page are actually on the layers attached to the page, not on the page itself.  Special layers can hold guides and drawing grids.


About presentations

When you create a Presentation document, the document has one master slide and one main slide. You can add as many additional main slides as you like, limited only by available memory. You arrange slides and set up optional transition effects to create a slide show presentation. Slide shows can be self-running or operator-controlled.

You can use the master slide to hold common elements that you want to appear in the background on most slides. Each main slide can have multiple layers. During slide show play-back, all visible layers can appear as one slide. Or, if you select the Progressive Build option in the Slide Show dialog box, each layer’s contents can be added to the base image in sequence.

When you work in a Presentation document, commands for layers and slides appear in the Layers & Slides submenu in the Layout menu.

You can use the slide icons and arrow buttons below the document window to navigate among the master and main slides. The icon representing the current slide is highlighted.

  To set up a presentation


About publications

When you create a Publication document, the document contains at least one body page and one master page, or two master pages (left and right) if you select Facing Pages in the Document Setup dialog box.

When you work in a Publication document, commands for layers and pages appear in the Layers & Pages submenu in the Layout menu. You can use the page icons and the arrows at the bottom of the document window to navigate among the master and main pages. The icon representing the current page number is highlighted.

  To set up a publication


Getting help with Canvas

To search for a Help topic (Windows)

1.	To find a Help topic based on a word or phrase, click the Index tab (in the topics window) or the Index button in the Help window.

2.	On the Index tab, type the word or phrase you want to find. The list of keywords scrolls to the closest matching keyword in the index.

3.	Click Display to view the topic for the selected keyword. If the keyword refers to more than one topic, the Topics Found dialog box opens. Select the specific topic you want to view and click Display.

To search for a Help topic (Mac)

1.	To find a Help topic based on a word or phrase, click the Index tab (in the Topics window) or the Index button in the Help window.

2.	On the Index tab, type the word or phrase you want to find. The keyword list scrolls to the closest matching entry.

•	To view the highlighted topic, click Display or double-click the topic.

•	You can use the arrow keys to move through the list and select sub-topics to display.

Related topic

Contacting Deneba Software


Contacting Deneba Software

For answers to technical questions, solutions for problems, and assistance with customer issues, please contact Deneba Software by phone, fax, mail or e- mail, or visit our site on the world wide web.

Technical support

To receive technical support, you must be a registered Canvas user. If you haven’t yet registered your copy of Canvas, you can register by mail, fax, or on Deneba’s web site.

Contact information

Mail	Deneba Software 7400 S.W. 87th Avenue Miami, FL 33173
Phone Monday through Friday, 9 a.m. to 6 p.m. Eastern time.	Main phone number (305) 596-5644
FAX You can send technical support questions and request other assistance from the  Customer Support department by fax 24 hours a day.	Customer Support fax (305) 273-9069 International support fax (305) 273-9877
E-mail You can send technical and customer support questions to the Customer Support department through Internet e-mail.	Customer Support e-mail support@deneba.com International support e-mail intlsupport@deneba.com
World Wide Web Visit Deneba’s comprehensive web site for technical support,  product information, purchases, product registration, demo versions, updates, supplemental files, tips, company contact information, and more.	http://www.deneba.com ftp server ftp.deneba.com In Canvas, choose Help > Deneba Home Page to launch your web browser and connect to Deneba’s web site.


Separating grayscale images

When you print color separations, Canvas can separate grayscale paint objects (images) as if the gray shades were made from RGB color values, or from black percentage values only. A preference setting lets you choose which of these methods to use.

To set the grayscale separation preference

1.	Choose File > Preferences.

2.	Click the Painting tab.

3. 	Select or clear the option box for "Separate grayscales as black," and then click OK.

•	To separate grayscale images onto the black plate only, select the option box.  When you output separations, Canvas will convert grayscale values into black percentages.

•	To separate grayscale images as RGB color images, clear the option box. When you output separations, Canvas will convert grayscale values into process color percentages.


Printing tips

To be sure that your Canvas documents print the way you want them to, you can take steps when you create the document and when you choose printing options. Use the links below for procedures and tips to ensure successful printing.

It's always a good idea to use the Print Preview command to see what will print before you output a document. Print Preview will show you the number of pages to print and how the document will appear on the printed pages.

Tell me about...

  Using Print Preview

  Printing text and transparency effects

  Printable area and tiling documents

  Separating grayscale images


Printing text over transparency

When you create transparency effects, be sure to check the placement of text objects in the document. Canvas renders transparency effects when it prints. If  opaque text is not in front of all other objects and on the top layer in the document, the text will also be rendered. This can make text appear jagged in the printed document.

To prevent the rendering of text, create a layer for all text objects, and place this layer above all other layers. If your text appears to be rasterized, be sure the text objects are on the top layer before you try printing again.


Printable area
The printable area and page breaks

You can display page breaks and the printable area to see how Canvas will print a document.

Canvas shows the printable area as a magenta rectangle in the document. The printer driver you use (and in some cases, the PPD file) tells Canvas the size of the printable area. If a document does not print as close to the paper edges as possible, the printer driver might not report the exact printable area for your printer model.

The printable area is displayed by default when you create a new Publication document. You can choose Display > Hide Printable Area to remove the printable area rectangle. Choose Display > Show Printable Area to display it.

In an Illustration or Presentation document, choose Display > Show Page Breaks to display the printable area rectangle. If a document will be tiled for printing, select Tile in the Page Setup / Printer Setup dialog box, and Canvas will display magenta rectangles for each tile to be printed.

Centering

By default, Canvas selects the Center on Paper option for printing. This centers the entire document within the printed page. If the document is tiled for printing, the document is centered on the group of tiled pages.

If an Illustration document is larger than the printer paper, and Center on Paper is not selected, the printable area starts at the top-left corner of the document. Display the printable area to see if any objects are outside the area.

If a Publication or Presentation document is larger than the printer paper, and Center on Paper is not selected, the printable area is inset from the top-left corner of the document the same as it is on a printed page. Display the printable area to see if any objects are outside the area that will be printed.

Tiling documents

If your document is larger than the printable area of the printer, Canvas can tile the document across multiple pages. When this is necessary, select the Tile option. Otherwise, Canvas will print one page (the first tile) from the document.


 Canvas commands

Use this menu	to do this

File	Create, open, save, and print documents; set preferences and customize Canvas

Edit	Undo and repeat actions; copy objects; use OLE or Publish and Subscribe to share information

Effects	Blend, combine, envelope, rotate, flip, extrude and apply shadows to objects

Help	Use the on-line help system

Image	Create images; apply filters and color correction; use image proxies

Layout	Set up documents, rulers, and grids; configure pages, layers, and slides; set display options

Object	Select, find, arrange, and manipulate objects

Text	Format text, check spelling, and insert special text objects

Window	Arrange windows and display palettes


New command

Use the New command to make a new Canvas document. When you choose the New command, you can select the document type and a document template.

You can create new documents any time. The number of documents you can open at once depends on the amount of system memory available.

To create a new document

1.	Choose File > New.

2.	In the New dialog box under "Type of Document," select the type of document you want to create: Illustration, Presentation, or Publication.

3.	To use a document template, select its name in the Use Template pop-up menu. A preview of the selected template appears on the right.

4.	Click OK. Canvas creates a new document with the name "Untitled" (Mac) or "New" (Windows) and a document number. If you selected a template, the document name is based on the name of the template.

How Canvas creates new documents

The first time you start Canvas, a blank illustration document appears. After that, Canvas makes a new document at startup based on the document type you chose the last time you used the New command. If you select a document template when you use the New command, Canvas uses the same template to create startup documents.

To start Canvas with a blank document

If Canvas applies a template to new documents at startup, and you want these documents created with no template, do the following:

1.	Choose File > New.

2.	In the New dialog box, select the type of document you want to create.

3.	Choose "None" in the Use Template pop-up menu.

4.	Click OK to create a new blank document. You can then close the new document and quit Canvas. The next time Canvas starts, it will create a new document based on no template.


Illustration documents

Illustration documents are general-purpose documents for all types of illustrations and graphics. You can specify a custom document size, and the document can have multiple pages (called "sheets"), with multiple layers on each sheet.

When the active document is an Illustration, the icons at the bottom of the window represent the document’s sheets. You can click an icon to move to that sheet.

  To set up an illustration


Publication documents

Publication documents are designed for publications printed with two-sided (facing) pages, although you can also create a Publication that has pages with single sides. You can use master pages to hold items that you want to appear throughout the publication. You can also use multiple layers on each page.

When the active document is a Publication, you can use page icons at the bottom of the window to move among the document’s pages.


Presentation documents

Presentation documents are designed for on-screen "slide show" presentations. You can use multiple layers and a master slide to hold background elements in Presentation documents. You can also use more than a dozen transition effects when you display a Presentation document as an on-screen slide show.

When a Presentation document is active, slide icons appear at the bottom of the document window. You can use these icons to move through the slides and to select body slides and the master slide.


Using document templates

Templates are special Canvas documents that you can use as the basis for new documents.

If you select a Template in the New dialog box, Canvas creates a new document containing the graphics and text in the Template. Canvas also uses the Template’s settings for layers, slides, pages, rulers, grids, guides, views, and default object attributes.

When Canvas creates a new document based on a Template, it doesn’t open the Template file on disk. When you make changes to the new document and save it to disk, the changes don’t affect the template.

Canvas treats a Template file the if you open it by double-clicking its icon or using the Open command. In either case, rather than open the actual Template document, Canvas makes a new document based on the Template’s document type and contents.

Templates, like regular Canvas documents, come in three types: Illustration, Presentation, and Publication Templates. In the New dialog box, the templates listed in the Use Template pop-up menu match the document type you select in the "Type of Document" area.


Open command

Use the Open command to open Canvas documents and to import other types of files into Canvas.

To open a Canvas document

1.	Choose File > Open. Canvas displays a standard dialog box for you to select a document file. By default, the dialog box lists the names of Canvas 6 documents in the current directory.

2.	In the file list, select the document you want to open and click Open. Canvas displays a preview if the selected document contains a preview. For Mac OS, Canvas previews require that QuickTime extensions be installed.

Related topics

Substituting fonts when opening documents

Opening documents that require specific tools


Opening documents that require specific tools

When you open a Canvas document that depends on one or more Canvas external tools to display and print correctly, Canvas alerts you if the necessary external tools aren't available.

To load tools required to open a document

1.	Quit Canvas.

2.	Restart Canvas while pressing the Spacebar to open the ToolPicker

3.	In the ToolPicker dialog box, click All Tools to be sure that Canvas loads all available external tools.

Note: If a required tool is not available in the ToolPicker, the tool file might be damaged. In that case, you should reinstall the Canvas tools.


Substituting fonts when opening documents
Substituting fonts in Canvas documents

If a document you open uses fonts that aren’t available on your system, Canvas displays a dialog box before opening the document. You can use the dialog box to review which fonts are required by the document and to select substitute fonts, or you can let Canvas select substitutes.

To select substitute fonts

1.	Select a font listed under Original Font, or Shift-click to select multiple fonts. This column lists fonts that are specified in the document but are not available.

2.	Choose a substitute font in the “With” pop-up menu. The name of the font appears in the list under Substitute Font. Canvas displays the font name in its corresponding typeface so you can preview the font substitution.

3.	Select the checkbox to permanently replace the missing fonts with the fonts you choose in this dialog box.

4.	After you select substitutes for the missing fonts, click OK to open the document. To cancel the changes, click Clear Changes to let Canvas choose a substitute and open the document.

Making font substitutions permanent

If you substitute fonts when you open a document, Canvas does not permanently change the document’s original fonts. Each time you open the same document, you will need to substitute fonts (if the original fonts still aren’t available). Canvas remembers the last substitutions you selected for a document.

You can permanently replace fonts in the document in two ways:

•	When you open a Canvas document and the Font Substitution dialog box appears, choose the Permanent Change option. When you click OK, Canvas will assign permanently to the document the substitute fonts you selected in the dialog box.

•	Change the fonts used in the document yourself. After you open the document, select all text that has unavailable fonts assigned to it. Use the Font menu or the Type palette to assign available fonts.


Place command

The Place command lets you insert a document stored on disk into an active Canvas document. You can insert a Canvas document or a non-Canvas document with this command.

Canvas lets you control the exact location and size of any document you place. In addition, when placing Canvas documents, you can also control which layers, pages, or slides to place, and whether to place them on the current layer, page, or slide, or on new ones, depending on the document type (Illustration, Publication, or Presentation).

To place a file in an open Canvas document

1.	Choose File > Place. A directory dialog box appears.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select the file that you want to place, and then click Place. If the file has more than one page or layer, the Place Options dialog box appears. Configure the options in the dialog box, and then click OK.

3.	If you selected “Show Place Cursor” in the dialog box, the Place cursor appears. Position the Place cursor in the open document where you want the top-left corner of the placed file to be. If you did not select "Show Place Cursor," Canvas inserts the file after you click OK.

4.	Click to place the file at its original size; Canvas inserts the upper-left corner of the file at the point you click. To define the dimensions of the file you’re placing, drag to create a bounding box. Canvas inserts the file and scales it to fit the bounding box.

Place options

When you place a file, the Place Options dialog box lets you specify how the placed file should be added to the current document.

When you place one Canvas document type (Illustration, Publication, or Presentation) into another document type, Canvas converts the placed pages, sheets, or slides to the format of the current document. Document pages (and sheets or slides) can be added to the current document, along with their layers.

In the Place Options dialog box, you can select the following options, and then click OK to place the document.

Place on Current Layer: Places the file’s objects on the current layer of the current page. No pages or layers are created in the current document.

Show Place Cursor: Select this option if you want to set the position or size of placed items on the current page. After you click OK in the Place Options dialog box, a place pointer appears. Click to set the position of the upper-left corner of the placed items, or drag to enclose an area in which you want the placed items to fit.

Add Layers to Current Page: Places the document’s layers as new layers on the current page in the current document.

Add New Pages: Places the document’s pages and layers as new pages and layers in the current document.

Select: Click to choose specific pages or layers to place. A dialog box lists the available items. Shift-click two items to select a range. Command-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows) to select multiple items and toggle selected items. Click OK to close the dialog box.


Close command

Use the Close command to close the active Canvas document. To close the document, choose File > Close. Canvas removes the document window from the screen.

You can also click the Close box (Mac), or the Close button (Windows) in the title bar to close the document.

Note: When you choose Close, Canvas doesn’t save a document, although it will warn you if you try to close a document without saving changes.


Save command

Use the Save command to store the current document on disk and continue working.

To save changes to a document as you work

Choose File > Save to update the document file on disk.

The Save command isn’t available if the active document has not been changed since it was last saved.

If a new document has never been saved, the Save command functions the same as the Save As command.

To avoid losing your work in the event of a power failure or system failure, use the Save command frequently while you work to store changes on disk. Canvas does not automatically save changes as you work.

When you use the Save command, Canvas stores the document in a disk file and replaces the previous saved version on disk.

File formats

Canvas preserves the original file format when you save a non-Canvas file. For example, if you open a Windows Bitmap file (.BMP), make changes in Canvas and choose Save, the BMP Export Options dialog box appears (you can choose a compression method for the file) and Canvas updates the BMP file on disk when you click OK.


Save As command

Use the Save As command to store a copy of the active document on disk. You can save the entire document or selected items.

To save a copy of a document

1.	In the active document, do one of the following:

•	To save specific objects, select the objects you want to save.

•	To save specific layers, make sure the layers you want to save are visible.

2.	Choose File > Save As. A directory dialog box appears.

3.	Select a file format in the "File Format" (Mac) or "Save as type" (Windows) pop-up menu. If you choose a format other than Canvas, some options, such as saving layers, are not available.

4. 	Select an option to specify what you to save in the new document:

Save Entire Document: Saves a complete document.

Save Selection: Select this option after you select objects in the document that you want to save. If you don’t select anything, this option is not available.

Save Layers: Select this option to save one or more layers. Click Layers to specify layers to save. This option isn’t available if the document has only one layer.

5.	Select other options for the saved document. The following options are available when saving Canvas 6 documents:

Use Compression: Reduces the size of saved files.

Create Preview (Mac) or Save Preview (Windows): Saves a low-resolution preview of the document. Canvas and some other applications let you view previews before opening files.

Use Preview Icon: Creates a finder icon (Mac OS only) with a preview of the document.

Use Extensions (Mac): Adds a three-character filename extension. Use this if you use Mac files on Windows systems.

6.	Type a name for the file, select a location, and click Save. For some file formats, a dialog box presents options for the file. Configure the options and click OK. If you select a raster image format and the file needs to be rendered, select rendering options and click OK.

Related topics

Saving in other formats

Save command


Revert command

You can use the Revert command to throw away changes you’ve made to a document since the last time you saved it.

Revert does the same thing as closing a document without saving changes, and then opening the original document stored on disk.

To revert to the saved version of a document: Choose File > Revert.

IMPORTANT: Before choosing the Revert command, be certain that you want to discard all changes to a document. You cannot use the Undo command to restore lost work after choosing Revert. If you aren’t certain that you want to discard changes to a document, use the Save As command to save the document with a new name, then open the original document and compare the two.


Opening recent files

You can open a document you edited recently by selecting its name from the File menu.

Canvas lists the names of the most recently opened documents near the bottom of the File menu. Opening a document with this method is the same as using the Open command.


Preferences command

The Preferences command opens a dialog box in which you can customize many aspects of Canvas. The options you select generally affect the entire application, rather than a specific document.

To change preferences

1.	Choose File > Preferences.

2.	In the Preferences dialog box, click a tab to display its options. Select the options you want to change.

3.	To implement the current settings, click OK.

How preferences are stored

Windows: Preferences are saved in the file “CANVAS.SET” in the User folder in the Canvas folder.

Mac OS: Preferences are saved in the file “Canvas Settings” in the Preferences folder in the System Folder.


General preferences tab

The options on the General preferences tab control various display and window behaviors.

Command information tool tip: Displays information, tips and shortcuts in small boxes that appear when you point to an item, such as a tool or button. For example, if you move the pointer over the Copy button in the Button bar, Canvas displays the command name and shortcut.

Create backup when saving: Saves a copy of the current document each time you save changes to the document. The backup copy has the extension “.bak,” and Canvas saves to this same file each time.

Dither Colors: Provides the best onscreen color representation, but requires more system memory. If you are using Canvas for Mac OS, this option requires 32-bit color capabilities.

Fit to Window: Opens documents so the full layout area can be seen in the center of the window. When this option is off, documents open in Home View (100% magnification with the upper-left corner of the page in the upper-left corner of the window).

Freeform Selection: Lets you place objects in freeform mode by clicking already-selected objects. Otherwise, you must use the Effects > Freeform command to put an object in freeform mode.

Maximize on Opening: Opens documents at full screen size. Otherwise, documents open at a standard size that fits any monitor, but might not fill the screen completely.

No Background Updates: Prevents Canvas from redrawing open Canvas documents when you are working in another application. This option lets other applications run faster when Canvas is in the background.

Number of Undo Levels: Enter a number in the Min box to set the minimum number of actions that Canvas can reverse. The default is three. Enter a number in the Max box to specify the maximum number of actions that Canvas reverse. The default is 10.

Note: Canvas uses memory to store operations so they can be undone. The amount of memory depends on the operation. Canvas allocates memory to ensure that you can undo the specified minimum number of actions. Canvas tries to set aside enough memory so you can undo the specified maximum number of actions. It uses this memory if it’s needed for other operations. Therefore, you should be able to undo the specified minimum number of actions, but you might not be able to undo the specified maximum number of actions. The memory allocation ensures that you’ll have the most memory available in Canvas.

Retain Selected Tool: Keeps the current tool selected after you use it, instead of reverting to the Selection tool.

Search selection on clicks: When this option is on, you can drag a selected object from behind another object. If this option is off, you can drag only the front object, because dragging deselects a back object.

Select Across Visible Layers: Lets you select objects on all visible layers in a document, rather than just the active layer. If this option is off, you can still select objects on other visible layers by pressing Tab and clicking the objects.

Specific information tool tip: Displays information in small boxes that pop up at the pointer. When this option is selected, Canvas displays user comments when you point to an object that has comments, and displays information when you point to an ink in the Inks palette. For color inks, Canvas displays color system information.


Drawing preferences tab

The Drawing tab lets you select a coordinate system for angular measurements and specify behavior for moving and copying objects.

Coordinate System: Choose the Standard or Engineering system for angular measurements.

When duplicating objects offset: Tells Canvas how far (in pixels) from the original to put object copies when you use the Duplicate or Paste commands in the Edit menu.

When moving objects offset: Lets you specify the number of pixels objects move when you use a combination of modifier and arrow keys.

Auto-scroll to selection: Keeps objects that you move using the arrow keys in view by scrolling the document window.

When dragging objects always show originals (Mac only): Objects you drag follow the pointer, but also appear in their original position until you finish dragging.


Painting preferences tab

The Painting tab lets you set preferences for displaying and editing paint objects and images.

Interpolation: Tells Canvas how to fill new pixels created by resizing a paint object or applying certain filters.

Nearest Neighbor fills new pixels with the same color as an adjacent pixel.

Bilinear fills new pixels with colors derived from the color values of adjacent pixels. This creates softer edges than Nearest Neighbor.

Color Channels: Makes channel previews in the Image Channels palette appear in color rather than shades of gray.

Video LUT Animation (Mac only): Provides faster previews of some image filters by modifying the color lookup table of your monitor instead of redrawing the image.

Anti-aliased Clipboard: Anti-aliases vector and text objects pasted from the Clipboard into a paint object.

Anti-aliased Canvas Objects: Anti-aliases Canvas vector and text objects drawn in a paint object.

Plug-ins: Click the button to set the location of Photoshop compatible plug-ins for use in Canvas. In the directory dialog box that appears, select the folder containing the plug-ins. The path name of the folder appears below the Plug-ins button on the Painting tab. Installed plug-in filters appear in the Image > Filters submenu.

Separate Grayscales as Black : When producing color separations, this option separates grayscale paint objects on the black plate. Otherwise, Canvas creates four-color grays.

Brush pointers: These options let you change the pointer displayed for painting tools. The default pointer is a symbol of the current painting tool.

Standard Pointer displays the icon for the current painting tool.

Precise Pointer displays a cross hair pointer. The intersection of the cross hair is the center of the current brush.

Brush Size Pointer displays an outline of the current brush as the pointer.

Note: You can use the context menu to change the pointer while you edit a paint object.


Printing preferences tab

The Printing tab has several settings that let you control the appearance of printed output.

These settings affect printed output when you use the “Print as: Composite” setting in the Print dialog box, and do not affect printing when you use the “Print as: Separations” setting.

Output to maximum resolution: Prints Canvas documents at the printer’s highest resolution.

This setting disables image-reduction options and fast-printing features of QuickDraw® printers, which require a setting of 72 dpi. If you print documents to a PostScript printer, it’s a good idea to select this option. However, if you are using Japanese fonts (two-byte), you can deselect the “Output to maximum resolution” check-box, and then use the pop-up menu to select 300 dpi, which will speed up printing.

When “Output to maximum resolution” is not selected, you can choose the resolution (from 72 to 2,540 dots per inch) to use in the Resolution pop-up menu.

Halftone

The options in this area let you set the halftone screen frequency and the halftone screen angle for composite printing. You can also choose to use the printer’s default halftone settings.

Use printer’s default: Select this option when you often print to desktop devices such as laser printers, and the default halftone screen frequency and angle are appropriate for your documents.

LPI: To specify a halftone screen frequency, clear the “Use printer default” checkbox, and enter the frequency in the text box. A higher frequency requires a higher printer resolution to produce the same number of grayscale levels in printed halftones.

Angle: If you want to specify the angle of the screens used for half-toning, rather than use the printer’s default setting, clear the “Use printer default” checkbox, and enter the angle in the Angle checkbox.

Cache symbols and texture fills: This option should be selected to print symbol and texture inks faster on PostScript printers.


Type preferences tab

The Type tab in the Preferences dialog box lets you customize options for text and typography.

Note: Some options on the Type tab are different for Mac OS and Windows versions of Canvas.

Anti-alias text: Select this option to soften the onscreen appearance of text based on a point size you specify. You can specify a point size from 10 to 128 points. When the apparent point size of text you type is equal to or less than the point size you specify, Canvas softens its appearance.

Auto Word Select: When you use the I-beam pointer to highlight specific text, this option ensures that you select only whole words (all characters between blank spaces). As you drag to highlight text, Canvas detects when you drag over a space. As you continue to drag, Canvas locates the next space and selects the characters in between.

Drag & Drop Text: With this option on, you can highlight specific text, then drag the highlighted text to a new location within the same text object.

Draw Text as Béziers (Windows only): When using a 256-color display, Windows cannot dither colors in text to approximate a non-system color; instead, Windows uses the closest solid colors. Turning this option on tells Canvas to redraw text as objects, which lets Windows dither colors when necessary. This method is resource-intensive and can be slow; turn this option on only if you need to see dithered color in text on a system with a 256-color display.

Faster Text/Poor Color (Windows only): Turning this option on speeds up screen redraw of text at the expense of color fidelity.

Smart Copy: With this option on, if you copy and paste text that begins a paragraph, Canvas pastes the text as a new paragraph using the original paragraph settings. With this option off, Canvas pastes text into the current paragraph using the existing paragraph settings.

Use Greek text: Select this option if you want Canvas to “greek” text at or below an apparent type size that you specify. Greeking replaces lines of text characters with gray bars, which speeds up screen redraw. This preference does not affect printing.

To use text greeking, select the “Use Greek text” check box, and enter a size in points in the adjacent text box. When “Use Greek text” is selected, Canvas greeks text at the specified size and smaller when the display magnification is 100% or less.

For example, if you specify 12 points for the Greek text preference, and zoom to 200%, Canvas greeks any text that is 6 points or smaller. If you zoom to 50%, Canvas greeks text that is 24 points or smaller.

It’s a good idea to set the size for text greeking to the same size as most body text in your documents. This lets you view headlines and display type normally, while Canvas greeks the body text at 100% magnification. Then, when you zoom in to edit the body text, it will not be greeked because of the higher magnification level.

Use Smart Quotes: Select this option if you want Canvas to insert true typographical apostrophes (’), single quotation marks (‘’), and double quotation marks (“”) when you type these characters with the Text tool. Otherwise, these characters appear as straight tick marks, or foot (') and inch (") marks. Of course, the actual appearance of the characters depends on the design of the typeface in use.

The character that Canvas inserts when you type a quotation mark depends on the position of the insertion point in the text, and its position relative to other quotation marks. For example, Canvas always inserts an open quotation mark (“) when you type a quotation mark immediately following a space.

The “Use Smart Quotes” preference setting has no effect on text that you type with the Path Text tool.

Use WYSIWYG Font menu (Mac only): This option displays actual fonts in the Fonts submenu. However, some type-management utilities can conflict with the fonts display. Deselect this option if you see problems in the fonts display.


Two-byte script features

The option labeled “Enable two-byte script” on the Type tab in the Preferences dialog box tells Canvas to accommodate text characters that require twice as much data (two bytes) as text characters in most Western languages. This makes it possible to create documents using specialized two-byte fonts, including Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.

Two-byte tools and options

Selecting the “Enable two-byte script” preference makes available several tools and options that let you create vertical text objects (with or without two-byte fonts), and use an entry window for typing two-byte characters:

•	The Vertical Text tool and Vertical Text Object tool appear in the Text toolbar in the toolbox.

•	A vertical option appears in the Column Guides dialog box and the Type palette.

•	The Inline tab appears in the Preferences dialog box.

To make the new two-byte tools and options available, you must restart Canvas after selecting “Enable two-byte script.” Other preferences take effect immediately after you click OK.

Measurement system

When the “Enable two-byte script” option is selected, Canvas uses the metric measurement system. You can select other measurement units using the Rulers command.

Two-byte script requirements

You can select the “Enable two-byte script” option in any version of Canvas. However, to use two-byte fonts in a document, you must have an operating system version that supports two-byte fonts. For Mac OS, you must have a two-byte system version, or a software package such as the Japanese Language Kit. On Windows, you must have a two-byte version of the operating system.

To activate two-byte features in Canvas

1.	Choose File > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Click the Type tab to bring it to the front, if necessary.

3.	Select the “Enable two-byte script” checkbox, and then click OK. A message tells you that changes will take effect the next time you restart Canvas. Click OK in the message box to continue.

4.	To use the two-byte text tools and options, choose Quit (Mac OS) or Exit (Windows) to stop running Canvas. Then restart the program.

Unlike other preferences, which take effect immediately, you must quit and restart Canvas to activate or deactivate the two-byte text preference. If the two-byte script option is selected, after you start Canvas, you can use two-byte text characters.

Depending on the amount of text in your documents, activating the two-byte text preference might slow down text editing.

Related topic

Inline preferences tab


Inline preferences tab

The Inline preferences tab appears in the Preferences dialog box only when the option on the Type tab labeled “Enable two-byte script” has been selected.

The options on the Inline preferences tab let you specify whether you want to always enter two-byte text directly into a document, or use a text-entry window when the apparent type size is outside a range that you have set.

Using a low zoom level can make it difficult to see text as you type. By using the text-entry window, you can see and edit text in the window, regardless of the current view magnification level.

Note: This feature is available only when you are running system software that supports two-byte fonts, and are using two-byte fonts to enter text into a document. This option does not affect printing.

To set inline text-entry preferences

1.	Choose File > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Click the Inline tab to bring it to the front.

3.	Specify the following options, and then click OK to implement the current settings:

•	If you never want to use a text-entry window, regardless of the size of the type, select the Never option.

•	If you want a text entry window to appear when you type text at some apparent type sizes, select the “For text from” option. Type a number from 6 to 255 in each text box. These numbers set the range in which the text-entry window does not appear and you type directly in the document.

A character’s apparent size is the size at which it appears on screen, based on the current view magnification level. For example, 12 point type appears to be 12 points at 100%; at 200%, its apparent size is 24 points; at 50%, its apparent size is that of 6 point type.

Using the text-entry window

If you choose the “For text from” option, and you type text in a document at an apparent point size that is outside the specified range, a small text-entry window appears at the bottom of the screen. You can type and edit text directly in the window. To enter the text into the current document, press Return (Mac) or Enter (Windows).

If the apparent size of text changes because you change the view magnification, actual point sizes that are beyond the specified “For text from” range might not cause the text-entry window to open. In this case, you can type the text directly into the document.


Units preferences tab

The Units tab in the Preferences dialog box lets you choose measurement settings such as units, precision, and numerical format. Settings on this tab affect the units displayed in the Strokes palette, the status bar of the Canvas window, the measurements in dimension objects, and the precision of settings in the Type palette.

Pen size units: Choose inches, millimeters, points, or picas in the pop-up menu to specify how you want to measure pen size in the Pen tab of the Strokes palette.

Number form: Set the precision and numerical format for numbers in the status bar, the Type palette, Show Size display, and other numerical displays.. You can choose whole integers, up to four-decimal precision, or fractions. The setting you choose affects the display precision only, and does not affect the actual drawing precision.


Virtual Memory preferences tab (Mac OS)

The Virtual tab lets you choose a disk drive, and set other options, for memory management. The memory management feature in Canvas makes it possible to open images and files that require more memory than the amount provided by physical RAM.

Disk Drive: Choose a mounted hard disk in the pop-up menu. Canvas uses this disk for virtual memory. The amount of available space on the disk is shown below the pop-up menu.

Use available system memory: Turning this option on instructs Canvas to use the allocated system memory first before resorting to its internal virtual memory.

Dynamic Disk Allocation: Leave this option on to let Canvas claim and release disk space as needed and available for particular files. If you turn this option off, you can use the “Minimum disk space after allocation” text box to set a limit on how much space Canvas can claim for virtual memory. For example, if you type 50 in the text box, Canvas will leave at least 50 MB free on the disk.


Display preferences

Options on the Display tab let you customize the display. You can control transparency effects, display speed and display quality.

Screen Compositing

This preference specifies the color space in which Canvas calculates transparency effects and color blending.

RGB: Canvas uses the RGB color space internally when it calculates transparency and blends between colors. This is the faster option, and should be used when documents are designed to be viewed on screen.

CMYK: Canvas uses the CMYK color space to calculate transparency and color blending. This can provide a more accurate preview of colors to be reproduced in the CMYK color space. However, transparency and blending effect can be slower at this setting.

Note: The CMYK Preview mode (Layout > Display > CMYK Preview) simulates CMYK colors for the entire display. In contrast, the CMYK display preference simulates CMYK colors for blending and transparency only.

Transparency display

The Transparency options let you control how transparency appears when a paint object is in edit mode.

No Preview: Displays a checkerboard pattern to represent transparency in an image. This isolates an image from background objects, which can be helpful for editing complex compositions.

Background Preview: Displays transparency in an image during editing. Objects behind the image are rendered realistically while you edit. (If no objects are behind the paint object, the document’s white layout area shows through transparent areas.) Objects in front of a paint object are hidden during image editing.

Total Preview: Displays both background and foreground transparency during image editing. This is the most accurate preview.

Draw Quality

These options in this pop-up menu affect the entire screen display in Canvas.

Draft: Provides the fastest screen display by drawing vector objects less smoothly. Choosing this option can increase display speed by 300%.

Normal: Provides fast screen display and draws smooth vector objects. This is the recommended setting and is selected by default.

Anti-aliased: Significantly smoothes all objects on screen, including text and vector objects, by anti-aliasing their edges. This setting is especially useful when you create screen shots or display slide shows on screen. However, this anti-aliasing slows the display compared to Draft or Normal settings.

Note: The effect of the Anti-aliased text option is independent of the Anti-Aliased option on the Display tab. If either option is selected, text is anti-aliased; if neither option is selected, text is not anti-aliased.

Object Caching

This preference keeps screen images in memory so the display refreshes significantly faster when you move or edit objects. Selecting this option is recommended. If you deselect this option, less memory (up to 4 MB) is used for screen display, but displaying complex images could be very slow.


User Info preferences

The User Info tab lets you specify a name and initials for object comments, which you can insert using the Comments command.

Name: Type a name in the text box. When you attach a comment to an object, Canvas associates the name you enter with the comment. By default, Canvas uses the name entered when Canvas was installed.

Initials: Type initials in the text box. When you attach comments to an object, Canvas associates these initials with the comment.


Page Setup command (Mac OS)

Use the Page Setup command to configure a Canvas document for printing. Page Setup affects some aspects of a document in conjunction with the Document Setup options.

To adjust page setup options

1.	In the Chooser, select the printer driver that you want to use. PostScript drivers, such as LaserWriter 8 and PSPrinter, work only with PostScript printers.

2.	Select an available printer. If you are connected to a network, you might need to select a zone first and then an available printer. For information on setting up printing options and background printing, refer to your Mac OS and printer documentation.

Note: Later versions of the Mac OS support Desktop printers and the Printer menu, so you can select a printer and associated printer driver without using the Chooser.

3.	In Canvas, choose File > Page Setup. A dialog box appears. The specific options in the dialog box might be different, depending on your printer driver. Options for PostScript printers are described below.

4.	Click OK to implement the Page Setup options.

PostScript (LaserWriter) setup options

The following options for PostScript printers appear in the Page Setup dialog box. Some of these options differ, depending on the specific printer driver version that you have selected.

Flip Horizontal: Reverses documents from left to right.

Flip Vertical: Reverses documents from top to bottom.

Invert Image: Reverses document colors, changing blacks to whites and whites to blacks.

Substitute Fonts: Uses fonts installed in the printer instead of the fonts installed on the computer, when the same fonts (or fonts with the same name) are available on both.

Precision Bitmap Alignment: Improves bitmapped graphics by reducing the image 96 percent.

Unlimited Downloadable Fonts: Reserves more memory in the printer for downloading fonts during printing.

Larger Print Area: This option lets some printers print closer to the edge of the paper. You might want to experiment to determine if this setting has any effect on your printer.


Printer Setup command (Windows)

Use the Printer Setup command to configure a Canvas document for printing. Printer Setup affects some aspects of a document in conjunction with the Canvas Document Setup options.

To set up printer options:

1.	Choose File > Printer Setup.

2.	Choose a printer and port from the pop-up menu, which lists printers installed for your system. If the printer you need is not on the list, use the Printers Control Panel to add it to the list.

3.	If necessary, select an appropriate PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file. A PPD file contains setup information and options for PostScript printers.

4.	For more options, click Setup. These options depend on the printer driver you are using. Refer to your printer’s documentation for more information.

5.	Check the other settings and click OK.


Print command

Use the Print command to send the current document to an output device, such as a desktop printer.

Before printing, you can set up the number of copies to print and which parts of the document to print, such as a range of pages or selected objects. You can tell Canvas how to position the document on the paper and to print color separations.

Two features can help you prepare a document for printing. You can preview the document’s printed appearance with the Print Preview command. You can use the Collect for Output command to prepare the document for remote output.

To print a document to a desktop printer

1.	Choose File > Print.

2.	In the Print dialog box, select All for “Pages to print.”

3.	In the Copies text box, type the number of copies to print.

4.	Make sure all settings are correct and click Print or OK.

Note: If you print an Illustration document that is larger than the paper in your printer, select the Tile option in the Print dialog box. Otherwise, Canvas prints only one “tile” (printer page) of the illustration.

Page range options

You can print all of a document, a page range, discrete pages only, or combinations of these options.

Mac: To print an entire document, select Document in the Print pop-up menu. To print a range of pages select Page Range in the Print pop-up menu, and then click the Range button. A dialog box appears. Enter the page range you want to print. To print pages 1 to 4, page 7, and page 9, for example, type 1-4, 7, 9 in the text box.

Note: The Range button isn’t available when you print documents that have only one page.

Windows: To print an entire document, click the All button. To print a range of pages, select Range. Enter the page range you want to print. To print pages 1 to 4, page 7, and page 9, for example, type 1-4, 7, 9 in the text box.

Printing selected parts of documents

In the Print pop-up menu, you can designate which parts of the document to print.

Document Prints the entire document.

Page Range (Mac only) Lets you enter a range of pages to print..

Current Page Prints the current page only.

Odd Pages Prints odd-numbered pages only.

Even Pages Prints even-numbered pages only.

Selection Prints selected items only.

Related topics

Printing composites or color separations

Arranging and scaling output

Color printing options

Images, OPI, and proxy options

Transparency options

Page Setup (Mac)

Printer Setup (Windows)

Printing preferences

Printing to a PostScript file


Print As options

In the Print dialog box, use the Print As menu to choose composite output or color separations.

To print documents in color or black and white: In the Print As pop-up menu, choose Composite.

To output color separations: In the Print As pop-up menu, choose Separations.

When you choose Separations, the Setup button becomes available. Click Setup to use the Separations Setup dialog box. Refer to the Color Printing Guide for information on separation setup and options for spot-color and process-color separations.


Arranging and scaling printed output
Arrangement and scaling options

Several options in the Print dialog box let you control the size and positioning of a printed document.

Center On Paper Centers a document on the printed page. If you’re printing selections only, Canvas shifts the selected items to the center of the printed media. This option can be useful when you have selected objects that you want to print in the center of the page, but they are not centered in the document itself.

Collate Copies Prints all pages of the document in order based on the number of copies requested, rather than printing all copies of page 1, all copies of page 2, and so on.

Fit To Paper Scales a document to fit within the page’s printable area. Canvas scales the document so that objects are not within 0.4 inch of the edge, where most printers can’t print.

Skip Blank Pages Does not output document pages that are completely blank.

Print Info Prints crop marks, registration marks, and other document details, such as date, time and page number. Canvas prints the marks and information beyond the area occupied by the document’s elements. The printer page size must be large enough to contain the entire document and the printed information.

Back To Front Prints from the last page to the first, keeping pages in the correct order if the printer stacks pages face-up in the output tray.

Print Trailing Blank Page Prints a final blank page after every document.

Facing Pages If the document is formatted for spreads, Canvas prints facing pages on a single page. In Illustration and Presentation documents, this option isn’t available.

Tile Prints a large document by dividing it among “tiles” of printer pages. Type an overlap amount in the text box so part of the document repeats at the edge of adjoining tiles; the overlap makes it easier to assemble the complete document after printing.

Printing multiple scaled pages

In the Layout pop-up menu, you can select an option to print multiple document pages on each printer page.

Choose 1/Page to print a document at actual size, with one document page on each printer page. If the document is larger than the printer paper, the document will not be scaled; you can select the Tile option to print the document on multiple sheets of paper.

To scale and print multiple document pages on each printer page, choose an option to set the number of document pages to print. The document pages will be scaled as necessary to fit the printer pages. The amount of scaling depends on the size of the document pages and the size of the printer pages.

For example, if you want to print six document pages as thumbnail images on a printer page, choose 6/Page.


Options for color printing

In the Print dialog box, Choose an option from the Colors pop-up menu to control color accuracy when using a color printer.

In general, when you print to a color printer, it’s best to choose a color specification that matches the colors in the document. For example, choose CMYK if your document contains CMYK colors.

The following options appear in the Colors menu in the Print dialog box.

Normal (RGB): Prints colors using RGB color specifications. On a non-color printer, colors print as shades of gray, the same as if you select the "Colors as Grays" option.

Black & White: Prints all colors as black or white.

Colors as Grays: Prints colors as shades of gray on all printers, including color printers.

Calibrated (LAB): Matches printed colors to their appearance on-screen. However, some colors displayed on a computer monitor can’t be reproduced on paper with printing inks. For example, colors that look bright and saturated on screen, such as hot pink, cyan, and brilliant orange, usually appear muted in print.

CMYK: Prints colors using CMYK color specifications. On a non-color printer, colors print as shades of gray, the same as if you select the "Colors as Grays" option.


Printing: Image options

The Print dialog box lets you choose options for printing images, OPI images, and image proxies.

Images

In the Images menu, choose a format for output of image data to a PostScript device or file. The format you choose affects the amount of data transmitted and the size of a PostScript file. This setting can affect compatibility with networks and PostScript printers.

Note: Rendered transparency effects are transmitted as image data to PostScript printers.

ASCII: Outputs image data as plain text. This is the most compatible format, but it transmits (or saves in files) the largest amount of data. Binary Outputs images as binary data, which might not be compatible with all printers and networks. Binary data is half the size of ASCII data.

Level 2 ASCII: Outputs images in an ASCII format that is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. This produces files that are approximately 20% smaller than regular ASCII PostScript files.

RLE: Outputs images using Run Length Encoding compression. This format is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. RLE compression is most efficient when documents contain images that have large areas of flat color.

JPEG: Outputs images using JPEG compression. This format is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. JPEG compression requires more system memory and more processing time at the printer than other compression methods. However, this format achieves the fastest printing results with continuous-tone (photographic) images and documents containing transparency effects.

Related topics

OPI options

Proxies options


Open Prepress Interface

Canvas supports Open Prepress Interface (OPI) systems for printing images from OPI servers with high-resolution images linked to EPS preview objects placed in Canvas documents.

For more information on Open Prepress Interface systems, consult the documentation for the OPI system software that you use.

If you do not print to an OPI system, always select OPI: Include Images in the Print dialog box. When any other OPI setting is selected, none of the document’s images (paint objects created in Canvas or images placed from TIFF and other file types) will be printed.

The following conditions apply to support of OPI printing in Canvas:

•	Any images in a document (besides EPS preview images linked to OPI files) will not be printed when you choose Omit TIFF & EPS in Canvas and print through the OPI system.

•	Rotation and scaling of OPI objects is supported. Other effects, including transparency, are not supported.

The OPI menu in the Print dialog box controls OPI output.

Include Images: Select this if you do not use an OPI system.

Omit TIFF & EPS: Choose this to replace low-resolution EPS previews with high-resolution images when printing with an OPI system. No other images in the document will be printed.


Printing Proxies options
Printing: Proxies options

Choose an option in the Proxies menu to control output of images when you have placed proxies in a document.

Full Detail: Prints the high-resolution images that are linked to the proxies in the document. Canvas outputs the images from the linked files on your computer.

Low Resolution: Prints proxy images rather than the high-resolution images. This option is faster and could be adequate for proofing other parts of a document.


Printing: Transparency options

In the Print dialog box, choose an option in the Render menu to specify how transparency effects will be rendered for printing. This setting can affect the accuracy of transparency effects in printed output.

Transparent Areas

Renders the area inside the bounding box of all transparent objects. This generates the least amount of additional data to print transparency effects. Do not choose this option if you are printing in color on non-PostScript printers and the document has vector and transparent objects that share the same color, because these printers will not match the colors precisely. In some cases, non-standard PostScript printers might produce a slight pixel shift between a transparent and non-transparent area of a vector object. If this happens, select Transparent and Overlapped in the Render menu.

Transparent and Overlapped

Renders the area within the bounding boxes of all transparent objects, as well as objects that are overlapped by transparent objects (or intervening objects). This is the best setting to use when you print to non-PostScript color printers to avoid color-matching problems.

All Objects

Renders all objects in the document as one or more images that are sent to the printer. This is equivalent to processing the document in an internal RIP (raster image processor) in Canvas. This option produces the greatest amount of image data. However, this option can be useful if you experience problems producing accurate output of transparency or other effects when you use a particular printer or printer driver.

No Transparency

Does not render most transparency effects in the document. If you select this option, transparent objects will be printed as opaque objects.

One type of transparent object can be printed without rendering when you use a PostScript printer: a vector object that has a transparency Scope setting of Fill only. PostScript can print transparent fill inks in vector objects without rendering.

You might want to select No Transparency if you need to quickly print a proof of a complex document. This allows you to check the positioning of objects without seeing the final transparency effects.


Printing to a PostScript file

You can use a PostScript printer driver to print a document and create a PostScript file, also called a PostScript printer file. You might create a PostScript file so you can output the file without using Canvas. You usually need a utility program to download a PostScript file to an output device. Also, some prepress utilities use PostScript files for color separation, imposition, and other tasks.

To print to a PostScript file

1.	Choose File > Print.

2.	In the Print dialog box, choose the print to File option.

3.	In the Images menu, choose a format for image data. The format affects the amount of data and the size of the PostScript file. This setting can affect compatibility with networks and PostScript printers.

ASCII Outputs image data as plain text. This is the most compatible format, but it creates the largest amount of data.

Binary Outputs images as binary data, which might not be compatible with all printers and networks. Binary creates about half as much data as ASCII.

Level 2 ASCII Outputs images in an ASCII format that is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. This creates files that are about 20% smaller than regular ASCII PostScript files.

RLE Compresses image data using Run Length Encoding. This format is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. RLE compression is most efficient when documents contain images that have large areas of flat color.

JPEG Compresses image data using JPEG format. This format is compatible with PostScript Level 2 devices. JPEG compression requires more system memory and more processing time at the printer than other compression methods. However, this format achieves the fastest printing results with continuous-tone (photographic) images and documents containing transparency effects.

4.	Click Save or OK. A directory dialog box appears. Select a location to save the file, type a file name, and click Save or OK. Canvas sends the document to the selected printer driver, which creates a disk file containing the PostScript commands to print the document.


Collect for Output

The Collect for Output command helps you prepare documents for commercial printing. Collect for output does two things:

•	reports on document settings, warning you of potential problems with high-resolution output or color separations

•	copies documents into output folders with required fonts and image files

Before you print color separations or send documents to a service bureau, it's a good idea to use Collect for Output. You don't need to use it to print documents on desktop printers.

To use Collect for Output

Save a copy of your document in Canvas format before collecting for output.

1. 	Choose File > Collect for Output. Or, in the Print dialog box, click Collect. The Collect for Output dialog box appears.

2.	Under "Copy to Output Folder," select items to collect in an output folder.

3.	Under "Warnings," select items to be reported.

4.	Click OK to close the dialog box and continue.

5.	A directory dialog box appears. You can do either of the following.

•	If you selected the Document option, use the dialog box to save a copy of the document in the output folder. If the folder doesn't exist, click the new folder button, type a folder name, and click OK. Select the output folder and click Select. Canvas will save the document copy and the output report in the selected folder.

•	If you did not select the Document option, use the dialog box to select a folder for the output report. You can create a new folder if necessary. Select the output folder and click Select. Canvas will save the output report in the selected folder.

6.	If you selected Fonts under “Copy to Output Folder,”  a dialog box shows which fonts will be copied to the output folder. Deselect any fonts you do not want to copy.

Viewing output reports

To preview an output report, click Preview in the Collect for Output dialog box. A tabbed dialog box displays information about the document.  The same information is in the output report text file.

See also

Copying fonts

Collecting proxy images


output report
Viewing an output report

Canvas saves an output report as a text file in the selected output folder. The file has the same name as the Canvas document, with the extension "txt". You can open the file in Canvas or any text program.


Copying fonts

To collect fonts for output, select the Fonts option. After you click OK, a list of fonts used in the document appears. Each font that Canvas will copy to the output folder has an "X" in the box by its name. If you do not want Canvas to copy the font, click the box to clear it.

The box is gray if Canvas can't copy the font to the output folder. Fonts that are used by the operating system or managed by font utilities such as Adobe Type Manager (ATM) can't be copied to the output folder by Canvas. This includes PostScript fonts that are managed by ATM in Windows.

Take note of fonts that can't be copied, and then place these fonts in the output folder after you finish with collect for output.

Note: Check the license agreement for your fonts for possible restrictions on copying of font files.


Collecting proxy images

Moving a document to another location can cause problems if the document contains proxies . If you select Linked Images in the Collect for Output dialog box, Canvas will copy the linked images to the output folder. However, the proxies will still have links to the original image files, not the copies in the output folder.

To avoid problems when you collect documents for output, you must link proxies to the image files in the output folder. Do this after the output folder is moved to the output computer at a service bureau or in your organization. If proxies aren't linked correctly, Canvas will print low-resolution images.

If you select the "Resolution out of Bounds" option, the output report will warn you if a proxy's resolution is less than the minimum you set in the Collect for Output dialog box. The report also lists the names and locations of images linked to proxies.


Customize command

With the Customize command, you can assign keyboard shortcuts to commands, tools, attributes, object styles, and font styles. You can also place buttons for these items on the Toolbar at the top of the screen.

To select items to customize

1	Choose File > Customize. In the Customize dialog box, choose items to customize. See “Choosing a category to customize,” next.

2	Use the procedures later in this section to customize keyboard shortcuts or place buttons on the Toolbar. When you finish customizing items, click Close to close the Customize dialog box.

When you close the Customize dialog box, object styles you added to the scrolling list will remain in the list. This lets you customize these styles in any document. Outside of the Customize dialog box, object styles are available only in the document in which you create them.

Choosing a category to customize

In the Category popup menu, you can choose which items you want to assign shortcuts or add to the Toolbar.

Commands: To select menu commands, choose Menus in the Category pop-up menu. In the Sub-Category pop-up menu, choose the menu you want. The menu’s commands appear in the scrolling list.

Tools: To select tools, choose Tools in the Category pop-up menu. The names of all tools and their icons appear in the scrolling list.

Attributes: To select attributes, choose Inks or Strokes in the Category pop-up menu. Next to the scrolling list, a pop-up palette displays preset inks, or three pop-up palettes display pen strokes, dashes, and arrows. Select an ink or stroke from a palette. The item you select appears in the scrolling list and as a button on the Toolbar.

To remove an ink or stroke from the scrolling list, select it and click the Remove Selection button; if the item is on the Toolbar, this removes it from the Toolbar also.

Styles: To select styles, choose Object Styles in the Category pop-up menu. The names of object styles appear in a pop-up menu below the scrolling list. If no object styles have been created in Canvas, the pop-up menu will be empty.

Font Names and Sizes: To select font attributes, choose Font Names and Sizes in the Category pop-up menu. A font size box appears. Select a size, then press the Add Size button. The font size appears in the main scrolling list, and a font size button appears on the Toolbar.

To choose a font, select a name from the pop-up menu. The font appears on the scrolling list, and a font button appears on the Toolbar.

To customize keyboard shortcuts

1 Select an item in the scrolling list in the Customize dialog box. If the item has a keyboard shortcut, the Current Shortcut Key box shows the shortcut keys.

2 To assign a keyboard shortcut, press the keyboard keys you want to use. The keys you type appear in the “Press New Shortcut Key” box. Click Assign to assign the new keys to the item. Certain keys are restricted, so pressing them will not display their values. Other shortcuts are reserved by Canvas, so they can be assigned, but not applied to some procedures; for example, Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2, and Ctrl+3 cannot be used in painting.

If the keys you type are assigned to another shortcut, the current assignment appears under the “Press New Shortcut Key” box.

You can’t assign single keys as shortcuts. For example, you can’t assign “H” or “F7” to an item.

•	To remove shortcut keys from the selected item, click Remove.

•	To restore the default shortcut keys to all commands, click Reset All.

•	To restore the default shortcut keys to one command, select the command in the scrolling list and click Reset.

To assign shortcuts to inks

You can create shortcut keys for specific fill inks and pen inks. To assign a shortcut key to a fill or pen ink, select the ink in the scrolling list in the Customize dialog box. Type the keyboard keys you want to use. The keys you type appear in the “Press New Shortcut Key” box.

Under the box, select whether you want the ink to be a Fill or Pen ink. Click Assign to assign to the new keys to the ink.

To place buttons on the Toolbar

Select an item in the scrolling list in the Customize dialog box. Inks, Strokes, Object Styles, and Fonts appear on the Toolbar automatically when you add them to the scrolling list. For Menus and Tools, double-click the item in the scrolling list to add it to the Toolbar. A button for the selected item appears on the Toolbar when it is displayed.

To remove an Ink, Stroke, Object Style, or Font button from the Toolbar, click the Remove Selection button under the scrolling list, or double-click the item in the scrolling list. To remove a Menu or Tools button from the Toolbar, double-click the item in the scrolling list.

Arranging buttons on the Toolbar

After you place buttons on the Toolbar using the Customize dialog box, you can change their arrangement directly on the Toolbar.

•	To move a button, Shift-drag the button to a new location.

•	To remove a button from the Toolbar, press Shift and drag the button away from the bar.

•	To add a separator between Toolbar buttons, Shift-drag the button on the right slightly to the right. A separator line appears between the button and the one to its left.

Using ink buttons

When you place buttons for inks on the Toolbar, you can use the buttons to apply fill inks and pen inks, or foreground colors and background colors.

You can apply fill and pen inks to vector objects and text. You can select foreground and background colors for painting.

•	To apply a fill ink or select a background color for painting, click the ink button on the Toolbar. If no objects are selected, the ink becomes the current fill ink or background color.

•	To apply a pen ink or select a foreground color for painting, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and click the ink button. If no objects are selected, the ink becomes the current pen ink or foreground color.

Saving and loading configurations

After you customize Canvas, you can save the current configuration in a file. You can create other custom configurations and save these in configuration files. You can load a configuration file to change the Toolbar and the keyboard shortcuts.

A configuration file stores all the current keyboard shortcut assignments and the setup of buttons on the Toolbar.

To save the current configuration: Click Save Set. In the directory dialog box, type a file name, select a location, and click Save to save the file.

To load a configuration: Click Load Set. In the directory dialog box, select the configuration file and click OK.

Clearing customized settings

To clear all of the customized settings and Toolbar buttons, press Clear All in the Customize dialog box. Canvas removes all of the customized settings from the scrolling list and all of the buttons from the Toolbar.


Print Preview

Print preview lets you see how a document will look when you print it. Use print preview to check print settings and the composition of a document before printing.

To preview a document: Choose File > Print Preview. Or, click Preview in the Print dialog box. The preview window displays the first page to be printed. When you finish previewing, click Done to close the preview window, or press Esc.

Print preview reflects the current print settings and the page setup(Mac) or printer setup (Windows). These settings include the type of output (composite or color separations), the pages to print, tiling, centering, printing blank pages, and printing in color.

In the preview, you can see which objects, layers, and pages will be printed. You can make sure the layout fits in the printable area of the paper. When you use the Tile option, the preview shows the tiles as separate pages.

Print preview options

To adjust the preview, you can select options in the preview window.

Click the zoom buttons to increase or decrease the magnification of the preview.

Click the arrow buttons to cycle through the pages.

Out of gamut: Displays a warning color on an object whose actual color is outside the CMYK gamut. The default warning color is bright green. This is the same warning shown in the document if you choose Layout > Display >Gamut Warning.

Overprint: Displays a pattern of “O’s” on an object that will be overprinted in color separations. This is the same pattern shown in the document if you choose Layout > Display > Overprint Preview.

Choke: Displays a pattern of “C’s” on an object that will be choke trapped in color separations. This is the same pattern shown in the document if you choose Layout > Display >Choke Preview.

Spread: Displays a pattern of “S’s” on an object that will be spread trapped in color separations. This is the same pattern shown in the document if you choose Layout > Display> Spread Preview.

Print: Click Print to display the Print dialog box.

Rasterized Area: Displays light blue over areas to be rasterized for printing. This includes areas of vector objects that will be rasterized because of transparency effects.

Done: Click Done or press Esc to close the Print Preview.

Previewing color separations

To preview color separations, select Separations in the Print As pop-up menu in the Print dialog box. Then, click the Preview button. When you are outputting color separations, the preview shows a separate page for each plate to be printed. You can identify objects designated for overprinting or trapping in color separations. The preview can highlight colors that are outside the CMYK gamut.


Properties command

With the Properties command, you can view the properties of documents. You can view standard data and add your own meta data to a document.

To view or edit properties

1.	Choose File > Properties. The Properties dialog box contains the following tabs: General, Statistics, Summary, and Custom.

2.	Click a tab to display its options. Use the procedures later in this section to edit the options, where applicable, then click OK to implement the settings.

Note: The document must be saved for some of its properties to be displayed.

Choosing a property

To view or customize a property, select a tab from the Properties dialog box.

General: Describes general information about a saved document, such as type, location, size, attributes, when it was created, and when it was last modified.

For Mac only, the Finder Comments box lets you view the comments that appear in the Finder’s Get Info comment window for the document. Statistics Displays when the document was created and when it was last modified. It also shows the last time the document was printed, the name of the person it was last saved by, the number of revisions, and the total editing time.

The Statistics box contains information about the document and the objects contained in it.

Note: The creation time can be different on the General and Statistics tabs. The Statistics tabs displays the date and time the document was created as a new document. The General tab displays the time it was first saved.

Summary: Lets you customize information about the document. You can enter a title, subject, author, manager, and company.

In the Category and Keyword boxes, you can type data to categorize the document.

The Comments box lets you type comments about the document.

Custom: Lets you add custom data to the document. You can choose names and data types for these entries, as described next.

To enter custom data

1.	Choose a name from the list for the data entry, or to create a new data name, type a name in the Name text box.

2.	Choose a data type from the Type menu. You can choose Text, Date, Number, or Yes or No. Then, depending on the type, enter a value in the Value box.

•	For Text, type any text value.

•	For Date, type a date from 1/1/1601 through 12/31/9999.

•	For Number, type a numeric value.

•	For Yes or No, click Yes or No.

3.	Click Add to add the data entry to the Properties box.

To modify a data entry

Click the entry in the Properties box, then change the type or value. You cannot change the name of the entry. Click Modify to apply the change.

To delete a data entry

Click the entry in the Properties box, then click Delete.


Quit command (Mac), Exit command (Windows)
Quit command (Mac)
Exit command (Windows)

Choose File Quit (Mac) or File > Exit (Windows) to quit Canvas when you are done working in the program.

If you changed any open document since you last saved it, Canvas displays a dialog box asking you if you want to save the changes before quitting the program.


Copy as Image command

When you want to copy an object and paste it into a document created in another application, and then print the document on a QuickDraw printer, use the Copy as Image command to enhance the printed appearance of the Canvas object. Copy as Image smoothes jagged edges and helps maintain the object’s details.

Use Copy as Image only when you’re pasting into a non-Canvas document that will be printed on a QuickDraw printer. If you’re printing a Canvas document on a QuickDraw printer, you can use the regular Copy command.

To use the Copy as Image command

1.	Select the objects to copy.

2.	Choose Edit > Copy Special > Copy as Image. Canvas places the selected objects on the Clipboard.

You can now use the Paste command to place the Clipboard contents into other applications. When printed on a QuickDraw printer, this method produces better results than the standard Copy command.


Again command

The Again command lets you repeat the previous command or other action by choosing Again in the Edit menu.

To repeat an action or command, choose Edit > Again. When an action can be repeated, the Repeat command includes the name of the action. For example, after you rotate an object, the Again command is “Rotate Again.”

Not all actions can be repeated. The Again command is not available if the previous action can’t be repeated.


Gamut Warning command

Use the Gamut Warning command to select the color Canvas uses when the Gamut Warning display option is active.

Canvas uses the color you specify to replace (for display purposes only) the colors in a document that fall outside the range that can be printed with process (CMYK) printing inks.

To change the gamut warning display color

1.	Choose Edit > Calibration > Gamut Warning.

2.	Select a color from the pop-up menu.

3.	Type an opacity percentage in the Opacity box. A setting of 100 makes the Gamut Warning color completely replace out-of-gamut colors in the document. At lower opacity settings, the Gamut Warning color tints, but doesn’t completely cover, these colors.

4.	Click OK to implement the new settings.

Highlighting out-of-gamut colors

When you turn on the Display > Gamut Warning option in the Layout menu,  Canvas displays a special highlight color on all objects that are outside the CMYK gamut. By default, the gamut warning color is bright green.

A check mark appears next to Gamut Warning in the Display submenu when this mode is active. To return to normal display mode, choose Gamut Warning again.


Clear command

The Clear command removes a selection from the document, without changing the contents of the Clipboard.

Choosing File > Clear is the same as pressing the keyboard Delete key.


Copy command

The Copy command places a copy of a selected item on the Clipboard. Use the Copy command when you want to paste a selection into the current document or another document without deleting the selection.

A copied selection remains on the Clipboard until the next time you use the Cut or Copy command.

To copy a selection

1.	Select a vector, text, group, or paint object, or make a selection in an object.

2.	Choose Edit > Copy. Canvas copies the selection to the Clipboard and the Paste command becomes available.


Cut command

Use the Cut command in the Edit menu to remove selections from a document and place them on the Clipboard. You can select text objects, paint objects, vector objects, specialized objects such as dimensions, and group objects. Canvas places the removed selection on the Clipboard. You can then paste it into Canvas documents and other programs. A selection remains on the Clipboard until you use the Cut or Copy command again.

You can use the Cut Without Comments command (Mac OS only) to place a selection on the Clipboard without special Canvas formatting information.

To cut a selection from a document

1.	Select an object (vector, text, or image), or highlight text in a text object, or select an area in an image.

2.	Choose Edit > Cut. Canvas removes the selection from the document and places it on the Clipboard.


Create Publisher command (Mac OS only)
Create Publisher command

Create Publisher is one of the commands that lets you use Publish and Subscribe technology in Canvas (Mac OS version only). Other related commands are found in the Publishing submenu in the Edit menu.

Use the Create Publisher command in the Edit menu to publish a selected object. When an object is published, you can subscribe to its edition file to insert the published object into other documents.

You can subscribe to an edition from a Canvas document and from documents in many other Mac OS programs. You can also use this procedure to publish information in another program and subscribe to it in Canvas.

To publish a Canvas selection

1.	Select the objects in Canvas that you want to publish.

2.	Choose Edit > Publishing > Create Publisher.

3.	In the Create Publisher dialog box, select a location and type a name in the text box for the edition file.

4.	Click Publish. Canvas creates the publisher’s edition file on disk. In the document, Canvas displays a rectangular shaded border around the published selection.

Publisher borders

Canvas displays a gray rectangle, called a publisher border, around published objects in a Canvas document. The border defines a “window” in the document. Canvas sends any objects within the publisher border to the edition file. To change the contents of an edition, you can resize and move the publisher border and move objects into and out of it.

You can control when the changes to a publisher are transmitted to an edition file, and when the subscribers to that edition are updated, using options for updating publishers and subscribers. The Publisher Options command tells Canvas when to send changes to a publisher to its edition file.


Duplicate command

Use the Duplicate command in the Edit menu to quickly copy a selection into the same Canvas document. Duplicate doesn’t change the contents of the Clipboard, in contrast to the Copy and Cut commands, which replace the Clipboard contents.

To copy objects into the same document, select the objects you want to copy and choose Edit > Duplicate. Canvas creates, off-sets, and stacks a copy of the selection in front of the original. To make additional copies, choose Edit > Duplicate again.

To make evenly spaced copies

1	Select one or more vector, text, paint, or group objects to copy.

2	Choose Edit > Duplicate. Canvas duplicates the selection and offsets the copy a preset distance from the original.

3	The copy must remain selected as you drag it or use the keyboard arrow keys to move it into position. The new position establishes the offset distance and direction from the original selection.

4	Choose Edit > Duplicate again. Canvas creates the next copy using the offset defined from the original selection to the first copy. Repeat this step to create additional evenly spaced copies.


Find command

The Find command opens the Find palette. The Find palette lets you locate objects and text within a document.

You can use the Objects tab in the Find palette to select objects based on their type and attributes. For example, you can select all rectangles in a document, or select all polygons that have a 3-point pen size and red fill ink. You can then change the selection specifications to select additional objects.

The Text tab in the Find palette incorporates the functions of a word processor’s search and replace feature.

Selecting objects based on their properties

1.	Choose Edit > Find command to open the Find palette.

2.	On the Objects tab, select the check boxes and use the pop-up menus to specify the object types and attributes that you want to find.

3.	To select objects by type, check Type and choose an object type icon in the pop-up menu. Selecting text or paint objects makes Fill, Stroke, and Pen options unavailable.

4.	To select objects by fill or pen ink, check the Fill or Pen boxes and choose the inks in the pop-up menus. Only inks used in the document, plus process colors and white, appear in the menus.

5.	To select objects by stroke, check Stroke and choose the stroke in the pop-up menu. Only strokes used in the document appear in the menu.

6.	To select objects by name, check Object Named. Type the name in the text box.

7.	To select objects in the current layer only, uncheck the "Search all visible layers" option.

8.	Check "Add to selection" to select additional objects without deselecting objects that are already selected.

9.	Click the arrow button at the bottom of the Find palette to open a window for working with selection sets, which let you broaden a search. Selection criteria symbols make up a selection set. The current selection set is boxed. Changing selection options updates this selection set. Click a set to make it the current selection set.

Or. Click to create an empty selection set.

Copy. Click to duplicate the current selection set.

Clear. Click to delete the current selection set. With only one set, Clear is unavailable.

Next Page/Slide. Click to advance to the page or slide and continue searching.

Select. Click to select objects based on the settings.

Related topic

Finding and changing text


Finding and changing text

Use the Text tab in the Find palette to search for specific text in selected text objects and entire documents. You can replace or delete found text selections one at a time or all at once.

The Text tab also lets you search for text with specific font, size, and style attributes, and change the attributes of found text.

To find and change text

1.	Choose Edit > Find to open the Find palette. Click the Text tab to select it. To search for text, type the text in the Find box. You can specify that you want to find only whole words, or text matching the capitalization (case) of the Find text.

2.	If you want to replace found text, type the replacement text in the Change To box. When the Change To box contains at least one character (including a space), the Change All button is available.

3.	Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the specified text. If one or more text objects are selected, Canvas searches the text contained in the first selected object. If no text objects are selected, Canvas searches the entire document.

4.	If Canvas finds the specified text, it highlights the text in the document. You can click Find to search for the next occurrence of the specified text. If the Change To box contains replacement text, the Change button is available. Click Change to replace the highlighted text with the Change To text.

5.	To continue searching, click Find. Repeat the previous step if Canvas finds another occurrence of the search text. When Canvas completes the operation, it displays a message. Click OK in the message box to continue.

Note: You can click Change All to replace all occurrences of the Find text with the text in the Change To box, without first clicking Find.

Finding and changing text attributes

You can search for and change text attributes (whether or not you also search for specific text). The text attributes you can search for and change are font, type size, and text style.

1.	To search for text attributes, click the arrow at the bottom-left corner of the Find palette.

2.	In the Find Attributes section, select a font name from the font pop-up menu. Type a size (in points) or select a size from the size pop-up menu. Click the style buttons to set the styles you want.

3.	In the Change Attributes To section, you can specify replacement attributes in the same way that you specify the Find attributes.

4.	Click Change or Change All to replace the attributes specified in the Find Attributes section with the attributes specified in the Change Attributes To section. If you have also typed text in the Find box, the replacement text attributes can be applied only to text that matches the Find text.

Clicking the Clear button removes all settings in the Find Attributes and Change Attributes To areas.


Get All Now command (Mac OS only)
Get All Now command

Use this command to update all subscribers in the active document according to their latest editions. This command is available on Mac OS only.

To update all subscribers in a document

Choose Edit > Publishing > Get All Now. Canvas gets updates from all editions that are linked to the subscribers in the document.

Related topics

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Updating publishers and subscribers


Paste command

Use the Paste command in the Edit menu to place the Clipboard contents into the active document. If the Clipboard is empty, the command is not available.

If a paint object is active when you choose Paste, Canvas pastes the Clipboard’s contents into the paint object. Otherwise, the pasted objects appear in the center of the screen.

You can paste the Clipboard's contents multiple times by repeating the Paste command; the Clipboard retains its contents until you use the Cut or Copy command to place another selection on the Clipboard.

Creating OLE objects by pasting (Windows only)

When you paste objects or text from other programs into Canvas on Windows, the default result is to create an OLE object that is linked to the originating program.

For example, pasting text from Microsoft Word into a Canvas document on Windows creates an object linked to the text in the original Word document. To edit this text, you double-click the text object; the Word menus and toolbars appear on screen so you can edit the text using Word’s tools. However, you can’t use Canvas text tools or commands on the text in the linked object.

You can double-click most OLE objects in Canvas to switch to the originating program for editing.

When you want to control the result when pasting objects into Canvas on Windows, you can use the Paste Special command.


Paste and Place command

You can use the Paste and Place command to copy objects and position the copies anywhere in a Canvas document.

1.	Copy the objects that you want to paste.

2.	Press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and choose Edit > Paste and Place. The Paste and Place command appears in the Edit menu only when you press the special key.

3.	After choosing Paste and Place, a Place pointer appears. Position the pointer in the document where you want the top-left corner of the Clipboard contents to appear. Do one of the following to paste the selection:

•	Click to place the Clipboard contents at full size.

•	To set the dimensions of the Clipboard contents, drag to create a bounding box to contain the selection.


Paste Special command (Windows only)
Paste Special command

The Paste Special command lets you select which type of object is pasted into a Canvas document from the Clipboard. This command is intended to be used when you copy objects from other programs to the Clipboard and you want to paste a specific type of object into Canvas. This command is available on Windows only.

Most programs place information on the Clipboard in more than one format. In the Paste Special dialog box, you can select the format you want to paste. In many cases, you can paste the Clipboard's contents as a linked or embedded object.

To select the object type when pasting

1.	Copy object to the Clipboard from another program, such as a word processing or charting application.

2.	Choose Edit > Paste Special to open the Paste Special dialog box.

3.	Select the option you want to use for pasting the selection (see the descriptions below) and click OK to insert the selected object into the active Canvas document

Using the Paste Special dialog box

Source refers to the document from which the Clipboard's contents were copied. The information shown here might include the name of the program, the default data format Canvas will use when pasting, and the coordinates of the objects in the source file.

Select a data type from the “As” list box. The available data formats depend on the type of object on the Clipboard and the program from which it was copied.

Paste puts the Clipboard's contents in the Canvas document according to the data format you select.

If you paste an object copied from another program, Canvas embeds the object in the active Canvas document. Embedding maintains a link between the object and the source program. To edit the embedded object, double-click it. The source program opens a document containing the embedded object for you to edit.

Paste Link puts the Clipboard's contents in the Canvas document according to the selected data format and links the object to its source file. Paste Link is available only when the object was saved in another program and copied from it, and you select the other program's native data format.

When you edit the linked object, you work in the object's source file. To see a list of linked objects in a Canvas document, choose Edit > Links and a dialog box opens. You can open the source file from this dialog box by selecting the linked object in the list and choosing the Open Source button. You can also double-click a linked object in a document to open its source file.

Related topic

Using Object Linking and Embedding


Publisher Options command

Use the Publisher Options command in the Edit menu (Mac OS only) to specify when to update a publisher’s edition file.

This command also lets you update an edition manually and to cancel the link between a publisher and edition.

The Publisher Options command is available once you save a document containing a publisher.

To set publisher options

1.	Click the publisher border to select it and choose Edit > Publishing > Publisher Options.

2.	To update the edition immediately, click Send Edition Now. Canvas updates the edition file.

3.	To specify when Canvas should update the edition file, choose one of the options in the Send Editions area:

•	On Save tells Canvas to update the edition file whenever you save the publisher document.

•	Manually tells Canvas not to update the edition. If you select this option, Canvas shows the time of the last publisher change.

4.	When you finish setting publisher options, click OK.

To break the link between a publisher and edition

Click Cancel Publisher in the Publisher Options dialog box. This breaks the link to the edition. However, canceling the publisher does not delete the edition file or affect documents that subscribed to the edition.

Related topics

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Publisher options

Publisher borders


Insert Object command (Windows)
Insert Object command

Use the Insert Object command in the Edit menu to insert an OLE object from another program or another Canvas document into the active Canvas document. This command is available on Windows only.

The Insert Object command opens a dialog box in which you can choose any registered OLE object type to insert into a document. You can create a new object or choose a file as the source of the embedded object.

Create New: With this option selected, you can select an OLE object type in the scrolling list, and then click OK to switch to the source program for that object. You create a new document in the source program and then switch back to Canvas, where the new OLE object is embedded.

Create from file: With this option selected, you can type the path and filename of a file you want to insert into the Canvas document. Click the Browse button if you want to navigate to the file and select it in a directory dialog box.

Result: When you select an OLE object type in the scrolling list (with the Create New option selected), the Result area provides a description of the object type.

Display as Icon: Select this option to display the OLE object as an icon. You can click the Change Icon button to select a different icon representation.

Once an object is embedded in a Canvas document, double-clicking the object opens the file containing the original object.

Related topics

Using Object Linking and Embedding

Links


Links command (Windows only)
Links command

You can use the Links command to check the source file of a linked object and repair a broken link if a source file has been moved. This command is available on Windows only.

1.	Select a linked object in a document.

2.	Choose Links in the Edit menu. The Links dialog box displays the link type and update method. To change the update method, choose the Automatic or Manual option.

3.	Use the buttons to update or change the linked object:

•	To update the object from its source, click Update Now.

•	To open the source document, click Open Source.

•	To select a different source document, click Change Source.

•	To remove the link so changes to the source do not affect the linked object, click Break Link.

Related topic

Using Object Linking and Embedding


Redo command

Use the Redo command in the Edit menu to cancel the Undo command. You can choose Redo multiple times to reinstate canceled actions in reverse order.

The Redo command is not available if you have not used the Undo command to cancel an action.


Replicate command

The Replicate command offers powerful capabilities for duplicating objects. You can use the Replicate dialog box to set the number of copies and to rotate, scale, and position copies with one command.

To replicate a selection

1.	Select one or more objects to copy and choose Edit > Replicate.

2.	In the Replicate dialog box, specify the number of copies. Enter the scaling, rotation, and offset values you want to apply (described next).

•	To preview the replication, click Apply. Canvas draws the copies and the dialog box stays open. You can change settings and click Apply to preview the new settings.

•	To cancel the replication, click Cancel. Canvas closes the Replicate dialog box and erases preview copies.

3.	Click OK to copy the selection and close the Replicate dialog box. The original object is deselected and the copies are selected.

Options in the Replicate dialog box

The Replicate dialog box lets you rotate, scale, and duplicate selected objects.

Copies. Enter the number of objects you want to create.

Rotate. To rotate each copy relative to the preceding object, select Rotate. Type the rotation amount from (minus) -359.0 to 359.0 degrees. The center of rotation is shown in the “Around” box by a hollow handle; click to select another handle as the rotation center.

Scale by. To incrementally change the size of each copy, select Scale by. In the pop-up menu, choose Percentage, Length, or Ratio. In the text boxes, enter horizontal and vertical scaling factors.

Percentage scales each copy by the specified percentages of the proceeding object’s dimensions. Enter whole numbers from 1% to 999%.

Ratio lets you resize copies by fractional amounts. Canvas scales each copy to ratios of the previous object’s horizontal and vertical dimensions. Type ratios with whole numbers from 1 to 999. The left number represents the copy; the right number represents the previous object. A 1/1 ratio maintains dimensions; ½ halves dimensions; 2/1 doubles dimensions.

Length increases or decreases by a fixed amount each copy of the object using the values in the horizontal and vertical text boxes.

Proportional. If selected, Can-vas makes the vertical value in the Scale by or Offset area equal to the horizontal value.

Offset. Check this option to place copies a specified distance from the previous object. In the text boxes, enter the horizontal and vertical offset distance. Positive numbers off-set copies up and right; negative numbers offset objects down and left.

Object data. Displays the selection’s height and width. These values can’t be edited.


Select All command

To select all objects, choose Edit > Select All. This command selects every object in a single-layer document.

To select all objects on all visible layers in a multi-layer document, change the default selection setting in the Preferences dialog box.

To select all objects created by a particular tool, select the tool, then choose Edit > Select All.

Selecting text in linked text objects

When you link text objects so text flows from one object to another, you can select all of the text in the flow. This lets you apply formatting changes to all the text at once, even if the linked text objects are not on the same page or slide.

To select all text in a flow

1.	Select the Text tool and click one of the linked text objects; this places the text object in edit mode and sets the insertion point in the text. You can also double-click a text object with the Selection tool to enter edit mode.

2.	Choose Edit > Select All. Canvas highlights all the text in the linked text objects.

To deselect the text, click outside any text object, or press Enter.

Note: When text is highlighted, anything you type replaces the high-lighted text. If you select a long text flow across several columns, and then type a single letter or press the Spacebar, all the highlighted text will be erased. If this happens, choose Edit > Undo.

When you select all the text in a flow, you can apply formatting changes using the Type palette, the commands in the Text menu, and the Text Ruler.

Of course, changes that you make to selected text on other pages or slides will not be shown until you switch to the other pages or slides.


Send All Now command (Mac OS only)
Send All Now command

Use the Send All Now command to update all editions that are linked to publishers in the active document, and temporarily override the settings for automatic updates. This command is available on Mac OS only.

To update all edition files

Choose Edit > Publishing > Send All Now. Canvas updates all editions that are linked to the publishers in the document.

Related topic

Updating publishers and subscribers


Subscribe To command (Mac OS only)
Subscribe To command

Use the Subscribe To command to subscribe to an edition file. You can subscribe to the edition file to place the published selection in as many documents as you want. This command is available on Mac OS only.

To subscribe to a published selection

1.	In the document in which you want to place the published objects, choose Publishing > Subscribe To in the Edit menu.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select the edition file for the published selection and click Subscribe. The published information appears in the subscriber document within a non-printing gray rectangle. You can move and resize this subscriber border.

Related topic

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe


Subscriber Options command (Mac OS only)
Subscriber Options command

Use the Subscriber Options command to specify when a subscriber updates to match changes in its edition file. This command is available on Mac OS only.

You can select options to make changes to the edition file appear automatically in subscriber documents, or to update the changes manually in each subscriber.

To set subscriber options

1.	Click the subscriber border to select it and choose Edit > Publishing > Subscriber Options.

2.	To update the subscriber now from the edition, click Get Edition Now. To specify when the subscriber should get changes from the edition file, choose an option in the Get Editions area:

Automatically Tells Canvas to update the subscriber when you open the document and whenever the edition changes.

Manually Tells Canvas not to update the subscriber. If you select this option, Canvas shows the time of the last update.

3.	When you finish setting subscriber options, click OK.

•	To break the link between a subscriber and edition, click Cancel Subscriber in the Subscriber Options dialog box.

•	To open the publisher document, click Open Publisher in the Subscriber Options dialog box.


Undo command

Use the Undo command to cancel an action. The Undo command can cancel most actions such as applying commands, creating or modifying objects, or changing object attributes.

Undo returns the document to its appearance before the action.

To cancel an action, choose Edit > Undo. Or, press Command+ Z (Mac) or Ctrl+Z (Windows).

The minimum and maximum number of times you can undo changes can be changed on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box.

Not all actions can be canceled with the Undo command. Actions that cannot be canceled include scrolling; closing or reverting to an earlier version of a document; selecting and deselecting objects; deleting settings in palettes; and saving documents.


Overprint and Spread commands

Two commands in the Style submenu let you specify special printing options, overprint and spread, for text.

These options affect text output only when you print color separations using the Print As Separations option in the Print dialog box.

The Overprint and Spread commands in the Style submenu let you apply these printing options to specific characters after you make a text selection within a text object.

Note: You can use the Object Specs palette to specify overprinting or spreading for objects, including text objects, but not for selected characters within a text object.

To spread or overprint a text selection

1.	Highlight the text characters in a text object to which you want to apply the overprint or spread printing option.

2.	To spread characters, choose Text > Style > Spread.

3.	To overprint characters, choose Text > Style > Overprint.

These special printing options do not change the appearance of text in the Canvas document.


Copy Options command

You can select options when you copy objects to the Clipboard by using the Copy Options command. The Copy Options dialog box lets you choose a format for objects you copy to the Clipboard. You can choose a format that produces the best results when you paste Canvas objects into other programs. These options do not affect objects that you copy and paste in Canvas.

To use Copy Options

1. Select the objects to copy and choose Edit > Copy Special > Copy Options.

2. Select a format (described next) in the dialog box and click OK. Canvas copies the objects to the Clipboard using the format you select. You can then paste the objects in the desired format into other programs.

Copy Options formats

In the Copy Options dialog box, you can choose a format for copying objects to the Clipboard. The basic Clipboard format is PICT for Mac OS and WMF (Windows Metafile) for Windows. Other formats let you include PostScript and raster image data on the clipboard.

Copy as PICT EMF Copies objects using the standard format for Mac OS (PICT) and Windows (EMF). In most cases, this option is the same as using the standard Copy command. PICT and EMF do not support transparency; transparent Canvas objects are not rendered and will appear opaque when pasted into other programs.

Copy as PICT with EPS (Mac only) Copies objects to the Clipboard with PostScript information. This can improve the quality of objects that you paste into other applications, including Adobe FrameMaker and Microsoft Word. This option is the same as choosing Edit > Copy Special > Copy With EPS.

Copy as PICT / EMF With Image Copies objects to the Clipboard as rasterized images at the resolution you specify. Type the resolution you want to use in the Resolution text box. This option is the same as choosing Edit > Copy Special > Copy As Image (although the Copy As Image command does not let you specify a resolution). When you use this option, Canvas renders transparency effects, so that transparency among Canvas objects is preserved. However, most programs do not support transparency, so Canvas objects pasted into another program will not be transparent relative to objects in the other program.

Anti-Alias Softens the edges of objects copied to the Clipboard using anti-aliasing. This is available when you select Copy With Image. Anti-aliasing slightly blurs objects to reduce the jagged appearance of object edges.

Omit Canvas Data (Mac only) This option is the same as the Copy Without Comments commands in previous Canvas versions. It places objects on the Clipboard without special Canvas formatting information. If you have problems when you paste Canvas objects into other programs, try using this option to copy the objects to the Clipboard.


Paste Attributes command

You can transfer attributes from one object to other objects using the Paste Attributes command. Transferring attributes can help you maintain consistency between objects. You can transfer attributes from a source selection — an object or text that has been copied to the Clipboard — to a target selection, which is one or more objects selected in the document. Or, you can retain the source selection attributes as the current attributes — those attributes that you can apply to new objects.

You can use Paste Attributes to transfer inks and stroke settings, object dimensions, effects, and text attributes.

To transfer attributes

1. Select an object or text whose attributes you want to transfer.

•	If you select multiple objects, only the dimensions of a rectangle encompassing all the objects will be available.

•	If you select a group object, only attributes that apply to the entire group, including the bounding box size and transformations applied to the group object, will be available.

•	If you select a text object, only the attributes common to the entire object will be available.

2. Choose Edit > Copy to place the selection on the Clipboard.

3. Select the one or more target objects to receive the attributes. If no objects are selected, the source attributes will be retained as the current attributes and can be applied to new objects.

4. Choose Edit > Paste Attributes. In the Paste Attributes dialog box, select the attributes to paste. Options that appear dimmed were not available in the source selection or cannot be applied to the target selection.

5. Click OK to paste the attributes and close the dialog box.

Paste Attributes options

Depending on the source selection and the target selection, you can choose options listed in the Paste Attributes dialog box.

An option is available if the attribute was copied from the source selection and can be applied to the selected target objects. The exception to this rule is the Text Style option. The Text Style option is available whenever the source selection is text, even if the target objects are not. In this case, no Text Style attributes will be applied to the target selection, but the Text Style attributes will be retained as the current attributes and can be applied to new text objects.

Fill ink Transfers the source selection’s fill ink. You can transfer fill inks if the source selection is a vector object or text that has a fill ink, and the target objects are vector or text objects. If no target is selected, the source fill ink becomes the current fill ink.

Pen ink Transfers the source selection’s pen ink. You can transfer pen inks if the source selection is a vector object or text that has a pen ink, and the target objects are vector or text objects. If no target is selected, the source pen ink becomes the current pen ink.

Stroke Transfers the source selection’s stroke, including pen, dash, and arrow attributes. You can transfer strokes if the source selection is a vector object or text that has a stroke, and the target objects are vector or text objects. If no target is selected, the source stroke becomes the current stroke.

Dimensions Transfers the dimensions of a rectangle “bounding box” that encompasses the source selection. You can transfer bounding box dimensions from any source object to any selected objects, but not to text selected within a text object. This makes all target objects the same size as the source.

If the source object has been rotated or skewed, you can transfer its original dimensions by selecting Dimensions. To transfer its transformed dimensions, select Transform.

Transform Transfers rotation and skewing applied to the source selection’s bounding box. You can transfer these effects to any selected objects.

Transparency Transfers the transparency effects applied to the source selection.

Text Style Transfers the following text attributes from a text source selection to a text target selection: font, type size, text style (bold, italic, and so on), leading, kerning, and justification. You can transfer text attributes when a particular attribute is uniform in the source selection. For example, if different kerning values are applied to characters in the source text, kerning will not be available for transfer to the target text. If no target text is selected, the source text attributes become the current text attributes.


Color management

Canvas uses the Kodak Digital Science Color Management System or its own internal color management system to achieve accurate color reproduction in the display and printing. The active color management system handles conversions from one color mode to another.

The Kodak Color Management System supports ICC (International Color Consortium) profiles. You can use ICC profiles to calibrate color management to your monitors and output devices.

To change color management settings, use the Color Settings command.


Color Settings command
To change Canvas color settings

1.	To change the color management settings, choose Edit > Calibration > Color Settings.

2.	In the Color Settings dialog box, you can select profiles and other options.

3.	Click OK to implement the settings.

  Color Settings options


Color Settings options

The Color Settings dialog box selects the color management system for color conversion in Canvas.

Monitor

Unless you have special calibrated video display equipment, you can choose the Canvas default monitor profile. To select a specific monitor ICC profile, choose Other. A directory dialog box with two panes appears. In the upper pane, available ICC monitor profiles appear. Select a profile and click Open.

Printer

Unless you have a calibrated output device, such as a color proofer or film recorder, you can use the Canvas default printer profile. To select a different ICC profile, choose Other. A directory dialog box with two panes appears. In the upper pane, available ICC printer profiles appear. Select a profile and click Open.

Engine

You can choose the Kodak Digital Science CMS or the internal Canvas CMS (color management system).

Note: In Canvas 6.0, the Kodak Digital Science CMS engine was chosen if you selected Edit > Calibration > Use Calibration; the Canvas engine was chosen if you deselected the Use Calibration command.

Intent

Choose a rendering intent:

•	Perceptual (Images) maintains relative color values as the values are mapped to the printer gamut. This method preserves the relationship among colors, though color values can change.

•	Saturation (Graphics) maintains relative saturation values of colors. Colors that are outside the printer gamut are converted to the closest colors with the same saturation that are inside the printer gamut.

•	Relative Colorimetric does not change colors that are inside the printer gamut. Colors that are outside the gamut are usually converted to colors that have the same lightness but are just within the printer gamut.

•	Absolute Colorimetric disables white-point matching when converting colors. This option can be used for technical purposes but is not recommended for satisfactory color matching.

Simulate print colors on display

Select this option to simulate on the monitor the appearance of the CMYK colors that will be printed. The active color management system is used for color conversions for printing whether this option is selected or not.


Printer Setup command (File menu)
Printer Setup command (Windows)

You can use the Printer Setup command in Canvas to select a printer and PPD file. In the Printer Setup dialog box you can set options for scaling, centering, and tiling a publication and for printing information on color separations.

In the Printer Setup dialog box, click the Setup button to open the Properties dialog box for the selected printer. In this dialog box, you can change paper size, orientation, positive or negative imaging, and scaling for output.

The Properties dialog box is the same for most PostScript printers, with page setup and printing options organized on tabs.

Paper tab

Use the Paper tab to select paper size, layout, orientation, and number of copies. Related options, which let you tile and center output, are available in the Print dialog box.

When you select a paper size, be sure it provides enough extra space outside the document for bleeds and printer information. If the printer driver lets you select a custom paper size, a Custom icon appears under Paper Size and you can enter your own paper dimensions.

Graphics tab

The Graphics tab contains options for output resolution, halftones, and imaging. For output of final film separations, however, these options should be set in Canvas using the Separation Setup dialog box, not here.

A resolution setting in effect at the imagesetter or RIP takes precedence over the Resolution setting on the Graphics tab.

Halftone settings in Canvas always supersede the Screen frequency and Screen angle settings on the Graphics tab. For color separations, Canvas uses the settings on the Screens tab in the Separation Setup dialog box. For regular printing, Canvas uses the settings on the Printing tab in the Preferences dialog box.

You can select negative and mirror image (wrong-reading) output options on the Graphics tab. However, some output devices also let you set these options. You might need to test the output before producing final film separations to be sure the correct settings are in effect.

Features tab

This tab contains options for the output device, such as text and photo-enhancement, print darkness, and smoothing, which can be controlled through software. The available options depend on the device. Refer to the output device documentation for details.

PostScript tab

This tab has options for PostScript formatting from the printer driver. However, Canvas creates PostScript data itself, rather than relying on the printer driver, so these options affect only the “preamble” or header information that Canvas sends to the output device or file, along with the actual PostScript page descriptions generated by Canvas.


Font submenu

Use the Font submenu to choose a font (typeface) for selected or new text.

To choose a font using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want the font to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the text or text objects.

•	To set the font before typing, place the insertion point where you want the font to change.

•	To apply the font to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Font to open the Font submenu. A check appears next to the current font.

3.	Choose a font in the submenu. The font setting changes immediately.

You can also use the Character tab in the Type palette to choose any of the fonts installed on your system.


Insert submenu

Use the commands in the Insert submenu to place headers, footers, or the current date, time, or page number in a Publication document. Most of these commands are described in this topic and are not available when you work in an Illustration or Presentation document.

Inserting special text in Publications

When date, time, or page number items are inserted into Header and Footer text objects in Publication documents, Canvas will update the date, time, and page numbers each time it redraws the screen.

You can also insert the current date and time in standard text objects. However, Canvas does not update this text; the date or time is “stamped” into the document as static text.

You can format the codes or stamps (for example, change fonts, sizes, or justification) the same way you apply formatting to normal text; simply select the codes or text and choose the formatting you want to use.

Canvas uses the date and time information as set by your operating system. Refer to your system documentation for information on setting the current date and time.

To insert the date, time, or page number in a publication document

With a text object in edit mode, choose an option in the Insert submenu in the Text menu; see the table below for descriptions of the commands.

To insert	In this type of object	Do this
Updating date code	Header or footer	Choose Insert > Date, or type $d
Date stamp (will not change)	Any text object	Choose Insert > Date Stamp
Updating time code	Header or footer	Choose Insert > Time, or type $e
Time stamp (will not change)	Any text object	Choose Insert > Time stamp
Current page number	Header or footer (page count is static in normal text objects)	Choose Insert > Page #, or type $p
Total page count	Header or footer (page count is static in normal text objects)	Choose Insert > Total Page #, or type $t
Related topic

Header and Footer commands


Header and Footer commands

In Canvas Publication documents, you can add Header and Footer text objects using Insert submenu commands in the Text menu.

Headers and footers are special text objects that can contain codes for the current date, time, and page number, in addition to text you type. Canvas updates the date, time, and page number codes each time it refreshes the screen.

Canvas inserts headers at the top of the printable area (the top of the onscreen page layout) and footers at the bottom of the printable area. Both types of objects initially span the width of the page, but you can resize and move them just like other text objects.

To create header and footer text objects:

1.	You can’t add headers and footers while in text edit mode; press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to exit text edit mode, if necessary.

2.	Choose Text > Insert > Header or Text > Insert > Footer. Canvas creates the object, and places it in text edit mode so you can begin typing.


Justification submenu

Use the Justification submenu to select an paragraph alignment method for selected or new text.

Canvas has four alignment, or justification, settings: flush right, flush left, full (flush with both right and left indents), or centered. You can set alignment in either the Justification submenu of the Text menu, the Text Ruler, or the Paragraph tab of the Type palette.

Note: Full justification may create wide letter or word spacing, especially in narrow text columns. Other justification settings (without hyphenation) might appear too ragged on one or both sides. You can set letter- and word-spacing parameters to improve the appearance of text.

To set justification using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want the justification settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set justification for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the justification before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply justification settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Justification to open the Justification submenu. Canvas places a check mark next to the current justification setting.

3.	Choose an alignment option in the submenu. Canvas applies the justification setting immediately.

Related topic

Vertical justification options


Kerning submenu

Use the Kerning submenu to choose a setting for the spacing between characters of selected or new text.

The Kerning submenu lets you choose a standard kerning amount: Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, or Very Loose. You can interactively kern characters in half-point increments using the Tighten and Loosen commands. You can also set a fine kerning amount using the Configure Fine Kern command, then use the Tighten Fine and Loosen Fine commands to kern characters by the specified amount.

If you change the kerning and later decide to return the text to its standard spacing, you can choose Normal to remove all changes.

Specifying spacing between characters

The space between characters is defined by font designers. In Canvas, the Kerning option lets you adjust the amount of space to the right of each character, so you can bring characters closer together (tighten) or spread them farther apart (loosen).

The term “kerning” generally refers to adjusting the spacing of specific character pairs. However, in Canvas, you can also set a kerning amount to apply to words, paragraphs, portions of text, and entire text objects. This is sometimes referred to as “tracking” rather than kerning.

To change character spacing using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want kerning to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the text or text objects.

•	To set the kerning before typing, place the insertion point where you want the kerning to change.

•	To apply the kerning setting to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Kerning to open the Kerning submenu. Canvas places a check mark next to the current kerning setting. Choose one of the following kerning options. Canvas will implement the setting immediately.

Option	Result
Tight	8% less space than normal between characters
Very Tight	14% less space than normal between characters
Normal	Standard spacing as defined by the font’s designers
Loose	8% more space than normal between characters
Very Loose	14% more space than normal between characters
Tighten	Reduce current kerning by 0.5 points. You cannot tighten kerning to less than the width of one character
Loosen	Increase current kerning by 0.5 points
Tighten Fine Kerning	Reduces kerning by the point value specified using the Configure Fine Kern command
Loosen Fine Kerning	Increases kerning by the point value specified using the Configure Fine Kern command
Configure Fine Kerning	Lets you set a Fine Kern amount in points.


Leading submenu

Use the Leading submenu to choose a method of spacing between lines in a paragraph for new or selected text.

The Leading submenu lets you set Single, 1 1/2, or Double Space leading. You can also choose the Tighten or Loosen commands to fine-tune the current leading in 0.5-point increments. You can tighten and loosen the leading repeatedly, but the line spacing cannot be less than zero.

Setting line and paragraph spacing

Canvas provides two methods of specifying leading: ratio (or percentage) and point size.

Ratio and percentage leading are based on the normal leading of the largest type size in the preceding line. The normal leading is usually designed to be slightly larger than the point size of the type. For example, a single line of 12-point text usually occupies about 15 points of vertical space when you specify 100 percent or Single Space leading. Therefore, double spaced, or 200 percent, leading for 12-point text increases the line spacing to about 30 points.

Leading specified in points is independent of the type size and normal leading of the typeface. The space from baseline to baseline is exactly the number of points specified, regardless of the size of the type. Using point size leading lets you maintain consistent line spacing, and fit text to specific space requirements. For example, you have 10 lines of text, and exactly 120 points of vertical space to place the text. To make the text fit, set the leading to 12 points.

To set leading using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want the leading to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set leading for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the leading before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply the leading setting to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Leading to open the Leading submenu. Canvas places a check mark next to the current leading setting.

3.	Choose a standard leading in the submenu, or choose Tighten or Loosen. Canvas applies the setting immediately.


Size submenu

Use the Size submenu to choose from standard sizes for new or selected text or to reduce or increase the type size in 1-point increments.

To set type size using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want the type size to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the text or text objects.

•	To set the type size before typing, place the insertion point where you want the size to change.

•	To set the type size of the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Size to open the Size submenu. A check mark appears next to the current type size.

3.	Choose one of the sizes in the submenu, or choose the Reduce or Increase option to change the type size in 1-point increments. The size setting applies immediately.


Spell Checker submenu

The Spell Checker submenu lets you check the spelling of text in a document. You can check specific words, selections, and an entire document.

Canvas can also watch for misspellings as you type, and mark words that are not in the Canvas spelling dictionary.

Canvas checks the spelling of text by looking up words in the Canvas Dictionary and the User Dictionary. The Canvas dictionary contains 100,000 words; this dictionary file can’t be modified. You can add words to the User Dictionary to stop Canvas from marking unrecognized words that are spelled correctly.

Showing and hiding unrecognized words

Canvas marks words that it can’t find in either the Canvas Dictionary or the User Dictionary with a red wavy underline. Canvas can check spelling while you type or after you finish entering text.

When Show Spelling Errors is active, Canvas checks the spelling of a word after you type it and press the Spacebar, tab, or deselect the text object. Canvas marks an unrecognized word with a red wavy underline.

To mark unrecognized words: Choose Layout > Display > Show Spelling Errors. If you do not want Canvas to mark unrecognized words, Choose Layout > Display > Hide Spelling Errors.

Using the spelling pop-up menu

While using the Text tool to edit text, you can choose suggested replacements for words marked as unrecognized. The spelling pop-up menu lets you choose replacement words. You can also use the menu to add unrecognized words to the User Dictionary.

To use the spelling pop-up menu, with a text object in edit mode, point to a word that Canvas has marked as unrecognized. Control-click the word (Mac) or right-button click the word (Windows). The spelling menu pops up.

Do one of the following:

Replacement word: To replace an unrecognized word with a suggested word, choose the suggested word in the pop-up menu. When you choose a replacement word in the Spelling menu, Canvas adds the unrecognized word and the replacement word to the Auto Correct dialog box. The unrecognized word appears in the Replace text box and the suggested word appears in the With text box.

Add Word: To add an unrecognized word to the User Dictionary, choose Add Word. After you choose Add Word, Canvas adds the word to the User Dictionary and will recognize any future use of the word.

Ignore Word: To ignore the spelling of the unrecognized word, click Ignore Word. If you choose Ignore Word, Canvas will ignore the word in any document until you quit Canvas.

Cancel: To close the spelling menu without making any changes, choose Cancel or click outside the pop-up menu.

Selecting dictionary files

If you choose a spelling command and Canvas asks you to locate the Canvas spelling dictionaries, go to the Dictionaries folder in the Canvas folder.  For the Spell Checking Dictionary, select the file “Canvas.dic” (Windows) or  “Canvas Dictionary” (Mac) and click OK.  For the User Dictionary, select the file “User.dic” (Windows) or “User Dictionary” (Mac) and click OK.

Spell checking a selection or document

You can check the spelling of selected text, a selected text object, and an entire document using commands in the Spell Checker submenu.

1.	To limit the spell checking to specific text or a text object, select the text or the text object. To spell check an entire document, you don’t have to select anything.

2.	To begin spell checking, choose Text > Spell Checker > Spell Check Selection (if you selected text or a text object), or Text > Spell Checker > Spell Check Document.

3.	If Canvas finds an unrecognized word, the Spelling Checker dialog box appears.

4.	Canvas displays a message when the spell check is complete. Click OK to close the message box.

Note: Canvas deselects any selected objects (but not text) when you use the Spell Check Selection or Spell Check Document commands.

When Canvas finds misspelled words

Whenever you check spelling in a document and Canvas finds a word it doesn’t recognize, it opens the Spelling Checker dialog box. The dialog box shows the unrecognized word highlighted within surrounding text. If Canvas suggest another spelling, the suggested spelling appears in the text box under the unrecognized word. To see additional suggestions, click the pop-up menu button at the right of the text box. To change the replacement word, type another word in the text box.

Use the buttons in the dialog box to correct the word, add it to the dictionary, or leave it unchanged.

Replace: Click Replace to replace the unrecognized word with the contents of the text box and continue to check spelling in the document or selection.

Add: If Canvas doesn’t recognize a word that is actually spelled correctly, you can add the word to the user dictionary so that Canvas will recognize it in all future documents. After saving the word, Canvas continues to check spelling in the document or selection.

Ignore: Allows an unrecognized word in the current document without adding the word to the dictionary. Canvas ignores all instances of the word until you close Canvas.

Skip: Allows the current instance of an unrecognized word, but Canvas alerts you the next time this word occurs.

Cancel: Interrupts the spelling check and closes the dialog box.

Continuing a spelling check

If, in the middle of checking a selection or document, you cancel the process, you can choose Text > Spell Checker > Continue Spell Check to pick up where you left off. Canvas remembers the words you chose to ignore.

Related topic

Modifying the user dictionary


Modifying the user dictionary

In addition to the approximately 100,000 words in the Canvas spelling dictionary, you can store an unlimited number of words in a personal user dictionary.

To add or delete words in the user dictionary

1.	Choose Spell Checker > Show Added Words in Text menu.

2.	In the User Added Words dialog box, type new words to add or choose words to delete.

•	You can add words to the dictionary by typing each word in the text box and clicking Add.

•	To delete words added to the dictionary, select the word in the top window in the dialog box and click Delete.


Style submenu

The Style submenu lets you apply character styles such as bold, italic, or superscript, as well as capitalization modes, to selected text.

Font styles can be categorized into three groups: appearance, capitalization, and baseline position. To the same text, you can apply multiple appearance styles, but only one each of capitalization and baseline styles.

You can also apply special printing options to characters in a text block by applying the Spread or Overprint styles.

Appearance styles

Appearance styles include plain, bold, italic, underline, outline, shadow, small caps and strikethrough. With the exception of the Plain option, you can use as many of these appearances as you like on the same text. Applying the Plain setting removes other font styles that have been applied so that text reverts text to its standard appearance.

Depending on the typeface, using certain styles might not have the desired effect, and can even make text appear ugly when printed. For example, applying bold to a heavy weight typeface can make characters look too thick. Similarly, applying italics to an already italicized font might exaggerate the slant of the characters.

Capitalization styles

Capitalization styles format text as uppercase, lowercase, or title styles. You can apply only one of these capitalization styles to the same text.

Uppercase capitalizes all letters.

Lowercase makes all letter lowercase.

Title capitalizes the first letter of each word.

Baseline position

The baseline of text is the imaginary horizontal line on which characters sit. To position characters above (superscript) or below (subscript) the normal baseline, you can shift the baseline position.

Canvas does not change the type size of superscript and subscript text. Unless you reduce the type size of shifted text, the line size increases by the amount of the baseline shift. As a result, the line spacing might change, depending on the leading setting. If you don’t want the line spacing to change, you can reduce the type size of shifted text by the same amount (or more) of the baseline shift, or you can specify leading in points.

If you use the Style submenu to change baseline position, you can choose either Superscript or Subscript to shift text the baseline by roughly 27 to 33 percent of point size of the line. For example, superscript text in a line of 12-point text appears 4.0 points above the normal baseline.

To apply font styles using menu commands

1.	Depending on how you want the font style to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the text or text objects.

•	To set the font style before typing, place the insertion point where you want the style to change.

•	To apply the font style to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Choose Text > Style to open the Style submenu. Canvas places check marks next to the active styles in the submenu.

3.	Choose the font style you want to apply. Choosing an active style turns off the style. Canvas implements the setting immediately.


Type palette
Type command

Use the Type command to open the Type palette. The Type palette lets you manage all typographic settings, including those provided by the Text menu. In the Type palette, you can enter numeric values to set custom point sizes, kerning, leading, and superscript and subscript elevations. In addition, the Type palette provides options for indents, drop caps, letter and word spacing, and hyphenation.

Choose Text > Type to open the Type palette. You can also double-click the Text tool in the toolbox to open the palette.

The Type palette contains six tabs:

Character tab

Hyphens tab

Indents tab

Paragraph tab

Spacing tab

Styles tab

Applying settings in the Type palette

When you adjust settings in the Type palette, the new settings don’t take effect until you click Apply. Be sure that you don’t click outside the palette before applying the settings, or they will be lost.


Type palette: Character tab
Character tab

The Character tab in the Type palette lets you set the font, type size, style, kerning, capitalization style, scale, and baseline position for text.

To change existing text, select the text that you want to modify (from one character to one or more entire text objects), choose the settings you want on the Character tab in the Type palette, and then click Apply.

To change settings before typing text, put the insertion point in a text object where you want to begin typing, choose the settings you want on the Character tab in the Type palette, and then click Apply.

To change the settings for new text, when no text is highlighted and no text objects are selected or in edit mode, choose the settings you want on the Character tab in the Type palette, and then click Apply.

To choose a font

1.	On the Character tab, choose a font in the Name pop-up menu.

2.	Click Apply to implement the font setting.

To set the type size

1.	On the Character tab, choose one of the sizes in the Size pop-up menu, or enter a number in the box to specify a type size.

2.	Click Apply to implement the type size setting.

 To apply font styles

1.	On the Character tab, click the Style buttons. Clicking the Plain button turns off all active appearance styles. Clicking an active appearance style button turns the style off.

2.	To change the capitalization style, choose Upper, Lower, Normal, Title or Small Caps in the Case pop-up menu.

3.	To change the baseline elevation, choose Normal, Superscript, or Subscript in the Baseline pop-up menu. If you are applying superscript or subscript, specify the distance from the baseline (in points) in the text box. Normal baseline always has an elevation of zero points.

4.	Click Apply to implement the font style settings.

To change character spacing (kerning)

1.	On the Character tab, choose Normal, Tighten, or Loosen in the Kerning pop-up menu and specify the kerning amount (in points) in the text box. Normal always has a setting of zero.

2.	Click Apply to implement the kerning setting.

To scale (compress or extend) characters

To scale an entire text object, you can select the text object, press Command (Mac) or Alt (Windows), and drag a selection handle. Depending on the direction of the drag, Canvas scales text horizontally or vertically.

 1.	On the Character tab, to specify the vertical and horizontal scale of characters, enter percentages in the Scale boxes. If you enter the same percentage in both boxes, Canvas scales the text proportionately. Canvas will apply these percentages to the point size displayed in the Size box.

2.	Click Apply to implement the scaling settings.

Note: Canvas does not limit the percentage you can scale characters, however, extremely high and low settings can distort some fonts and make them unreadable. In addition, scaling requires significant amounts of memory for text display, which might cause performance problems for some systems.

To lock character attributes

Using the Character tab, you can lock the current font, type size, and font style to prevent accidental changes. This feature is especially useful when several people are using the same Canvas document. In addition, you can also use this feature to selectively exempt sections of text from global formatting changes. Once you lock a setting, no one can change it without first unlocking it.

To lock an attribute, click the Lock button to the right of the attribute controls. You can also change font attributes in this step. When you click Apply, Canvas first applies the new font attributes, then locks the new attributes. Click Apply to implement the lock settings.

To use the Vertical option for text objects

You can use a special Vertical option to set up the Text tool for vertical text, and to arrange text objects to contain vertical text.

1.	If necessary, select the option “Enable two-byte script” on the Type tab in the Preferences dialog box. Then, do one of the following to set up the Text tool, or to change the orientation of existing text objects:

•	To change the default operation of the Text tool, make sure that no objects are selected in the document.

•	To change existing text objects, select the text objects.

2.	Select the “Vert.” checkbox on the Character tab in the Type palette, and then click Apply. Canvas applies the vertical option to the selected text objects or to the Text tool.

When you set the Text tool to create vertical text, lines of text that you type are vertical, with text flowing from top to bottom and lines running from right to left. This is the same as the orientation of text within an existing text object when you apply the Vertical option.

You can also create text objects with the same vertical text orientation using the Vertical Text tool.

To restore horizontal orientation

Select a text object containing vertical text. On the Character tab in the Type palette, deselect the “Vert.” checkbox, and then click Apply.

Using vertical text in Publication layouts

To make it easy to create text layouts in Publication documents, choose the Column Guides command in the Layout menu, and create the number of column guides you want to use. Then, use the Vertical Text Object tool to click between column guides. This creates a text column sized to fit the column guides. The column extends from the point you click to the left margin of the page. If the column guides are outside the printable area, the column text remains inside the printable area.


Type palette: Hyphens tab
Hyphens tab

The Hyphens tab in the Type palette lets you change the settings Canvas uses for automatic hyphenation of text. Hyphenation settings apply to entire paragraphs.

To hyphenate a word with a permanent hyphen, type a hyphen character where you want to hyphenate the word.

Soft hyphens

You can specify where a word should hyphenate by inserting a “soft hyphen”; simply place the insertion point where you want the word to break and press Command+H (Mac OS) or Ctrl+H (Windows).

To set hyphenation for paragraphs

1.	Depending on how you want the hyphenation settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set hyphenation for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To allow Canvas to insert hyphens as you type a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply hyphenation settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Configure the hyphenation settings as described below.

3.	Click Apply to implement the hyphenation settings.

Hyphenation settings

If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type. Click the Hyphens tab to bring it to the front. Turn hyphenation on and configure the following settings.

After word beginning: Specify the minimum number of letters that must precede a hyphen.

Before word ending: Specify the minimum number of letters that must follow a hyphen.

Smallest word: Specify the minimum number of letters that a word must have to be hyphenated.

Consecutive line limit: Specify the number of consecutive lines that can end in hyphens. For example, if four consecutive lines could end in hyphens but the limit is three, Canvas does not hyphenate the last word of the fourth line.

Skip capitalized words: Turn this option on to prevent proper names and other words beginning with a capital letter from being hyphenated.


Type palette: Indent tab
Indent tab

The Indent tab of the Type palette lets you set the amount of space between the left and right borders of a text object and the edges of each paragraph.

For text wrapped to an object, you can also use the Indent tab to set the distance between the edge of the object and the text.

The Indent tab also lets you set up an automatic drop cap in text.

To set indents using the Type palette

1.	Depending on how you want the indent settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set indents for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the indents before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply the indent settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Configure the indent settings as described below.

3.	Click Apply to implement the indent settings.

Indent settings on the Indent tab

If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type. Click the Indent tab to bring it to the front.

Left: To specify the distance between the left border of a text object and the left indent of a paragraph, enter the distance in the Left box.

Right: To specify the distance between the right border of a text object and the right indent of a paragraph, enter the distance in the Right box.

First Line: To specify a different indent for the first line of a paragraph, enter the distance in the First Line box. Canvas measures the first line indent from the left border of the bounding box.

Object Wraps: To specify the distance between an object and the edge of text wrapped around or inside that object, enter the distance in points in the Object Wraps box.

Setting up drop caps using the Type palette

1.	Depending on how you want the drop cap to apply, do one of the following:

To apply to	Do this
First paragraph in a text object	Select the object or place the insertion point anywhere in the first paragraph
All other paragraphs	Place the insertion point in a paragraph, or select a paragraph. You can also select multiple consecutive paragraphs.
A new paragraph you are about to type	Place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.
The preset format	Deselect all objects. Canvas will apply drop caps to the first paragraph of all new text objects you create with the Text tool.

2.	Configure the drop cap options as described below.

3.	Click Apply to implement the drop cap settings.

Drop Cap settings

If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type. Click the Indent tab to bring it to the front.

Lines: Specify the number of lines you want the drop caps to occupy. This determines the vertical height of the drop cap.

Characters: Specify the number of characters to enlarge for drop caps. Canvas always applies this setting beginning with the first character in a paragraph.


Type palette: Paragraphs tab
Paragraph tab

The Paragraph Tab of the Type palette lets you set text alignment, control justification, adjust leading (spacing between lines of text), and specify additional space before and after paragraphs.

To set alignment (justification) using the Type palette

1.	Depending on how you want the alignment settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set alignment for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the alignment before a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply alignment settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type, and then click the Paragraph tab to bring it to the front.

3.	Click an alignment button at the top of the palette. The buttons (from left to right) represent left, center, right, and justified alignment.

4.	Click apply to implement the setting.

To adjust letter spacing and word spacing

1.	Depending on how you want the letter and word spacing settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set spacing for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the spacing before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply the spacing settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type.

3.	To set line-width options, click the Paragraph tab to bring it to the front, if necessary. Depending on the type of alignment applied to the text, use the following options on the Paragraph tab:

For right-, left-, and center-justified text: To set the "Minimum Width of Lines," enter a percentage in the text box. The percentage tells Canvas to adjust letter and word spacing so that each line is at least as wide as you specify. For example, if you create a two-inch wide, left-justified paragraph and set the minimum line width to 75%, Canvas adjusts the spacing so that each line is at least 1.5 inches wide. Only the last line in a paragraph is unaffected by the "Minimum Width of Lines" setting.

For full-justified text: To tell Canvas when the last line of a paragraph is wide enough to be justified (flush with both right and left margins), enter a percentage in the "Justify Last Line Within" box. For example, you create a two-inch wide, full-justified paragraph and tell Canvas to justify the last line within 75%. If the last line is less than 1.5 inches wide, Canvas does not justify the line. However, if the last line is wider than 1.5 inches, Canvas justifies the line.

To set leading using the Type palette

1.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type. Click the Paragraph tab to bring it to the front. Then, depending on how you want leading to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or entire text objects. To set leading for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the leading before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply the leading settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	Configure the leading settings as described below and click Apply to implement them.

Percentage leading: To set the leading using a percentage of the line size, choose Percentage in the Line Spacing pop-up menu and enter an amount in the At box. A leading of 100% is the same as the Normal setting in the Leading submenu of the Text menu. Double space is 200%, and one-and-a-half space is 150%.

When you set leading in this way, the leading is always relative to the size of the type. If you increase the type size, Canvas also increases the leading to maintain the same relative percentage.

Point size leading: To specify leading in points, choose Points in the Line Spacing pop-up menu and enter an amount in the At box. Although each font's standard leading might be different, normal leading is generally between 110% and 125% of the largest type size on the line. Therefore, for 10-point type, normal leading is approximately 12 points.

When you set leading in this way, it remains fixed even when you change the type size.

Before paragraph: To insert space before the first line of a paragraph, specify the number of points in the Before Paragraph box. Canvas doesn’t apply Before paragraph spacing to the first paragraph in a column (text object).

After paragraph: To insert space after the last line of a paragraph, specify the number of points in the After Paragraph box. Canvas inserts space after every paragraph, including the last paragraph in a column.


Type palette: Spacing tab
Spacing tab

The Spacing tab of the Type palette lets you adjust the letting-spacing, word-spacing, and text flow characteristics of a paragraph.

Paragraph attributes, including spacing, affect entire paragraphs, even if you select a single character, or place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph. If you select text in multiple paragraphs, all the paragraphs will be affected.

Depending on the type of justification you choose, you might want to adjust letter and word spacing to reduce raggedness or eliminate unusual spacing. For example, left-justified paragraphs might appear too ragged on the right edge, and full-justified paragraphs might have large spaces between characters and words. In Canvas, you can specify minimum, maximum, and desired spacing guidelines.

To adjust letter spacing and word spacing

1.	Depending on how you want the letter- and word-spacing settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change existing text, select the paragraphs or text objects. To set spacing for only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To set the spacing before typing a new paragraph, place the insertion point at the beginning of the paragraph.

•	To apply the spacing settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type.

3.	To set letter and word spacing parameters, click the Spacing tab to bring it to the front, if necessary. Set the minimum, desired, and maximum spacing in the Letter and Word areas. Specify each setting as a percentage of the current spacing. The desired spacing must be greater than the minimum and less than the maximum. The maximum spacing cannot be less than the minimum.

•	Canvas will try to adjust spacing to the desired percentage, but might not be able to depending on minimum line width and justification settings. In these cases, Canvas will then try to adjust the spacing within the minimum and maximum percentages you specify. However, if the minimum and maximum spacing parameters are still in conflict with minimum line width or full justification settings, Canvas will ignore the spacing parameters.

•	To change the spacing of a paragraph by a set amount, you can set the minimum, desired, and maximum percentages to the same value. This has a similar effect to kerning the entire paragraph.

•	If you applied kerning to characters within the selection, Canvas adjusts the spacing as a percentage of the kerning.

4.	Click Apply to implement the settings.

Preventing widows and orphans

You can set text flow options to avoid leaving just a few lines at the top or bottom of a column of flowed text. The term widow describes the first line of a paragraph that appears at the bottom of a column, and orphan refers to the last line of a paragraph that appears at the top of a column.

Canvas can prevent widows and orphans in a text flow by moving the page or column break higher and sending lines to the next page or column. In addition, you can specify that all lines in a paragraph stay together, or that certain pairs of paragraphs always remain together in the same column.

To modify a column break in a particular paragraph, keep all lines in a paragraph together, or keep two paragraphs together, you should change the text flow settings for the specific paragraph only. In most cases, you won’t want these settings to apply to every column break.

To prevent widows and orphans

1.	Depending on how you want the text flow settings to apply, do one of the following:

•	To change text flow settings for existing text, select the text objects or paragraphs. To change only one paragraph, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph.

•	To apply the text flow settings to the preset format, deselect all objects.

2.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type, and click the Spacing tab to bring it to the front.

3.	Configure the widows and orphans settings, as described below.

4.	Click Apply to implement the text flow settings.

Widow and orphan settings

Use the Paragraph area of the Spacing tab to configure widows and orphans protection properties. If an “X” appears in a checkbox, that feature is active.

Widow. Turn on to activate widow protection. You can specify the minimum number of lines that can appear in the last paragraph of a column.

Orphan. Turn on to activate orphan protection. You can specify the minimum number of lines that can appear at the top of a column in a linked flow.

Keep all lines. To prevent Canvas from inserting a column break in a paragraph, turn on this option. This prevents widows and orphans, but might leave a lot of blank space at the bottom of a column.

Keep with next. To prevent two paragraphs from being separated by a column break, turn on this option. This option is useful for keeping a one-line paragraph, such as a heading, together with its section.


Type palette: Styles tab
Styles tab

You can save type formatting settings as named character and paragraph type styles using the Styles tab in the Type palette. Canvas stores type styles with documents. When you open a document, Canvas loads the associated styles so you can apply them.

Type styles make it easy to apply formats and maintain consistency throughout a document. In Canvas you can base styles on each other to form a "family" of styles, so that styles inherit the character and paragraph attributes of a parent style. Organizing styles in this manner makes global style changes a simple matter of changing the parent style.

When a style is changed, text with the style applied also changes. In the case of style families, when a parent style changes, the entire style family is updated, and all text using the styles in the family is updated, too.

Creating new type styles

You can create two kinds of styles, character and paragraph, which incorporate different formatting attributes. After establishing character and paragraph styles, you can apply them independently to create new combinations. You can also save and load styles using the pop-up menu that opens from the triangle button. Canvas saves styles with a “.STY” extension.

Character style attributes		Paragraph style attributes
Font		Leading
Type size		Indents
Font style		Justification
Capitalization style		Drop caps
Baseline position		Hyphens
Kerning		Letter and word spacing
Colors (optional)		Text flow settings
		Character attributes and colors (optional)
Related topics

To create a new type style

Deleting type styles

Modifying type styles

Applying type styles

Copying type styles between documents

Using style families


Using style families

When you base a style on another, the style "inherits" the attributes of the parent style. When the parent style changes, Canvas also updates all related styles. In addition to inherited attributes, the style possesses its own attributes, which you specify. A style's own attributes always take precedence over attributes inherited from the parent style.

For example, you create a style, Body2, based on a parent style, Body1. The fonts are the same, but the type sizes are different. Body2 uses 10 point type, while Body1 uses 12 point. If you change the font for the parent style, the font also changes for Body2. However, if the point size changes for the parent style, Body2 does not change, because Body2's own attributes take precedence. To make Body2 always use the same point size as Body1, you must set the point sizes equal, base Body2 on Body1, and save the style again.

In addition, if you later change Body2's font, this style will no longer inherit fonts from the parent style. Body2's font will override Body1's font setting.

Careful planning will save you from time-consuming corrections when basing styles on each other. In some cases, changing a parent style's attributes may cause unwanted changes throughout the style family. For example, if you base ten styles on Body1, and later decide that you want Body1 (but not the whole family of styles) to be double spaced, you must first change the leading for Body1, then remove the leading setting from each of the other ten styles.


Copying type styles between documents

You can copy named type styles from one Canvas document to another by copying text that uses the style and pasting it into a different document. Canvas transfers the style with the text. When you save the document, Canvas also stores the transferred style.

A type style based on another style cannot inherit attributes across documents. For example, Body2 is based on a parent style, Body1, and you copy only Body2 to a new document. Body2 in the new document no longer inherits attributes from Body1, which is still in the original document.

However, if you copy both Body1 and Body2 to a new document, the relationship is preserved, and Body2 will inherit attributes from its parent style.

Note: When you do this, Canvas changes style names in the new document. For example, a style named “Body 2” will become “Body 2 -2.”


Applying type styles

Applying type styles is similar to applying individual character or paragraph formats using the Type palette. However, instead of configuring settings on each of the tabs in the palette, you can simply choose style names in the pop-up menu on the bottom-right corner of the Type palette.

The pop-up menu displays the current type style name. The C and ¦ indicate if the style is a character or paragraph style, or both. If "+++" appears to the right of a style name, the style has been modified but not saved. If you choose a style in the pop-up menu when "+++" appears next to the current style, you will lose the modifications to the style. Therefore, if you want to use the settings again, you should save the modified style with a new name before applying another style.

To apply a style to selected text or text objects

Select the text or text object(s) you want to apply a style to. Choose a style in the pop-up menu on the bottom-right corner of the Type palette. Click Apply to implement the style. If the text you selected already had a style applied, Canvas replaces the style with the style you choose. In addition, if you apply a paragraph style with font attributes to highlighted text, the font attributes affect the selection only, and the paragraph attributes affect the entire paragraph.

To use a type style as the current format setting

If necessary, deselect all text objects by pressing Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows). Choose a style in the pop-up menu on the bottom-right corner of the Type palette and click Apply. Canvas formats new text objects with the specified style.


Modifying type styles

You can change the attributes of a type style and save the style with the same name. When you change a style's attributes, all styles in the family automatically inherit the new attributes and Canvas updates any existing text that uses the family of styles.

To modify a type style

1.	If necessary, open the Type palette by choosing Text > Type.

2.	To edit a style, choose the style name in the pop-up menu at the bottom of the palette.

3.	Use the Type palette to change the style's attributes. Canvas displays "+++" after the style name at the bottom of the palette to indicate that changes were made to the style.

4.	Click the Styles tab to bring it to the front, and click Create.

5.	In the Create Type Styles dialog, you can choose to include ink settings. You can also include font attributes for paragraph styles. Canvas displays the current style name in the Based On pop-up menu and Style Name box. To replace the style, do not change these options.

6.	Click Save. Canvas asks you to confirm that you want to replace the existing style with the new style.


Deleting type styles

To minimize confusion when choosing styles to apply, you can delete type styles you don't want to use. Text using a deleted type style retains its formatting, but no longer has a named style. In addition, any text using a style based on a deleted style also loses its named style.

To delete a style

Click Delete on the Styles tab in the Type palette. Choose the style you want to delete in the pop-up menu and click OK.


To create a new type style

To save the attributes of existing text as a style, place the insertion point in the text and choose Text > Type to open the Type palette. You can also save current Type palette, Text menu, and Text ruler settings as a style, without first applying them to text.

After you choose settings for a type style, click the Styles tab in the Type palette to bring it to the front.

Example area: Displays a sample of text with the current formatting settings applied.

Description: Lists the current character or paragraph attributes. The C and ¶ buttons toggle between descriptions of character and paragraph attributes.

To save a type style, click Create to open the Create Type Style dialog box. Configure the following settings.

Character or Paragraph: Click one of these buttons to specify what kind of style you want to create.

Based on: Choose a style name in this pop-up menu to base the style you are creating on an existing style. To disable this feature, choose None.

Include: Select the attributes you want to save as part of the style. You can include ink settings (fill and stroke attributes that have been applied to existing text) in character and paragraph styles. For paragraph styles, you can also include font attributes.

Style name: Type a name for the style.

Click Save to store the style and close the dialog box.


Wrap submenu
Wrapping text

When you wrap text inside a object, Canvas adjusts the text object’s margins so that text fits within the boundaries of the object. A text object can be wrapped inside only one object at a time.

Canvas has two methods of wrapping text inside an object. You can select an existing text object and vector or paint object and choose Text > Wrap > Inside Shape option, or you can select an existing object and simply begin typing.

Note: If you wrap text inside an open vector object, such as an arc, the text wraps between the bounding box and the concave side of the arc. If you try to wrap text to a line or a narrow arc, the text will not be visible. If this occurs, choose Text > Wrap > Remove Wrap or choose Edit > Undo to make the text visible again.

To wrap existing text inside an object

Select an object and a text object. Choose Text > Wrap > Inside Shape. Canvas places the text inside the object.

If there is more text than can fit inside the shape, Canvas inserts a column break in the text object and displays an overset symbol. You can resize the object to fit the text, or flow the excess text to another column.

To type new text inside an object

Select a vector or paint object and begin typing. Canvas adjusts margins so that text you type remains within the left and right borders of the object.

If the object is too small to contain all the text you type, the text object extends below the object. You can resize the object to fit the text. You can also resize the text object to fit the shape, and then flow any excess text to another column.

Related topics

Repelling text from objects

Slanting text columns

Removing wrap effects


Remove Wrap command

To restore a text flow that has been wrapped around objects, select the text object and choose Text > Wrap > Remove Wrap.


Repelling text

To make text flow around an object, you can apply a repel setting to the object. You also can set the amount of space between the object and text it repels.

An object with a repel setting repels all text. You can move the object and it will repel text wherever you place it.

You can apply repel settings to objects before any text has been created or placed in a document. You can also apply a repel setting to a text object to make it repel the text in other text objects.

To make a text object repel text in other text objects, the repel text object must be at the front of the stacking order. Select a text object and choose Object > Arrange > Bring to Front to put the object in front of all other objects on the same layer.

An object can repel text that is contained in text objects. A repel setting does not repel text that has been bound to a path with the Path Text tool or the Bind Text command.

To make objects repel text

1.	Select one or more objects that you want to repel text.

2.	Choose Text > Wrap > Repel. Canvas applies the repel setting. The initial repel amount is zero points.

To set repel space

Use this procedure to set the amount of space between an object and text that it repels.

1.	Select the object that has a repel setting and choose Text > Wrap > Repel Options.

2.	Enter a value from -30 to 30 points in the four boxes. These values specify the amount of space between the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the object and text that the object repels.

3.	Click Apply to view the effect of the current settings. Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box.

To remove a repel setting: Select an object that you do not want to repel text. Choose Text > Wrap > Remove Wrap. Canvas removes the repel setting from the selected object.

To prevent text from being repelled

You can prevent a text object from being repelled by objects that have a repel settings by selecting the text object and choosing Text > Wrap > Remove Wrap. To restore the repel, select the text object and choose Text > Wrap > Repel.


Slant Margin command

The Text > Wrap > Slant Margin command lets you change a text column’s margins to form a parallelogram.

To slant right and left margins

1.	Select a text object.

2.	Choose Text > Wrap > Slant Margin. The text object’s selection handles change to four corner handles.

3.	To slant margins away from the bottom line of text, drag either of the text object’s top two selection handles horizontally.

4.	To slant margins away from the top line of text, drag either of the text object’s bottom two selection handles horizontally.

5.	Press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) when you are finished.


Rules command

Paragraph rules are horizontal lines that Canvas draws above a paragraph, below a paragraph, or both. You can select pen type, dash, color, length, and offset for paragraph rules.

To apply paragraph rules

1.	Place the insertion point or make a selection in the paragraph. You can highlight multiple paragraphs to select them. The Paragraph Rules command is not available unless a text object is in edit mode.

2.	Choose Text > Rules. In the Paragraph Rules dialog box, select Rule Above or Rule Below. You can select either or both options. The options for Rule Above and Rule Below can be set independently.

3.	Select rule options, then click Apply to preview the rules. Click OK to apply the rules and close the dialog box.

Paragraph Rules options

When you configure a paragraph rule, a preview of the rule appears in the box in the Rule Above or Rule Below section of the Paragraph Rules dialog box.

Rule Above and Rule Below: Draws rules above or below selected paragraphs. Both can be selected. The size, placement, and attributes of rules are based on the settings in the dialog box. If a paragraph has rules and you clear the checkboxes, Canvas removes the rules.

Length: Use the pop-up menu to choose an option for the length of paragraph rules.

•	Indents sets the rule length based on the values in the From Left and From Right boxes. These values set the distances from the ends of the rules to the right and left borders of the text object (independent of paragraph indents).

•	Text makes the rule length equal to the first line (for rules above) or last line (for rules below) of a paragraph. The From Left and From Right options are not available when the Text option is selected.

Offset: Enter a value in points to space the rule away from the adjacent line of text. The position for rules above is measured from the descenders of the last line of the previous paragraph. For rules below, the position is measured from the descenders of the last line of the current paragraph. You can enter a minimum value of -10 points to move the rule closer to the text. You can enter a maximum value of 72 points to move the rule away from the text.

Pen: Select a stroke for the rule from the Pen pop-up palette. You can select a solid pen, neon, or parallel stroke.

Dash: To apply a dash to the rule, select a dash style from the Dash pop-up palette.

Color: Select a color for the rule from the Color pop-up palette.


Auto Correct

Canvas can automatically fix typographical mistakes as you type. The Auto Correct dialog box lets you select several automatic correction options. It also lets you specify common misspellings, typing errors, and abbreviations that you want Canvas to replace as you type.

When any text replacement option is active, Canvas checks each word you type. It corrects or replaces text as appropriate once you press the Spacebar.

To set up automatic correction

1.	Choose Text > Spell Checker > Auto Correct.

2.	In the Auto Correct dialog box, select the replacement options you want to use. The options are described below.

3.	Click OK to implement the current settings.

Auto Correct options

Use the options in the Auto Correct dialog box to specify corrections you want Canvas to make as you type.

Two Initial Capitals: Corrects a word that you type beginning with two capitalized letters.

Capitalize the First Letter of Sentences: Capitalizes the first letter you type following typical sentence-ending punctuation, such as periods, question marks, or exclamation points, even if these marks are followed by quotation marks or parenthesis. Canvas may or may not capitalize the first letter following unusual punctuation, such as web-site addresses or abbreviations in the middle of sentences, so sentences containing unusual punctuation should be checked.

Note: Auto Correct does not capitalize the next word if you insert sentence-ending punctuation in existing text.

Capitalize the Names of Days: Capitalizes the full names of days of the week. For example, this option replaces “saturday” with “Saturday.” It does not expand abbreviations for day names, such as “wed.” or “Thurs.,” unless you add these abbreviations to the replacement list.

Correct Accidental Usage of the Caps Lock Key (Windows only): Corrects non-standard word capitalization. If the first letter of a word is lowercase and the other letters are uppercase, this changes the first  letter to uppercase and the rest of the letters to lowercase. For example, this replaces “rEPEL” with “Repel.” If the first two letters of a word are uppercase and the rest are lowercase, this changes the first letter to uppercase and the rest of the letters to lowercase, replacing “REpel” with “Repel,” for example.

Replace Text as You Type: Replaces text that you type with any specified replacement text. Each set of typed text and replacement text appears in the scrolling list in the Auto Correct dialog box. You can add items to this list and delete selected items.

Setting up text replacement

You can specify abbreviations, common misspellings, and other text that you want Canvas to replace as you type. You can use this feature to expand abbreviations for common phrases and long names that you type throughout a document.

To set up text replacement

1.	Choose Text > Spell Checker > Auto Correct. In the Auto Correct dialog box, be sure Replace Text as You Type is selected.

2.	In the Replace box, type text that you want to be replaced. In the With box, type the replacement text. Click Add to place the text in the scrolling list. Repeat this procedure to specify more automatic replacements. You can add as many items to the scrolling list as you want. When you finish, click OK.

Note: Auto Correct does not remove specified text from a document if you type nothing in the With box. Also, Auto Correct won’t replace spaces with more or fewer spaces (such as replacing two spaces with one space). However, you can use the Text tab in the Find palette to find and replace spaces.

To remove replacement entries: Select the entry in the scrolling list and click Delete.

Automatic spelling correction

When you use the Spelling pop-up menu to correct a misspelling, Canvas adds the item to the Auto Correction list. The misspelled word appears under Replace and the correction appears under With. If you make the same spelling mistake again and “Replace Text as You Type” is selected in the Auto Correct dialog box, Canvas corrects the error. If “Replace Text as You Type” is not selected, Canvas won’t make these automatic corrections.


Align command

You can use the Align palette to quickly and precisely position objects. As the reference point for alignment and distribution, you can choose points on the objects or the document. The Align palette can stay on screen as you work with different selections, making it easy to quickly access these features.

You can apply alignment and distribution options to vector objects, group objects, paint objects, and text objects. You can align and distribute objects in separate or combined operations.

When aligning objects, Canvas lines up key points on the objects in relation to the reference point you choose. You can choose left, right, top, bottom, or center as methods for alignment.

When distributing objects, Canvas spreads them out over a specified area and equalizes the space between the key points. You can choose the left, right, top, bottom, inside, outside, or center as methods for distribution. For example, if you choose left edges for distribution, the left-most point in each object is an equal distance from the leftmost point in each of its neighbors.

If one of the objects you select for alignment is locked, other objects align relative to it. When distributing objects, Canvas places all objects relative to each other.

To align and distribute objects

1.	Choose Object > Align to open the palette. Select the objects you want to arrange. Click Apply to implement the current settings.

2.	Choose the reference for alignment and distribution:

Each Other: With respect to the other selected objects.

Grid: To the nearest grid increment.

Printable Area: With respect to the printer page or tile.

Document: To a specified location in the document. If you center an object in a multi-page illustration, portions can appear on multiple tiles.

3.	In the Vertical and Horizontal areas, click buttons for alignment and distribution options. Active buttons are recessed. You can select an alignment or distribution option, but not both, in each area.

For no change in position, click the first button in either the Vertical or Horizontal area.

4.	Check Outside Pen to use the outside edge of objects’ strokes when aligning or distributing objects. Otherwise, Canvas uses the center of the stroke.


Arrange submenu

The Arrange submenu in the Object menu lets you change an object’s position in the object stacking order. The submenu also lets you move and copy selected objects to other layers on the same page and to layers on other pages.

Related topics

Changing an object’s position in the stacking order

Arranging objects on layers and pages


Changing an object's position in the stacking order

To move objects in front of or behind other objects on the same layer, select the object and choose a command (see the following table) in the Object > Arrange submenu.

You can move objects to the front or back of the stacking order, or move them one level at a time toward the front or back of the stack.

Command	Result
Bring to Front	Moves selected objects to the front of the stack
Send to Back	Moves selected objects to the back of the stack
Shuffle Up	Moves selected objects one step toward the front of the stack
Shuffle Down	Moves selected objects one step toward the back of the stack


Copying and sending objects to layers, pages, or slides
Arranging objects on layers and pages

Commands in the Arrange submenu in the Object menu let you move and copy selected objects to other layers on the same page and to layers on other pages.

To send or copy objects to another location

1.	Select the objects, and then do one of the following:

Choose Object > Arrange > Send to Layers to move objects to new locations.

Choose Object > Arrange > Copy to Layers to copy objects to new locations.

2.	In the Layer Select dialog box, click one or more layers to designate them as the destination for the selected objects.

3.	Click Select. Canvas copies or moves the selected objects to the destination layer or layers.

Note: The destination layer for the objects cannot be locked.


Object Specs command

The Object Specs palette provides several important features for working with objects.

The Object Specs palette displays data for selected objects and lets you modify settings for selected objects. It also lets you create objects by specifying size, position, and object type.

The Object Specs palette contains tabs labeled Data, Options, and Styles.

The Data tab lets you create objects. You can also use the Data tab to edit the size, position, and other settings of selected objects.

The Styles tab lets you create, modify, and apply object styles.

The Options tab lets you set printing options, including over-printing and trapping for color separations.

To display the Object Specs palette

Choose Object > Object Specs. The palette can remain open while you work. You can change coordinates, dimensions, or other settings, and then click Apply to implement them.


Object Specs palette: Data tab
Data tab

You can use the Data tab to create objects, and to view and edit data for selected objects.

The Data tab displays information for a selected object or group object. If you select a group object, you can change the group’s size and coordinates, but not an individual object within the group.

When more than one object is selected, the boxes on the Data tab are not available, because you can’t edit the position or dimensions of multiple selected objects.

After you edit the values on the Data tab, click Apply to apply the changes to the selected object.

To create an object

1.	On the Data tab, choose an object type from the Object Type palette. You can create rectangles, ovals, arcs, polygons, and lines.

2.	Enter values for the object’s size and position in the text boxes. The type of data you can enter depends on the object type.

3. 	Click Create to create the object.

To display object data

The Data tab includes object size and position data and related options. The tab displays additional options when you select text. The text options let you change the shape of a text object or change the way text wraps in its bounding box.

Select the type of data to display. You can choose Height/Width or Top/Bottom for all objects except lines. For a line, you can choose Start/End, Delta V/H, or Length/Angle.

When an object is selected, you can change the values in the text boxes to resize or reposition the selected object. If Keep Proportions is checked, Canvas maintains the proportion of the object if you change either the height or width (on Mac, the calculation occurs when you press the Tab key or click Apply).

Data display options

Height/Width Type values in the text boxes to specify the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the object.

Top/Bottom Type values in the text boxes to specify the position of the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the object, relative to the document rulers.

Start/End Type values in the text boxes to specify the position of the first and last endpoints of a line.

Delta V/H Type values in the text boxes to specify the position of the first endpoint, and the distance from the first endpoint to the last endpoint of the line.

Length/Angle Type values in the text boxes to specify the position of the first endpoint, and the length and angle of the line.

Data tab settings

Position data. The type of data that appears in the boxes, and their labels, depends on whether you choose Height/Width or Top/Bottom, Start/End, Delta V/H, or Length/Angle.

Left Type the horizontal distance from the ruler’s zero point to the left edge of the object.

Top Type the vertical distance from the ruler’s zero point to the top edge of the object.

Height Type the height of the object, relative to the top edge of the object.

Width Type the width of the object, relative to the left edge of the object.

Bottom Type the vertical distance from ruler’s zero point to the bottom edge of the object.

Right Type the horizontal distance from the ruler’s zero point to the right edge of the object.

St V Type a value to position the first endpoint of a line, relative to the vertical ruler’s zero point.

St H Type a value to position the first endpoint of a line, relative to the horizontal ruler’s zero point.

End V Type a value to position the last endpoint of a line, relative to the vertical ruler’s zero point.

End H Type a value to position the last endpoint of a line, relative to the horizontal ruler’s zero point.

Delta V Type a value to position the last endpoint of a line, relative (vertically) to the first endpoint of the line.

Delta H Type a value to position the last endpoint of a line, relative (horizontally) to the first endpoint of the line.

Length Type a value to specify the length of a line.

Angle Type a value to specify the angle of a line.

X Type a value to position a handle of a polygon, relative to the horizontal ruler’s zero point.

Y Type a value to position a handle of a polygon, relative to the vertical ruler’s zero point.

Start Type a value to specify the starting point of an arc in degrees.

Delta Type a value to specify the length of an arc segment in degrees.

Diag Type a value to specify the roundness of the corners of a rounded rectangle.

Area. Shown when Canvas can calculate the area occupied by a selected object’s bounding box. When you select text, the horizontal insets text box replaces the Area text box.

Perim. Shown when Canvas can calculate the perimeter, or distance around, a selected object’s bounding box. When you select text, the vertical insets text box replaces the Perim text box.

Object name. Type a name for the object.

Object #. The object number assigned by Canvas.

Keep Proportions. Select this option to keep an object’s height and width proportional when you are editing the object’s dimensions.

Apply. Click to apply the current settings. The Apply button changes to Create when no object is selected and you choose an object type to create.

Text object settings

Insets. Change the proportions of a text object’s background. Type values, in pixels, in the text boxes to specify the horizontal and vertical size of the text object’s background.

Caption. Select or deselect to change the way text wraps in its bounding box. Text that is not captioned wraps to the next line based on the boundaries of the text’s bounding box.

You cannot use the Caption or Insets options with text that you created using the Path Text tool, or text that you converted to paths.


Object Specs palette: Styles tab
Styles tab

An object style is a set of attributes you can save and then apply to objects.

Object styles help you maintain consistency and make applying attributes easier. You can edit and reapply styles to objects, rather than editing each attribute.

To create an object style

1.	Display the Object Specs palette and select the Styles tab.

2.	Select an object on which you want to base a style.

3.	Click the Create button in the Object Specs palette.

4.	In the dialog box, type a style name in the Name text box.

5.	Select the check boxes for attributes you want to include in the object style and click OK to save the style.

Styles tab options

The Styles tab in the Object Specs palette lets you create, apply, and edit object styles.

Object style. This pop-up menu contains the names of object styles saved in the document. To apply a style to selected objects, choose the style from the pop-up menu.

Previews of selected styles appear in the area under the Object Style menu.

Style descriptions are listed in the area under the style example. The scrolling list describes the fill, stroke, pen size, miter, dash, arrow, and arrowhead settings for the selected style.

Create. To create an object style with the attributes of the selected object, click Create. Use the Create Object Style dialog box to name the new style and specify which attributes to include.

Note: creating a style does not apply it to the selected object.

Edit. To change attributes of the current style, click Edit.

Delete. To delete the current style, Click Delete.

Apply. To apply the current style to selected objects, Click Apply.

Style Attributes

The following attributes of a selected object can be saved as a style.

Fill Ink The fill ink of the object in the style. The name of the fill ink appears to the right of the check box.

Pen Ink The pen ink of the object in the style. The name of the pen ink appears to the right of the check box.

Stroke The stroke attributes of the object, such as pen size and miter, in the style.

Dash The dash pattern of the object in the object style.

Arrow The arrowhead style of the object in the style.

To delete an object style

1.	Display the Object Specs palette and select the Styles tab.

2.	Choose the Object Style to delete from the pop-up menu. A preview and the style’s description appear on the tab.

3.	Click the Delete button. Canvas removes the style’s preview and description, and removes the style’s name from the Object Style pop-up menu.

Related topic

Editing object styles


To edit a saved object style
Editing object styles

After you create an object style, you can modify it at any time. You use the Styles tab in the Object Specs palette to work with Object Styles.

1.	To edit an object style, choose the style to edit in the Object Style pop-up menu.

2.	Click the Edit button to open the Edit Object Style dialog box, which shows the selected style settings. You can change which attributes are part of the style, and the attributes’ settings:

To add or remove attributes from the style, select or deselect the Fill, Stroke, Pen, Dash, or Arrow checkboxes.

To change attribute settings, use the Fill, Stroke, Pen, Dash, or Arrow pop-up menus.

To prevent creation of a new object style while you edit an existing one, the Name text can’t be changed.


Object Specs palette: Options tab
Options tab

You can tell Canvas to treat specific objects differently when printing a document. The Options tab in the Object Specs palette lets you designate selected objects as non-printing, or makes them overprinted or trapped in color separations.

Overprinting in color separations

When you output color separations in Canvas, you can specify that an object should overprint, rather than knock out, objects behind it.

In color separations designed for commercial printing, a front object usually “knocks out” a hole where it overlaps other objects. However, you can apply the Overprint Object option to an object to prevent it from creating knockouts in objects behind it. This can compensate for registration problems on some printing presses.

For example, if you draw a cyan circle on a yellow background, Canvas knocks the circle out of the background in color separations so cyan and yellow do not mix in the circle. If you select the circle and use the Overprint Object option, the circle will print over a solid yellow background, and the cyan in the circle will mix with the background yellow, resulting in a green circle.

The effect of the Overprint Object option is not visible on screen. This effect is visible only in the printed output when you produce color separations. You can verify the settings for a particular object by viewing the Options tab in the Object Specs palette and then selecting the object.

Color mixing as described in the previous example is not the primary reason for overprinting. It’s more common for designers to overprint dark objects on lighter backgrounds as a way to prevent a gap from appearing between the colors if the press registration (alignment) isn’t perfect.

To specify overprinting for objects

1.	Select the vector or text objects to be overprinted.

2.	Select the Overprint Object checkbox on the Options tab in the Object Specs palette.

3.	Click Apply. The appearance of the selected objects does not change on screen, but the objects will be overprinted in color separations.

To remove overprinting: Select the objects, clear the Overprint Object checkbox on the Options tab, and then click Apply.

Trapping in color separations

When objects of different colors touch, there is the potential for an unsightly gap to appear between the colors if the piece isn’t printed precisely aligned, or “in register.”

Trapping is a technique that purposely distorts the shapes of objects in color separations where different colors meet. The slight distortion creates tiny areas called “traps” where colors overlap. The trap areas can help avoid the appearance of gaps if the page is printed slightly out of register.

Before you use trapping in color separations, you should determine how likely it is that the piece will not be printed in register. You should consider how beneficial it will be to distort the shape of some objects to compensate for possible bad registration. For example, trapping type can ruin the appearance of the text, and probably isn’t necessary.

Trapping choices

Canvas lets you specify two types of trapping, Choke and Spread.

Choke trapping is used to make light background colors trap to dark foreground objects. Canvas creates a choke trap by slightly reducing, (“choking”) the knockout area in the light background object.

For example, if a dark blue “A” is printed on a pale yellow back-ground with choke trapping applied to the “A,” the “A” remains exactly the same, but the knockout area in the yellow background becomes a slightly smaller “A” shape. The result is that some of the yellow overlaps the edges of the dark blue “A.”

Spread trapping is used to make light foreground objects trap into dark backgrounds. The trap is created by slightly enlarging the fore-ground object without changing the knockout in the background color.

For example, if a light circle is printed on a dark background with spread trapping applied to the circle, the circle expands slightly to overlap, or trap into, the circle knockout in the dark background.

Trapping limitations

Whenever possible, you should design illustrations to avoid certain trapping problems, and always discuss trapping with your service bureau and printer to avoid unnecessary expense and inferior results.

In Canvas, trapping is best applied to vector objects that use a solid pen stroke and solid pen ink color. The following limitations apply to trapping:

•	Canvas will not create a choke trap for text.

•	Canvas will not create a choke trap for a vector object that has no stroke or has a stroke that is not a solid pen stroke.

•	Canvas will not create a choke trap for an object that has a gradient pen ink.

•	Canvas will not create a spread trap for a paint object.

To specify trapping for objects

1.	Select the object you want to trap. In most cases, this will be a foreground object that touches a highly contrasting color.

2.	Choose Object > Object Specs to open the Object Specs palette and click the Options tab, if necessary.

3.	Click the Trap Object check box, and then select the Choke or Spread option button, depending on the type of trap to create.

4.	Click Apply to set the trapping option for the selected object. No change is apparent in the object on screen, because the trap is created only when you print color separations.

To apply trapping to selected text: You can apply trapping options to text that you select within a text object the Overprint and Spread options in the Style submenu.

To adjust trap amount

Before printing color separations, you can specify the size of traps using the Options tab in the Separations Setup dialog box.

1.	To open the Separations Setup dialog box, choose File > Print. The Print dialog box appears. In the Print dialog box, choose Separations in the “Print As” pop-up menu, and then click the Setup button. The Separations Setup dialog box appears.

2.	In the Separation Setup dialog box, click the Options tab.

3.	Type the trap size, in points, in the Trap Size box.

4.	Click OK to implement the new setting. The Separations Setup dialog box closes and you return to the Print dialog box.


Group and Ungroup commands

You can use the Group command to unite objects that you want to keep together as one unit. You can group individual objects as well as already-grouped objects.

When you no longer want to keep a group together, you can separate the original objects with the Ungroup command.

To group objects: Select the objects that you want to group. Choose Object > Group. Canvas replaces the bounding boxes of the individual objects with a single bounding box.

Tip: After you group objects, you can select individual objects in the group with the Direct Selection tool.

To ungroup objects: Select one or more grouped objects that you want to separate. Choose Object > Ungroup. Canvas separates the group and leaves the individual objects selected. If any of these objects are group objects, you can further ungroup them by choosing Object > Ungroup again.

When you apply a command to a group object, the effect in most cases is the same as if you applied the command to each object in the group individually.

Grouping and stacking order

Grouping objects can change the stacking order of the objects relative to objects outside the group.

For example, you have three overlapping objects. If you group the front and back objects, the group moves to the back and the middle (not grouped) object becomes the front object.


Lock and Unlock commands

When you want to secure objects from unintentional changes, you can lock them. A locked object can’t be moved, edited or deleted, and its attributes can’t be changed.

If you try to alter a locked object, Canvas alerts you that the selection is locked. However, you can select and copy locked objects and the copies won’t be locked.

To lock or unlock objects: Select the objects that you want to lock or unlock. Choose Object > Lock or Object > Unlock.

How commands affect locked objects

If you apply the Align command to several selected objects, and one object is locked, the other objects align to the locked object.

If you group several objects and one of the objects is locked, all the objects are positioned behind the locked object in the stacking order.


Clipping Path submenu

The commands in the Clipping Path submenu in the Object menu, Make, Release, Show, let you work with clipping paths.

You can use a text or vector object as a clipping path. The clipping paths hides, or "clip" portions of objects behind it.

You can clip multiple objects with one clipping path. Canvas does not group these objects, and you can move the clipping path and the background objects independently.

To apply a clipping path

Select at least two overlapping objects; the front object will become the clipping path, and must be a vector or text object. Choose Object > Clipping Path > Make.

Displaying clipping paths

When you use an object to clip another object, the clipping path disappears, while the area of the back object that is inside the clipping path remains visible.

Use the Show command in the Clipping Path submenu to make the outline of all clipping paths in a document visible. Use the Hide command to hide the outline of all clipping paths.

•	If an object does not have a visible stroke, no outline will appear when you choose Object > Clipping Path > Show.

•	The clipping path outline is not a stroke that can be changed. It will not print. However, if you render the clipping path when the outline is displayed, the outline will appear in the rendered image. To avoid this, choose Object > Clipping Path > Hide before rendering.

If you want a clipping path outline that will print, you achieve this effect by creating a duplicate object with no fill ink. Set the stroke and pen ink on the duplicate object. Place the duplicate object in front of the clipping path in the same position.

To remove a clipping path

Select a clipping path and choose Object > Clipping Path > Release.


Move command

Use the Move command to specify distance and direction.

1.	Select the objects you want to move and then choose Object > Move.

2.	In the Move dialog box, enter values in the first or second row of text boxes. Use negative numbers (type a minus sign before the numbers) to move up and to the left. Use positive numbers to move down and to the right.

3.	Click Apply to preview or OK to implement the Move settings.

Related topic

Moving objects with the keyboard and mouse


Moving objects with the keyboard and mouse

You can move objects by dragging them, by using the keyboard arrow keys, and by using the Transform palette. You can also use the Move command to specify a position change, and the Object Specs palette to specify exact coordinates.

When you drag an object, the Status bar shows the change in the object’s x- and y-coordinate position. You can specify the format and precision of this data in the Preferences dialog box.

You can make precise positioning easier by turning on the autogrid so that objects you drag snap to preset ruler increments. You can also place alignment guides that objects will snap to in a document.

Moving objects using the keyboard

To move objects left, right, up, or down, press the corresponding arrow key. You can use the modifier keys shown in the following table to move greater distances.

To move objects	Do this
1 pixel to the left, right, up or down	Press left, right, up or down keyboard arrow key
10 pixels to the left, right, up or down	Mac: Press Option and an arrow key Windows: Press Alt and an arrow key
50 pixels to the left, right, up or down	Mac: Press Command and an arrow key Windows: Press Ctrl and an arrow key

You can change the default distances that the keyboard keys move by changing a Drawing preference.

To move an object using the Selection tool

Position the pointer on the object and drag. If you drag as soon as you press the mouse button, an outline of the object follows the pointer. To see the entire object as you drag, pause after you press the mouse button, and then drag.

Arrow tool movement options

To	Do this
Constrain movement to 45 degree increments	Press Shift while dragging
Copy objects by dragging	Mac: Press Option while dragging Windows: Press Alt while dragging
Leave a trail of object copies	Mac: Press Command+Option while dragging Windows: Press Ctrl+Alt while dragging


Edit Path command

To edit points and segments of a path, you place the path object in edit mode. When an object is in edit mode, its anchor points appear as small squares along the path; every path has at least two anchor points.

When an object is in edit mode, you can select one or more anchor points. You can even select anchor points and segments on more than one object at once, as long as the objects are in edit mode.

To place an object in edit mode

Do one of the following to place a path object in edit mode:

•	Double-click the object.

•	Select the object and choose Object > Path > Edit Path.

•	After you set the last anchor point when using the Curve or Polygon tools, select the Selection tool in the toolbox.

To place multiple objects in edit mode: You can place two or more objects in edit mode by selecting them, then choosing Object > Path > Edit Path.

To return from edit mode: When you finish editing an object, double-click outside the object, or press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to leave edit mode.

Related topics

Editing paths with the context menu

Selecting anchor points and segments

Adding and deleting points and segments

Closing and opening paths


Editing paths with the context menu

When an object is in path edit mode, you can use the context menu to help you quickly add, delete, and change anchor points and tangent lines.

To see this menu, Ctrl-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) with at least one object in path edit mode. The available options vary depending on the location of the pointer. Each option is described next.

Delete Point Available when the pointer is on an anchor point and appears as a crosshair. Removes the anchor point from the path, and connects the adjacent anchor points with a path.

Add Point Available when the pointer is on a path segment and appears as a gray arrowhead. Inserts an anchor point with a tangent line at that location.

Break Available when the pointer is anywhere on a path. Splits the path segment at that location, and adds anchor points to the ends of the resulting segments.

Join Curves Available when you select two anchor points that are not connected by a straight line (the anchor points can be joined by a curve, or not connected at all). Connects the selected points with a straight line.

Cusp Available when the pointer is on a tangent line handle or an anchor point. On anchor points, this option deletes the point’s tangent lines. On tangent line handles, this option makes the path either smooth or cornered at the anchor point. To be smooth, the anchor point must have both sides of a tangent line. When smooth, the halves of the tangent line are always 180 degrees from each other and rotate around the anchor point like a propeller. When the anchor point is a corner, the tangent line segments can move independently around the anchor point, like the hands of a clock.

Delete Handle Available when the pointer is on a tangent line handle and appears as a crosshair. Removes the handle and the effects of the tangent line on the path.

Add Handle Available when the pointer is on an anchor point and there are fewer than two tangent line segments attached to the anchor point. Adds tangent line segments to the point.

Straighten Available when the pointer is on a path segment and appears as a gray arrowhead. Makes the path segment straight by removing tangent lines from the segment’s anchor points.

Fillet Available when the pointer is on an anchor point between two segments. Fillet creates a radius corner between the two segments. When you choose Fillet, a dialog box appears. Enter a radius value in the text box and click OK. The larger the radius value, the larger the curved segment. A message appears if the radius value is too large for the angle of the segments.


Selecting anchor points and segments

When you edit paths, you need to select particular anchor points or segments before you can delete, move, or reshape them. Before you can select anchor points and segments, a path object must be in edit mode.

When a path is in edit mode and you point to an anchor point with the Selection tool, the pointer becomes a crosshair. When you point to a segment, the pointer becomes a gray arrowhead.

You can select points in more than one object. When you move any selected point, all points in the selection move the same way. This also works for segments belonging to separate objects.

To select anchor points and segments: With the path object in edit mode, click an anchor point or segment to select it. To select multiple points or segments, use the Selection tool to drag a selection box around them, or Shift-click each point or segment.

To select all anchor points: With the path object in edit mode, choose Edit > Select All.

To select parts of separate paths: Place the paths in edit mode, and Shift-click the point or segments.

When an anchor point is selected, it changes from a solid to hollow square. If the anchor point has tangent lines, they appear when the anchor point is selected. When you select a segment, the anchor point at each end is selected.


Adding and deleting anchor points and segments
Adding and deleting points and segments

If a segment’s anchor points are too far apart for you to adjust the shape as needed, you can add more. If you create or add more anchor points than you need, you can delete unnecessary ones.

Keep in mind that the more points on a path, the more complex and system resource-intensive it becomes. In particular, too many anchor points can cause printing problems. It’s best to use the fewest possible anchor points placed as far apart as possible to create a path.

To add an anchor point: With an object in edit mode, Ctrl-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) a segment to which you want to add an anchor point. In the path Context menu, choose Add Point. You can also Option-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows) a segment to add a point.

To delete an anchor point: With an object in edit mode, Ctrl-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) the point you want to delete. In the path Context menu that appears, choose Delete Point. You can also Option+Shift-click (Mac) or Ctrl+Shift-click a point to delete it, or select points and press the Delete key.

To delete a segment: Select a segment and press Delete.

Deleting a segment of a closed path does not split the path open; the remaining segments are joined and the path remains closed.

To add segments to an open path

You can add segments to the end of an open path using the Curve tool or Polygon tool.

1.	With the object in edit mode, select the endpoint where you want to add a segment.

2.	Select the Curve tool (to add straight or curved segments) or the Polygon tool (to add straight segments) in the toolbox.

3.	Click to add a straight segment beyond the selected endpoint. With the Curve tool, you can add a curved segment by pressing the mouse button to establish the new anchor point and then dragging to position the tangent line.

4.	To add additional segments, repeat the previous step. When you finish, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to leave edit mode.


Closing and opening paths

A closed path is one that starts and ends at the same anchor point. An open path has separate starting and ending points.

You can close an open path by letting Canvas create a new segment to join the path’s two endpoints. You can open a closed path by splitting the path.

To close an open path: With the path in edit mode and the Curve or Polygon tool selected, click one of the endpoints. Canvas closes the path by connecting the endpoints with a new segment. If the adjacent segments are curved, the new segment follows the curve.

To open a closed path: With the object in edit mode, Ctrl-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) an anchor point or segment to open the path Context menu. In the menu, choose Break; Canvas inserts segment end points to open the object at that location.


Join command

You can use the Join command to create one path from two separate, open path objects.

To join two paths

Select the two open path objects that you want to join (they should not be in edit mode). Choose Object > Path > Join. Canvas connects the two paths by extending the existing segments or creating a new segment, depending on the distance between the objects.

When you use the Join command to connect two objects that are more than 15 pixels apart, Canvas creates a new line segment between the two closest endpoints.

When you join objects whose endpoints are 15 or fewer pixels apart, Canvas extends the two objects to a midpoint between the two closest endpoints.

When the two endpoints on the paths to be joined are 15 or fewer screen pixels apart, you can add a segment by pressing Shift when you choose Join.

When the distance between the endpoints is greater than 15 pixels, you can extend the existing segments by pressing Shift when you choose Join.

To join paths at selected endpoints

Canvas, by default, joins paths at the closest endpoints. However, you can select which endpoints to join.

1.	Place an open object or multiple open objects in edit mode.

2.	Click an endpoint you want to join to another path. The endpoint becomes hollow to indicate that it is selected.

3.	Shift-click another endpoint. The endpoint also becomes hollow to indicate that it is selected.

4.	Choose Object > Path > Join, or Ctrl-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) one of the selected points. In the context menu, choose Join Curves.


Making and breaking composite paths
Make Composite command
Break Composite command

You can create openings in a filled path by incorporating multiple paths into a single, composite path. Areas between the paths and areas where the paths intersect are transparent.

To create a composite path from multiple paths: Select the paths you want to make into a composite path. Choose Object > Path > Make Composite.

To separate a composite path: Select the composite path and choose Object > Path > Break Composite.


Smooth and Unsmooth command
Smooth command
Unsmooth command

You can use the Smooth command to convert a polygon — a path made of straight segments — to a path with smooth curves.

You can smooth any paths made of straight segments, including rectangles and paths drawn with the Curve tool, as long as they have only straight segments.

The Smooth command is a convenient way for those who haven’t mastered curve drawing to create smooth shapes.

To smooth a polygon: Select the polygon and choose Object > Path > Smooth. Canvas converts the polygon’s corner points into smooth points, which changes the path’s straight line segments into curved segments.

You can use the Unsmooth command to restore the straight segments of a polygon that was smoothed with the Smooth command. However, you can use Unsmooth only if the smoothed polygon wasn’t edited after it was smoothed.

To unsmooth a smoothed polygon: Select the smooth polygon and choose Object > Path > Unsmooth. Canvas restores the polygon’s straight line segments.


Convert To Paths command

Some vector objects have specialized properties and unique edit modes instead of the standard path edit mode. For example, you cannot directly edit the path segments of macros, concentric circles, grids, multigons, spirals, and objects modified by the Envelope or Extrude commands. However, you can convert these objects to paths so you can edit them the same as any other vector object.

If you create paths from a specialized vector object, the new shape does not have the same unique editing capabilities as the original. For example, if you convert a multigon star object to paths, you can no longer use the edit handles that let you adjust the depth and twirl of the points.

Similarly, placed macros are no longer linked to their parent macros in the Gallery palette after you convert them to paths.

You can also convert text so you can reshape characters as vector objects. This has the benefit of making the characters independent of their fonts; the font is no longer required to view and print the characters properly. However, once you convert text to paths, you can no longer perform text operations, such as editing, spell-checking, and formatting, on the text. Also, characters with “holes” in them (such as a, b, d, e, g, o, p, r, and q) are converted to composite paths, which cannot be extruded.

To convert an object to paths

Select the object you want to convert and choose Object > Path > Convert To Paths. Canvas converts the object to one or more paths.

Converting text to paths

Canvas can create path outlines of characters so you can edit the shape of each character. Once you convert text to paths, Canvas treats the paths as objects. You cannot edit the objects as text (apply fonts to, change the type size of, or spell check, for example).

To edit character paths

1.	Select a text object and choose Object > Path > Convert to Paths. If the text object contains multiple characters, Canvas groups the converted text together.

2.	To edit individual character outlines, choose Object > Ungroup, or use the Direct Selection tool to select shapes.

3.	Double-click a character outline to place it in path edit mode. To put several shapes in path edit mode at the same time, you can select multiple character outlines and choose Object > Path > Edit Path.

4.	Use path-editing techniques to change the outline, and then press Esc to exit edit mode.

Ungrouping objects made of multiple paths

When you convert multiple objects, characters, or specialized vector objects to paths, Canvas creates a separate path for each shape and groups them. You can use the Ungroup command in the Object menu to separate them.

For example, if you convert a five-letter word to paths, the resulting object is a group of five paths. To edit just one of the five paths, first choose Object > Ungroup. You can also use the Direct Selection tool to select one path without first ungrouping the object.


Scale command

The Scale command in the Object menu provides several options for enlarging or reducing objects.

You can scale by a percentage or ratio, horizontally and vertically. You can also scale text and stroke weights when you scale objects.

To scale an object

1.	Select one or more objects and choose Object > Scale to open the Scale dialog box.

2.	Select a scaling method in the Scale By pop-up menu. The configuration of the dialog box depends on which option you choose.

Percentage You can specify vertical and horizontal percentages. Scaling an object 150 percent is the same as increasing the object’s size by a factor of 1.5, for example.

Ratio You can specify horizontal and vertical scaling factors as ratios by entering numbers in each set of two boxes. For example, to scale an object to one-third its original height, enter “1” in the first text box, and “3” in the second.

3. To scale an object vertically and horizontally by the same amount, turn Proportional on.

4.	To maintain the proportion between an object’s pen size and the overall size of the object, turn Scale Pen on.

5.	If one of the selected objects contains text, you can turn Scale Text on to change the size of the characters. Otherwise, text remains the same size.

6.	Click Apply to implement the settings.

7.	Click OK to scale the object.

Tip: You can also scale an entire document when you print it, without changing the objects in the document, by specifying a scaling factor in the Print dialog box.


Layout menu

You can use Layout menu commands to set up rulers, grids, and guides, and to navigate within a document. The Document Setup command lets you change a document's size, orientation, and (for Publication documents) specify the margins and sheet layout.

The commands that appear in the Layout menu depend on the current document type.

•	The Layers & Sheets submenu appears for an Illustration document

•	The Layers & Pages submenu appears for a Publication document

•	The Layers & Slides submenu appears for a Presentation document.


Column Guides command

The Column Guides command places sections on pages. It also lets you change settings for any section on the current page.

A section is a rectangular area that arranges text in columns. A section is made of column guides, which are non-printing lines that define the text columns and gutters (spaces between columns). Sections make it easy to arrange and modify text in columns. If you change the number or size of columns in a section, Canvas will adjust the text to fit.

To show column guides: Choose Layout > Display > Show Guides. To hide column guides, choose Layout > Display > Hide Guides.

To create sections with the Column Guides command

1.	Go to the page where you want to place a new section and choose Layout > Column Guides.

2.	In the Column Guides dialog box, you can select a preset column arrangement or set up custom columns. In the Apply To menu, choose where to place the new section.

3.	Click OK to create a new section with the current settings.

If the document contains no sections, Canvas creates one or more new sections, according to the Apply To setting.

Modifying sections

If you choose the Column Guides command, and the current page contains one or more sections, you can use the Column Guides dialog box to modify or delete a section.

Enter the name of the section to modify in the Section Name box. You can use the menu to select the name of any section on the page.

When you click OK, Canvas applies the settings in the Column Guides dialog box to the section specified in the Section Name box.

If you choose the Delete Section command in the dialog box, Canvas deletes the section specified in the Section Name box.

Related topic

Column guides settings


Column Guides settings

The Column Guides dialog box appears when you create or modify sections with the Section tool or the Column Guides command.

Section Name

Canvas applies a default name when you create a section. You can type a new name in the text box to change a section’s name.

To modify a section, enter its name. You can select a section name in the Section Name menu. The menu contains names of sections on the current page or pages.

When you modify a section, Canvas modifies all sections that have the same name if you select an option in the Apply To menu that refers to more than one section.

Apply To

When you create and modify sections, choose an option in the Apply To menu to specify where you want to apply the column guides settings.

This Page Applies the settings to the current page only. In a Publication with facing pages, it applies the settings to both (left and right) current pages.

All Pages Applies the settings to all pages in the document.

All Left Pages Applies the settings to all left-hand pages in a Publication with facing pages.

All Right Pages Applies the settings to all right-hand pages in a Publication with facing pages.

Left Page Applies the settings to the current left-hand page in a Publication with facing pages.

Right Page Applies the settings to the current right-hand page in a Publication with facing pages.

Section options

You can also delete sections, fit sections to a page, or fit sections to the top half or bottom half of a page. Choose an option from the triangle pop-up menu.

Delete Section Deletes the current section. If the Apply To setting refers to more than one section, this deletes all matching sections.

Fit to Page Creates a full-page section.

Fit to Top Half or Fit to Bottom Half Creates a half-page section on the top half or the bottom half of the specified pages.

Preset column guides

The column buttons let you select a preset column guides arrangement. Click a button to select 1, 2, or 3 columns of equal width, or 2 columns with a wider column on the left or right.

Number of Columns

This setting specifies the number of columns; it overrides the preset column guides. Type the number of columns. The maximum number you can set depends on the width of a section.

Equal Widths This option makes the column widths equal to the value in the Column box, and makes the gutter widths equal to the value in the Gutter box. Deselect this option to set the width of a specific column.

When Equal Widths is selected, you can’t set a specific column width (the Column box is not available), because the column width is based on the number of columns, the gutter width, and the section size.

Fixed Widths This option prevents changes to the width of the section’s columns. If you use the Section tool to drag a column guide, the entire column moves, which changes the width of the gutters without changing the width of the column.

Fixed Gutters This option prevents changes to the width of the column gutters. If you use the Section tool to drag a column guide, the gutter moves, which changes the width of the adjacent columns without changing the width of the gutter.

If both Fixed Gutters and Fixed Widths are selected, you can’t drag the column guides in a section to adjust the widths of columns or gutters.

Horizontal This option appears if “Enable two-byte script” is selected in the Preferences dialog box. It creates horizontal columns for text in a section.

Size

If Equal Widths is not selected, you can set widths for specific columns and gutters in the Size area.

Column # To adjust a specific column or the gutter to the right of the column, select the column by number. The widths of the selected column and gutter appear in the Size area. Columns are numbered from left to right.

Column Enter the width of the column specified in the Column # menu. If you select a preset column option, the Column value can’t be changed unless Equal Widths is deselected first. This box is not available if Equal Widths is selected.

Gutter Enter the width of the gutter to the right of the column specified in the Column Number pop-up menu.

Text Flow

To change the direction of the text flow, click the button that indicates left to right (the arrow points right) or right to left (the arrow points left).

Applying section settings throughout a document

The Column Guides dialog box lets you create or modify multiple sections at once. The Apply To setting controls how Canvas applies the column guides settings. When you click OK, Canvas modifies matching sections and creates new sections as necessary, depending on the setting selected in the Apply To menu.

For example, if you choose All Pages while creating a section, Canvas creates a matching section on each page in the document.

In Publications with facing pages, you can apply the column guides settings to left-hand or right-hand pages, or both. Canvas will modify existing sections and create new matching sections, if necessary, based on the Apply To setting.

For example, a document with 10 pages has matching sections on five pages. If you choose All Pages while modifying a section, Canvas will modify the existing sections and create a new section on each of the pages with-out a matching section.

The Apply To setting can complement your actions. If you drag the Section tool on a left page in a Publication, but choose Right Page in the Apply To menu, Canvas creates a section on the left page and on the right page.

Vertical text and columns options

A checkbox labeled “Vertical” appears in two places: the Column Guides dialog box and the Type palette.

In the Column Guides dialog box, you can create column guides for vertical text in Publication documents. In the Type palette, you can specify horizontal or vertical orientation for text objects.

Note: The Vertical options described in this section, which appear when the option “Enable two-byte script” is selected on the Type tab in the Preferences dialog box, are not related to the “Vertical” command that changes the alignment of text bound to a path.

To use vertical text column guides

You can use the Column Guides dialog box to set up horizontal guides for columns (text objects) that contain vertical text.

1.	If necessary, activate the two-byte script option on the Type tab in the Preferences dialog box.

2.	Choose Layout > Column Guides in the Layout menu. The Column Guides dialog box appears.

3.	Select the “Vertical” checkbox. The column guide buttons at the top of the dialog box change to vertical orientation.

4.	Use the preset column buttons or the other options to specify guides for the number of columns that you want to use.

•	To use preset column guides, click one of the buttons. Lines on the first buttons show 1, 2, and 3 text columns. Numbers on the last two buttons show that these make 4 and 5 columns.

•	You can set up guides for any number of columns from 1 to 12 using the “# of columns” text box.

5.	Click OK to create guides for the specified number of columns.


Alignment guides
Alignment guides command

Alignment guides are horizontal and vertical lines you can place in a document to help align objects. These lines do not print.

To set up alignment guides

1.	To display the document’s rulers, if necessary, choose Display > Show Rulers in the Layout menu.

2.	Point to either ruler and drag a guide into the document area.

3.	To remove a guide, drag the guide back to its ruler.

Displaying and moving alignment guides

You can hide a document’s alignment guides without removing the guides. You can also move a guide and the objects that are touching it together.

To display the guide lines in a document: Choose Display > Show Guide in the Layout menu.

To hide all the guides in the document: Choose Display > Hide Guides in the Layout menu.

To move all the objects whose edges touch a guide: Press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) as you drag a guide.


Display submenu

Use the items in the Display submenu to turn visual drawing aids on and off.  If the item is already displayed, the command in the Display submenu becomes “Hide” instead of “Show”. For example, if the printable area of a publication document is already displayed, the command becomes Hide Printable Area.

Use this command	To do this
Show Size	Display dimensions when you use drawing tools
Show Grids	Display grid lines on screen
Show Rulers	Display rulers on screen
Show Guides	Display guides or column guides in a document
Show Printable Area	(Publication documents only) Display guides indicating the printable area of a document
Show Page Breaks	(Illustration and Presentation documents) Displays the borders of the printable pages
Show Text Invisibles	Display paragraph marks, tabs,  and other non-printing characters
Show Text Boxes	Display outlines of text boxes
Show Text Flow Bars	Display overset indicators and flow symbols on text objects that have overset or flowed text
Show Spelling Errors	Mark unrecognized words with a red underline
Show Text Ruler	Display the Text Ruler for formatting text
Refresh	Redraw the screen
CMYK Preview	View colors as they will print to a CMYK device
Gamut Warning	View colors that are outside the CMYK gamut
Wireframe	Display objects without stroke or ink attributes
Choke Preview	Identify objects that have choke trapping applied
Spread Preview	Identify objects that have spread trapping applied
Overprint Preview	Identify objects that have been set to overprint in color separations
CMYK Preview

You can get an approximation of how colors will look when printed by using the CMYK Preview command.  For more information on monitor calibration and color simulation, see Color Settings .

Gamut Warning

The Gamut Warning mode tells Canvas to highlight on screen any colors in a document that are outside the CMYK gamut. These colors are likely to differ the most between on-screen and printed appearance.

Show/Hide Grids

You can display a grid of vertical and horizontal lines to aid in positioning objects in a document. You can also turn on the snap-to-grid feature to make Canvas snap objects into alignment with the grid when you drag near a grid line.

When snap-to-grid is active, the pointer movements snap to the grid according to the settings in the Grids dialog box.

Show/Hide Guides

The Show/Hide Guides command can display or hide alignment guides and text column guides.

Alignment guides are horizontal and vertical lines you can place in a document to help align objects. These lines do not print. You can hide a document’s alignment guides without removing the guides. You can also simultaneously move a guide and objects that touch it.

Column Guides are lines that you can use to align columns of text. You can tell Canvas to place guides evenly between the page margins for multiple columns or customize the columns in various widths.

Show/Hide Page Breaks

For illustrations or Presentations larger than the current paper size, you can use the Display > Show Page Breaks command in the Layout menu to see page divisions. A line around the layout area indicates page boundaries.

Show/Hide Printable Area

To check that your margins are within the printable area, you can use the Display > Show Printable Area command in the Layout menu. Canvas indicates the printable area by a line around the border of the page. The Show/Hide Printable Area command is only available in publication documents.

Refresh

Use the Refresh command to redraw the screen.

Show/Hide Rulers

You can display or hide the rulers you set up rulers for a document using the Rulers command. Rulers help you track the pointer’s movement and let you create alignment guides in the layout area.

Show/Hide Size

Canvas can display the horizontal and vertical dimensions of an object as you draw it. The Show Size command makes dimensions (in scale) appear at the pointer as you drag with any drawing tool. These dimensions do not remain in the document. The dimensions use the units and scale set up with the Rulers command.

Show/Hide Text Boxes

When the bounding boxes of text objects are visible, you can hide them by choosing Display > Hide Text Boxes in the Layout menu. To show text boxes again, choose Display > Show Text Boxes in the Layout menu.

Show/Hide Text Invisibles

You can show paragraph markers and other non-printing characters by using the Show Text Invisibles command.  Viewing these characters while editing text blocks can help you format the type you want. See

Show/Hide Text Ruler

The Text Ruler provides basic formatting options that you can access quickly from a toolbar above the document. The Text Ruler also lets you set tabs and text colors.

Wireframe

You can use the Wireframe  display mode to save time and memory.


Text Ruler

The Text Ruler provides controls for text formatting in a bar above the document layout area.

To display the Text Ruler: Choose Layout > Display > Show Text Ruler.

To hide the Text Ruler: Choose Layout > Display > Hide Text Ruler.

Click on the Text Ruler here for information about formatting controls:

Type mode

Styles mode

 Using the Text Ruler


Using the Text Ruler

1.	Select the text you want to format. You can select an entire text object, place the insertion point in text, or select any text characters or paragraphs.

2.	Select a Text Ruler mode:

T: Click for Type mode to set fonts, type sizes, type styles, leading, or kerning.

S: Click for Styles mode to apply paragraph and character styles.

To apply colors and set tabs, you can use either mode.

3.	Select formatting options in the Text Ruler. After typing values, press Enter or Tab to apply them.

  Related topics


Text colors and frames

Pop-up palettes on the Text Ruler let you apply inks and strokes to text selections. You can apply any inks stored in the Inks palette. You can apply Pen, Neon, and Parallel strokes stored in the Strokes palette.

Fill Ink, Frame Ink, Background Ink, and Frame Stroke buttons

Fill Ink: Applies an ink to selected text characters. Choosing from this palette is the same as choosing a fill color from the Inks palette.

Frame Ink: Applies an ink to the stroke around a text object or selection.

Background Ink: Applies an ink to the background of a text object or selection.

Frame Stroke: Applies a stroke as a box around a text object or selection.


Text leading

The Text Ruler shows the current leading and lets you enter leading amounts in points. Leading applies to paragraphs, either the paragraph containing the insertion point, all selected paragraphs, or all paragraphs in a selected text object.

The default leading is “Auto,” which is about 120% of the type size.

To change leading: Enter the value in points in the leading box. Press Enter or Tab to apply the leading value to the text selection.

To apply automatic leading: Enter zero in the leading box. Press Enter or Tab to apply automatic leading to the text selection.


Text alignment (justification)

The Text Ruler shows the current text alignment setting and lets you change alignment. Text alignment applies to paragraphs, either the paragraph containing the insertion point, all selected paragraphs, or all paragraphs in a selected text object.

Click a button to change the alignment of selected text to left, center, right, or full justification.


Tab controls

You can use the Text Ruler to set tabs and change tab settings. Tab controls are available when a text object is selected or in edit mode.

A tab applies to one or more paragraphs, either the paragraph containing the insertion point, all selected paragraphs, or all paragraphs in a selected text object.

 Tab type: Before you set a new tab, click the button to select left, center, right, decimal, or comma tab type.

  Tabs menu: The selected tab's position value appears on the menu button. The menu lists all tab positions in the current text selection.

To set a new tab

1.	Select the text object or paragraphs where you want to set a tab.

2.	Click the tab type button to select the type of tab.

3.	Click in the Ruler bar to set the tab. A tab marker appears where you click, and default tabs left of the new tab are removed.

4. 	To change the tab's settings, see "Tabs dialog box" below.

Tab markers in the Ruler bar

Using the ruler bar

When a text object is selected or in edit mode, the ruler bar appears below the formatting area in the Text Ruler. You can set and adjust tab markers in the ruler bar.

Tab markers show custom tab types and positions. Small triangles along the bottom of the ruler bar represent default tabs.

A short line appears above a custom tab marker when the tab is selected. The tab's distance from the left margin appears on the Tabs menu button.

When more than one paragraph or an entire text object is selected, gray tab markers in the ruler bar and Tabs menu identify tabs applied to some of the selected paragraphs. Adjusting a gray tab applies it to all paragraphs in the text selection.

To move a tab: Drag the tab marker in the ruler bar, or use the Tabs dialog box.

To remove a tab: Drag it up and out of the ruler bar. Once a tab marker is removed, you can't restore it with the Undo command.

Using the Tabs dialog box

The Tabs dialog box lets you change or delete a selected tab.

To change tab settings

1.	Double-click a tab marker in the ruler bar, or select a tab in the Tabs menu in the Text Ruler.

2.	The Tabs dialog box appears.

•	Change the tab position, type, or leader character, and click OK to apply the settings.

•	Click Delete to remove the tab and close the dialog box.


Kerning adjustment

The Text Ruler shows the current text kerning value and lets you apply kerning to text selections. The default kerning value is zero, for normal kerning.

If no text is selected, Canvas applies the kerning value at the insertion point. Otherwise, Canvas applies the kerning to all characters in a text selection.

If kerning varies within a text selection, the Text Ruler shows the most recent kerning value you applied, the kerning value of the last text selected, or zero.

To loosen kerning: Enter a number of points in the kerning box in the Text Ruler. Higher numbers increase the space between characters in the selection.

To tighten kerning: Enter a negative number (preceded by a minus sign) of points in the kerning box. Lower values decrease the space between characters in the selection.


Font, Size, and Style controls

You can change the font, type size, and style of selected text using formatting controls in the Text Ruler. These are available when the ruler is in Type mode.

Formatting controls

The formatting applies to selected text or selected text objects. If no text is selected, formatting applies to the next text you type.

To change font and type size: Type a font name or type size in points in the Text Ruler and press Tab or Enter. You can choose font names and type sizes from the pop-up menus.

To apply type styles: Click one or more styles buttons. To remove a style, click its button again. To remove all styles, click the "P" button.

Selecting saved styles

The styles boxes in the Text Ruler let you apply saved character and paragraph styles. The styles apply to the selected paragraphs or characters, or a selected text object. If nothing is selected, a style applies to the next text you type.

To apply a style: Type the style name, or select it from the menu.

Paragraph and Character style boxes

  Related topics


Wireframe command

Wireframe mode is useful because it accelerates scrolling and redraw and lets you view objects without stroke and ink attributes.

To use Wireframe mode

Choose Display > Wireframe in the Layout menu. Canvas puts a check mark next to the command when this mode is active. To return to normal display mode, choose Display > Wireframe again.

In Wireframe mode, Canvas displays attributes as the following:

This attribute	Is displayed as
Stroke (object outlines)	1 point, solid black pen
Fill and pen ink	not displayed
Colors	not displayed


Document Setup command

Use the Document Setup command to select measurement units, document size and orientation, and, for publications, the margins and column layout of a document.

After you create a document, you can use the Document Setup dialog box to set the document’s size, orientation, and other options. The Document Setup dialog box presents options based on the type of the current document. For example, in a Presentation document, you can set the layout area to represent a particular screen size. In a Publication document, you can set up page margins.

Related topics

To set up an Illustration

To set up a Publication

To set up a Presentation


To set up an Illustration

Choose Layout > Document Setup. The Document Setup dialog box appears. Select the options you want and click OK.

Document Units: To specify measurement units, choose an option in the Document Units pop-up menu.

•	Select Inches, Points, Centimeters, or Picas to see the size of the document in these units in the boxes in the Illustration size area.

•	Select Ruler Units to use the units specified in the Ruler dialog box. To change the units specified in the Ruler dialog box, choose Layout > Rulers.

•	Select Printer Pages to specify the document size as a multiple of your printer’s page size.

Illustration Size: You can set the document size to match the paper in your printer, or set up a document based on a standard or custom size.

•	To base the dimensions of the layout area on your printer’s page size, choose From Printer. The layout area will match the settings in the Page Setup (Mac) or Printer Setup (Windows) dialog box.

•	To use a standard size, choose an option from the pop-up menu. You can choose US Letter (8.5 by 11 inches), US Legal (8.5 by 14 inches), Tabloid (11 by 14 inches), and other standard sizes.

•	To specify custom dimensions, choose Custom. Type the width in the first box and the height in the second box.

Orientation: To change the orientation of the layout area, click the button in the Orientation area. This swaps the width and height values of the layout area.

Tip: For illustrations larger than the current paper size, you can choose Layout > Display > Show Page Breaks to display page divisions as one or more rectangles in the layout area.


To set up a Publication

Choose Layout > Document Setup. The Document Setup dialog box appears. Select the options you want and click OK.

Document units

To specify the measurement units, choose an option in the Document Units pop-up menu.

•	Select Inches, Points, Centimeters or Picas to set the units for the Publication size values.

•	Select Ruler Units to use the current ruler units for Publication size values.

Publication size

You can set up a document to match the size of paper in your printer, or use a standard or custom size.

•	To make the layout area the same size as the printer’s paper, choose From Printer. The layout area will be sized according to the Page Setup dialog box (Mac) or Printer Setup dialog box (Windows).

•	To use a standard size, choose the page size from the pop-up menu.

•	To use custom dimensions, choose Custom. Type the width in the first box and the height in the second box.

Tip: To see or hide the printable area, you can use the Display > Show/Hide Printable Area command in the Layout menu. Canvas indicates the printable area by a solid line around the border of the page.

Orientation: To swap the layout width and height values, click the button in the Orientation area.

Margins

To set margins for two-sided publications, enter the Inside, Outside, Top, and Bottom margin values in the text boxes. For single-sided publications, enter Right, Left, Top, and Bottom margin values. Margins are measured from the edge of the paper. On screen, the document’s margins appear as a dashed line. The printable area appears as a solid line near the edge of the layout area. Make sure the margins are not outside the printable area.

Page Layout

To specify multiple pages per sheet, choose Tent Card or Greeting Card in the Layout pop-up menu.

Facing pages

To create double-sided pages, select Facing Pages. (The option can't be changed once it's selected.) The document will have left and right master pages.


To set up a Presentation

Choose Layout > Document Setup. The Document Setup dialog box appears. Select the options you want and click OK.

Document units: To specify the measurement units, choose an option in the Document Units pop-up menu.

•	Select Inches, Points, Centimeters or Picas to see the size of the document in these units in the boxes in the Presentation size area.

•	Select Ruler Units to use the units specified in the Ruler dialog box. To change the units specified in the Ruler dialog box, choose Layout > Rulers.

Presentation size: You can set up the document size to match the screen size, the paper in your printer, or you can set up a custom size.

•	To base the size of the layout area on the monitor’s resolution, choose From Screen.

•	To base the dimensions of the layout area on your printer’s paper, choose From Printer. The layout area will match the settings in the Page Setup (Mac) or Printer Setup (Windows) dialog box.

•	To use a standard size in pixels, choose an option from the pop-up menu. You can choose 640 by 480, 800 by 600, 832 by 624, 1024 by 768, 1280 by 1024, or 35mm Slide.

•	To specify custom dimensions, choose Custom. Type the width in the first box and the height in the second box.

Orientation: To change the orientation of the layout area, click the button in the Orientation area. This swaps the width and height values of the layout area.


Grids command

You can display a grid of vertical and horizontal lines to aid in positioning objects in a document. You can also turn on the snap-to-grid feature to make Canvas snap objects into alignment with the grid when you drag near a grid line.

When snap-to-grid is active, the pointer movements snap to the grid according to the settings in the Grids dialog box.

To display grid lines on screen: Choose Layout > Display > Show Grids. To turn off grids, choose Layout > Display > Hide Grids.

To turn on snap-to-grid: Choose Layout > Snap To > Grid. Choose the command again to turn off snap-to-grid.

To temporarily override the grid constraint: Press Tab as you create, resize, or move objects.

To set up the alignment grid

1.	Choose Layout > Grids. The Grids dialog box appears.

2.	 Type a value in the Line Distance X: Units text box. This is the distance from one vertical grid line to another.

3.	Type a value in the Line Distance Y: Units text box. This is the distance from one horizontal grid line to another.

4.	Type a value in the Snap Factor X: Fields text box. This value sets the snap points along the horizontal lines of the grid.

5.	 Type a value in the Snap Factor Y: Fields text box. This value sets the snap points along the vertical lines of the grid. You can enter decimal or fractional values; Canvas converts fractional values to decimal values. For example, if the Line Distance is 1 inch, a Snap Factor of 1/2 Fields sets snap points every 1/2 inch.

6.	Select Snap to X and Snap to Y to make objects snap to the snap points on both sets of grid lines.

7.	Click OK to implement the grid settings.


Rulers command

Use the Rulers command to set up a document’s overall drawing scale and to configure the on-screen rulers. The ruler scale affects all object measurements, including those made with the dimensioning tools. The ruler scale also affects position data that appears in the Director palette and in the status bar.

Setting up rulers and the drawing scale

You can set up rulers for a document using various units of measure and display the rulers at the top and left of the document window. Rulers help you track the pointer’s movement and let you create alignment guides in the layout area.

When you set up rulers, you also set the document’s drawing scale. Canvas bases the rulers and all object measurements on the drawing scale. For example, if you set the drawing scale to 1 inch = 1 foot, and draw a line 1 inch long on screen, Canvas displays the line’s length as 1 foot. Canvas uses scale measurements in the Object Specs palette, the information area of the Status bar, and in dimension objects.

You can use inches, pixels, centimeters, and picas as a document’s base unit of measurement. For the drawing scale, you can relate the base unit to inches, feet, miles, picas, pixels, metric units, and your own custom units.

Using peel-off rulers

You can drag a copy of the rulers into a document for visual reference. A ruler copy is a raster image object and does not provide the functions of the attached document rulers.

To drag a copy of the horizontal or vertical ruler into the document:

1.	The rulers must be displayed. If the rulers aren't displayed, choose Show Rulers in the Display submenu in the Layout menu.

2.	Press Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows) and drag from the ruler area into the document.

To remove a ruler copy, select it and press Delete.

Related topics

To set up rulers and drawing scales

To display and hide rulers

To change the rulers' zero point


To set up rulers and drawing scales

1.	Choose Layout > Rulers.

2.	In the Rulers dialog box, choose a ruler number from the Ruler pop-up menu. You can use the default rulers or customize them.

3.	To change the measurement units, choose the units from the Units pop-up menu. Canvas sets up the ruler’s major divisions based on the units you choose.

4.	Set the drawing scale using the two text boxes and the pop-up menu in the Scale area. The first value is the base unit measurement, the second value is its scaled equivalent. In the third box, enter the units for the scaled measurement. You can type a custom unit here; Canvas will use the first two letters (“as” for astronomical units, for example) in dialog boxes and dimensions.

This table shows settings for some drawing scales:

For this scale	Enter these values
1 inch = 6 inches	1, 6, inches
5 inches = 1 mile	5, 1, miles
10 cm = 1 meter	10, 1, meters

5.	Choose a setting for the ruler’s minor divisions from the pop-up menu under the Scale boxes.

6.	To establish the ruler’s major divisions, drag the double arrow between the two rulers. Drag to the unit of the top ruler that you want to be the major division. The major division also determines the major division of the alignment grid.

7.	After you configure all ruler settings, click OK.


To display and hide rulers

When you want rulers to appear on screen, choose Layout > Display > Show Rulers. To hide the rulers, choose Layout > Display > Hide Rulers. The rulers must be displayed if you want to create alignment guides in the layout area or use peel-away rulers.

To change rulers

When the document rulers are visible, you can change the current ruler by pressing the button in the upper-left corner of the document, and selecting a ruler from the pop-up menu that appears.


To change the rulers' zero point

The default zero point for each ruler is at the top-left corner of the illustration area. To change the zero point, drag from the intersection of the rulers. As you drag the zero point, intersecting lines follow the pointer. To return the rulers to the default zero point, click the box where the rulers intersect.


Smart Mouse command

Use the Smart Mouse command in the Layout menu to turn on and off the active Smart Mouse constraints and open the Smart Mouse palette.

To activate Smart Mouse constraints

1.	Choose Layout > Smart Mouse. This opens the Smart Mouse window, which contains icons for all constraints.

•	To identify a constraint, press the icon and its name and current value (if any) pops up.

•	To activate or deactivate a constraint, click its icon. Active constraint icons are highlighted.

2.	Choose Layout > Snap To > Smart Mouse to turn on the Smart Mouse. A check mark shows that Smart Mouse is active.

Note: Be sure Snap To Grid (in the Layout > Snap To menu) is off when you use the Smart Mouse. If Snap To Grid is on, the pointer will snap to the grid and not to active Smart Mouse constraints.

Smart Mouse constraints

With  this constraint active:	The pointer and objects snap to:
Angle	A specified angle.
Diagonal	Straight diagonal movement -- all multiples of 45°.
Horizontal	Straight horizontal movement -- 90° and 270°, or 0° and 180°, depending on the current coordinate system.
Vertical	Straight vertically movement -- 0° and 180°, or 90° and 270°, depending on the current coordinate system.
Length	A specified length in points (based on 100% magnification).
Multiple Angle	All multiples of the specified angle.
Object corners	The corners of the bounding boxes of vector objects.
Object Edges	Edges of the paths of vector objects (not their bounding boxes). When Object Edges is active, other constraints can’t affect the pointer.
Object Fractions	A specified division of vector objects. For example, specify 1/2 to snap to the center of objects.
Object Points	Any anchor point on the paths of vector objects.
Object segments	Specified divisions of the of the segments of vector objects. For example, the pointer snaps to the midpoints of segments if you specify 1/2.
Tangent & Perpendicular	Movement in a straight line, tangent or perpendicular to vector objects.
Related topics

Types of Smart Mouse constraints

Customizing Smart Mouse constraints

Adding and deleting constraints


Types of Smart Mouse constraints

You can use 12 types of Smart Mouse constraints. The various constraints can make objects and the pointer snap to

•	the corners or centers of objects

•	even divisions (such as the midpoints) of object segments

•	specified lengths or angles

•	horizontal, vertical, or diagonal movement

•	tangential or perpendicular alignment with objects

•	the edges of vector objects

Relative constraints

Indicate the relation between the beginning position and current position when you draw or drag an object. Relative constraint pointers can indicate a constraint has been met. The relative constraints are: Horizontal, Vertical, Diagonal, Angle, Multiple Angle, Length, and Tangent & Perpendicular.

Absolute constraints

Indicate the relation between the pointer and objects. These constraints (except Object Edges) can display source lines and pointers to show a constraint has been met. The absolute constraints are: Object Corners, Object Fractions, Polygon & Bézier Anchors, Polygon Fractions, and Object Edges.

Identifying multiple constraints

More than one Smart Mouse constraint can be met at the same time. For example, you can drag an object in such a way that it triggers both the horizontal constraint and object corner constraint. Only two constraints can affect the pointer at once.

Constraints are listed at the top of the Smart Mouse dialog box, from High to Low priority. A check mark indicates active constraints. Constraints preceded by a delta symbol (Δ) are relative constraints.

Smart Mouse can display symbols for the pointer to indicate that a constraint has been met. When Pointers is on, you can toggle the pointer display see if more than one constraint is active.

To toggle the Smart Mouse pointer

Press Command (Mac) or Alt (Windows) when a constraint symbol is visible. If another symbol appears, both constraints can take effect. The symbols won’t change for different settings of one constraint type, such as two different values for the Angle constraint.

To temporarily hide Smart Mouse pointers, press Command (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) when the pointer is stationary. The special pointer reappears when you move the mouse.


Customizing Smart Mouse constraints

You can activate constraints, change their values, and add and delete constraints in the Smart Mouse dialog box.

1.	Choose Smart Mouse in the Layout menu to open the Smart Mouse window if necessary, then double-click a constraint icon to open the Smart Mouse dialog box.

2.	To activate or deactivate a constraint, click to the left of the constraint name in the scrolling list. You can activate multiple constraints, but only two can affect the pointer at once.

3.	Configure the constraint settings described next and click OK.

Constraint settings

The settings in the Current Constraints area at the top of the Smart Mouse dialog box affect the behavior of all Smart Mouse constraints. Select a constraint in the list to see its symbol in the Icon box.

Priority	When multiple constraints are active, those at the top of the scrolling list take precedence over those lower in the list. To change the priority of a constraint, drag it to a new position in the list.
Source Lines	If checked, Canvas displays a line to show that the pointer, or an object you are moving, is aligned horizontally or vertically with a snap point -- such as the corner of an object.
Pointers	If checked, the symbol for the constraint appears as you draw or drag an object when that constraint can take effect.
Constraint Range	The maximum distance, horizontally or vertically, from a target point at which the constraint causes the pointer to snap to the target point.
Objects Within	For absolute constraints only, specifies how close the pointer must be to an object for the object to trigger the constraint.


Adding and deleting constraints

You can add new Smart Mouse constraints and delete those you no longer need. When you add a constraint, it appears in the Smart Mouse window; constraints you remove no longer appear.

1.	Double-click an icon in the Smart Mouse window to open the Smart Mouse dialog box. If the Smart Mouse Window isn’t open, choose Smart Mouse in the Layout menu.

2.	To add a constraint, choose one from the Type pop-up menu. For a relative constraint, enter the constraint value in the Value box, and then click the Add button.

For this Constraint	Enter this value
Object Fractions, Object Segments	The number of divisions. For example, type 2 if you want the constraint to snap to the middle (1/2 point) of an object or segment.
Angle	The angular measurement in degrees.
Length	The distance in pixels.

3.	To delete a constraint, select the constraint in the scrolling list at the top of the dialog box, and then click the Remove button.

4.	Click OK to implement any changes and close the Smart Mouse dialog box.


Snap To submenu

Use the Snap To submenu to turn automatic alignment options on and off. You can tell Canvas to make the pointer and any objects you drag “snap” into alignment with the grid, guides, column guides, or active Smart Mouse constraints.

To snap to alignment guides and column guides: Choose Snap To > Guides in the Layout menu. When the snap-to feature is active, objects you move snap to the document’s guides and objects on guide layers.

To snap to the alignment grid: Choose Snap To > Grid in the Layout menu.

Related topics

Alignment guides

Column Guides

Grids

Smart Mouse


Views submenu

Use the Views submenu in the Layout menu to change the view magnification. The submenu options are Home View, Fit to Window, New View, Delete View, Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Zoom.

Changing the view magnification

Canvas lets you change your view of a document by changing the view magnification. You can use the Magnifying Glass, Zoom bar, Zoom palette, and Zoom commands to enlarge and reduce the view. Changing magnification changes the appearance on screen, but doesn’t change the actual size of anything in the document.

A view in Canvas stores a magnification level and location within a document so you can return to it later. You can use preset views and create your own custom views. Preset and custom views appear in the Views submenu in the Layout menu. Canvas puts a check mark next to the name of the current view.

To select a view

Choose Views > ”View Name” in the Layout menu, where “View Name” is a view listed in the Views submenu. Beside custom views that you create, you can choose from one of the following preset views:

Home view displays the upper-left corner of the document at normal (100 percent) magnification.

Fit to Window reduces or increases magnification to the maximum magnification level at which the document fills the window.

To use menu commands to zoom in or out

Choose Views > Zoom In or Zoom Out in the Layout menu. Zoom In increases magnification to the next higher preset level; Zoom Out decreases magnification to the next lower preset level.

Using zoom shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to access the Magnifying Glass tool and to zoom directly.

Mac

To zoom in with the Magnifying Glass tool, press Option+Tab or Option+Spacebar or Command+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area; to zoom out, press Option+Tab+Shift or Option+Shift+Spacebar or Command+Shift+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom in directly, press Command+Option +Plus (+). To zoom out directly, press Command+Option+Minus (-).

Windows

To zoom in with the Magnifying Glass tool, press Ctrl+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area; to zoom out, press Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar and click or drag a box around an area.

To zoom in directly, press Ctrl+Alt+Plus (+). To zoom out, press Ctrl+Alt+Minus (-).

Related topics

Custom views

Zoom...


Zoom...

You can zoom to magnification levels from 3.12 to 3,200 percent. Normal magnification is 100 percent.

To enter a zoom percentage

Choose Layout > Views > Zoom, or press Command (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and the Slash key (/). Enter a zoom percentage from 3.12 to 3,200 in the dialog box and press Enter or click OK.

When the Zoom palette is floating, you can enter a zoom percentage directly by typing in the text box in the Zoom palette.


Custom views

You create custom views based on the current magnification level and position of the document in the Canvas window. After you create a custom view, you can select it the same as a preset view.

To create a custom view

With the document’s magnification and position set, choose Views > New View in the Layout menu. Type a name for the view in the dialog box and click OK.

To remove a custom view

1.	Choose Views > Delete View in the Layout menu. If only one custom view exists, Canvas deletes it.

2.	If more than one custom view appears in the Views submenu, the Delete Views dialog box opens. Select a view and click OK. Canvas removes the selected view from the Views submenu.


Layers and pages commands

All Canvas documents can contain multiple pages and layers.

•	Publication documents can have single or facing pages.

•	In Illustration documents, pages are referred to as “sheets.”

•	In Presentation documents, pages are referred to as “slides.”

Layers are like transparent overlays that divide the stack of objects in a document. You can use layers in any Canvas document. Layers are clear — a layer itself blocks nothing behind it. On a single layer, an object blocks whatever is behind it in the stacking order. With multiple layers, an object blocks other objects on any layer that is farther back in the stack of layers.

Layers can help you work more efficiently because you can perform operations on layers. You can hide, print, and save layers individually. You can use layers to hold different colors to produce simple spot-color separations, or to keep text objects separate so you can hide artwork when you edit the text.

Layers submenus

The commands for working with layers and pages appear in a submenu in the Layout menu.

•	When you work in an Illustration document, commands for layers and pages (sheets) appear in the Layers & Sheets submenu in the Layout menu.

•	When you work in a Presentation document, commands for layers and pages (slides) appear in the Layers & Slides submenu in the Layout menu.

•	When you work in a Publication document, commands for layers and pages appear in the Layers & Pages submenu in the Layout menu.

The following commands are available for working with layers:

Document Layout	Opens the Document Layout palette
Hide Other Layers	Makes all layers except the current layer invisible
Show Other Layers	Makes all layers visible
Next Layer	Makes the following layer visible and active
Previous Layer	Makes the layer directly below the current layer visible and active
Adding pages with Layout commands

Commands in the Layout menu let you insert new pages into a document.

1.	Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Insert Sheets in an Illustration document. Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Insert Pages in a Publication. Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Insert Slides in a Presentation.

2.	A dialog box appears. Enter the number of items you want to add, choose a location to insert the new items in the palette, and then click OK.

Deleting pages with Layout commands

You can remove items from a document using commands in the Layout menu.

1.	Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Delete Sheets in an Illustration document. Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Delete Pages in a Publication. Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Delete Slides in a Presentation. A dialog box appears.

2.	Specify a range of items to delete, and then click OK to remove the items and their contents from the document.


Document Layout palette

You can set up options for pages and layers using the Document Layout palette. The palette lists the pages and layers contained in the current document.

In the columns in the palette, bullets and color squares indicate active options for each item in the list. To turn an option on or off, click to add or remove a bullet or color square in the appropriate column.

Show master page: Select to show or hide the master page for a page or slide. When a master page is hidden, the bullet in the column is hollow. When the master page isn’t hidden, the bullet is solid.

Visible: Select to make an item visible or not visible. When you hide a sheet, page, or slide, its layers are also hidden, unless the active layer is part of the item you’re hiding.

Locked: Select to lock or unlock an item. A bullet in this column indicates the item is locked and its content can’t be selected, moved, edited, or deleted. Grid layers are always locked. A padlock icon indicates the item is also password-protected. In addition, you can lock or unlock a layer using the Layer Options dialog box.

Printable: Select to make an item printable or not printable.

Color override: Select to apply an override color to a layer. When you’ve applied a color override to a layer, a square with the override color appears in this column. Keep this option on to make the layer’s content appear on screen and print with the override color. Turn this option off to hide the override color for a layer’s content and make it print without the override color. When this option is off, the square in this column is not visible.

To select items in the palette

Click the name of an item in the list, or do one of the following:

•	To select a continuous range of items, press Shift, and then click the first and last items’ names.

•	To select (or deselect) several non-contiguous items, press Ctrl, and click each item’s name.

Setting up sheets, pages, and slides

The Document Layout palette lets you set up the layers and pages. A new Illustration contains one page (sheet). A new Presentation contains one page (slide), and one master page. A new Publication contains one page, and one master page. Each page in a new document also contains one layer.

To collapse the items in the list: Choose Collapse All in the palette’s pop-up menu.

To expand the list: Choose Expand All in the palette’s pop-up menu.

To add pages

In the Document Layout palette, select a page, and then click New Sheet, New Page, or New Slide. Canvas adds the item to the palette’s list, and names the new item with the next number in the sequence.

You can also add pages by choosing New Sheet, New Page, or New Slide in the palette’s menu. In Illustrations and Presentations, a dialog box appears in which you can name the item. Type a name, and then click OK. In Publications, pages cannot be named. The new item appears in the list.

Changing the order of items

To change the order of sheets, pages, master pages, slides and layers, drag the item to a new position in the palette’s list. Canvas does not rename layers when you change their order in the list. However, Canvas will rename pages based on their position in the sequence if they have not been assigned unique names.

To copy layers: Select one or more layers in the palette, and then Ctrl-drag them to a new location.

To delete sheets, pages or slides: Drag the item from the list in the palette to the Trash icon. You can also delete items by selecting them in the palette and then choosing Delete Sheet, Delete Page, or Delete Slide in the palette’s pop-up menu.

Adding layers

In the Document Layout palette, you can add layers using the New Layer button, or the Add Layer command. When you use the Add Layer command, you can configure options for the layer before it’s added.

The active layer appears in bold in the palette, and shared layers appear in italics.

Using the New Layer button

1.	Select a layer under the sheet, page, or slide you want to add another layer to. The item’s name is shaded.

2.	Click New Layer in the palette. Canvas names the new layer with the next number in the sequence. To configure options for the layer, double-click it to open the Layer Options dialog box.

Using the Add Layer command

1.	Select the sheet, page, or slide you want to add a layer to. The item’s name is shaded.

2.	In the pop-up menu, choose Add Layer.

3.	In the dialog box that appears, configure the options as desired, and then click OK. Canvas adds the layer’s name to the palette.

Sharing layers

You can share layers among pages in a document. A shared layer is part of a group of layers that have been united, so changes to any shared layer are reflected by the other layers in the group. This makes shared layers like “custom” master pages you can set up. You can share layers in any document type.

To share a layer

1.	Select the layer you want to share in the palette’s list. The layer’s name is shaded.

2.	Choose Share Layer in the palette’s menu.

3.	In the dialog box that appears, select the pages you want to share the layer. To share the layer with all the pages in the list, click Select All.

4.	Click OK to share the selected layer. Canvas unites the specified layers as a shared group. Shared layers appear in italics in the palette.

To unshare a layer

1.	Select the layer you want to unshare.

2.	Choose Unshare Layer in the palette’s menu.

3.	In the message box that appears, click Yes to unshare all of the layers in the shared group. Click No to unshare the selected layer only. Canvas creates a copy of the unshared layer and keeps the rest of the layers in its group shared.

To delete layers

1.	Select the layers you want to delete.

2.	Do one of the following:

•	Choose Delete Layer in the pop-up menu.

•	Drag the selected layers you want to delete to the trash icon.

Related topic

Layer Options

Using Master items


Layer Options

You can set options for layers using the Document Layout palette or the Layer Options dialog box. You can set some options, such as printable status, in both the Layer Options dialog box and the Document Layout palette. However, some options, such as password protection, can be set in the Layer Options dialog box only.

To use the Layer Options dialog box, double-click a layer in the Document Layout palette.

Layer Name: Type a layer name.

Visible: To set options for a layer, it must be visible, so this option is not available. To make a layer not visible, you can use the Visibility column in the Document Layout palette.

Grayed: Select to make objects on the layer appear with ink colors that are lighter than the actual colors assigned to the objects.

Locked: Select to lock a layer. You can’t move, delete, or edit the content of a locked layer. This option is not available for grid layers, which are always locked.

Password: Select to assign a locked layer a password in the text box.

Printable: Select to make a layer printable.

Color Override: Select to apply a color override to a layer.

White Fill: Select to use the White Fill option for vector objects and text objects on a layer.

Applying color overrides to layers

When you apply a color override to a layer, you temporarily assign a color to vector and text objects on the layers you specify. A color override does not affect paint objects. When you turn off the Color Override option, all affected objects revert to their original colors.

White Fill option

The White Fill option in the Layer Options dialog box lets you control how override colors appear on vector objects. This option doesn’t change the way override colors appear on text.

When the White Fill checkbox is selected, Canvas applies the override color to the pen ink of vector objects and applies white as the fill ink color. In other words, the override color becomes the color of the stroke (outline) of vector objects, while the inside of the object remains white. This is the method used in Canvas 5.0.3, Canvas 3.5, and earlier versions.

When the White Fill option is not selected, Canvas applies the override color as both pen and fill inks.

If you use the White Fill option, objects without a visible stroke are not visible against the white layout area.


Guide layers and grid layers

In addition to general purpose layers, you can use special layers for guides and guide objects. A guide layer lets you create “magnetic” guides from vector objects on the layer. An object on a guide layer makes objects snap to its edges.

To add a guide layer

1.	Select the page you want to add a guide layer to.

2.	Choose Add Guide Layer in the palette’s pop-up menu. The New Guide Layer dialog box appears.

3.	Configure the options as desired, and then click OK. Canvas adds a new guide layer.

By default, vector objects drawn on guide layers are light blue. By assigning a guide layer an override color, you can make the vector objects on a guide layer any color you want.

Guide layers can be arranged to be in front of or behind drawing layers. Guide layers have three states: Visible with snap active; visible with snap inactive; not visible (snap is inactive for invisible guide layers). In addition, when you drag guides from the ruler into the drawing area, Canvas places the guides on a new guide layer. If there’s an existing guide layer, Canvas places any guides you drag from the ruler onto the existing guide layer.

Grid layers

Canvas lets you create special grid layers. Grid layers display a gray grid on a layer that makes it easier to position objects on drawing layers precisely. In addition, when you create a grid using the Grids command in the Layout menu, Canvas places the grid on a new grid layer. Grid layers are always locked.

To add a grid layer

1.	Select the page you want to add a grid layer to.

2.	Choose Add Grid Layer in the palette’s pop-up menu. The New Grid layer dialog box appears. Configure the options as desired, and then click OK. Canvas adds a new grid layer.


Using master pages and slides

Master pages (and master slides) hold common elements that you want to appear on most pages in a document.

Master pages are available in Publications and master slides are available in presentations. This topic uses master page to refer to both master pages and master slides. Illustration documents do not use master pages.

Objects on a master page appear on pages that use the master page.

Linking and unlinking master pages

You can link and unlink a master page from any body page. When a master page is linked to a body page, changing the master page changes the body page. When a master page is unlinked, it appears on the body page the same as when it was linked, but changing the master page does not change the body page.

To unlink a master page

1.	Select the page or slide with the master page you want to unlink.

2.	Choose Unlink Master in the palette’s pop-up menu. Canvas unlinks the item’s master page, copies the master layers and their contents, and then makes them regular layers.

To link a master page

1.	Select the page or slide you want to re-link a master page to.

2.	Choose Link Master in the palette’s pop-up menu. Canvas adds a new master page, but keeps any copies of layers created when the page was unlinked.


Layers & Slides submenu

Use the commands in the Layers & Slides submenu in the Layout menu to work with the slides of a presentation.

To create new slides: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Insert Slides. In the dialog box, type the number of items you want to insert and the location, and then click OK.

To delete slides: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Delete Slides. In the dialog box, type the number of items you want to remove, and then click OK.

When you specify the number of an item you want to remove, use the item’s actual sequence number, not its name. For example, if you rearrange a document so the page named “Slide #3” is now the fifth slide in the document, specify Slide 5 to in the Delete Slides dialog box to delete that slide.

To go to a specific slide: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Go To Slide. Type a number in the dialog box and click OK.

To change presentation slides: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Next Slide or Previous Slide.

To change presentation layers: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Next Layer or Previous Layer.

To open the Document Layout palette: Choose Layout > Layers & Slides > Document Info.


Slide Show command

To configure a slide show

1.	In a Presentation document, choose Layout > Slide Show. The Slide Show palette opens.

2.	To play the slide show at the largest size possible on the current display device, turn on Fit To Screen.

3.	To make the slide show start over after displaying the last slide, turn on the Loop option. Otherwise the slide show stops after the last slide.

4.	To show a pointer on-screen during playback, turn on Show Pointer and select a pointer from the adjacent pop-up menu.

5.	If you want Canvas to sequentially add the contents of visible layers to main slides, turn on Progressive Build. If Progressive Build is off, visible layers appear as part of their main slide.

6.	If a slide includes QuickTime movies, turn on “Auto-play QuickTime movies” to play the movies when the slide appears.

7.	To make a slide show self-running, turn on “Advance Every x seconds,” and type the number of seconds to display each slide.

Slide Show options

Fit to screen: Reduces or enlarges the document’s slides so they fit within the screen area of the system used to play the slide show. Canvas calculates a scaling factor based on the size of the system’s monitor and the resolution setting.

Loop: Causes the slide show to play continuously until you interrupt it. When Canvas reaches the end of the document, it begins the slide show from the first slide.

Show Pointer: Displays a pointer you specify on screen during playback. You can control the pointer with the mouse during the slide show, so you can indicate important items in the presentation.

Auto Play QuickTime movies: Causes any QuickTime movie files that have been placed in the Presentation document to begin playing automatically. When a slide containing a movie is played, Canvas loads the movie and begins playing it if this option is selected.

Advance Every x Seconds: Makes the slide show self-running by advancing from one slide to another after a specified interval, without any intervention from the operator. Enter the number of seconds in the text box. The exact timing between slides depends on the speed of the system used for playback and the complexity of the illustrations.

Progressive Build: Affects presentations in which layers are used to contain items designed to appear in sequence against a common background. If this option is selected, Canvas displays a slide and its first layer, and then displays the slide’s additional layers in sequence. If this option is not selected, slide layers are displayed as part of the slide, like the layers in an illustration.

To play a slide show

1.	Choose Layout > Slide Show.

2.	To start a slide show, click Play. If “Advance Every x Seconds” is on, Canvas displays the slides, using the specified timing.

If the Loop option is also on, the slide show will repeat.

If the slide show is not self-running, click to advance one slide. Ctrl-click to go back one slide.

3.	To stop the slide show, press Esc (Mac) or right-click (Windows).

Related topic

Slide transitions

Presenting a slide show


To select slide transitions

You can select from more than a dozen transition effects for slide shows.

1.	Double-click the name of a slide in the Document Layout palette’s list. The Slide Options dialog box appears.

2.	Select the “Transition to next slide” option, and then select a transition in the Transition pop-up menu.

3.	To preview the effect of the transition setting, click Try.

4.	If the selected transition offers additional options, click the Options button in the Slide Options dialog box. A dialog box appears.

5.	Configure the options as desired, and then click OK.

6.	Click OK in the Slide Options dialog box to make the settings take effect.


Presenting a slide show

You can use a presentation document as the basis of an on-screen “slide show” presentation. Canvas can control a slide show by running through the slides of a presentation document automatically, or you can control the pace of the presentation by changing slides manually.

You set up a presentation by first creating a presentation document using the New command in the File menu, then adding additional slides (and layers, if desired) using the Slide Info palette. You can also use the Slide Info palette to specify transitions between slides.

You can use the presentation document’s master slide to hold background objects and text that you want to appear on most slides. Use the Slide Info palette to apply the master slide to main slides on which you want master slide elements to appear, and to set the printable, locked, and password options for slides.


Bind Text command

Use the Bind Text command to bind existing text to the outline of an object.

To bind existing text using a menu command

1.	Select a text object and a vector or paint object.

2.	Choose Effects > Bind Text. When the pointer is on the edge of the selected object, the pointer becomes a crosshair.

3.	Click to place the selected text on the path. Text aligns to the point where you click.

Related topics

Working with bound text

Binding text to a circle


Working with bound text

Once you bind text, you can change its starting position, alignment, baseline position, and flow direction. In addition, you can edit the shape and location of the vector object to which text is bound, and Canvas will fit text to the new path.

You can also edit text while it is bound to a path by selecting the Path Text tool and clicking an object with bound text, or by double-clicking a bound text object with an Arrow tool. However, extensive text editing might be difficult and slow while the text is bound to an object. To edit bound text, you might want to remove the text bind, make changes, and re-bind the text.

Bound text and its binding object move together, like grouped objects. However, unlike grouped objects, you can select and change attributes (such as stroke and ink) individually for the text and the object.

You can use the context menu to change the alignment of text that is bound to a path, and to show or hide the path.

To position and align bound text

Canvas has three Bind Position handles that you can drag to place text anywhere on, above, or below an object.

Handle	Description
Reverse Flow handle	Click to switch the vertical orientation of type relative to the object path and reverse the flow direction.
Alignment handle	Drag to specify the point where you want type to align. For example, center-justified text will center around the location of this handle.
Baseline Shift handle	Drag to change the position of the baseline relative to the vector object. Baseline Shift lets you insert space between bound type and the object.
To remove a text bind

Whether you use the Bind Text menu command or the Path Text tool, you can remove a bind effect by selecting a bound text object and choosing Effects > Remove Effects.

Editing bound text

Once you bind text to a path, you can use the context menu to change the orientation of the text characters relative to the path, and to make the path visible or not visible.

The bound text commands appear in the context menu when a bound text object is selected. To use the context menu, press Ctrl and the mouse button (Mac), or press the right mouse button (Windows).

Bound text commands

The following commands appear in the context menu:

Show/Hide Path: Choose Show Path to make the path visible. Choose Hide Path to make the path not visible.

Vertical Text: Choose Vertical Text to keep the baseline of the text characters horizontal, rather than perpendicular to the path. This also keeps the vertical axis of each character vertical, rather than angled to follow a curved path. The Vertical Text command is available when the text is bound with the Tangent Text option.

Tangent Text: Choose Tangent Text to keep the baseline of the text characters tangent to the path, rather than horizontal. This angles the vertical axis of each character away from vertical as needed to follow the path. By default, Canvas uses the Tangent Text option when it first binds text to a path. The Tangent Text command is available when the text is bound with the Vertical Text option.


Binding text to a circle

You can create circular logos, with text on the top flowing clockwise and text on the bottom flowing counterclockwise. In Canvas, you can create this effect by binding two text objects to a circle and using the Bind Position handles to arrange the text.

To create a circular logo

1.	Create a circular object using the Oval tool in the toolbox.

2.	Create two text objects and bind them to the top and bottom of the circle. You can use the Path Text tool to create and bind the first text object, but you must bind the second text object using the Bind Text command.

Note: when you bind a second text object to the one shape, Canvas creates a duplicate of the shape and binds text to the duplicate.

3.	To center each text object on the circle, select a text object and drag the Align handle. Centering text objects is easier if the text is center-justified.

4.	To flip the orientation of the bottom text object, click the Reverse Flow handle with the crosshair pointer. The bottom text object binds to the inside of the path.

5.	To shift the bottom text object outside the circle, drag the Baseline Shift handle outward from the center of the circle. As you drag, Canvas displays a proportionately-sized circle to show the location of the baseline.


Bind Group command

The Bind Group command in the Effects menu arranges the individual objects in a group object along the path of another object.

To use the Bind Group command, you must select an object group (a set of vector objects that have been united with the Group command in the Object menu).

To bind an object group

1.	Select the object group that you want to bind to a path and select the path to which you want to bind the object group.

2.	Choose Effects > Bind Group.


Blend command

Use the Blend command to create new shapes between the objects you select. Blend creates a series of objects that merge one shape into another.

To blend objects

1.	Select two or more vector objects.

2.	If necessary, choose Effects > Blend to open the Blend palette.

3.	Configure the Blend settings and click Apply.

Blend settings

# of shapes:. The number of objects Canvas creates for the blend. Higher numbers result in smoother blends.

Rainbow colors: Creates a rainbow-like blend of colors between objects. This introduces more color variations than a standard blend, which uses only combinations of the original colors. When you turn on this option, two buttons appear; choose a clockwise or counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.

Bind to a path: Turn on to use the path of an object (not in the current selection) to arrange blend objects. When you click Apply, Canvas prompts you to Choose Path; click the object to which you want to bind the blend objects.

Point to point: Available when blending two objects. This option lets you rotate blend objects, creating the illusion that one object is twisting into another. When you click Apply, Canvas prompts you to Choose 1st Point; click an anchor point on one object. Canvas then prompts you to Choose 2nd Point; click an anchor point on the other object. To reverse the blend direction, Option-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows) when you choose the two points.

Dynamic: Lets you use the Direct Selection  tool to accelerate, decelerate, expand, contract, and redirect the blend after Canvas creates it.

The Dynamic option is not available when the selected object is created with a specialized vector tool, including Concentric Circles, GridMaker Multigon, Macro, Spiral, and Dimensioning. If you select Dynamic when one of these objects is selected, the Apply button is not available to apply the blend.

Tip: To ensure that blended objects have the same number of anchor points, copy an object, edit its shape, and blend between these objects.


Combine command

Combine creates new objects from two or more overlapping vector objects.

To combine objects

1.	Select two or more objects that you want to combine. Each selected object must overlap at least one other selected object.

2.	Choose Effects > Combine to open the Combine palette, if necessary.

3.	In the Combine palette, choose a combine method from the list.

4.	Click Apply to implement the current settings.

Combine methods

In the Combine palette, you can choose various methods for combining objects. Some methods require that the paths of overlapping objects intersect. Some methods work only with closed vector objects, not with lines and open curves.

Outline	Creates one path around the selected objects and fills the interior of the new shape with the ink of the front object.
Add	Joins two objects where they overlap to create a compound path, and fills the new shape with the ink of the front object. Compound paths can include multiple closed shapes that have holes in them, unlike objects created with the Outline option.
Intersect	Creates a new object from the intersection of all selected objects and fills the new object with the ink of the front object. All selected objects must be closed paths and share a common area.
Punch	Removes the area where selected objects intersect and fills the new object with the ink of the front object. If you select more than two objects, Canvas starts with the back object and continues forward through the stacking order.
Subtract Front	Removes from the back object the areas of overlapping objects in front. The back object retains its ink attributes.
Subtract Back	Removes from the front object the areas of overlapping objects behind it. The front object retains its ink attributes.
Crop	Removes areas of objects that are not behind the top object.
Divide	Creates new objects where selected objects overlap. This option lets you use lines to “cut” other objects in pieces.
Slice	Cuts the path of an object where it intersects with objects in front of it in the stacking order. Unlike other combine methods, slice results in open-ended paths. For example, slicing a circle in half with a line produces two arcs, as opposed to two closed semicircles.
Transparency (see note below)	Creates new objects where selected objects overlap, and fills overlapping areas with a new color, similar to the Mix option (the original colors must be solid). However, transparency lets you specify the level of transparency. When you select the Transparency option, enter a percentage in the text box that appears; 100 percent is completely transparent, and zero is opaque.
Mix (see note below)	Creates new objects where selected objects overlap, similar to the Divide option. However, Canvas fills overlapping areas with a new color (the original colors must be solid).
Trim	Trims intersecting lines or arcs by shortening them until they meet at a vertex.  You can trim a line to a line, an arc to an arc, or an arc to a line. In each case, Canvas trims the shorter segments of the intersecting lines and arcs. Trimmed lines and arcs remain separate and retain their attributes. Trim also trims lines or arcs where they intersect closed vector objects. The vector objects do not change.  If Canvas can’t trim the selected objects, a message tells you that the operation requires at least one open path.

Note: If multiple overlapping objects are grouped, Canvas treats the group as a single object and doesn’t apply the Transparency or Mix effect within the group.

How Canvas “mixes” colors

To determine a new color, Canvas compares the CMYK values of the overlapping objects and uses the highest value of each color. (If you are using RGB colors, Canvas first converts the colors to CMYK.)

For example:

	Cyan	Magenta	Yellow	Black
Color 1	50	30	25	5
Color 2	25	40	20	0
New Color	50	40	25	5


Envelope command

The Envelope command lets you distort the shape of vector objects and text. You can use preset envelopes and create custom envelopes for reshaping objects.

To apply an envelope effect

Select a vector object and, if necessary, choose Envelope in the Effects menu to open the Envelope palette. In the palette, choose an envelope style in the pop-up menu and click Apply.

Envelope styles and editing options

Style	Envelope behavior
Warp	Each handle behaves like a path anchor point and can move in any direction.
Distort	Each side of the envelope edit box is a straight line; handles can move in all directions. This style is useful for creating perspective.
Straight Line	All handles are connected by straight lines. Corner handles are constrained to right-angle movements; side handles can move in all directions.
Single Cusp	Side handles form convex or concave curves between corner handles. Side handles can move in any direction; corner handles are constrained to right-angle movements.
Double Cusp	Side handles form S-shaped curves between corner handles. Side handles can move in any direction; corner handles are constrained to right-angle movements.
Bézier	All handles behave like smooth anchor points and can move in any direction.
Related topic

Using envelope templates


Using envelope templates

After you apply the envelope effect to an object, you can save the shape of the envelope as a template. You can then apply template envelopes to other objects to quickly create shapes or effects.

To save an envelope as a template

1.	Select an enveloped object (the object cannot be in edit mode).

2.	Choose Effects > Envelope to open the Envelope palette, if necessary.

3.	In the pop-up menu, choose Template.

4.	Click Acquire; a preview of the envelope shape appears in the scroll box.

To apply an envelope template

Select an object, and choose Envelope in the Effects menu to open the Envelope palette, if necessary. In the palette, choose Template in the pop-up menu. Click a preview shape in the scroll box to select it, and click Apply.

To delete an envelope template

In the Envelope palette, choose Template in the pop-up menu. Click a preview shape in the scroll box to select it, and click Delete.


Extrude command

The Extrude palette creates objects that appear to have three dimensions. You can create parallel, circular, and semi-circular extrusions from vector or text objects.

You can rotate and scale extruded objects in three-dimensional space. In addition, you can set the placement, intensity, and color of a simulated light source and Canvas applies appropriate shading to the extruded object.

Although Canvas extrusions appear similar to QuickDraw 3D objects, they do not require installation of the QuickDraw 3D shared libraries, and do not use the 3DMF (3D metafile) file format.

Note: You cannot extrude grids, concentric circles, spirals, composite paths, and objects modified with the Envelope palette. (You can apply Envelope effects after you extrude objects.) Also, Canvas uses only solid fill colors for extruded objects, and ignores stroke attributes, pen inks, gradients, hatches, symbols, and textures.

To extrude objects

With a text or vector object selected, choose Effects > Extrude. In the Extrude palette, choose the settings you want, and then click Apply.

Choosing an Extrude style

The pop-up menu at the top of the Extrude palette displays extrude styles. When you select a style, an example appears at the upper right. You can choose one of three extrude styles.

Style	Result
Parallel	Adds thickness to a shape, as though the shape were cut out of a slab of clay. You can create parallel extrusions with text objects and closed vector objects.
Circular	Extrudes a shape in a circular path. You can set the diameter of the extrusion path (see “Completing a circular or sweep extrusion,” below). You can apply circular extrusions to open and closed vector objects, but not text. However, you can convert text to paths, then apply a circular extrusion.
Sweep	Extrudes a shape along a circular path, and lets you specify the number of degrees (0 to 360) to extrude. You can also set the diameter of the extrusion path (see “Completing a circular or sweep extrusion,” below). You can apply circular extrusions to open and closed vector objects, but not text. However, you can convert text to paths, then apply a sweep extrusion.
Completing a circular or sweep extrusion

After you apply a circular or sweep extrusion to an object, you need to set the diameter of the extrusion path. Canvas displays a black bar to mark the center of the extrusion. Canvas also shows a mirror image of the original object to show the position of the extrusion at 180 degrees.

To set the extrusion diameter

Drag the black bar right, left, up, or down, depending on the direction you want to extrude. The mirror image of the original object moves as you drag the black bar. When the diameter is the right length, press Enter (Mac), Esc (Windows), or double-click. Canvas completes the extrusion.

Related topic

Editing extruded objects


Editing extruded objects

Canvas lets you rotate and scale extruded objects interactively. To rotate and scale extruded objects, the object must be in extrusion edit mode. Immediately after you apply the Extrude effect, the object is in edit mode; to exit this mode, double-click outside the object or press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows).

To place an extruded object in edit mode: Double-click the extruded object.

In edit mode, Canvas displays three axes, representing the three dimensions. Each axis has a handle, and when you point to a handle, it changes to an extrusion pointer. Otherwise, the pointer appears as a rotation pointer.

To rotate an extruded object

When you first apply the Extrude effect, the object appears solid gray and flat because it is facing you (the z-axis points directly at you). To see all dimensions, rotate an edge of the object toward you. With the rotation pointer, drag a side in the direction you want to rotate the object. As you drag, Canvas displays a circle to show the space in which the object can rotate.

You can also rotate an extruded object in two dimensions, like other vector objects, using the Rotate or Freeform commands in the Effects menu. The object can’t be in extrusion edit mode to use these commands. When you use the Rotate and Freeform commands, Canvas does not reapply lighting effects as with three-dimensional rotation. In other words, the light source appears to move with the object, instead of remaining in the same place as the object rotates.

Changing the shape of extruded objects

When an extruded object is not in edit mode, you can resize and reshape it like other two-dimensional vector objects. You can

•	drag a handle on the bounding box to resize the object

•	place the object in freeform mode to skew the object

•	use the Scale or Object Info commands to resize the object

•	apply the Envelope effect to warp and distort the object

In addition to these two-dimensional editing functions, extruded objects have unique, three-dimensional properties. When an object is in extrusion edit mode, you can make it, thicker, wider, or taller, and Canvas redraws the object to account for lighting changes.

Changing the color of extruded objects

When you extrude a vector object, Canvas uses combinations of a solid-color fill ink, shades of gray, and the light-source color to create a three-dimensional appearance. After you extrude an object, you can apply solid color fill inks (not gradients, hatches, symbols, or textures) and change the color of the light source in the Extrude palette. When you change colors, Canvas redraws the object to show the interaction of the new colors with the object’s shape and shading.


Flip command

The Flip commands change the orientation of objects by reflecting or inverting them.

You can flip individual objects, multiple selected objects, or grouped objects. When you flip a group object, the objects in the group are flipped around the axes of the group.

To flip a selected object from top to bottom

Choose Effects > Flip > Vertical. The Vertical command flips the selection’s vertical coordinates over its horizontal axis.

To flip a selected object from left to right

Choose Effects > Flip > Horizontal. The Horizontal command flips the selection’s horizontal coordinates over its vertical axis.

To flip a selected object horizontally and vertically

Choose Effects > Flip > Both Axes. Flip Both Axes flips the selection’s horizontal coordinates over its vertical axis and flips the selection’s vertical coordinates over its horizontal axis.


Freeform command

Use the Freeform command to place selected objects or image selections in freeform edit mode.

When you put an object or image selection in freeform mode, you can rotate and skew it by dragging special handles.

To put an object in freeform mode: Select an object and choose Effects > Freeform. Rotation and skewing handles and the object’s centerpoint appear.

The Freeform Selection option under General preferences lets you place objects in freeform mode by clicking them.

To end freeform mode: Click away from the object, or press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows).

Rotating objects in freeform mode

In freeform mode, the circular handles at each corner of the bounding box are rotation handles. The circle and crosshair in the center of the object is the point around which the object rotates. To rotate an object in freeform mode, Drag one of the four corner handles. An outline of the object rotates as you drag a handle.

To set the center of rotation of an object: Drag the centerpoint to a new location anywhere on the screen. To make the centerpoint snap to one of the handles or the center, press Shift as you drag.

Skewing objects in freeform mode

When an object is in freeform mode, you can slant its shape by dragging the horizontal and vertical skew handles. Skewing an object reshapes it by changing the relationship of the horizontal and vertical axes to the skew centerpoint.

Canvas skews objects around a centerpoint that you can position to achieve the effect you want. You can drag the centerpoint to any position inside or outside the object. The location of the skew centerpoint changes the effect of dragging a skew handle on the object.

To position the centerpoint on one of the freeform handles or in the center of the object, Shift-drag the centerpoint where you want to place it.

To skew an object horizontally: Drag a horizontal skew handle to the left or right.

To skew an object vertically: Drag a vertical skew handle up or down.

Related topic

Freeform editing of floating selections


Remove Effects command

Use the Remove Effects command to return objects to their original orientation and shape. Remove Effects will reverse most changes made by commands in the Effects menu.

Select the objects you want to restore and choose Effects > Remove Effects.


Rotate command

Use the Rotate command to change the orientation of an object by a specified number of degrees. You can rotate selected objects in 0.01 degree increments. You can select the center or a handle on an object's bounding box as the center of rotation.

To rotate an object

1.	Select the object you want to rotate.

2.	Choose Effects > Rotate to open the Rotate dialog box.

3.	To choose a rotation direction, click the clockwise or counterclockwise button. Enter the rotation amount in the Angle box.

4. 	In the Center box, the dark handle is the center of rotation. To change the center of rotation, click a handle on the bounding box illustration.

5.	Click Apply to preview the settings. Click OK to rotate the object and close the dialog box.

Editing rotated objects

When you rotate an object using freeform edit mode or the Rotate command, Canvas rotates the object’s bounding box. This lets you reshape and resize the object in rotated space; you can drag a handle on the object’s bounding box and the sides keep their rotated orientation, which prevents distortion of the original shape.

Exporting rotated objects

Rotation is an effect that does not alter the original object. If you rotate a paint object, the rotation effect is removed if the object is saved or exported using an image format, such as TIFF. To preserve the rotation effect, you must use the Render command to create a new, rectangular paint object from the rotated image.


Colorize command

You can use the Colorize command to tint vector objects with solid color fill or pen inks when you want to mix two colors, or shade one color with another. Doing this in the Inks palette can be complicated, because you have to create a custom color and set the correct values to approximate a two-color mixture. The Colorize command lets you simply select two colors and choose the percentage of each.

To colorize a vector object

1.	Select at least one vector object that has a solid color fill or pen ink. Colorize has no effect on gradient, hatch, texture, and symbol inks.

2.	Choose Effects > Colorize.

3.	In the Colorize dialog box, turn on the Fill and Stroke options to colorize both, or select the one ink you want to colorize.

4.	In the pop-up color palettes, select the colors you want to add to the inks of the selected objects.

5.	Use the sliders or enter a percentage in the text boxes to set the amount of color to mix with the object’s color.

6.	Turn on Preview to see the effect or click OK to colorize the object.

How colorization works

Canvas uses the percentages you specify to determine the new color values for the selected object. For each color value (for example, Red, Green, and Blue in the RGB color model), Canvas finds the difference between the tint and the original color. Then, Canvas multiplies the differences by the percentage you specify, and adds these values to the original color values.


Fractalize command

Fractals are mathematical transformations that simulate the irregularities and patterns in natural shapes, such as coastlines and mountain ranges. When you fractalize a vector object, its outline becomes jagged. You can use the Fractalize command to add a fractal effect to any vector object except dimension objects and Smart Lines.

To fractalize an object

Select at least one object and choose Effects > Fractalize. Set the amount of wiggle and the density you want to use. Click Apply to preview the effect on the selected object. Click OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

Wiggle: The amount a fractalized path can deviate from the original path. Enter a number between 0 and 20; higher numbers increase the amount of wiggle.

Density: The smoothness of the fractalized path. Enter a number between 0 and 5. Higher values increase the number of anchor points Canvas add to the path. Lower densities result in sharper angles.

Note: Canvas fractalizes objects by adding anchor points to an object’s path. High wiggle and density settings can add a lot of anchor points, which can require more memory to print.


Shadow command

The Shadow command copies selected objects, applies a color to the new objects, and offsets them from the original objects by an amount you specify. Canvas places the shadow object directly behind the original in the stacking order. If you apply a shadow to a group of objects, Canvas groups the shadow objects and places the shadow behind the original group.

You can apply shadow effects to any vector or text object except dimension objects and Smart Lines.

To create an offset shadow

Select a vector object and choose Effects > Shadow to open the Shadow dialog box. Configure the options, and click Apply to see the effect. To accept the settings and close the dialog box, click OK.

Shadow depth: The horizontal and vertical distance by which the shadow object is offset from the original object.

Pen and fill color of shadow objects

Because shadow objects are vector objects, you can edit them the same as other objects. You can skew them to create oblique shadows, or convert them to paint objects and use blur filters to soften them. Remember that the original object and the shadow object are not grouped, so editing or moving one doesn’t affect the other.


Acquiring images

The Image > Acquire submenu lists image file formats that you can import. This menu also lists any plug-in acquire modules that you have installed.

Acquiring an image places it in the current document as a paint object.

To acquire image files

1.	Choose Image > Acquire > file format (choose the file format of the file to acquire).

2.	A directory dialog box appears. Go to the folder that contains the files to acquire. Files that match the selected format are listed.

3.	To select files to acquire, do either:

Mac: Double-click a file or select it in the list and click Add. You can select multiple files and then click Done. Selected files appear in the lower box.

Windows: Double-click a file, or select it in the list and click Open. Selected files appear in the Files to Acquire box. To acquire multiple files, select each file, click Add, and then click Done.

You can use the buttons to select multiple files:

Add: Click to add a selected file to the list of files to acquire. The Add button is available when you select a file.

Add All: Click to add all the displayed files to the list of files to acquire.

Remove: Click to remove a selected file from the list of files to acquire.

Remove All: Click to remove all files from the list of files to acquire.

  Related topics


Using TWAIN scanners

Scanner manufacturers created the TWAIN interface to standardize interaction between scanners and computer software. Scanners that comply with the TWAIN standard provide a “source manager” file that translates scanner information into data that Canvas can use.

If you don’t know whether a scanner is TWAIN-compatible, contact the manufacturer.

To select a TWAIN scanner

1.	Choose Acquire > TWAIN Select Source in the Image menu. In the Select Source dialog box, a scrolling list contains the names of all TWAIN scanners for which Canvas can locate a data source.

2.	Select the scanner you want to use in the scrolling list and click OK. The Select Source dialog box closes and the scanner you selected becomes the active scanner.

To acquire images using TWAIN scanners

1.	When you scan an image in Canvas, the image appears in the active Canvas document. Either open the document you want to use, or use the New command to create a new document.

2.	Choose Acquire > TWAIN Acquire in the Image menu. A dialog box for the scanner you are using appears. Refer to the scanner’s user manual for information on scanner options.

3.	Select the options you want in the scanner dialog box.

•	Click Prescan to view a preview of the image. You can verify that the image is aligned and completely visible and reposition it if necessary.

•	Depending on the available options, you can adjust scaling and brightness of the image.

4.	Click Scan to begin scanning. When the scanner finishes, the scanned image appears in the active Canvas document.

Using scanners with plug-in acquire modules

Because Canvas is a plug-in host program, you can use any scanner that provides an “acquire module” that is Photoshop plug-in compatible.

You must install plug-in acquire modules so they are available to Canvas. Canvas looks for third-party plug-ins (including acquire modules) in the “Plug-Ins” folder inside the Canvas Tools folder. Once Canvas recognizes an acquire module, its name appears in the Image > Acquire submenu.

To select a plug-ins folder for Canvas

To tell Canvas to look for scanner acquire module plug-ins in a different location, change the Canvas preference.

1.	Choose File > Preferences. In the Preferences dialog box, click the Painting tab to bring it to the front.

2.	Click the Plug-Ins button. In the directory dialog box, navigate to the folder for plug-ins on your hard disk, and then click the Select “folder name” button.

3.	Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.

4.	Exit and then re-start Canvas to activate the plug-in modules.

To acquire images using plug-ins

1.	When you scan an image in Canvas, the image appears in the active Canvas document. Either open the document you want to use, or use the New command to create a new document.

2.	Choose Acquire in the Image menu and select a plug-in acquire module from the Acquire submenu.

Note: If you do not see your scanning device in the menu, make sure that its acquire module is in the correct folder; see “To select a plug-ins folder for Canvas,” above.

3.	After selecting a device, a dialog box with options for your scanner appears. Refer to the scanner’s user manual for information on these options and information on using the scanner.

4.	Adjust the settings in the scanner dialog box and click Scan.

See the scanner documentation for information on the settings available.


Invert command

You can use the Invert command to reverse the colors in an image, as in a photographic negative. The command converts each pixel’s color into its opposite hue in the color spectrum. It does this by inverting the brightness value of each pixel in each color channel.

For example, if a pixel is pure red, its brightness levels are 255, 0, 0 in RGB mode. When inverted, this pixel’s brightness values become 0, 255, 255, changing it to pure blue-green, its opposite in hue.

The Invert command can be particularly useful in channel editing, as colored pixels can denote either masked or selected areas.

The Invert command can’t be applied to paint objects in Indexed mode.

To invert an image

1.	Select one or more paint objects to invert all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to invert the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

You can also apply the Invert command to a channel or a selection in edit mode.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Invert


Threshold command

You can use the Threshold command to convert any image or channel to black and white.

The Threshold command compares each pixel’s brightness value to a threshold value that you set. It changes brighter pixels to white and darker pixels to black. The threshold setting is based on a scale of brightness values from 0 (black) to 255 (white).

For example, if you set a threshold value of 128, pixels that are brighter than medium gray become white, while pixels darker than medium gray become black.

You can’t use the Threshold command on images in Black & White or Indexed mode.

To use the Threshold command

1.	Select one or more paint objects to adjust all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Threshold.

3.	In the Threshold dialog box, enter the threshold value by dragging the slider or typing a number in the text box. If you want to convert half the pixels to black and half to white, click Auto.

4.	After entering the setting you want, click OK.


Posterize command

You can condense the brightness variations in an image with the Posterize command.

If you “posterize” a photograph, it becomes a high-contrast image. Posterizing compresses hundreds of brightness levels into only a few. Canvas reduces each color channel to the number of levels you specify.

The Posterize command’s effect depends on the mode of the image.

For example, if you apply the Posterize command with a setting of 2 levels to a grayscale-mode image, the image becomes black and white. If you apply the same setting to an RGB Color image (even if it contains only grays), the command converts each pixel’s red, green, and blue value to either zero or full color, reducing the image to eight colors (red, green, blue, red-green, red-blue, blue-green, black, and white).

To posterize an image

1.	Select one or more paint objects to posterize all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to posterize the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Posterize.

3.	Enter a level from 2 to 255. Higher numbers produce subtle effects. Lower numbers produce high-contrast images.

4.	After you enter the Levels setting, click OK.


Levels command

You can adjust the brightness of shadows, highlights, or midtones by using the Levels command.

Brightness values in an image are assigned values from 0 (black) to 255 (white). For colored pixels, brightness is the brightness value in each color channel.

To brighten highlights

You can vitalize real-life images by brightening highlights.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Adjust > Levels in the Image menu.

2.	Select a channel or combination of channels in the pop-up menu. The Levels command will affect only the specified channels.

3.	Enter a positive number less than 255 in the right Input Levels text box or drag the white slider located under the histogram. Canvas assigns the maximum output level to all pixels on the right of the slider.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

To lighten shadows

You can lighten shadows to prevent ink from over-saturating a printed medium.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Adjust > Levels in the Image menu.

2.	Select a channel or combination of channels in the pop-up menu. The Levels command will affect only the specified channels.

3.	Enter a number greater than zero in the left Output Levels text box or drag the black slider under Output Levels to increase the minimum output level. This value becomes the darkest value allowed in the image.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

To darken highlights

You can darken the highlights on one particular color channel to bring brighter colors back into the printable color range.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Adjust > Levels in the Image menu.

2.	Select a channel or combination of channels in the pop-up menu. The Levels command will affect only the specified channels.

3.	Enter a positive number less than 255 in the right Output Levels text box or drag the white slider under Output Levels to decrease the maximum output level. This value becomes the brightest value allowed in the image.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

To deepen shadows

You can create more contrast in an image by making shadows darker.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Adjust > Levels in the Image menu.

2.	Select a channel or combination of channels in the pop-up menu. The Levels command will affect only the specified channels.

3.	Enter a number greater than zero in the left Input Levels text box or drag the black slider under the histogram. Canvas assigns the minimum output level to all pixels on the left of the slider.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

To lighten or darken middle tones

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Adjust > Levels in the Image menu.

2.	Select a channel or combination of channels in the pop-up menu. The Levels command will affect only the specified channels.

3.	Enter a value in the center Input Levels text box or drag the gray slider under the histogram to the left:

•	To lighten midtones, enter a value from 1.01 to 9.99 or drag the slider to the left. All pixels on the right of the slider will be brighter than medium gray.

•	To darken midtones, enter a value from 0.1 to 1.00 or drag the slider to the right. All pixels on the left of the slider will be darker than medium gray.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

Saving and loading Levels settings

You can save Levels settings on disk to use again. For example, after correcting a scanned photo, you can save the settings and use them to correct other images scanned from the same source.

To save Levels settings: In the Levels dialog box, click Save. Type a name for the settings file, select a location, and click Save.

To load previously-saved Levels: In the Levels dialog box, click Load. A directory dialog box opens. Locate the settings file you want to open, and click Open.


Curves command

You can adjust the brightness of a specific color channel or tonal range with the Curves command.

The Curves dialog box uses a line graph to map brightness values. The scale of brightness values ranges from 0 black to 255 (white). For colored pixels, brightness depends on the brightness value in each color channel.

By default, the vertical axis of the graph represents output brightness, while the horizontal axis represents input brightness. You can switch the axes by clicking the grayscale bar below the graph.

This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode or Indexed mode.

To adjust brightness curves

1.	Select one paint object to adjust. Or, place a paint object in edit mode. You can select an area in the image to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Curves.

3.	In the Channel pop-up menu, choose the channel(s) to adjust. You can select separate color channels or the composite channel.

4.	To change the shape of the existing curve, make sure the curve button at the bottom-left is selected. If you’re adjusting an image in edit mode, turn on Preview so you can see the changes in the image.

5.	Click any points on the curve that you want to stay the same; drag points on the curve that you want to change. For example, to keep the midtones the same while you adjust other tonal ranges, click the center of the curve, then drag other areas of the curve. To adjust midtones without affecting highlights and shadows, click the quarter and three-quarter points of the curve, and drag the middle.

•	To brighten a tonal range, drag the curve up.

•	To darken a tonal range, drag the curve down.

6.	If you draw disjointed segments with the pencil, you can click Smooth to create one continuous curve.

7.	Click OK to apply the current settings to the image.

Saving and loading Curves dialog box settings

You can save Curves dialog box settings on disk to use again. For example, after correcting the brightness curve for a particular Photo CD image, you can save these settings and later apply them to other images from the same source.

To save Curves settings: In the Curves dialog box, click Save. In the directory dialog box, type a name for the settings file, select a location, and click Save.

To load Curves settings: In the Curves dialog box, click Load. In the directory dialog box, locate the settings file and click Open.


Brightness/Contrast command

You can adjust the brightness and contrast of an entire image or specific channels with the Brightness/Contrast command. Brightness refers to the lightness of an image. Contrast is the difference in brightness between two pixels.

Because the Brightness/Contrast command adjusts all pixels equally, you should avoid using it to lighten an image that appears too dark, because the image can lose shadow detail.

To preserve shadows or highlights when adjusting the brightness of an image, you can use the Levels or Curves commands.

This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode or Indexed mode.

To use the Brightness/Contrast command

1.	Select one or more paint objects to adjust all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Brightness/Contrast.

3.	Enter a Brightness value from -100 to 100. Higher values can wash out midtones and shadows. Lower values can dull highlights.

4.	Enter a Contrast value from -100 to 100. Increasing contrast moves the color values of pixels to the extremes of the brightness spectrum. Decreasing contrast moves color values toward medium gray.

5.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.


Color Balance command

The Color Balance command lets you adjust color in shadows, mid-tones, and highlights. You can use it with paint objects in CMYK Color or RGB Color modes.

To adjust image color

1.	Select one or more paint objects to adjust all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Color Balance.

3.	Click Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights to select the tonal range you want to adjust. You can set the color levels independently for each tonal range.

4.	Drag a slider toward a color label to increase the amount of that color. The letters indicate the primary color values: Cyan, Red, Magenta, Green, Yellow, and Blue. When you increase the amount of a color, you also reduce its inverse, which is the color labeled at the other end of the slider.

5.	Click Preview to preview the color adjustments. Preview is available when a single paint object is in edit mode.

6.	Click OK to apply the settings.


Color Equalization command

You can graphically adjust the saturation of different color ranges with the Color Equalization command. This command lets you add or remove gray from various color ranges.

This command works with paint objects in RGB Color mode, CMYK Color mode, and LAB Color mode.

To use the Color Equalization command

1.	Select one paint object to adjust. Or, place a paint object in edit mode. You can select an area in the image to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Chose Image > Adjust > Color Equalization.

3.	Drag the bars in the color equalizer window to change the saturation of the various color ranges:

•	To increase the saturation of a color range, drag the bar toward the top of the window.

•	To decrease the saturation of a color range, drag toward the bottom of the window.

•	To increase the saturation of all colors, click Saturate. To decrease the saturation of all colors, click Desaturate.

•	Click Normalize to return all colors to their original saturation.

4.	When you finish adjusting saturation settings, click OK.


Hue/Saturation command

You can modify the tint and purity of colors with the Hue/Saturation command. Hue is the basic color characteristic, described by a color name such as red or green. Saturation refers to the amount of gray in a color.

The Hue/Saturation command can be used with CMYK Color, RGB Color, or Lab Color images.

To use Hue/Saturation

1.	Select one or more paint objects. With one paint object in edit mode, you can select an area to adjust.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Hue/Saturation.

3.	Click an option to specify the color range to adjust, or click Master to affect all colors equally.

•	If Colorize is selected, these options aren’t available.

4.	To change the hue, enter the degrees of change in the Hue box. Negative values indicate a counter-clockwise shift around the color wheel; positive values indicate a clockwise shift. For example, with the Master option selected, setting Hue to 60 changes red to magenta, magenta to blue, blue to cyan, and so on.

•	If Colorize is selected, the effect of entering positive and negative Hue values is reversed.

5.	To adjust saturation, type a saturation amount from -100 to 100 in the Saturation box, or drag the slider. Positive values decrease the amount of gray in the selected colors. Negative values increase the amount of gray. For example, enter a saturation value of -100 to change red to gray. Enter a value of 100 to make red completely saturated.

6.	To adjust lightness, type a value from -100 to 100 in the Lightness box, or drag the slider. Positive values increase the amount of white in the color range. Negative values decrease the amount of white.

7.	Select the Preview options to see the effect of the current settings. To apply the settings and close the dialog box, click OK.

To colorize an image

The Colorize option lets you tint an image with a selected color by applying the same hue and saturation to all pixels that are not 100 percent black or white. The Colorize option does not affect the lightness levels of pixels.

1.	Select the Colorize option.

2.	Enter a value from -180 to 180 degrees in the Hue text box. For example, enter 120 to tint with green.

3.	Enter a value in the Saturation text box or drag the slider.

4.	To apply the current settings and close the dialog box, click OK.


Desaturate command

You can use the Desaturate command to remove color while retaining relative brightness levels.

Desaturate works with paint objects in RGB Color mode, CMYK Color mode, and LAB Color mode.

To desaturate

1.	Select one or more paint objects, or select an area in one image.

2.	Choose Image > Adjust > Desaturate.


Crop command

You can adjust the overall size of an image using the Crop command.

When you enlarge an image, Canvas adds white pixels. When you reduce an image, Canvas crops out pixels and discards the image data.

1.	Select a paint object (not in edit mode) and choose Image > Area > Crop. A dialog box displays the current size, width, and height.

2.	Under New Size, enter the size you want the image to be. You can use percent, pixel, inch, centimeter, point, or pica values.

3.	To set the position of the resulting image, click a square in the Placement grid. For example, to crop the image from the right side and bottom, click the upper-left square in the Placement grid. To expand the image on all sides, click the center square.

4.	Click OK to resize the image. If you are reducing the image area, Canvas warns you it will delete pixels; click OK to proceed.


Resolution command

You can use the Resolution command to change the resolution of paint objects in two ways:

•	If you do not want to change an object’s size, you can resample the image. Resampling merges or divides pixels.

•	If you want to preserve all the data in an image, you can change the object’s resolution and allow its size to change.

Using the Resolution command

The Resolution dialog box has compact and expanded states. In its compact state, you can easily change the resolution of multiple paint objects without needing to specify additional options.

Note: When more than one paint object is selected (unless the objects are the same size and resolution), the button that displays additional options in the Resolution dialog box is not available.

To change resolution by resampling

This procedure reduces resolution of paint objects for use on a web page or in a presentation.

1.	Select one or more paint objects. These objects can vary in size and resolution.

2.	Choose Image > Area > Resolution. The Image Resolution dialog box appears in its compact state.

3.	To specify resolution, select pixels per inch or pixels per centimeter and enter the resolution value in the text box.

4.	Click OK. Canvas changes the resolution of the selected objects, which remain the same size.

To change resolution without resampling

Use this procedure to change the resolution of paint objects without resampling. This changes the size of objects while preserving the image data.

1.	Select one or more paint objects and choose Image > Area > Resolution.

2.	In the Image Resolution dialog box, select Preserve Data. Enter the desired resolution in the text box and click OK. Canvas changes the resolution of the selected paint objects.

If you reduce resolution, paint objects become larger because the individual pixels are larger. If you increase resolution, paint objects becomes smaller because the individual pixels are smaller.

To calculate resolution

If only one object is selected, you can calculate an appropriate resolution based on a halftone screen frequency by clicking Auto in the Image Resolution dialog box. Enter the screen frequency and choose Draft, Good, or Best. Canvas calculates the resolution by multiplying the screen frequency by 1 (draft), 1.5 (good), or 2 (best). Click OK to enter the calculated resolution in the Image Resolution dialog box.

Related topic

Image Resolution settings


Image resolution settings

When you choose the Resolution command, you can use the following settings and options in the Image Resolution dialog box.

You can specify the resolution, width, and height for a selected paint object when the Image Resolution dialog box is expanded. You can expand the dialog box when a single paint object is selected; if multiple objects are selected, they must match in size and resolution.

Depending on the options you select, certain settings in the dialog box can’t be changed. A bracket and chain icon indicate settings that are linked and fixed.

Preserve Data: Prevents resampling, or interpolation, when resolution or size changes. Selecting Preserve Data also selects Preserve Proportions, so width and height can change only in proportion to each other.

Preserve Data means image resolution and size are relative; changing the resolution will change the object size, and changing the size will change the image resolution.

If you select Pixels in the Width and Height menus, you cannot change these values, because the number of pixels cannot change when Preserve Data is selected.

Width and Height: You can specify a size for the paint object by entering values in these text boxes. Select measurement units in the adjacent menus.

The width and height boxes show the size a paint object will become if you change the resolution when Preserve Data is selected.

Preserve Proportions: This option links the Width and Height values so that changing one value changes the other and maintains the original proportions of the paint object. Selecting Preserve Data also selects this option. If you want to stretch a paint object in only one direction, you must deselect Preserve Proportions.

To specify how Canvas approximates new pixels

When increasing the resolution of an image, Canvas uses a specified interpolation method to calculate the color values for pixels it adds to the image. You can use the Preferences command to change the interpolation method.

1.	Choose Preferences in the File menu and select the Painting tab in the Preferences dialog box.

2.	Select an option under Interpolation. For more information, see Painting preferences.

3.	Click OK to implement the settings.


Create command

The Create command creates new paint objects using the mode, size, resolution, and transparency settings that you specify.

You can use the Create command to create paint objects that are opaque or clear. Opaque paint objects are the same as paint objects in previous versions of Canvas. Clear paint objects let you see through unpainted areas. They are similar to transparent layers in image-editing programs such as Photoshop.

To create a paint object

1.	With no objects selected, choose Image > Area > Create.

2.	In the Create Image dialog box, set the image mode, type of background, background color (for an opaque image), size, and resolution of the image.

3.	Click OK. The new paint object appears in the center of the view and is selected.

Setting paint object dimensions

When you use the Create command, you can set the dimensions of a paint object using relative or absolute values, depending on what you choose in the pop-up menus next to the Width and Height text boxes.

If you choose pixels to set the dimensions of the paint object, the size of the object is relative to its resolution; higher resolution makes pixels smaller, so the resulting object is smaller at the same width and height values.

If you choose inches, centimeters, picas, or points, you can enter absolute values for the paint object’s dimensions.

Create options

These options appear in the Create Image dialog box:

File Size: The amount of memory required by the paint object, based on resolution, size, and image mode. Black & White mode requires the least memory; CMYK Color requires the most.

Mode: Choose an image mode.

Background: Choose Transparent or Opaque. Opaque creates an image filled with opaque pixels. You can select a color from the adjacent palette or specify a custom color.  Transparent creates a clear image with a visibility mask. When you choose this option, the color palette is not available.

Width and Height: Type the paint object’s width and height. In the adjacent menus, choose pixels and enter relative dimensions, or choose a unit of measurement and enter absolute dimensions.

Res.: Enter the image resolution. Choose pixels per inch or pixels per centimeter in the adjacent menu.

Auto: Click Auto to calculate the resolution based on halftone screen frequency.


Render command

Rendering converts objects into paint objects. For example, you can use the Render command to create a paint object from text, and then use the Airbrush tool to paint highlights on the image of the text.

You can create paint objects by rendering selected vector objects, text objects, and group objects. You can render a paint object to create a new paint object that has different characteristics than the original.

To render objects

1	Select one or more objects and choose Image > Area > Render. If you select multiple objects, they will be rendered as one paint object.

2.	The Render Image dialog box lets you specify resolution and other settings for the resulting paint object. Click OK to render the selection.

Canvas creates a paint object containing an image of the original objects. The paint object appears in front. The Render command does not change the original selected objects.

Pasting into images

You can render objects by copying them to the Clipboard and then pasting them into paint objects in edit mode. When an image is in edit mode and you paste into it, the Clipboard content is rendered and appears as a selection in the image.

If you select the “Anti-aliased Clipboard” option in the Preferences dialog box, Canvas anti-aliases vector and text objects that you paste into paint objects.

Rendering exported files

If necessary, Canvas renders selected objects or an entire document when you use the Save As command to export to a raster file format. For example, if you select vector objects, and then save in GIF format, Canvas renders the selected objects because GIF files store raster images.

When Canvas is saving a file, some options might not be available in the Render Image dialog box because the file format doesn’t support them.

Render Image settings

When you use the Render command, you can specify image mode, resolution, and other settings in the Render Image dialog box.

Dimensions: Displays the width and height of the paint object Canvas will create.

Choose the measurement for the Width and Height values in the Dimension area: inches, centimeters (cm), points, or picas.

Mode: Choose the color mode for the resulting image: Black & White, Grayscale, Indexed Color, RGB Color, CMYK Color, or LAB Color.

Width and Height: Enter the pixel dimensions for the paint object. When you change a value, Canvas adjusts the others to maintain the size and proportions of the original objects.

Res.: Choose pixels per inch or pixels per centimeter in the pop-up menu. The value shown after “Size” is the amount of data in the image, based on the mode, resolution, and dimensions.

Anti-Alias: Blurs edges while rendering to make the edges of text characters and vector objects appear smoother in the resulting image. Choose Fine, Medium, or Coarse.

Coarse uses 16 shades for anti-aliasing and is the fastest option. Medium uses 64 shades for anti-aliasing. Fine uses 256 shades for anti-aliasing.

Mask: Select this option if you want the resulting paint object to have a visibility mask or a channel mask. Then choose the type of mask.

•	Transparency creates a channel mask. The channel mask is based on the silhouette of the rendered objects. If there are spaces between the objects, the channel mask will create transparent spaces.

•	Visibility creates a visibility mask in the paint object. The result is a clear background in areas not covered by objects.

If you do not select Mask, areas not filled by rendered objects within the paint object’s bounding rectangle will be white and opaque. If you select Mask and either Transparency or Visibility, areas that are not filled by rendered objects will be transparent.


Trim command

Use the Trim command to remove borders around an image.

The Trim command removes same-color pixels at the edge of an image. Trim can remove unwanted white space or other borders that are not part of the main image.

Canvas alerts if an image can’t be trimmed because it cannot identify a border.

To trim an image

1.	Select one or more paint objects to trim.

2.	Choose Image > Area > Trim. Canvas removes a solid border around the image.


Auto Trace command

You can use the Auto Trace command to create vector objects from an image.

The Auto Trace command traces any channel of an image. The command is available when a paint object is selected (not in edit mode).

When Canvas auto-traces a channel, it leaves the original image unchanged. Canvas applies the current stroke to the resulting vector objects. When the tracing is complete, you can move the vector objects away from the image.

Canvas auto-traces high-resolution images better than low-resolution images. Auto-tracing an image with a resolution lower than 300 ppi can produce jagged paths.

To auto-trace an image

1.	Select a paint object to trace and choose Image > Auto Trace.

2.	In the Auto Trace dialog box, choose the channel to trace from the Channel menu. The menu lists the channels contained in the image, including alpha channels.

3.	Select other settings to use for tracing, and then click OK to trace the selected channel.

Customizing settings for auto-tracing

You can tell Canvas to use polygons or Bézier curves to trace an image by clicking a radio button in the Auto Trace dialog box. Tracing with polygons results in the most precise trace, but sometimes causes a jagged effect. Tracing with curves results in fewer anchor points and smoother shapes.

Adjusting sensitivity for Bézier curve tracing

When you use the Béziers option for auto-tracing, you can adjust how closely curves follow the image with the Loose-Tight slider. Drag the slider toward Tight for more exact tracing with more anchor points. Drag the slider toward Loose for a looser tracing with fewer anchor points.

Auto-trace options

Choose this option	To do this	For this tracing
Centerline	Trace one line through the middle of large solid areas instead of tracing along the edges.	Béziers and Polygons
Corners	Create corner points that let you modify one curve segment without affecting the other. Use the Round-Sharp slider to control the corner sensitivity.	Béziers
Filter	Prevent the tracing of small, random elements, such as tiny lines and dots.	Béziers and Polygons
Fixed end	Align the trace with the endpoints of the image.	Béziers
Smooth	Trace without corner points when the Corners option is off. If Smooth and Corners are on, angles within the specified sharpness are traced as corner points.	Béziers
To save custom auto-trace configurations

Canvas provides several preset trace configurations that you can choose from the Auto Trace pop-up menu. You can also save your own tracing configurations so you can use the same settings again.

1.	Click an image with the Selection tool to select it.

2.	Choose Auto Trace in the Image menu. In the Auto Trace dialog box, configure the options you want to save.

3.	Click Save Settings and type a name for the configuration in the dialog box that appears.

4.	Click Save. The name of the configuration will appear in the presets pop-up menu.

To delete custom auto-trace configurations

You can permanently remove configurations from the Auto Trace pop-up menu.

1.	Click an image with the Selection tool to select it.

2.	Choose Remove Settings from the pop-up menu in the Auto Trace dialog box.

3.	Select the configuration you want to remove from the presets pop-up menu and click OK to delete the configuration.


Calculate command

Use the Calculate command for manipulating the channels of an image. You can combine image channels to adjust the shadows and highlights or create effects such as type embossed in an image.

The Calculate command combines corresponding pixels from two channels by the method you choose. You can place the result in a new or existing channel.

To combine channels

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Calculate in the Image menu.

2.	In the Source 1 pop-up menu, choose the first channel. If you want to invert the channel, turn on Invert.

3.	In the Source 2 pop-up menu, choose the channel you want to combine with the first channel. If you want to invert the channel, turn on Invert.

4.	In the Blending area, choose a method from the Use pop-up menu.

5.	Enter an opacity from 0 to 100 percent for Source 1.

6.	If you want to mask Source 1, turn on Mask in the Blending area. Then choose a channel from the pop-up menu. To invert the mask, turn on Invert in the Blending area.

7.	Choose a destination channel in the Result pop-up menu. By default, Canvas creates a new channel. However, you can use an existing channel. If you select an existing channel, Canvas replaces all contents of the existing channel with the results of the calculation.

8.	Turn on the Preview option to check the results of the calculation. When the settings are correct, click OK.


Show Channels command

To open the Channels palette, choose Image > Show Channels.

You can use the Channels palette to create, duplicate, and delete channels; to change channel options; to make selections by loading channels; and to work with channel masks.

•	The Channels palette displays the channels of a paint object that is in edit mode.

•	The palette displays the channels of any object that has a channel mask and is in mask edit mode.

Composite channel

Select the first channel in the palette to make all color channels visible and active. Paint objects in CMYK Color, RGB Color, and LAB Color modes have composite channels. The channel is labeled “CMYK” for a CMYK Color image, “RGB” for an RGB Color image, and “LAB” for a LAB Color image.

Paint objects in Indexed, Grayscale, Black & White, and Duotone modes have single channels. A vector object that has a channel mask has an “object channel.”

Color channels

Color channels appear below the composite channel in the Channels palette. Color channels store the color data in an image. The image mode determines the number of color channels. CMYK Color images have Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black color channels. RGB Color images have Red, Green, and Blue color channels. LAB Color images have “A” and “B” color channels and a Lightness channel. Multichannel images have numbered channels that contain grayscale pixels only.

Alpha channels

Alpha channels contain grayscale pixels that represent a selection. Any paint object can have alpha channels. However, paint objects in Black & White mode must have a channel mask before they can contain alpha channels.

You can drag an alpha channel into the channel mask slot to create a channel mask.

Channel mask

A special channel you can add to any object, a channel mask contains grayscale pixels that represent transparency. Drag a color or alpha channel to the channel mask slot to create a channel mask.

You can drag a channel mask into the channel list to copy it into a new alpha channel.

Viewing previews

To view previews in the Channels palette, choose Palette Options in the palette’s pop-up menu. Click the size of the preview you want to display, or click None. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Channels palette options

Active channels are shaded. Editing affects the active channels only. To make a channel active, click the channel name.

An eye indicates that a channel is visible. If a channel is not visible, click or drag in the column to make it visible.

Floating Opacity: If a selection is floating, drag the slider to change the opacity of the selection.

Mode: If a selection is floating, select a mode from the menu. The default mode is Normal.

Deleting channels: Drag channels to the trash to delete them. You cannot delete color channels.

Preserve Visibility: Select this option to preserve the transparency of clear and partially transparent pixels when you edit an image. If a paint object doesn’t have a visibility mask, this option is not available.

Related topics

Creating and deleting channels

Customizing alpha channels

Activating channels


Creating and deleting channels

Canvas provides several methods for creating and deleting channels. You can specify more options by using the commands from the Image Channels pop-up menu, located in the lower, right corner of the Image Channels palette. However, you can also use the short-cut buttons in the Image Channels palette to create a new channel with default settings or delete an alpha channel from the palette.

To create a new channel

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, open the Channels palette by choosing Image > Show Channels in the Image menu.

2.	Select New Channel from the pop-up menu (under the triangle button).

3.	Select options for the new channel. See Customizing alpha channels.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

Deleting alpha channels

Although Canvas can store up to 24 channels in an image, you might want to delete unnecessary ones to save memory and disk space. However, you cannot delete composite channels.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Show Channels in the Image menu to open the Image Channels palette.

2.	Drag the alpha channel you want to delete to the trash can icon at the lower-right corner of the palette.


Customizing alpha channels

You can change the name, color indication, and opacity of an alpha channel in the Channel Options dialog box. By default, Canvas numbers alpha channels, sets them at 50% opacity, and assigns a color to masked areas.

Canvas provides the color and opacity settings in the Channel Options dialog box only as visual aids. These settings do not affect the original image or channel.

To specify channel options

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Image > Show Channels to open the Channels palette.

2.	Do one of the following to open the Channel Options dialog box:

•	Double-click an alpha channel.

•	Click an alpha channel and select Channel Options in the pop-up menu at the lower-right corner of the palette.

3.	After adjusting the options you want to change, click OK.

The following options can be changed in the Channel Options dialog box:

Name: To rename the alpha channel, type a label in the Name text box.

Color Indicates: If you want white areas to indicate selected pixels, choose Masked Areas. Otherwise, choose Selected Areas.

Color: To change the tint of the alpha channel, select a hue from the Color pop-up menu. You can see this tint when two or more channels are visible.

Opacity: To change the opacity of the channel, enter a value from 1 to 100% in the Opacity text box.


Activating channels

To edit a channel, click the channel name in the Channels palette to make it active. Canvas shades the active channel. Painting tools and filters affect active channels only.

You can make more than one channel active by Shift-clicking the channels.

To make a channel visible but not active, click the left column to make an eye icon appear.

To make all color channels visible and active, click the composite channel at the top of the palette.


Export submenu
Export image commands

The Image > Export submenu lists the file formats you can use to export a selected paint object.

You can use the Export commands when one paint object is selected. Export commands are not available to export vector objects, text, or multiple paint objects. To save these objects, use the Save As command.

Image file formats support certain image modes. If a file format is not available in the Export submenu, it doesn’t support the mode of the selected paint object.

Related topic

Exporting images


Blur submenu

The Blur submenu in the Image menu contains filters for softening the appearance of images.

Blur filters soften images by decreasing the contrast between neighboring pixels.

To use the Blur filter

1.	Select one or more paint objects to blur all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to blur the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected. This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode or Indexed mode.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Blur > Blur.

Comparing Gaussian and Average blurs

You can control more of a softening effect by using the Gaussian Blur or Average Blur filters. Their effects are similar, but the Gaussian Blur filter does not affect an image as strongly as the Average Blur filter.

The Gaussian Blur filter changes the color value of each pixel by applying a weighted average based on the color values of pixels within a specified distance. Color values at the outer edge of the specified distance influence the final color value less than closer pixels.

The Average filter determines the new color value for each pixel by equally averaging all color values within the specified radius.

To apply a Gaussian Blur or Average Blur

1.	Select one or more paint objects to blur all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to blur the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected. This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode or Indexed mode.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Blur > Gaussian Blur, or Image > Filter > Blur > Average Blur.

3.	Specify a radius value from 0.1 to 250 in the dialog box. Smaller radius values produce more subtle effects than larger ones.

4.	After entering the setting you want, click OK.

Depending on the size of the radius, applying a Gaussian or Average blur can take longer than other Blur filters.


Motion Blur filter

With the Motion Blur filter, you can create the effect of linear movement. The filter simulates blurring of a moving object that is photographed with a slow exposure. You can specify the direction and magnitude of the effect.

This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode, Indexed mode, and Duotone mode.

To apply motion blur

1.	Select one or more paint objects to blur all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to blur the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Blur > Motion Blur. Adjust the settings in the Motion Blur dialog box, and then click OK to apply the filter and close the dialog box.

Motion Blur settings

Direction: Establishes the angle of the blur and the object “movement.” Enter a value from -90 to 90 degrees. You can drag the slider or drag the solid dot inside the circle to set the Direction value. A value of 0 degrees creates a horizontal blur; 90 degrees creates a vertical blur.

Distance: The magnitude of the blur. Enter a number from 1 to 999, or drag the slider to set the Distance. A lower number creates less blurring.

Phase: Establishes the apparent direction of movement by creating a blurred trail that follows the object. Enter a number from -100 to 100 or drag the slider to set the Phase. Negative numbers create apparent movement up and to the right. Positive numbers create apparent movement down and to the left.

Preview: Displays the current effect before you apply the filter to the image.


Radial Blur filter

With the Radial Blur filter you can create the effect of circular movement in an image, similar to a long-exposure photograph of a spinning subject.

This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode, Indexed mode, and Duotone mode.

To apply radial blur

1.	Select one or more paint objects to blur all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to blur the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2 Choose Image > Filter > Blur > Radial Blur. Adjust the settings in the Radial Blur dialog box, and then click OK to apply the filter.

Radial Blur settings

Spin: Controls the magnitude of the apparent rotation in the image. Type a number from 1 to 100 or drag the slider to set the value. Or, drag the solid area inside the circle. Drag clockwise to simulate slower rotation; drag counterclockwise to simulate faster rotation and produce more blurring.

Quality: Higher quality creates a smoother image but takes more time. The quality differences become more pronounced when the image is enlarged or printed on standard size paper.

Select Draft for the fastest redraw. Select Good for average redraw speed and quality. Select Best when image quality is most important.

Centering options: These options let you set the rotation origin.

Center In Image sets the origin at the center of the image.

Center in Selection sets the origin at the center of a selection.

“Offset from Center in Pixels” lets you type values to offset the origin from the center of the image or selection. Type vertical and horizontal offset amounts in pixels in the text boxes. Negative horizontal offsets move the center to the left. Negative vertical offsets move the center up. Positive horizontal offsets move the center to the right. Positive vertical offsets move the center down.

Preview: Displays the current effect before applying the filter.


Zoom Blur filter

The Zoom Blur filter can create the effect of movement in an image, as if the scene were moving rapidly toward or away from the observer. The filter blurs along an axis perpendicular to the image.

You can specify the depth, direction, and smoothness of the blur effect.

This command doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode, Indexed mode, and Duotone mode.

To apply zoom blur

1.	Select one or more paint objects to blur all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to blur the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Blur > Zoom Blur. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, and then click OK to apply the filter.

Zoom Blur settings

Span: Sets the depth, (length) of the zoom effect. Type a number from 1 to 100 or drag the slider to set the value. A larger number simulates a greater zoom depth and a more blurred effect.

Zoom In/Out: Establishes the direction of the blur effect toward or away from the viewer. Type a number from -100 to 100 or drag the slider to set the value. Negative numbers make the image appear to move closer; positive numbers make the image appear to move away.

Smoothness: Controls the quality of the transition of the blur effect. Type a number from 1 to 10 or drag the slider to set the value. A smaller number creates a smoother blur with fine color blending.

Centering options: These options let you set the zoom origin.

Center In Image sets the origin at the center of the image.

Center in Selection sets the origin at the center of a selection.

“Offset from Center in Pixels” lets you type values to offset the origin from the center of the image or selection. Type vertical and horizontal offset amounts in pixels in the text boxes. Negative horizontal offsets move the center to the left. Negative vertical offsets move the center up.

Positive horizontal offsets move the center to the right. Positive vertical offsets move the center down.

Preview: Displays the current effect before applying the filter.


Noise submenu

In images, “noise” refers to randomly-colored pixels. Noise can detract from an image, but it can also be used for artistic effects. For example, you can apply noise to computer-generated graphics to make them appear more photographic. You can also use filter that removes noise to minimize the appearance of tiny scratches or other artifacts present in original source material or introduced during digitizing.

To add noise to selections

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filters > Noise > Add Noise in the Image menu.

2.	Enter an amount from 1 to 999 to specify how far the color of the noise can vary from the original color.

3.	Choose the Uniform or Gaussian distribution option:

•	Choose Uniform to apply colors randomly picked within the Amount specified. Canvas evenly distributes the color of the noise across a range of colors. This option gives the smoothest effect.

•	If you want the noise to favor lighter and darker colors within the specified range, choose the Gaussian option. This option creates a more pronounced effect than Uniform.

4.	If you want all added noise to be different brightness levels of the original color, turn on the Monochromatic option.

5.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

Removing noise from selections

You can remove noise from an image or selection using the Median, Despeckle, or Dust and Scratches filters. The Median filter removes noise by averaging the color of pixels. The Despeckle and Dust and Scratches filters remove noise by selectively blurring regions of the selection.

To use the Median filter

On a pixel-by-pixel basis, the Median filter applies the median color value of all pixels within the specified radius. Although the filter ignores extreme values in its computations, higher radius values can still wash out an image.

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filter > Noise > Median in the Image menu.

2.	Type a value from 1 to 16 in the Radius text box, or drag the slider. Smaller radius values produce subtler effects.

3.	After entering the setting you want, click OK.

To use the Despeckle filter

The Despeckle filter can remove defects such as dust and other speckling in images.

Despeckle works with all images except Black & White and Indexed mode images. The filter blends pixels with the lightness values of neighboring pixels.

It’s a good idea to select areas that need correction before applying the filter.

To apply the Despeckle filter

1.	Select one or more paint objects to adjust all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Noise > Despeckle.

3.	Drag the slider or type a number in the text box to set the Threshold value. Higher values produce greater blending of pixels.

To reduce dust and scratch marks

The Dust and Scratches filter can remove dust specks by replacing a pixel’s value with a median value. The filter does not change a pixel’s value unless the absolute value of the difference of its gray value and the median gray value of its neighborhood is greater than the Threshold.

Larger numbers of pixels are replaced by the median value when the Threshold is low. The practical effect of this is that larger pixel regions (larger “specks”) are reduced or removed with a lower Threshold. Therefore, you can use the Threshold to control the size of the artifacts you want to remove.

This filter doesn’t work with paint objects in Black & White mode or Indexed mode.

1.	Select one or more paint objects to adjust all the images. You can select an area in one image in edit mode to adjust the selected area only. If you don’t make a selection, the entire image in edit mode is affected.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Noise > Dust and Scratches.

3.	Enter a value from 1 to 16 in the Radius text box. Smaller radius values produce a subtler effect than larger ones.

4.	Type a value from 0 to 255 in the Threshold text box. Higher values make the filter less sensitive to contrast between pixels. After entering the settings you want, click OK.


Fill command

The Fill command fills a selection with the foreground or background color, or with black, white, or gray. You can set the opacity and transfer mode of the fill color.

To fill a selection with a color

1.	With an area of an image selected, choose Image > Filter > Other > Fill.

2.	In the Fill dialog box, choose a color to fill the selection with in the Use pop-up menu.

•	To make the color appear transparent, set the Opacity level to less than 100%.

•	To use a different transfer mode effect, choose an option in the Mode pop-up menu.

5.	Click OK to fill the selection.


Offset command

You can shift a selection in an image with the Offset command. Canvas fills the vacated area with color, duplicated pixels, or parts of the offset area.

To offset image areas

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select an image area. If you don’t make a selection, Canvas offsets the entire image.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Other > Offset.

3.	Enter horizontal and vertical offset amounts in pixels. The filter offsets selections to the right and down from the original location.

4.	Choose an option under Undefined Areas.

Choose this option	For this effect
Set to Background	Fills area with the background color
Repeat edge pixels	Duplicates edge pixels until they fill the area vacated by the offset
Wrap around	Moves pixels cut off by the offset into the vacated area

5.	To see the effect of the settings, turn on Preview. When the settings are correct, click OK.


High Pass command

The High Pass command lets you isolate high-contrast edges in an image by removing low-contrast detail. The filter makes pixels located in low-contrast areas gray. In color images, the High Pass filter outlines high-contrast edges in color. Otherwise, it outlines these edges in dark gray.

To apply the High Pass filter

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select an area. If you don’t make a selection, Canvas filters the entire image.

2.	Choose Filter > Other > High Pass in the Image menu.

3.	Enter a radius from 0.1 to 250 pixels. If you want the High Pass filter to retain more of the original image surrounding high-contrast edges, enter a high number. If you enter a low number, the filter makes more of the image gray.


Maximum and Minimum commands

You can increase or decrease light areas in an image with the Maximum and Minimum filters. The Maximum filter spreads light areas into the shadows. The Minimum filter shrinks light areas.

When you apply these filters, Canvas compares a pixel to each of its neighbors within the radius you specify, and then replaces it with the lightest or darkest pixel in the group.

To use the Minimum and Maximum filters

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select an image area. If you do not make a selection, Canvas filters the entire image.

2.	To maximize the light areas in an image, choose Filter > Other > Maximum in the Image menu and enter a radius from 1 to 10 pixels.

3.	To minimize the light areas in an image, choose Filter > Other > Minimum in the Image menu and enter a radius from 1 to 10 pixels.

4.	Turn on Preview to check the settings and then click OK.


Custom command

You can create your own special-effect and image-correcting filters using the Custom command. You can also save these custom filters to disk and use them in future Canvas documents.

Filters work with an image one pixel at a time. Using a mathematical formula and the color values of pixels within a specified radius, filters assign each pixel a new color value. In a custom filter, you supply the numbers the filter uses to calculate the new color values.

The same filter can produce different effects in other images. To get the most out of custom filters, spend time experimenting.

To use Custom filters

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select an area of the image. If you don’t make a selection, Canvas filters the entire image.

2.	Choose Filter > Other > Custom in the Image menu to open the Custom dialog box.

3.	In the configuration grid, type a value from -999 to 999 in as many boxes as you want. Canvas ignores blank text boxes.

4.	Enter a Scale value from 1 to 9,999.	To retain the general appearance of the original image, the scale should equal the sum of the entries in the configuration grid. For example :

Grid entries	Sum	Scale
2 2 1 -1 -1 3	2 + 2 + 1 - 1 - 1 + 3 = 6	6
-15 7 4 -3 2 8	- 15 + 7 + 4 - 3 + 2 + 8 = 3	3

5.	Enter an Offset value from -9,999 to 9,999. Positive values increase the brightness of the final outcome while negative values decrease the brightness.

6.	Turn on the Preview option to check the filter effect. When the settings are correct, click OK.

To save a custom filter

In the Custom dialog box, enter the filter settings and click Save. Enter a name and location for the filter and click OK.

To load a custom filter

In the Custom dialog box, click Load. In the dialog box that appears, locate the filter and click Open.


Render submenu

You can use the commands in the Render submenu in the Image menu to paint clouds and color spectrums in an image. The filters in the Render submenu apply forms or textures to an image.

Rendering clouds

You can apply texture to areas in an image, such as skies or walls, by applying the Clouds filter. The Clouds filter renders soft swirls of color using the foreground and background colors.

Note: The Clouds filter completely replaces the original image or selection.

To apply a swirl of color to an image

With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filter > Render > Clouds in the Image menu.

Rendering a color wheel

You can fill a selection with a radial blend of colors by choosing Filter > Render > Wheel in the Image menu. The rendered effect looks like the color wheel preview in the Hue/Saturation dialog box.

Unless you make a selection in the image, the Wheel filter replaces the entire image. If you want to apply a translucent wheel effect, follow the steps for the procedure “To render translucent clouds” above. In the seventh step, use the Wheel filter.


Sharpen submenu

The commands in the Sharpen submenu increase the contrast between adjacent pixels, which can make an image appear more distinct. The Sharpen filter modifies an image only slightly. The effect of the Sharpen More filter is about four times stronger than the Sharpen filter.

You can use the Sharpen Edges filter to make edges more distinct. This filter affects only high-contrast areas, leaving the rest of the image untouched.

The Unsharp Mask filter provides additional control over the sharpening effect. When you use the Unsharp Mask filter, you can specify the amount, radius, and threshold of the sharpening effect.

To sharpen an image

With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filter > Sharpen. Choose a filter from the Sharpen submenu.

To apply the Unsharp Mask filter

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filter > Sharpen > Unsharp Mask in the Image menu.

2.	Enter a number from 1 to 500 percent in the Amount text box. Enter a number less than 100 percent to sharpen the image slightly; enter a higher number for more dramatic sharpening.

3.	Enter a number from 0.1 to 250 in the Radius text box. This specifies how far from the filter will look to determine the new color value for the original pixel. Small Radius values focus the sharpening effect on high-contrast edges. Greater values spread the sharpening effect over a larger area.

4.	Enter a number from 0 to 255 in the Threshold text box. Enter 0 to filter all pixels. Enter a larger value to filter only high-contrast edges.

5.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.


Emboss command

You can make an image or image selection appear raised with the Emboss command. Embossing converts low-contrast areas to gray and accentuates high-contrast areas with color (or black and white if the image is grayscale) according to the placement of a theoretical light source.

To apply the emboss filter

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select the area of the image you want to emboss. If you don’t make a selection, the Emboss filter affects the entire image.

2.	Choose Filter > Stylize > Emboss in the Image menu. The Emboss dialog box appears. To preview the emboss effect before you apply it, click the Preview option.

3.	To make the image appear raised, enter an Angle from 0 to 360 in the Angle text box..

4.	To set the height of the effect, enter a height from 1 to 32 pixels. You can also set the Height and Angle simultaneously by dragging the handle on the dial.

5. 	Enter a number from 1 to 500 in the Amount text box. To retain more color along high-contrast borders, increase the Amount.

6. 	To apply the Emboss effect, click OK.


Solarize command

You can create surrealistic effects in an image by applying the Solarize command. This filter mimics a photographic darkroom procedure that exposes film to light during development.

You can solarize CMYK, RGB and Grayscale images. If you make a selection, Canvas filters only the selected pixels.

 To solarize an image

With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filter > Stylize > Solarize in the Image menu.


Trace Contour command

With the Trace Contour command, you can outline image areas that border a particular color. This filter makes color outlines if you are working with a color image, and black outlines if you are working with a grayscale image.

To use the Trace Contour filter

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, select the area you want to trace. If you don’t make a selection, Canvas filters the entire image.

2.	Choose Filter > Stylize > Trace Contour in the Image menu.

3.	Enter a Level from 0 to 255. The Trace Contour filter uses this brightness value to determine the areas to trace.

4.	Select Upper or Lower in the Edge area. To outline areas with higher brightness levels than the one specified, choose Upper. Choose Lower to outline areas with lower brightness levels.

5.	To see the effect of the settings, turn on Preview. When the settings are correct, click OK.


Ripple filter

With the Ripple filter you can create the impression of ripples in an image, like the ripples made by dropping a stone into smooth water.

By varying the controls in the Ripple dialog box, you can produce a range of effects in an image, from slight rippling to extreme distortion.

To apply the Ripple filter

1.	Select a paint object. To limit the effect to a particular area, select the area where you want to apply the filter. If you don’t make a selection, the filter affects the entire image.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Other > Ripple. Adjust the settings in the Ripple dialog box, and then click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box. To close the dialog box without changing the image, click Cancel.

Ripple settings

You can adjust the following settings in the Ripple dialog box.

Spin: The Spin value controls the effect of swirling the image around its center point. Type a number from -100 to 100 or drag the slider to set the amount and direction of spin. Positive numbers generate a clockwise spin; negative numbers generate a counter-clock-wise spin. Larger values (positive or negative) increase the amount of swirling. If Spin is zero, the filter creates no ripples in the image and none of the other controls produces an effect.

Frequency: The Frequency value affects the number of “waves” created in the image. Type a number from 0 to 50. A large number creates more small waves; a small number creates fewer large waves.

Clustering: The Clustering option can create interesting interference patterns in combination with some Frequency values. In general, Frequency values of 15 to 50 and Spin values of 25 and higher are most effective. You can enter a Clustering value of 0 to 30. The higher the Clustering value, the more interference ripples appear between the main waves.

Wave Decay: The Wave Decay value softens the effect of the Frequency setting by dampening or stretching the waves away from the center of the image. The closer a wave is to the center of the image, the less it is stretched. Wave Decay creates the impression of blending the waves farthest from the center of the disturbance, especially when Include Corners is selected.

Enter a Wave Decay value of 0 to 100. The higher the value, the more the waves appear stretched toward the edge of the image.

High Frequency: The High Frequency option causes an approximate doubling of the effect of the Frequency setting.

Bullseye Mode: Selecting Bullseye Mode leaves rings of unchanged original image area between the wave distortions. This creates a pattern of concentric rings like those surrounding the bull’s-eye of a target. This mode can provide a means of integrating a recognizable version of the image with its distortion.

Include Corners: This option spreads the filter’s effects to the corners of an image or selection. If Include Corners is not selected, the effects are confined to a circular area at the center of the image or selection.

Preview: Select Preview to see the effects of the current settings before applying the filter to the image.


Twirl filter

The Twirl filter twists an image around its center to create interesting spiral distortions.

To apply the Twirl filter

1.	Select a paint object. To limit the effect to a particular area, select the area where you want to apply the filter. If you don’t make a selection, the filter affects the entire image.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Other > Twirl. Adjust the Angle set-tings in the Twirl dialog box. The Angle value specifies the direction and extent of the effect. Type a number in the box or drag the slider to set the Angle value. Higher numbers (positive or negative) create more twists around the center. A positive number twirls clockwise. A negative number twirls counter-clockwise.

3.	Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box. Select Preview to see the effects of the current settings before applying the filter to the image. To close the dialog box without changing the image, click Cancel.

No Anti-Alias: Turns off smoothing of edges in the image. Deselect this option for a smoother effect.


Spherize filter

The Spherize filter can distort an image to simulate a reflection on a curved surface.

To apply the Spherize filter

1.	Select a paint object. Make a selection if you want to limit the effect to a selected area. If you don’t make a selection, the filter affects the entire image.

2.	Choose Image > Filter > Other > Spherize. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, and then click OK to apply the filter.

Spherize settings

Amount: The extent of the distortion. Type a number from 1 to 10 or drag the slider to set the value. A higher number simulates a stronger curve.

Projection Mode: The shape of the distortion. Select Spherical/ Ellipsoid to simulate reflection on a spherical surface like a globe. Select Cylindrical to simulate reflection on a cylinder, such as a can. Select Horizontal to make cylindrical distortion horizontal. Select Vertical to make cylindrical distortion vertical. Select Hyperboloid to simulate reflection on a concave hyperboloid surface.

Vignette: Isolates the shape of a spherical distortion from the rest of the image. If the image has a visibility mask, the areas of the image that fall outside of the distorted area will be transparent. If the image does not have a visibility mask, the areas are filled with the current background color. You can use this option when Spherical/Ellipsoid is selected.

No Anti-Alias: Turns off smoothing of edges in the image. Deselect this option for a smoother effect.

Preview: Displays the current effect before you apply the filter to the image.


Video submenu

Use the Video submenu commands to smooth video images. Because video images contain two interlaced pictures, you can sometimes see a slight banding effect in images acquired from video-recording devices. You can correct this in Canvas by using the Deinterlace filter and then applying the Unsharp Mask filter.

To smooth video images

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Filters > Video > Deinterlace in the Image menu.

2.	Click Odd fields or Even fields to select bands to eliminate.

3.	Choose a replacement method for the eliminated pixels:

•	Click Duplication to fill the area by inserting a copy of an adjacent band.

•	Click Interpolation to fill the area by inserting intermediate color values based on the color values of neighboring pixels. This option creates a smoother, more accurate fill than Duplication.

4.	After entering the settings you want, click OK.


View Histogram command

To display the histogram of the current image or selection, choose Image > Filter > View > Histogram.

A histogram plots the relative number of pixels in each brightness level in an image. Shorter bars indicate fewer pixels and higher bars indicate more pixels for each brightness level along the histogram graph.


Mode commands

Use the commands in the Mode submenu to change the mode of selected paint objects. A paint object’s mode affects the color model used to define the image.

When you create a paint object, you choose the image mode. When you select a paint object, Canvas displays the mode name at the right end of the Status bar.

You can use Black & White, Grayscale, Duotone, Indexed, RGB Color, CMYK Color, Lab Color, and Multichannel modes.

You can change the image mode at any time. For example, you might convert an RGB image to Grayscale mode, and then convert to Duotone mode to create a duotone image.

Some filters and effects are available in certain image modes. Many filters and image commands work only in RGB Color or CMYK Color modes.

To change the mode of an image

Select one or more paint objects and choose a mode in the Image > Mode submenu. . You can also choose a mode for a paint object in edit mode.

Some modes are available only if a paint object’s current mode is compatible. For example, you can choose Black & White mode and Duotone mode only when Grayscale paint objects are selected.

When you change modes, and the mode you choose doesn’t support all the colors in an image, Canvas asks you to confirm the change. Click OK in the message box to proceed.

Related topics

How Canvas assigns image modes

Image mode descriptions


Image mode descriptions

The following image mode descriptions include information on the number of colors and color model used in each mode.

Black & White

Black & White mode is appropriate for scanned line art and other “bitmap” images, in which pixels are only black or white. Black & White mode does not support shades of gray or anti-aliasing effects, and opacity controls aren’t available. Images in Black & White mode require the least amount of memory and disk space.

If you convert an image to Black & White mode, Canvas discards all color and brightness information.

To convert to Black & White mode

Grayscale mode images and Multichannel mode images are the only images you can convert to Black & White mode. If an image is not Grayscale, convert it to Grayscale mode first if you want to convert it to Black & White mode.

1.	Select the paint objects to convert and choose Image > Mode > Black & White. The Select Halftone Method dialog box lets you choose a conversion option.

2.	Select Pattern Dither, Diffusion Dither, or Threshold, and then click OK.

If you choose Pattern Dither or Diffusion Dither, Canvas “screens” the image, rendering its tones as patterns of tiny dots.

•	Pattern Dither screens an image using a fixed pattern similar to a traditional halftone screen.

•	Diffusion Dither screens an image using a process that creates a random pattern effect.

If you choose Threshold, Canvas converts the image to a high-contrast black-and-white image. Pixels of lightness values from 0 to 128 become black, and pixels of lightness values from 129 to 255 become white.

When you paste a selection into a Black & White image, Canvas uses diffusion dither on the selection.

Grayscale

Grayscale mode is appropriate for images scanned from black and white photographs. In Grayscale mode, pixels are assigned one of 256 brightness levels, ranging from pure black through grays to pure white. Because Grayscale mode uses 256 brightness levels (and hue information isn’t needed), it uses 8 bits of information per pixel and requires less memory than color modes that use 24 bits per pixel.

If you convert a color image to Grayscale mode, Canvas discards all color information.

Indexed

Indexed mode uses a palette of 256 colors that are selected from the full color spectrum. An Indexed mode image includes a color table or palette of the colors used in the image. When you convert an existing image to indexed mode, you specify the number of colors and their hues for the image’s color table.

Indexed mode is appropriate for images originating on computer screens and those that will be transmitted through on-line services or the Internet. If you capture a screen image and save the image as a file in Windows Bitmap (BMP) or PICT format, Canvas saves it as an Indexed mode image.

Indexed mode uses less memory than RGB Color or CMYK Color modes. Image filters and anti-aliasing effects are not available for indexed images.

RGB Color

RGB Color mode is used most often when working with high-quality full-color images, such as those from color scanners and digitized photographs stored on CD-ROM.

RGB Color mode is the most reliable mode to use for images you want to modify with painting tools and filters. However, the full range of RGB colors exceeds the range that commercial printing can reproduce, so you should be aware of the limitations of the printing method that will be used. Also, an RGB Color image is device dependent, which means that the same RGB values can look different when displayed on different monitors.

In RGB Color mode, each pixel has a red, green, and blue component. Each component, referred to as a color channel, has 256 intensity levels. The combination of the intensity value in each channel creates the pixel’s color.

CMYK Color

CMYK Color mode uses the color system of commercial process-color printing. CMYK mode is based on the four color inks used in commercial printing (and by some desktop printers): cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Some color scanners can produce CMYK images.

In a CMYK Color image, each pixel has a cyan, magenta, yellow, and black component. Each of these components, called color channels, has 256 intensity levels. The combination of the intensity value in each channel creates the pixel’s color. Because monitors are RGB devices, Canvas estimates how CMYK images will appear when printed.

LAB Color

The Commission Internationale d’Eclairage (CIE) developed the LAB color mode as an international color standard to overcome the device dependency of the RGB and CMYK modes. In a LAB Color image, each pixel has one lightness and two color components. The Lightness channel has 256 levels of intensity. The two color channels, labeled A and B, provide a color range from red to green and yellow to blue, respectively.

Some companies sell collections of images in LAB Color mode. LAB images have the benefit that their colors appear exactly the same on different computers as long as they are color-calibrated. Editing LAB images with some filters or painting tools might have interesting and unpredictable effects. However, by temporarily converting RGB or CMYK images to LAB mode, you can improve most images or scans in a few steps.

Duotone

A duotone image is a grayscale image saturated with one additional color. This color accents highlights, midtones, and shadows. By saturating Grayscale mode images with two or three additional colors, you can create tritones and quadtones.

Duotone images create more interesting effects than Grayscale images, and because duotone images require only two colors, they are less expensive to print than full-color images. You create a duotone, tritone, or quadtone by converting a Grayscale mode image. See To create a duotone image.

Multichannel

Multichannel image mode lets you work with multiple channels of grayscale information in a grayscale image. In Multichannel mode, each channel contains lightness values as in other image modes, but the values do not represent color components of the image.

When you convert an image to Multichannel mode, the image data does not change. For example, if you convert an RGB Color image to Multichannel mode, the Red, Green, and Blue channels retain the same pixel information, but the channels no longer represent color pixels.

The channels in Multichannel mode are labeled numerically (#1, #2, and so on) in the Channels palette.

The Multichannel mode is not available if you select a paint object containing an image in Black & White image mode.


Duotone command
To create a duotone image

1.	Select a Grayscale image and choose Image > Mode > Duotone. The Duotone Options dialog box opens.

2.	To specify the number of colors to use in the image, choose Monotone, Duotone, Tritone, or Quadtone in the Type pop-up menu.

3.	For each ink, choose a color in the pop-up menu. If you want to use a particular color, such as a PANTONE spot color, you must first add this color to the Inks palette.

4.	Give each color a name in the text box next to each ink. If you plan to convert Canvas illustrations to EPSF files that will be separated in another application, be sure that the names you specify in this dialog box exactly match the names you use for separations in the other application.

5.	To adjust the amount of color applied to different areas of luminance, click the box with a diagonal line next to each ink (the Transfer Curve box). This opens the Duotone Curve dialog box. Adjust the curve to achieve the effect you want.

6.	Click Overprint Colors to specify what color you want to use to represent specific combinations of the duotone inks. This changes the on-screen appearance only, and not the printed output. For example, you can specify that you want areas where Ink 1 and Ink 2 overlap to appear green.

7.	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the inks.

To edit the inks in a duotone image

Select the duotone image object and choose Mode > Duotone Inks in the Image menu. Use the Duotone Options dialog box as described above the edit the ink specifications.


Indexed command
Converting an existing image to indexed mode

1.	Select an image with the Selection tool.

2.	Choose Mode > Indexed in the Image menu. The Indexed Color dialog box appears.

3.	In the Palette area, choose a method for computing the color table:

Use this method	To create a color table
Exact	Using the same colors in the image, if the image contains 256 colors or less
Uniform/System	Using the operating system’s palette of 256 colors (System), or a subset of these colors (Uniform)
Adaptive	Based on the most frequently used colors in the image
Custom	Using colors that you specify (see below)
Previous	Using the same colors as the last indexed image created in the current Canvas session

For the Uniform method, you can specify the number of colors to include in the color table using the Colors pop-up menu. The options in this pop-up menu reflect subsets of the fixed 256-color system palette (if you choose 256, the Uniform option changes to System to show that you are using the complete palette). For the Adaptive method, Canvas suggests a number in the text box, which you can replace with a different value.

4.	Choose a color-distribution option in the Dither area:

None	Changes colors to their closest equivalent in the selected color table without dithering
Pattern	Estimates colors not in the palette by arranging palette colors in geometric patterns (available for Uniform/System method only)
Diffusion	Estimates non-palette colors by randomly dithering available colors; creates the most natural effect

5.	After choosing the settings you want, click OK to complete the mode change.


Color Table command
Creating a color table

If you choose to create a custom color table for the indexed image, Canvas opens the Color Table dialog box after you close the Indexed Color dialog box. In the dialog box is a 256-tile grid; each tile represents one color that is available for an indexed color image. The Table pop-up menu has a Custom option and  four preset tables that you can use to start building a custom color table.

Grayscale is a ramp from pure black to pure white.

Black Body is a range of sunset-like colors.

Macintosh System is the 256 standard colors of the Mac OS operating system.

Spectrum is a set of rainbow colors.

Web Browser is a set of 216 colors shared by the Mac OS and Windows operating systems. This color set was created for preparing images that will be used in world wide web pages.

Windows System is the 256 standard colors of the Windows 95 and Windows NT operating systems.

To customize a color table

Click a tile to open a color picker dialog box. Specify the color you want to add the table and click OK.

To add a range of colors to a color table

You can blend two colors to fill the tiles in the color table.

1.	Drag across multiple tiles to select them. The more tiles you select, the more gradual the blend will be. The color picker dialog box opens.

2.	Choose the first color and click OK. The color picker remains open; choose the second color and click OK. Canvas fills the selected tiles with a ramp of the two colors you selected.


How Canvas assigns image modes

When you import an image from another source, either by opening an image file or by pasting an image from another program, Canvas assigns an image mode based on the number of colors and the color model used in the image.

The following table shows the image modes that Canvas assigns when you import images in some common image formats.

Imported format	Assigned image mode
TIFF	RGB, CMYK or Grayscale
BMP	256-color image: Indexed 24-bit image: RGB
MacPaint	Black and White
Photoshop	Same as original image mode


Select submenu

The Select submenu commands let you make and work with image selections in paint objects.

You can use various method to select groups of pixels in an image. When you make a selection, Canvas protects the rest of the image so that painting tools and filters cannot affect it.

To select all pixels in an image

With a paint object in edit mode, choose Image > Select > All.

To deselect all pixels

Choose Image > Select > None.

If the selection is floating, press Esc to defloat the selection; then press Esc again to deselect the pixels.

Selection borders

When you make a selection in an image, you specify a group of pixels. To indicate selected pixels, Canvas surrounds them with a flashing border. You can hide this border without losing the selection.

Note: When you make selections in which some pixels are selected at less than 100% intensity, the flashing border does not surround the entire selected area. For example, if you make a selection based on a channel containing a blend from 100% to 0% brightness, the flashing border in the image would surround the pixels selected from 100% to 50% intensity, but not the pixels selected at 49% to 0% intensity.

To hide a selection border

Choose Image > Select > Hide Edges.

To view a selection border

Choose Image > Select > Show Edges in the Image menu.

Related topics

Color Range command

Feather command

Float and Defloat commands

Inverse command

Saving and loading selections


Inverse command

You can use the Inverse command to simultaneously select all pixels not in the current selection and deselect the current selection.

To select areas not included in the current selection

Choose Select > Inverse in the Image menu.


Color Range command

You can use the Color Range command to select all areas of similar color in an image. You can interactively select colors, or use one of the preset selection options.

The Color Range command creates a selection mask similar to an alpha channel. White areas indicate pixels selected at 100% opacity, and black areas indicate masked areas that you can’t edit.

To select a color range interactively

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Select > Color Range in the Image menu. In the Color Range dialog box, make sure that Sampled Colors appears in the Select pop-up menu.

2.	Adjust the Fuzziness setting. Lower settings make the color range narrower; for example, to select all pixels of exactly the same color, set the Fuzziness to 0.

3.	In the Color Range dialog box, click the preview image with a dropper from the dialog box. Canvas selects all pixels within the color range of the specified “fuzziness.”

4.	To add colors to the selection, click the ‘+’ dropper in the selection window of the Color Range dialog box.

5.	To remove colors from the selection, click the ‘-’ dropper in the selection window of the Color Range dialog box.

6.	Click OK to close the dialog box and make the selection.

To select areas using a preset color range

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Select > Color Range in the Image menu.

2.	In the Select pop-up menu, choose an option. You can select a color (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, or magenta), a tonal range (highlights, midtones, or shadows), or all colors that are outside the CMYK color gamut.

3.	Click OK to close the dialog box and make the selection.

To change views in the Color Range dialog box

1.	Choose the Selection or Image option to change the view of the image or selection in the dialog box:

Selection: To view the selected pixels in the preview window, click the Selection option in the Color Range dialog box. Gray areas indicate pixels that the Color Range command selects at a reduced opacity. Filters and painting tools affect these areas to a lesser degree.

Image: To view the original image in the preview window, click the Image option.

2.	To change how Canvas previews the selection in the document, choose an option in the Selection Preview pop-up menu.

None provides no preview.

Grayscale shows the selection in grays against a black background.

Black Matte shows the selection in color against a black background.

White Matte shows the selection in color against a white background.

Mask shows the selection in color against a red-tinted “mask.”


Feather command

The Feather command in the Select submenu lets you soften the edges of a selection. Feathering a selection means that the effect of commands or paint tools you apply to the selection will be less at the edge of the selection that at the center.

Often, its helpful to soften the edges of a selection so that it blends more naturally into the original image.

To feather a selection

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, make a selection and choose Image > Select > Feather.

2.	In the Feather dialog box, enter the radius in pixels. The larger the radius, the more Canvas softens the selection edge.

3.	After entering the setting you want, click OK.


Float and Defloat commands
Float command, Defloat command

You can move and manipulate floating selections without affecting the original image. You can also smooth the effect of filters or tools near the edges of a selection by first floating a copy of the selection.

When a selection is floating, it sits on an invisible plane above the original image. When you type text in an image or paste in an object from the Clipboard, Canvas makes it a floating selection. Moving a selection that is part of the original image creates a floating selection, but also leaves a cleared area in the original image.

To float a copy of a selection

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, make a selection.

2.	Do one of the following:

 •	Choose Select > Float in the Image menu.

 •	Option - drag (Mac) or Ctrl - drag (Windows) the selection with the Marquee or Lasso tools.

Making a floating selection part of the original

Deselecting a floating selection makes it part of the original image. You can deselect the floating selection by pressing Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) twice, or choosing Select > None in the Image menu.

To make the selection part of the image but still retain the floating selection, you can press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) once, or choose Select > Defloat in the Image menu.


Save and Load (selection) commands
Save (selection) command
Load (selection) command

You can save selections to disk so you can recall them later without re-creating them. Canvas saves selections as alpha Channels.

To save a selection

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, make a selection.

2.	Choose Image > Select > Save.

3.	Choose New in the Channel pop-up menu.

4.	In the Operation area, select New Channel and click OK. A new, numbered channel will appear in the Image Channels palette.

To load a saved selection using menu commands

1.	With a paint object in edit mode, choose Image > Select > Load.

2.	Select a name from the Channel pop-up menu.

3.	If you want to Invert the selection, turn on the Invert option. (You can achieve the same result by loading the selection, then choosing Image > Select > Inverse.)

4.	Choose one of the following options in the Operation area:

Option	Result
New Selection	Removes any current selections and creates a new selection
Add to Selection	Preserves the current selection
Subtract from Selection	Removes pixels from the current selection
Intersect with Selection	Creates a new selection composed of pixels that appear in both the current selection and the selection you are loading

5. 	After entering the settings you want, click OK.

To load a selection using shortcuts

You can drag a channel to the selection button (the button with a dotted circle on it) at the bottom of the palette, or drag the button to the channel you want to load. You can also Option-click (Mac) or Alt-click (Windows) a channel to load it.


Modifying selections

You can use the Expand, Contract, Smooth, and Border commands to modify selections in images.

These commands make it easy to fine-tune a selection by expanding or contracting the selection border by a specified number of pixels, or by adding or subtracting pixels based on color.

Expanding a selection

You can expand a selection by adding a specified number of pixels to the selection border.

To modify an active selection, choose Image > Select > Modify > Expand. Type a value in the Radius text box and click OK.

Contracting a selection

You can shrink a selection by subtracting a specified number of pixels from the selection border.

To modify an active selection, choose Image > Select > Modify > Contract. Type a value in the text box and then click OK. Canvas subtracts the specified area from the selection and the dashed border contracts.

Smoothing a selection

The Smooth command is useful after you have made a color-based selection that has left stray pixels inside or outside of the selected area. The Smooth command includes or eliminates the stray pixels to even out the selection. The value you type in the text box determines which pixels will be included or excluded in the selection at the border.

To modify an active selection, choose Image > Select > Modify > Smooth. Type a value in the text box and then click OK. Canvas adds or subtracts pixels to the perimeter of the selection based on the radius number of pixels you specified.

Bordering a selection

After you define a selection, you can select the area at the border of the selection by specifying an offset in pixels from the selection edge.

To border an active selection, choose Image > Select > Modify > Border. Type a value in the text box and click OK. Two dashed borders indicate the new selected area.


Grow command

The Grow and Similar commands let you expand selections to include similar colors in an image. These commands compare the colors outside a selection to the colors in the selection. Colors that are in a specified range of similar colors are added to the selection.

The Grow and Similar commands are available for all image modes except Black & White.

The Grow command selects similar colors that are contiguous to the current selection. The Similar command selects similar colors anywhere in the image.

The range of colors selected by Grow and Similar is based on the Tolerance setting in the Wand dialog box.

To select colors contiguous to the current selection: Choose Image > Select > Grow.

You can repeat the Grow and Similar commands to continue expanding a selection. As more colors are added to the selection, more colors are in the range of colors similar to the selection. Therefore, even though the Tolerance doesn’t change, repeating Grow or Similar can expand a selection incrementally.

Grow and Similar can help you isolate elements in an image, such as dark objects against a light background. Select part of one dark object with the Marquee tool. Choose Grow to expand the selection to the entire object. Choose Similar to expand the selection to all similar colors in the image.


Similar command

The Grow and Similar commands let you expand selections to include similar colors in an image. These commands compare the colors outside a selection to the colors in the selection. Colors that are in a specified range of similar colors are added to the selection.

The Grow and Similar commands are available for all image modes except Black & White.

The Grow command selects similar colors that are contiguous to the current selection. The Similar command selects similar colors anywhere in the image.

The range of colors selected by Grow and Similar is based on the Tolerance setting in the Wand dialog box.

To select colors throughout an image: Choose Image > Select > Similar.

You can repeat the Grow and Similar commands to continue expanding a selection. As more colors are added to the selection, more colors are in the range of colors similar to the selection. Therefore, even though the Tolerance doesn’t change, repeating Grow or Similar can expand a selection incrementally.

Grow and Similar can help you isolate elements in an image, such as dark objects against a light background. Select part of one dark object with the Marquee tool. Choose Grow to expand the selection to the entire object. Choose Similar to expand the selection to all similar colors in the image.


Arrange Icons command (Windows only)
Arrange Icons command (Windows)

Choose Window > Arrange Icons to line up the icons of minimized Canvas documents on your desktop.


Palettes submenu

You can use commands in the palette submenu to display or close the following palettes and interface items:

Docking Bar
Toolbar
Toolbox
Strokes palette
Inks palette
Transparency palette
Gallery palette.

To show a palette: Choose Window > Palettes > Show palette name.

To Hide a palette: Choose Window > Palettes > Hide palette name.

When palettes are floating, you can handle them like other windows. To move a palette, drag its title bar. To roll up a palette, double-click its title bar (Mac) or click the box at the right end of the title bar (Windows).

To roll up all palettes: Choose Window > Palettes > Clean Up Palettes. All open palettes roll up and move to the upper-right corner of the screen.

To close all palettes: Choose Window > Palettes > Put Away Palettes. Canvas closes all the open palettes.

To show or hide the Status bar (Mac only): Choose Window > Palettes > Hide Status Bar  or Window > Palettes > Show Status Bar.

To show or hide the Clipboard (Mac only): Choose Window > Palettes > Show Clipboard or Window > Palettes > Hide Clipboard.


Stack command

Choose Window > Stack to arrange all open Canvas documents so their title bars are visible and they create a cascading effect.


Tile command
Tile command (Mac)

Choose Window > Tile to arrange all open Canvas documents in a grid pattern. This command is available on Mac OS only


Tile Across command

Choose Window > Tile Across to arrange two or more open document windows side-by-side, as if in columns.


Tile Down command

Choose the Tile Down command in the Window menu to arrange two or more open document windows from top to bottom on the screen, as if in rows.


<Document Name>

The names of all open Canvas documents appear at the bottom of the Window menu. Choose one of these names to select the window and bring the document to the front.


Help menu

Help menu commands provide information about commands, tools, and procedures in Canvas. The Help menu is located next to the Window menu (Windows and Mac OS 8) or under the question mark in the menu bar (Mac System 7.5 and 7.6).

Contents

To view the contents of the Help system, choose Help > Contents. The Contents tab shows the Help topics arranged in books. Double-click a book icon to view the topics in the book. Double-click a topic page icon to view the topic.

If the Help welcome topic appears instead of the Contents tab, and at other times when you want to view the Contents tab, click the Contents button in the Help window.

About Canvas

Choose About Canvas in the Help menu (Windows) or Apple menu (Mac) to display the Canvas startup screen. This screen shows important information about the Canvas program, including the serial number, the registered user, the version, the amount of free memory, and other helpful data.

‘About Plug-in’ submenu

Choose an item in this submenu to display information about an individual plug-in filter or acquire module installed with Canvas. “About Plug-in” appears in the Apple menu (Mac) or the Help menu (Windows).

Related topics

Deneba Home Page

Search for Help on


Deneba Home Page command

The Deneba web site is a comprehensive resource for Canvas users. The site offers customer support and technical assistance, including a technical notes library, lists of answers to frequently asked questions, how-to explanations, tips and shortcuts, sample files, and updates. You can also find product information, place product orders, and register your products on-line.

To connect to the Deneba web site in Canvas

With Canvas running, choose Help > Deneba Home Page. Canvas launches your web browser and goes to the Deneba home page.

To connect to the Deneba web site any time, go to: http://www.deneba.com


Find Help On

Use the Find Help On command to search the index of Help topics.

Choose Help > Find Help On. The Index tab for the Help system appears. Type a word or phrase in the text box to find an index entry. The index list scrolls to the closest matching index entry.

Click Display to display the highlighted index entry, or double-click the entry in the list. If an index entry refers to more than one topic, a list of matching topics appears. Double-click the topic you want to display.

Keeping Help on top

If the Help window does not stay in front when you choose a topic, move the application window in front out of the way and click the Help Window. Then, choose Options > Keep Help On Top > On Top.


Apple Menu

While Canvas is active, the Apple menu lets you get information about Canvas. The Apple menu appears on systems running Mac OS.

About Canvas command

Choose About Canvas in the Help menu (Windows) or Apple menu (Mac) to display the Canvas startup screen. This screen shows important information about the Canvas program, including the serial number, the registered user, the version, the amount of free memory, and other helpful data.

About Plug-Ins submenu

Choose an item in the About Plug-Ins submenu in the Apple menu to display information about the individual plug-in filters or acquire modules that you have installed with Canvas.


Paste Into

The Paste Into command pastes the Clipboard contents into a selection in an image. This includes a selection in an image channel or a channel mask attached to an object.

The Paste Into command pastes anything that you copy to the Clipboard, including a vector, text, or paint object, an image selection, or a segment of a vector object.

You can use Paste Into to composite images and create effects that would otherwise be difficult to produce. For example, to simulate a picture on a television screen in a photograph, you can select the screen area and paste an image into the selection. You can move the pasted image within the selection to adjust the area that you see.

You can paste transparent objects into opaque images, or opaque objects into transparent images. The background of the image determines the opacity of the pasted selection.

To paste into a selection

1.	Place an object or selection on the Clipboard by choosing Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.

2.	Make a selection in an image (or a channel mask), and choose Edit > Paste Into. The Clipboard contents appear in the selection.

3.	You can drag the pasted item or press the arrow keys on the keyboard to move it, to display the areas you want to see. When you finish adjusting the selection, deselect it to merge it into the image.


Layers & Sheets submenu

Use the commands in the Layers & Sheets submenu in the Layout menu to work with the sheets (pages) and layers of an Illustration document.

To create new sheets: Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Insert Sheets. In the dialog box, type the number of sheets to insert and specify the location, and then click OK.

To delete sheets: Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Delete Sheets. In the dialog box, type the number of sheets to remove, and then click OK.

When you specify an item to remove, use the item’s actual sequence number, not its name.

To go to a specific sheet: Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Go To Sheet. Type a number in the dialog box and click OK.

To change sheets: Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Next Sheet or Previous Sheet.

To change layers: Choose Layout > Layers & Sheets > Next Layer or Previous Layer.


Layers & Pages submenu

Use the commands in the Layers & Pages submenu in the Layout menu to work with the pages and layers of a Presentation document.

To create new pages: Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Insert Pages. In the dialog box, type the number of pages to insert and specify the location, and then click OK.

To delete pages: Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Delete Pages. In the dialog box, type the number of pages to remove, and then click OK.

When you specify an item to remove, use the item’s actual sequence number, not its name.

To go to a specific page: Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Go To Page. Type a number in the dialog box and click OK.

To change pages: Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Next Page or Previous Page.

To change layers: Choose Layout > Layers & Pages > Next Layer or Previous Layer.


Insert Picture
Insert Picture command

Use the Insert Picture command to insert a copy of the Clipboard contents into the current text object. You can use Insert Picture to anchor symbols, custom bullets, and small graphics within a paragraph.

An inserted picture behaves just like a text character: Canvas sets the spacing and leading around the picture. The picture moves with the surrounding text. The paragraph’s margin and justification properties also apply to the picture. You can adjust the picture’s baseline shift and kerning.

Inserted pictures can’t be edited. Unlike the surrounding text, an inserted picture can’t be scaled; the Spread and Overprint commands have no effect; and you can’t apply strokes or inks to inserted pictures.

Canvas inserts the Clipboard contents as a raster image when you use Insert Picture. An inserted picture loses its original object properties. You should finish editing objects before you place them on the Clipboard for use with the Insert Picture command.

To insert a picture in text

1.	Select one or more objects (multiple objects become a single picture) to insert. Choose Edit > Cut or Copy.

2.	Select the Text tool. Click in the text to set the insertion point.

3.	Choose Text > Insert Picture. Canvas inserts a picture of the Clipboard contents at the insertion point.

•	If the paragraph Leading is defined by percentage in Type palette, Canvas adjusts the line spacing to accommodate the picture.

•	If the paragraph Leading is defined by points, the leading does not change, regardless of the picture size.

•	If the inserted picture is much larger than a text character, the picture can cause the width and length of the text object to change.

Using Macros for anchored graphics

Although you can’t edit an inserted picture, you can use a macro object as an inserted picture. A macro objects is linked to an editable object in the Gallery palette. If you change the object in the Gallery palette, the inserted picture will change to match.

For example, you can insert simple “placeholder” macro objects, such as small squares, in place of finished graphics. By replacing the macro objects in the Gallery palette with the finished graphics, you can change the placeholder graphics into finished graphics, without having to change each graphic individually.


Copy with EPS command
Copy with EPS command (Mac only)

Use the Copy with EPS command to include Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) information for an object when you copy the object to the Clipboard. This improves the object’s appearance in certain applications, including Microsoft Word and Adobe FrameMaker.

This command is available on Mac OS only.

To include EPS information when copying: Select the objects to copy and choose Edit > Copy Special > Copy with EPS.


Proxies and Canvas Image Files

Proxies are low-resolution images you place in Canvas documents. A proxy is a placeholder that is linked to an image file on disk.

Proxies can reduce the screen refresh time and the amount of disk space needed to store a Canvas document. This feature is most useful for conserving time and memory when you use large, high-resolution color images.

To replace an image with a proxy

1.	In the Canvas document, select a paint object to replace with a proxy.

2.	Choose Image > Proxy > Make Proxy. A directory dialog box appears.

3.	Select a location on disk and type a name for the Canvas Image File that Canvas will create.

4.	Click Save. The Make Proxy dialog box appears.

5. 	Type a value in the “Make...Times Smaller” box. The larger the number, the lower the proxy resolution and the less memory required to store the proxy in the document.

6.	Click OK. Canvas replaces the paint object with a proxy object that is linked to a Canvas Image File containing the original image.

Related topics

Acquiring images as proxies

Editing proxies

Maintaining proxies

Exporting Canvas Image Files


Make Proxy dialog box

The Make Proxy dialog box displays the following information:

•	The width and height of the original image in pixels.

•	The size of the original image in kilobytes.

•	The resolution of the original image in pixels per inch (ppi).

•	The memory required for the proxy in the document.

•	The location and name of the Canvas Image File that you specify. To change this information, click the File button. See “Changing proxy links” below for more information

Make...Times Smaller: Enter a number in the text box to specify how much of the original image data Canvas should include in the proxy. Canvas reduces the original image data by this factor to create the proxy. For example, if the value is 64 (the default value), Canvas reduces the original image data by a factor of 64 to create the proxy. If the original image is 72 ppi, this results in a proxy with a resolution of about 9 ppi.


Editing proxies

Changes you make to a proxy without changing pixels in the image are object-level edits. For example, you can skew and scale proxy objects. Object-level editing does not affect the image file linked to the proxy.

Pixel editing

When you place a proxy object in image-edit mode, Canvas loads and displays the linked image in place of the proxy.

Changes you make in image-edit mode are saved in the linked image file when you exit image-edit mode. Canvas then displays an updated proxy.

Editing an image linked to a proxy is the same as editing any image in Canvas. You can use painting tools and commands to alter pixels in the original image.

Proxy information

When you select a proxy object, the information area of the Status bar displays information about the linked image file.

To display a dialog box with additional information about a proxy, select the proxy object and choose Image > Proxy > Proxy Info.

The Proxy Info dialog box displays the dimensions and resolution of the proxy object and the location of the linked image file on disk.

To replace a proxy with its linked image

1.	Choose Image > Proxy > Unlink Proxy. Canvas asks if you are sure you want to remove the file association from the proxy.

2.	Click OK to replace the proxy and remove the link to the image file.

To delete a proxy object (without inserting the linked image):  Select the proxy object and press Delete, or choose Edit > Cut or Clear.


Maintaining proxies

If a linked file’s name or location changes, Canvas alerts you that the file could not be found when you try to edit, unlink, or update a proxy.

You can check proxies in a document to verify that the links are valid. If Canvas detects unlinked proxies, you can re-link them to image files.

Important: You should always verify the proxy links in a document before final output. If you produce final high-resolution output from a document with unlinked or broken proxy objects, the associated images will not print correctly.

To verify proxy links

To determine if any proxy links are broken, choose Image > Proxy > Check Proxies.

If all proxies in the document have valid links, Canvas displays the message: “No problems found.” Canvas also displays the message if the document contains no proxies.

If Canvas finds an unlinked proxy, it displays selection handles around the proxy and centers it in the document window. Canvas displays a message telling you that the proxy has a problem because the linked image file could not be found.

Note: Canvas displays the proxy’s name if you assigned a name to the proxy object. You can do this by typing a name in the Object Name box on the Data tab in the Object Specs palette.

If Canvas tells you that a proxy has a problem, you should re-link the proxy. Without a valid link to an image file, Canvas prints the low-resolution proxy.

To re-link proxies

If Canvas detects an unlinked proxy, you can use the dialog box to re-link the proxy to an image file.

1.	Click Fix if you want to re-establish a link to an image file. The Proxy Info dialog box appears. If you click OK, Canvas skips the selected proxy and checks for other unlinked proxies. Click Cancel if you want to stop checking for unlinked proxies.

2.	In the Proxy Info dialog box, Click File. A directory dialog box appears.

3.	In the directory dialog box, select the file that you want to link to the proxy. Click Open. Canvas links the file on disk and the selected proxy in the document. Canvas closes the directory dialog box and returns to the Proxy Info dialog box, which shows the path to the linked image file.

4.	Click OK. Canvas closes the Proxy Info dialog box and continues to check for unlinked proxies. If Canvas finds another unlinked proxy in the current document, Canvas again selects the unlinked proxy and displays a message that the proxy has a problem. Repeat the procedure from Step 1 to re-link all unlinked proxies.

When Canvas doesn’t find any additional unlinked proxies, it ends the Check Proxy procedure and returns to the document.

To change proxy links

You can link a proxy object to any Canvas Image File. Use the following procedure to link a proxy to a different Canvas Image File, or establish a link to a Canvas Image File from an unlinked proxy.

1.	Select the proxy object.

2.	Choose Image > Proxy > Proxy Info. The Proxy Info dialog box appears.

3.	Click File. A directory dialog box appears.

4.	In the directory dialog box, select the Canvas Image File you want to link to the proxy.

5.	Click Open. Canvas closes the directory dialog box and opens the Proxy Info dialog box, which displays the new path and name of the linked image file.

6.	Click OK to close the Proxy Info dialog box.

Updating proxies

Use the Update Proxies command to update all proxies in a document so they match the image data in their linked files. The Update Proxies command is not available if any objects are selected in the document.

To update all proxies: Choose Image > Proxy > Update Proxies.

To update a particular proxy, select the proxy object and choose Image > Proxy > Update Proxy.


Copy at 4X and Copy at 8X commands

You can use the Copy at 4X command or the Copy at 8X command to place vector objects on the Clipboard as rasterized objects at specific resolution levels. You might want to do this if you are pasting Canvas vector objects into another program and the objects appear jagged when printed. This can happen when a program prints Canvas vector objects at the low resolution of the screen display.

The Copy at 4X and Copy at 8X commands place selected objects on the Clipboard at specific resolution levels: “4X” indicates resolution 4 times greater than screen resolution and “8X” indicates resolution 8 times greater than screen resolution. 4X approximates the resolution of a 300 dpi printer; 8X approximates the resolution of a 600 dpi printer. Choose the resolution level based on the printing device you are going to use.

When copying and pasting within Canvas documents, these commands perform the same function as the standard Copy command.

Using these commands is not recommended for copying paint objects, which are already rasterized at a specific resolution.

To copy vector objects at increased resolution

Select the objects to copy and choose Edit > Copy Special > Copy At 4X or Edit > Copy Special > Copy at 8X.

Canvas places the selected objects on the Clipboard. You can then paste the Clipboard contents into other applications.


Freeform editing of image selections
Freeform editing of floating selections

Use the Freeform command to place selected objects or floating image selections in freeform edit mode. When you put an object or image selection in freeform mode, you can rotate and skew it by dragging special handles.

A floating selection has special freeform transformation options.

To put a floating image selection in freeform mode

While a floating image selection is active, choose Freeform in the Effects menu. Handles appear on the corners and sides of the floating selection.

To end freeform mode: Double-click inside the selection to paste the pixels as defined by the floating selection into the image and end freeform mode, or press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to leave freeform mode without changing the image.

To move a selection in freeform mode: Place the pointer inside of the selection. The pointer becomes an arrow head. Drag to move the selection.

Rotating selections in freeform mode

When the pointer is outside a selection in freeform mode, the pointer becomes a curved line with arrows. To rotate the selection, drag around the selection in the direction you want to rotate it. The selection outline rotates as you drag. Press Shift as you drag to rotate in 15-degree increments.

Scaling selections in freeform mode

You can scale a floating selection in freeform mode by dragging any of the corner or side handles. The selection will scale as you drag.

•	If you drag a side handle, you scale the width.  If you drag a top or bottom handle, you scale the height.

•	If you drag a corner handle, you can scale width and height.

•	Press Command (Mac) or Alt (Windows) to scale from the center.

Skewing selections in freeform mode

You can skew a selection by pressing Ctrl and dragging a side or top handle.

•	Press Shift to constrain the skew along the axis of the handle side.

•	Press Command (Mac) or Alt (Windows) to skew opposite sides of the selection equally.

The modifier keys can be combined to produce both skewing effects simultaneously.


Loading and saving settings

After you choose a Load, Append, or Save command or button in a dialog box or palette, the Load Settings or Save Settings directory dialog box appears.

For example, if you want to save a color range selection to use later in other images, you click the Save button in the Color Range dialog box. In the Brushes palette, if you want to save the current set of brushes, choose Save Brushes in the palette's pop-up menu. In both cases, a directory dialog box appears. (In Windows, these dialog boxes are titled “Save Settings.” The Mac OS version is a standard directory dialog box without a title).

You can use these directory dialog boxes to load, append, and save a variety of custom or default settings on disk.


Saving settings

1.	Choose the Save command or button in a palette or dialog box.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select a location for saving the settings file.

3.	Type a file name.

•	(Mac OS) It is recommended that you do not remove the file extension Canvas adds to the file name if you want to move the settings file to a Windows system. If you remove the extension, the settings file will not be recognized properly if transported to a Windows environment.

•	(Windows) Canvas adds the correct extension when you save the file. The extension appears in the file name box and the “Save As Type” box.

4.	Click Save.


Loading settings

1.	Choose the Load or Append command or button in a palette or dialog box.

•	Choose Load to replace the current settings with new settings from a file on disk.

•	Choose Append to add settings from a file on disk to the current settings. This command is not available in all cases.

2.	In the directory dialog box, Canvas displays files of the current settings type. Select the file to load or append.

•	To show every file in the current folder (even files that Canvas can’t open), Select “All Files” in the pop-up menu (Windows), or select the “Show All Files” check box (Mac).

3.	Click Open.

Note: If you have selected a file of a different type than the current settings file type, Canvas will warn you that it could not open the file because it is either corrupted or the wrong format.


Loading and saving strokes

The Load Strokes or Save Strokes directory dialog box appears after you choose a Load, Append, or Save command from the pop-up menu in the Strokes palette.

For example, to load custom neon strokes, click the arrow at the lower-right corner of the Neon tab and choose Save Neon Strokes. The Save Strokes directory dialog box appears.

You can use the dialog box to save custom or default strokes from the Strokes palette to files on disk. You can use the Load Strokes directory dialog box to load (or append) into the Strokes palette sets of strokes saved in files on disk.

To save strokes in a file

1.	Open the Strokes palette and choose the tab for the strokes you want to save.

2.	Click the arrow at the bottom-right corner of the Strokes palette. Choose the “Save ... Strokes” command. The command includes the type of strokes. For example, on the Neon tab, the command is “Save Neon Strokes.”

3.	In the directory dialog box, select a location to save the strokes file. Type a name for the file.

•	(Mac) It is recommended that you do not remove the file extension Canvas adds to the file name if you want to use the strokes file on a Windows system. If you remove the extension, the strokes file will not be recognized on a Windows system.

•	(Windows) Canvas adds the correct file extension when you save the file.

4.	Click Save.

To load or append strokes from a file

1.	Open the Strokes palette and choose the tab for the strokes you want to load.

2.	Click the arrow at the bottom-right corner of the Strokes palette. Choose “Load ... Strokes” or “Append ... Strokes”.

•	Choose Load to replace the current strokes with new strokes from a file.

•	Choose Append to add strokes from a file to the current strokes.

3.	In the directory dialog box, select the file to load. Canvas displays files of the current strokes type.

•	To show every file in the current folder (even files that Canvas can’t open), Select “All Files” in the pop-up menu (Windows), or select the “Show All Files” check box (Mac).

4.	Click the Open button.

Note: If you have selected a file of a different type than the current strokes type, Canvas will warn you that it could not open the file because it is either corrupted or not of the correct format.

Types of strokes files

Canvas uses the following file types for saving strokes:

Pens (.SPN)

Dashes (.DPN)

Arrows (.APN)

Parallels (.PPN)

Neons (.NPN)


Loading and Saving Inks

The Load Inks or Save Inks directory dialog box appears after you choose a Load, Append, or Save command in the Inks palette.

For example, if you want to load a set of Gradient Inks, you choose Save Gradient Inks in the Inks palette’s pop-up menu. The Save Inks directory dialog box appears.

You can use the Save Inks directory dialog boxes to save custom or default inks in files on disk. You can use the Load Inks dialog box to load (or append) into the Inks palette custom or default Inks from inks files saved on disk.

To save Inks in a disk file

1.	Open the Inks palette.

2.	Choose the tab for the type of Ink you want to save.

3.	Click the right-pointing arrow in the bottom-right corner of the Inks palette.

4.	Choose the “Save ... Inks” command.

5.	Select a location for the Inks file you want to save.

6.	Type a name for the file.

•	(Mac OS only) It is recommended that you do not remove the file extension Canvas adds to the file name if you want to use the Inks file on a Windows system. If you remove the extension when saving on Mac OS versions of Canvas, the Inks file will not be recognized properly if transported to a Windows environment.

•	(Windows only) Canvas adds the correct extension when you save the file. The extension appears in the “Save As Type” and File Name text boxes.

7.	Click Save. Or, to close the dialog box without saving Inks, click Cancel.

To load or append Inks from a disk file

1.	Open the Inks palette.

2.	Choose the tab for the type of Ink you want to load or append.

3.	Click the right-pointing arrow in the bottom-right corner of the Inks palette.

•`	Choose the “Load ... Inks” or “Append ... Inks” command.

•	Choose “Load ... Inks” to replace the current Inks with new Inks from a file on disk.

•	Choose “Append ... Inks” to add Inks from a file on disk to the current Inks.

4.	Select the inks file you want to load. Canvas displays files of the current Inks type.

•	To show every file in the current folder (even files that Canvas can’t open), Select “All Files” in the pop-up menu (Windows), or select the “Show All Files” check box (Mac).

5.	Click the Open button. Or, to close the dialog box without loading new Inks, click Cancel

Note: If you have selected a file of a different type than the current Inks type, Canvas will warn you that it could not open the file because it is either corrupted or not of the correct format.

Types of Inks files

Canvas uses the following file types to save the settings on the corresponding tabs in the Inks palette.

Colors (.PAL)

Gradients (.GRD)

Hatches (.HTC)

Symbols (.SBL)

Textures (.TXR)


Comments command

You can attach written notes called comments to any object in a Canvas document. This can be useful for individuals and workers in groups who share documents. Anyone who works on a document can attach one or more comments to any object.

You can attach comments to any type of object, including paint objects, vector objects, and text objects.

When you open a document, you can view all comments attached to objects. You can edit comments that you create, but you can’t change comments made by others.

When you select an object that has one or more comments attached to it, the object displays yellow selection handles (Windows) or gray selection handles (Mac).

You can view comments by pointing to objects. When the pointer is on an object, the object’s comments appear in a pop-up window. If comments do not appear when you point to commented objects, be sure that “Specific information tooltip” is selected on the General tab in the Preferences dialog box.

To attach comments

1.	To attach a comment to an object, select the object.

2.	Choose Object > Comments to display the Comments palette. In the Comments palette, click New.

3.	In the New Comment dialog box, type the comment text. When you finish, click OK to attach the comment to the selected object. The comment appears in the Comments palette. You can click New in the Comments palette to attach additional comments to the selected object.

A comment can contain up to 64 kilobytes of text (about 65,500 characters). The text appears in a fixed size and typeface.

When you create comments, you can select, copy, cut, and paste text using the standard keyboard shortcuts. Spell checking, text formatting, and text colors can not be applied to the text of comments.

Viewing and editing comments

You use the Comments palette to view, edit, and delete comments.

1.	Choose Object > Comments to display the Comments palette. All comments attached to objects in a document appear in the Comments palette.

2.	Select an author’s name in the pop-up menu to display only that author’s comments in the list. To show all comments, choose All Reviewers.

The scrolling list displays the first lines and the author’s initials for each comment. The initials preceding comments are from the user name entered during Canvas installation. You can edit the initials on the User Info tab in the Preferences dialog box.

3.	Click a comment to select it. When you select a comment, Canvas selects the commented object in the document. Yellow (Windows) or gray (Mac) selection handles appear around the object to indicate that the object has one or more comments.

4.	To view, edit, or remove a selected comment, choose one of the following options:

View: To view a selected comment, click View. The comment text appears in the View Comments dialog box. You can select text and copy it to the Clipboard using standard keyboard shortcuts. You can edit your own comments in the View Comments dialog box, but you can’t edit or remove comments made by others.

The pencil icon at the bottom-left corner of the dialog box indicates that you can edit a comment. When you view a comment that you can’t edit, a slash appears on the pencil icon and the dialog box background is shaded.

When you finish viewing a comment, click OK or Cancel to close the dialog box. If you have made changes to a comment, click OK to save the changes or click Cancel to discard them and close the dialog box.

Remove: Select a comment you created. Click Remove to delete the comment from the object and the Comments palette.

Preserving comments

Comments remain attached to objects until you remove the comments from them. However, some operations you can perform on objects do not preserve the original objects or their comments.

In general, comments are not preserved by operations that convert objects to different forms or types of objects. Operations that do not preserve comments of the original objects include Knife, Combine, Extrude, Fractalize, Join, Make Composite, Convert to Paths, and Insert Picture.

Comments are preserved when you perform basic editing or change an object’s attributes. For example, comments are preserved when you change inks and strokes, edit anchor points, rotate, flip, skew, and duplicate vector objects. Commands that do not affect comments include Envelope, Group/Ungroup, Smooth, Resolution, Attach Mask and Detach Mask, and Lock/Unlock.


Image selections
Image selection

An image selection designates pixels that will be affected by image editing and other operations. A selection can be made in a paint object in edit mode.

A selection can cover an area or include pixels based on color or other image characteristics.


Transparency palette

To open the Transparency palette

Choose Window > Palettes > Show Transparency. To remove the palette, choose Window > Palettes > Hide Transparency.

You can also choose Object > Transparency > Transparency to display the Transparency palette.

Or, press the Opacity icon in the toolbox. When the Opacity slider pops open, drag it away from the toolbox. The Transparency palette appears when you release the mouse button.

Transparency palette options

Options for opacity, transfer mode, scope, and masks appear in the Transparency palette. When an object is selected, the Transparency palette displays the object’s opacity and transfer mode.

Opacity. Drag the slider or enter a percentage to set the opacity of a selected object.

Scope. Set the transparency scope for a selected vector object.

Click the arrow to show or hide the mask options.

Applying transparency: In the pop-up menu, choose Channel to create a channel mask. Or, Choose a vector mask style to create a vector mask. If the object has a mask, the menu shows the type of mask. Choose None to remove the object’s mask.

Edit. When a selected object has a channel mask or vector mask, click Edit to edit the mask.

When a masked object is selected, mask options appear at the bottom of the palette.

Related topics

Channel masks

Vector masks

Output Resolution

Transfer modes


Channel masks

A channel mask creates transparency based on the color values in an image channel.

You can create a blank channel mask or attach a paint object as a channel mask. You can also create a channel mask when you render objects using the Render command .

To create a channel mask

1.	Select a text, paint, vector, or group object to mask and do one of the following:

•	Press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and double-click the object.

•	Choose Object > Transparency > New Channel Mask

•	Click the object with the Sprite tool

•	Choose Mask: Channel in the Transparency palette.

2.	If the object to be masked is not a paint object, a dialog box asks you to set the resolution of the mask. Enter a resolution from 1 to 2,540 ppi and click OK.

•	If the object is a paint object, the channel mask’s resolution will be the same as the paint object’s resolution.

3.	The object appears in channel mask edit mode, with the object visible and the channel mask selected. You can edit the channel mask with painting tools. When you finish, press Esc to leave edit mode.

To attach a channel mask

1.	Place the paint object that will become the channel mask in front of the object to be masked. The two objects do not have to overlap or touch, but the paint object must be in front of the other object in the stacking order.

2.	Select both objects and choose Object > Transparency > Attach Mask. Canvas creates a channel mask and both objects remain selected. The original paint object is not changed.

If the paint object and the object to be masked aren’t the same size, Canvas scales the paint object to the same size as the masked object.

To edit a channel mask

When you create a new channel mask, the mask channel is white. This produces no transparency in the masked object. Painting in the channel mask with gray produces partial transparency; painting with black produces 100% transparency in the masked object.

1.	Do one of the following:

•	Select the masked object and choose Object > Transparency > Edit Channel Mask.

•	Select the masked object and click Edit in the Transparency palette.

•	Press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and double-click the object.

•	Click the object with the Sprite tool.

2.	The masked object appears in channel mask edit mode. In this mode, the channel mask is active and the object is also visible. You can paint in the channel or modify it to change the transparency of the underlying object. When you finish editing, press Esc to leave edit mode.

To remove a channel mask

Remove a channel mask from an object to remove the transparency effect produced by the channel mask.

1.	Select the masked object and do one of the following:

•	Choose Object > Transparency > Detach Mask.

•	Choose Mask: None in the Transparency palette.

•	In the Channels palette, drag the channel mask to the trash icon.

When you detach a channel mask, Canvas converts the channel mask  to a paint object and places it in the document. The paint object includes any alpha channels contained in the masked object.


Output Resolution command

You can specify an output resolution for a transparent object. If you don’t specify the resolution for Canvas to use, it selects the resolution based on the following guidelines:

If a transparent paint object overlaps other paint objects, Canvas rasterizes all the objects at the same resolution as the paint object that has the highest resolution.

If a vector object is transparent or is behind a transparent object, Canvas rasterizes the vector object at the resolution specified for printing. You can set the resolution for printing on the Printing tab in the Preferences dialog box.

To set the output resolution of an object

1.	Select the object whose resolution you want to specify.

2.	Choose Object > Transparency > Output Resolution.

3.	Do one of the following in the dialog box, and then click OK:

•	Select the Maximum Resolution checkbox to specify that the object should be rendered at the maximum resolution of the output device.

•	Deselect the Maximum Resolution checkbox and enter the resolution you want Canvas to use. You can set the resolution from 1 to 2,540 dpi.

To set the maximum output resolution

You can specify a maximum resolution for Canvas output. The resolution that you specify in the Preferences dialog box affects output of all objects and rasterizing of transparency effects. This setting overrides settings you apply to objects with the Output Resolution command.

1.	Choose File > Preferences.

2.	Click the Printing tab.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Select the “Output to maximum resolution” checkbox to specify that Canvas should output objects at the maximum resolution of the output device.

•	Deselect the “Output to maximum resolution” option if you want to specify an output resolution. Select an output resolution from the pop-up menu.

4.	Click OK.


Transfer modes

All objects — vector objects, text objects, paint objects, and group objects — have a transfer mode. Transfer modes are like invisible filters that affect the appearance of colors. When objects overlap, the transfer mode of the front object can change the appearance of the back object.

Transfer modes work with transparency effects, including opacity and transparency masks. However, transfer modes can make objects appear to be transparent without reduced opacity or transparency masks. For example, Multiply mode lets underlying colors show through an object.

To apply transfer modes, you select objects and choose modes from the Transfer Mode menu in the Transparency palette. For vector objects, you can apply transfer modes to fill inks alone or to fill inks and strokes together.

The default transfer mode is Normal. In Normal mode, the colors of overlapping objects do not mix unless the front object is partially transparent.

In addition to interacting with background objects, transfer modes can interact with the document’s white background. When an object’s transfer mode is Screen, for example, anything white replaces the object’s color, so the document’s white background can make the object seem to be invisible.

To change an object’s transfer mode

1.	Choose Object > Transparency > Transparency to open the Transparency palette.

2.	Select an object and choose a transfer mode in the Transfer Mode pop-up menu in the Transparency palette.

3.	For vector objects, select a Scope option. Select Fill to apply the transfer mode to the fill ink; select Fill & Stroke to apply the transfer mode to both the object’s fill ink and stroke.

Selecting transfer modes

The transfer modes available in the Transfer Mode menu in the Transparency palette are listed here. The following descriptions are based on objects with RGB colors with no other transparency effects.

Each mode is described in terms of the front object when the back object’s transfer mode is Normal.

Normal: In Normal mode, colors do not blend; the color of a front object hides the colors of all objects behind it.

Multiply: In Multiply mode, overlapping colors become darker. Black produces black. White has no effect, the same as if a white object were not visible. White text, for example, reveals the back-ground.

Screen: The Screen mode lightens overlapping colors. Objects with lighter colors increase the effect. White produces white. Black has no effect, the same as if a black object were not visible. Black text, for example, reveals the background.

Overlay: In Overlay mode, a front object’s color overlays colors in the background, while preserving highlights and shadows. White and black in the background are not affected.

Soft Light: The Soft Light mode lightens or darkens underlying colors depending on the brightness of the front color. Colors in front that are lighter than 50% gray lighten the underlying object. Colors in front that are darker than 50% gray darken the underlying object.

Hard Light: The Hard Light mode lightens or darkens underlying colors depending on the brightness value of the front color. Hard Light mode is similar to Soft Light. However, black in the front object produces black; white in the front object produces white.

Darken: In Darken mode, the color values of the front color replace the underlying color values if the front color value is darker than the back color value. Black in the background appears unchanged; the front color appears in place of white in the background.

Lighten; In Lighten mode, the color values of the front color replace the underlying color values if the front color value is lighter than the back color value. White in the background appears unchanged; the front color appears in place of black in the background.

Difference: The Difference mode compares the color values of the front and back colors and subtracts the darker value from the lighter value. If the front and back colors are identical, the result is black. If the front or back color is black, the other color does not change. If the front or back color is white, the other color is inverted.


Vector masks

A vector mask creates a transparency effect similar to a gradient. You can apply a vector mask to vector, paint, text, and group objects.

To use Vector Transparency tools

The Vector Transparency tools make it easy to create effects such as vignettes and fades.

1.	Select a text, paint, vector, or group object to mask.

2.	Select the Radial, Directional, Rectangular, or Elliptical Vector Transparency tool in the Effects toolbar.

3.	Drag the tool near or on the selected object. As you drag, a vector line or shape displays the position of the vector transparency effect.

4.	To adjust the effect, drag a handle to reposition the transparency vector. When you finish, press Esc to leave edit mode.

To use the Transparency palette

You can specify values for the position and intensity of the effect when you apply a vector mask with the Transparency palette.

1.	Select an object to mask.

2.	In the Transparency palette, choose Directional, Radial, Rectangular, or Elliptical in the Mask pop-up menu. These styles correspond to the Vector Transparency tools.

3.	To adjust the effect, drag the handles to reposition the transparency vector. When you finish, press Esc to leave edit mode.

Setting the vector mask scope

When you apply a vector mask to a vector object, the mask affects the vector object’s fill ink or its fill ink and stroke (pen ink). To change the effect, change the Scope setting in the Transparency palette.

To attach a vector mask

You can create a vector mask by attaching a vector object to another object. This produces transparency relative to the color values of the mask. If the vector object is white, it creates no transparency; if it is black, it creates 100% transparency.

1.	Place a vector object to use as a mask in front of the object to be masked. The two objects do not have to overlap or touch, but the vector object must be in front of the other object in the stacking order.

2.	Select both objects.

3.	Choose Object > Transparency > Attach Mask. Canvas creates a vector mask and both objects remain selected. The original vector object is not changed.

If the vector object and the object to be masked aren’t the same size, Canvas scales the vector object to fit the masked object.

Related topic

Editing vector masks


Editing vector masks

You can edit vector masks that have been applied with the Vector Transparency tools, and masks created by attaching gradient-filled vector objects. Editing lets you change the boundary of the opaque and transparent areas of a mask.

To edit a vector mask

1.	To put a masked object in edit mode, do one of the following:

•	Select the object and click Edit in the Transparency palette.

•	Select the object and then select the Vector Transparency tool that applied the vector mask.

•	Click the object with the Sprite tool.

2.	The vector mask handles appear. Drag the handles to adjust the position and boundaries of the vector mask. The handles correspond to the values in the Mask area in the Transparency palette. When you finish editing, press Esc.

To remove a vector mask

Removing a vector mask from an object removes the transparency effect produced by the mask.

1.	Select the masked object.

2.	Choose Object > Transparency > Detach Mask. Or choose Mask: None in the Transparency palette.


Transform command

You can use the Transform palette to move, scale, rotate, and skew selected objects. You can keep the palette open for easy editing and positioning of objects.

To display the Transform palette: Choose Effects > Transform. To close the palette, click the Close box (Mac) or double-click the Control menu box (Windows).

You can change the palette’s layout from horizontal to vertical by dragging the lower-right corner.

You can change the size, location, and orientation of selected objects by using options and entering values in the Transform palette. Canvas applies the current settings when you press Enter or tab to the next box.

Once an object has been transformed, it becomes a new object. Therefore, the reference point is reset to reflect its position on the new object. The values in the text boxes display the size and position of the new object. The text boxes that show rotation and skew display 0. And the scaling percentage text boxes display 100 percent.

Locating the reference point

The reference point is displayed on the Transform palette. It is a point on the selected object (or its bounding box) that position data are based on. The reference point is also the fixed point used in an object’s transformation.

For example, with a rectangle selected, click the upper-left corner point. The X Y boxes show the coordinates of the rectangle’s upper-left corner, if Absolute coordinates are specified.

Transform menu options

You can choose different options to transform objects. The option you choose determines the type of data that appears on the palette.

Relative: Changes the position of the object relative to the current position, or height and width values. The value in the first boxes, Delta X and Delta Y, is 0 when you select an object. To move the object, type the distance to move. The next two boxes, W and H, display the object’s width and height. Type new values to resize the object.

Absolute: Specifies X Y coordinates or height and width values. The first two boxes, X and Y, display the coordinates of a selected object’s reference point. To move an object, type new coordinates for the reference point. The next two boxes, W and H, display the object’s width and height. Type new values to resize the object.

Start/End Points: The first two boxes, X and Y, show the coordinates of the object’s reference point. To resize an object by moving the reference point, type new coordinates for the reference point. The next two boxes, X' and Y', show the coordinates of one of the corner points on the object (or the object’s bounding box). The point is the upper-right corner when the reference point is the lower-left corner. The point is the lower-right corner when the reference point is the upper-left corner. The point is the lower-left corner when the reference point is the upper-right corner. The point is the upper-left corner when the reference point is the lower-right corner.

For a line, you cannot select a reference point. The X and Y boxes always indicate the starting point of the line and the X' and Y' boxes always indicate the end point of the line.

To resize an object, type new coordinates for this point.

Distance and Angle: The first two boxes show the X Y coordinates of a line’s start point. This is available only when a line is selected. The second two boxes show the line’s length and angle. You can change these values to change the length, angle, or position of the line. A representation of the angle is given in the reference point box.

Scaling

The X and Y boxes display 100% when you select an object. To resize the object, type new percentages in the boxes. If the Proportional button is selected, the Y scaling box is not available.

Rotation and skewing

To rotate or skew a selected object, you can select a direction and specify an amount.

Click the Rotation and Skew buttons to change the rotation or skew direction. Type the amount to rotate or skew in the adjacent text boxes.

Group option

The button at the upper-right corner of the palette is the Group option. When the button is selected and multiple objects are selected, the palette operates as if the objects were grouped. Otherwise, the palette applies changes independently to each selected object.


Visibility mask

A visibility mask can protect the relative transparency of all pixels when you paint or edit the image.

When a paint object has a visibility mask, you can select “Preserve Visibility” in the Channels palette. Canvas protects clear and partly transparent areas from the effects of painting and image editing.

A visibility mask changes the effect of erasing, deleting, and moving a selection in an image:

•	If a paint object has a visibility mask, you can erase, delete, and move selections to reveal a clear “background.”

•	If a paint object does not have a visibility mask, areas you erase, delete, or move are filled with the current background color. These areas are opaque, not clear.

Creating visibility masks

You can create visibility masks when you create paint objects using the Paint Object Creator tool, the Render command, and the Create command.

To add a visibility mask

You can add a visibility mask to a paint object that was created with an opaque background in Canvas or imported from another application. This doesn’t change the paint object’s appearance immediately; for example, white pixels don’t become transparent.

1.	Select a paint object that does not have a visibility mask.

2.	Choose Image > Add Visibility Mask. This command is not available if a Duotone, Indexed, or Multichannel image is selected.


Vertical justification

Vertical justification aligns text relative to the top and bottom of text objects. Vertical justification applies to an entire text object.

Top vertical justification is the default setting for new text objects. Copying or duplicating text objects preserves their vertical justification. If you copy a text selection and paste it into another object, the text adopts the vertical justification of the text object you paste into.

To change vertical justification: Select one or more text objects. Choose Text > Justification > Top, Bottom, Vertical Full, or Vertical Center. A check mark appears next to the selected setting.

Note: For vertical justification to have an effect, there must be blank space (not including empty paragraphs) in a text object. Text objects made with the Text Object tool can contain extra space. Text objects made with the Text tool close up from the bottom to eliminate extra space.

Vertical justification commands

Top: Sets all lines of type starting from the top of a text object. This is the traditional vertical alignment for text objects. For example, if a text object contains three lines of type, they appear at the top of the text object. Spacing between lines is controlled by the Line Spacing, Before Paragraph, and After Paragraph settings of the text.

Vertical Center: Sets all lines of type so they are spaced evenly above and below the vertical center of a text object. If a text object contains three lines of type, for example, the lines appear at the center of the text object. Spacing between lines is controlled by the Line Spacing, Before Paragraph, and After Paragraph settings of the text.

Bottom: Sets all lines of type at the bottom of the text object. If a text object contains three lines of type, for example, the lines appear at the bottom of the text object. Spacing between lines is controlled by the Line Spacing, Before Paragraph, and After Paragraph settings of the text.

Vertical Full: Sets all lines of type so they are evenly spaced between the top and bottom borders of the text object. If a text object contains three lines of type, for example, one line appears at the top, one appears at the center, and one appears at the bottom of the text object. Because it distributes type from the top to the bottom of a text object, Vertical Full justification can cause very wide spacing between lines if a large text object contains a little text. You can drag a handle at the top or bottom of a text object to adjust its height and alter the spacing between lines of text.


Opacity

Opacity is a feature that lets you easily apply a transparency effect to any object. When an object’s opacity is less than 100%, the object appears partly transparent.

You use the Opacity slider to set the opacity of objects. The Opacity slider is available in the toolbox and in the Transparency palette . The Opacity slider in the toolbox will set opacity for one or more selected objects. The Opacity slider in the Transparency palette is available only when a single object is selected.

Opacity slider in the toolbox

Opacity affects the overall transparency of an object, so the Opacity slider is a master control for all transparency effects applied to an object. For example, you can use a channel mask to make an oval vignette image. At the edge of the oval, the image becomes completely transparent. If you then reduce the object’s opacity, the visible part of the image becomes partly transparent.

When an object’s opacity is less than 100%, anything in the back-ground, including the white illustration area, can affect the object’s appearance. The illustration area has the same effect as a solid white object in the background.

To set the opacity of objects

1.	Select the objects whose opacity you want to change.

2.	Do one of the following to use the Opacity slider:

Windows: Click the Opacity icon in the toolbox and the Opacity slider appears. Drag the slider or click in the scale to adjust the opacity setting.

Mac: Press the Opacity icon in the toolbox and the Opacity slider appears. Drag in the scale to adjust the opacity setting.

3.	Drag the Opacity slider to the left to decrease opacity; drag to the right to increase opacity. The opacity percentage appears at the right of the slider.

If no objects are selected when you press the Opacity icon, the Opacity slider isn’t available.

The Opacity icon in the toolbox displays an opacity scale. When an object is selected, a line in the scale indicates the object’s opacity set-ting. The left end of the scale represents 1% opacity and the right end represents 100% opacity.

Tip: You can set opacity quickly by Tab-clicking the opacity scale in the toolbox. A line in the scale shows the setting.

In the Transparency palette you can adjust the opacity of a single selected object. To set a selected object’s opacity, drag the Opacity slider or enter a percentage from 1% to 100% in the text box.

Setting opacity for multiple objects

You can use the Opacity slider in the toolbox to set the opacity for more than one object. The Opacity slider in the Transparency palette is not available when more than one object is selected.

Opacity applies to a group object as if it were a single object. This is different than changing the opacity of multiple selected objects that aren’t grouped.

When a group object is selected, changing the opacity applies to the group as a whole. Objects that were opaque do not become transparent to other objects in the group if you reduce the opacity of the group object. If you ungroup an object, the group opacity setting is removed and the opacity of each separate object is restored.


Offset Path command

You can use the Offset Path command to create new objects that follow the path of a vector object.

An offset object’s path follows the inside or outside of the original object’s path. You can specify the offset distance and the number of objects to create.

You can offset one vector object at a time. Composite objects created by the Concentric Circles, Spiral, Cube, GridMaker, or Multigon tools cannot be offset.

To offset an object path

1.	Select a vector object and choose Effects > Offset Path.

2.	In the Offset Path dialog box, type the offset distance in the Distance box. In the Copies box, type the number of copies to make.

3. 	Click OK to create the offset objects.

Canvas applies the current inks and stroke to offset objects. The new objects appear in front of the original if they are smaller; otherwise, they appear behind it.

The direction of the offset depends on whether you type a positive or negative Distance value.

When you offset an object that has an open path, type a negative value to offset the new object to the inside of the curve. Type a positive value to offset the new object to the outside of the curve.

When you offset an object that has a closed path, type a negative number to offset the new object to the inside of the original path. Type a positive number to offset the new object to the outside of the original path.

An offset object can differ in shape from the original object, if a large offset distance makes the path cross itself to follow narrow angles or tight curves of the original object.


New Mask

The New Mask dialog box lets you set the resolution of a new channel mask.

The dialog box appears when you use the New Channel Mask command or the Transparency palette to apply a channel mask to objects other than paint objects.

The New Mask dialog box also appears if you double-click the Sprite tool or use the tool to apply a channel mask to an object (other than a paint object).

To set channel mask resolution: Enter the resolution in pixels per inch in the text box and click OK in the New Mask dialog box.

The New Mask dialog box does not appear when you apply a channel mask to a paint object, because the mask resolution matches the paint object’s resolution.

Related topics

Channel masks

Transparency palette


Channel mask

A special pixel-based channel attached to an object. A channel mask creates transparency relative to the lightness of its pixels.


Proxies

Low-resolution images in a Canvas document. Each proxy is a placeholder that is linked to a high-resolution image file. The proxy is stored in the document, while the linked file can be stored anywhere that Canvas can access it. When you edit the proxy or print the document, Canvas loads the image file in place of the proxy.


Show / Hide ClipArt

To open the Gallery palette so you can select from the Canvas clip art collection, choose Object > Show ClipArt. Clip the Clip Art tab if necessary. You can also use this command to open the Gallery palette to  work with Macros.

To close the Gallery palette, choose Object > Hide ClipArt.


Selected objects

Objects that are designated for the next action. A selected object has a bounding box around it, with handles on the corners and sides of the box. "Selected objects" generally refers to one or more objects that are selected at the time.

Choosing a command usually affects only selected objects. Pressing arrow keys on the keyboard moves selected objects. Choosing inks and other attributes applies them to selected objects.


The Canvas toolbox
The toolbox

The toolbox is a floating palette. You can place it anywhere on screen or dock it on the Docking bar.

The toolbox displays 10 tools at a time. The other tools (more than 40 total) are available from toolbars that open when you press a tool icon.  Click in the picture for descriptions of the toolbars. To see the list of all Canvas tools, click here    To select a tool: Click the tool icon. The selected tool icon is shaded like a recessed button.  To use a toolbar: The tool used last in each toolbar is shown in the toolbox. If a tool isn’t shown, press the icon to open the toolbar. Some tools (Smart Lines, Dimensioning, and others) have their own toolbars.
	The toolbox


List of tools and toolbars

Every tool in the Canvas toolbox is shown here. Tools are grouped in toolbars that pop out from the toolbox. Click a tool name for information on using the tool.

Selection tools	Selection Direct Selection
Line tools	Line Smart Lines
Rectangle tools	Rectangle Rounded Rectangle,
Oval tools	Oval Arc Circle 3 Points Circle Radius Arc Radius Arc 3 Points
Object tools	Colada Button Concentric Circles Cube Dimensioning Grid Maker Colada Animation Gallery Multigon Spiral Colada Sound
Painting tools	Paint Object Creator Crop Wand Marquee Lasso Remote Move Pencil Eraser Marker Paintbrush Airbrush Neon Bucket Blend Blur Sharpen Rubber Stamp Smudge Dodge Burn Sponge
Text tools	Text Path Text Text Object Text Link, Text Unlink Text Info Section
Path tools	Curve Freehand Polygon
View tools	Magnifying Glass Hand
Effects tools	Sprite Color Dropper Gradient Vector Vector Transparency Knife Scissors
Related topics

The Canvas toolbox: Using toolbars and palette icons

Object properties: Applying inks and strokes

Using the Brushes palette: Setting painting options

Tools for vertical text: Vertical Text tool and Vertical Text Object tool


Airbrush tool

The Airbrush tool is a painting tool. It applies a soft-edged stroke of color to an image. Using the Airbrush tool, you can apply the foreground color with a very soft (anti-aliased) stroke. The Airbrush tool paints as long as you press the mouse button. The Pressure setting in the Brushes palette controls how fast the Airbrush applies color. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To paint with the Airbrush

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a foreground color in the Color tab in the Inks palette.

3.	Select a brush shape and mode in the Brushes palette.

4.	Enter a percentage in the Pressure text box in the Brushes palette. Pressure controls how fast the Airbrush applies color.

5. 	Click or drag the tool in the image. The Airbrush paints as long as you press the mouse button. To constrain the Airbrush tool to a horizontal or vertical line, press Shift and drag the tool in the image.

Airbrush tool options

You can double-click the Airbrush to open the Airbrush dialog box. The Airbrush dialog box lets you modify the operation of the Airbrush tool.

To decrease the size of the Airbrush brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area.

To decrease the application rate of color as you drag in the image, choose Pressure in the Fade area.

If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

If you have a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Pressure in the Pressure Varies area to let the pressure of the stylus affect the fade of the Airbrush tool.

After configuring the Airbrush tool the way you want, click OK.


Arc tool

The Arc tool is a vector drawing tool. Use the Arc tool to draw curved line segments that are quarter sections of ellipses or circles. The Arc tool is in the Oval tools toolbar.

To draw arcs

1.	Select the Arc tool.

2.	Drag from one corner to the opposite corner of the arc's bounding box. To create arcs that are segments of circles, press Shift and drag from one corner to the opposite corner of the arc's bounding box.

To change the length of an arc

1.	Select the arc. Round handles appear near the beginning and end of the arc segment.

2.	To shorten the arc, drag the round handle back over the arc. To lengthen the arc, drag the round handle to continue the arc segment.

You can also adjust the length of an arc by changing its Start angle and Delta values in the Object Specs palette.


Blend tool

The Blend tool is a painting and image-editing tool that creates a gradient from the foreground color and the background color. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To paint a blend of colors

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a foreground and background color with the color icons in the toolbox.

3.	In the Brushes palette, select a transfer mode.

4.	In the Opacity text box in the Brushes palette, enter the opacity percentage.

5.	Drag the Blend tool from the start of the blend to the end.

Constraining blends

Shift-drag to constrain the blend's direction to a vertical or horizontal direction. Canvas fills the remaining area of the image (if any) with the foreground color and background color.

To paint a radial blend

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Double-click the Blend tool icon to open the Blend dialog box.

3.	In the Blend dialog box, choose Radial in the Style pop-up menu and click OK.

4.	Drag the Blend tool from the center of the blend area.

Blend tool options

The Blend dialog box lets you modify the operation of the Blend tool. Double-click the Blend tool to open the Blend dialog box.

Set the following options in the Blend dialog box and click OK to implement the settings.

Style: Radial blends begin at a center point and radiate outward. Linear blends begin and end with a line of color.

Offset: For Radial style, enter a value to set the percentage of starting color in the blend. To use more of the starting color in the blend, enter a number from 50 to 100.

Skew: To set the midpoint between blend colors, enter a number from 1 to 100. The default is 50.

Behavior: Foreground and Background refer to the current colors in the toolbox. Transparent options fade the color to transparency. Spectrum blends create rainbow blends in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction around the color wheel.


Blur tool

The Blur tool is a painting and image-editing tool that softens specific areas in an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To blur image areas

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a brush shape and painting mode in the Brushes palette.

3.	Enter pressure percentage in the Pressure text box in the Brushes palette.

4.	Drag the Blur tool in the image area you want to blur. To constrain the Blur tool to a horizontal or vertical path, press Shift while dragging.

Blur tool options

The Blur dialog box lets you modify the operation of the Blur tool. Double-click the Blur tool to open the Blur dialog box.

You can set the following options in the Blur dialog box and click OK to implement the settings:

Fade Size: To decrease the size of the Blur brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area.

Fade Pressure: To decrease the softening effect as you drag in the image, choose Pressure in the Fade area.

Fade Within: If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

Pressure settings: If you use a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Pressure in the Pressure Varies area to vary either the tool’s effective size or intensity through stylus pressure.


(Paint) Bucket tool
Bucket tool

The Bucket tool is a painting and image-editing tool that fills areas with color. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To apply color with the Bucket tool

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select the color to apply from the Foreground Color icon in the toolbox.

3.	In the Brushes palette, select a transfer mode.

4.	Enter an opacity percentage in the Opacity text box in the Brushes palette.

5. 	Select the Bucket tool and click in the image area you want to color. Canvas applies the foreground color to pixels that match the pixel you click, depending on the Tolerance setting in the Bucket dialog box.

Bucket tool options

The Bucket dialog box lets you adjust the way the Bucket tool applies color in an image. Double-click the Bucket tool to open the Bucket dialog box.

You can set the following options in the Bucket dialog box and click OK to implement the settings:

Tolerance: Limits the range of colors the Bucket tool affects. Type a number from 0 to 255 in the Tolerance text box. The lower the Tolerance value, the more exact the color match must be. To affect only identically-colored pixels contiguous to a pixel you click, type 0 in the Tolerance text box. Increase the Tolerance to increase the range of pixels affected.

Anti-Aliased: To soften the bucket effect at the edge of the filled area, turn on Anti-Aliased.


Burn tool

The Burn tool is an image-editing tool that gradually darkens pixels where it is used in an image. The Burn tool is an analogue to the darkroom technique of directing light from an enlarger onto particular areas of a photographic print to increase the exposure in those areas.

You can modify the operation of the Burn tool with Brush selection and other settings in the Brushes palette, and with the Burn dialog box. The Burn tool is located in the Painting tools toolbar.

To burn image areas

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	In the Brushes palette, choose a brush shape.

3.	Choose an Exposure setting in the Brushes palette. Increasing the exposure setting increases the darkening effect of the tool. Decreasing the setting decreases the effect.

4.	Choose Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights in the Brushes palette pop-up menu. The Burn tool darkens pixels in the selected lightness range.

5. 	Drag the Burn tool in the image area you want to darken.
To constrain the Burn tool to a horizontal or vertical path as you drag, press Shift while dragging.

Burn tool options

The Burn dialog box lets you modify the operation of the Burn tool.

To adjust the Burn tool operation

1.	Double-click the Burn tool to open the Burn dialog box.

2.	You can set the following options in the Burn dialog box:

Fade Size: To decrease the size of the Burn brush stroke as you drag in the image, check the Size box in the Fade area.

Fade Exposure: To decrease the darkening effect as you drag in the image, check the Exposure box in the Fade area.

Fade Within: If you turn on a Fade option, enter the number of fade steps in the text box. The size of a fade step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

Pressure Varies: If you use a compatible digitizing tablet with a pressure-sensitive stylus, you can make stylus pressure affect the size or intensity of the Burn tool effect by choosing an option in the Pressure Varies area.

Note: If the following options appear dimmed and are not available, Canvas can not detect a compatible pressure-sensitive tool installed on your system.

•	Check the Size box to vary the tool’s coverage area through stylus pressure.

•	Check the Exposure box to vary the darkening effect through stylus pressure.

3.	Click OK to implement the settings.


Color Dropper tool

You can use the Color Dropper tool to select and apply colors and inks. The Color Dropper tool is located in the Effects toolbar in the toolbox.

The Color Dropper can select colors from any object in a document and from anywhere on screen, even outside of the Canvas application window.

Inks you select with the Color Dropper become the current pen inks and fill inks for new vector objects. Colors you select with the Color Dropper become the current foreground or background colors for painting.

The Color Dropper has two modes: Object Ink and Pixel Color. The tool selects the actual color at the point you click, taking into account transparency effects. Or, it selects the applied ink or paint color.

To select an ink

In Object Ink mode, the Color Dropper can pick up texture, gradient, hatch, and symbol inks from vector objects and text. When you click a vector object or text, you pick up the applied ink, not the actual color. For example, if you click a symbol ink of white stars on a blue background, this symbol ink becomes the current ink, whether you click a white or blue area.

In Object Ink mode, the Color Dropper picks up original colors applied to pixels that you click in paint objects.

1. 	Double-click the Color Dropper tool icon. In the dialog box, select Object Ink and click OK.

2. 	Select the Color Dropper tool. To set the fill ink, click an ink in a vector or text object, or click a pixel in a paint object. To set the pen ink, Option-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows).

To select a color

In Pixel Color mode, the Color Dropper picks up the actual color that you click.

1. 	Double-click the Color Dropper tool icon. In the dialog box, select Pixel Color and click OK.

2. 	Select the Color Dropper tool. To set the fill ink, click a color. To set the pen ink, Option-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows).

To select colors outside of Canvas

With the Color Dropper selected, you can drag from the Canvas window to anywhere on screen. As long as you press the mouse button, the Color Dropper remains active; the ink icons in the toolbox show you the colors the tool can select.

To select a fill ink and background color, release the mouse button to select the color under the tip of the pointer.

To select a pen ink and foreground color, press Option (Mac) or the right mouse button (Windows) and drag from the Canvas window to anywhere on screen. Release the mouse button to select the color under the tip of the pointer.

To apply colors to objects

You can apply the current inks to vector objects and text with the Color Dropper. This makes it easy to quickly transfer inks from one object to another.

Mac: Ctrl-click a vector or text object to apply the current fill ink to the object. Ctrl+Option-click to apply the current pen ink to the object.

Windows: Ctrl-click a vector or text object to apply the current fill ink to the object. Ctrl+right-click to apply the current pen ink to the object.

The Color Dropper’s mode does not affect the application of colors. Also, you can’t apply colors to paint objects using the Color Dropper tool.

Color Dropper modes

The Color Dropper selects either actual colors where you click, or it selects the inks applied to vector or text objects. To set the mode of the Color Dropper, double-click the Color Dropper tool icon. In the dialog box, select an option and click OK. The mode remains set unless you use the dialog box to change it.

Object Ink

Selects inks and actual colors, not the apparent color that you click. In vector or text objects, the Color Dropper selects object inks — color, gradient, symbol, texture, and hatch inks. It does not take into account transfer modes or transparency effects. If you click an object’s stroke, you select its pen ink; if you click an object’s interior, you select its fill ink. In the case of paint objects, which do not have inks, the color you click is selected as a color ink.

For example, if you click a gradient ink with the Color Dropper, it selects the gradient ink, not the color under the pointer. If you click a dotted symbol ink, the tool selects the symbol ink, not the color where you click.

In paint objects, the Color Dropper selects applied paint colors, not colors you see because of transfer modes, channel masks, or other transparency effects. For example, if you click a black area that is 50% transparent against a white background, you select solid black, not the 50% gray that you see.

Pixel Color

Selects the apparent color that you click at the tip of the Color Dropper pointer. This mode works the same whether you click a paint, vector, or text object.

For example, if you click a gradient ink in a vector object, you select the exact color you click, not the gradient ink. If you click in an object that has transparency and transfer mode effects, you select the exact color you see. Selecting a color in Pixel Color mode lets you identify the color’s values. When you click a pixel, the Color manager in the Inks palette shows the color values.

Color mode

When you select Pixel Color in the Dropper dialog box, you can choose a color system in the pop-up menu. You can select RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale. The Color Dropper converts any color you click to the selected color system.

For best performance, choose the color system that matches the colors you are sampling. For example, if you sample colors in complex RGB images with CMYK selected, slight delays can occur because Canvas must convert the image’s RGB values to CMYK values.

However, you might want to select a color system that differs from an image. You might do this to see the effect of a color conversion, such as RGB to CMYK for printing, for example.


Concentric Circles tool

The Concentric Circles tool draws nested rings of ovals or circles. It is located in the Object tools toolbar.

1.	Select the Concentric Circles tool in the toolbox.

2.	Drag diagonally to set the size of the bounding box around the concentric circles object.

•	To create perfect circles, press the Shift key while dragging.

•	To draw concentric circles from the center out, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Option key (Mac) and drag the tool.

To edit concentric circles

Double-click a concentric circles object to open the Concentric Circles dialog box Set the number of circle rings, and the ring spacing, and then click OK.

Concentric Circles tool options

Use the Concentric Circles dialog box to set the number and spacing of the rings before or after drawing with the Concentric Circles tool.

To configure the Concentric Circles tool

Double-click the Concentric Circles tool icon to open the Concentric Circles dialog box. Set the following values and then click OK to implement the settings:

Number of Circles: Type a number from 1 to 100 to set the number of rings in a concentric circles object.

Space Circles Every _ Pt.: Type the distance in points (1/72 inch) that you want to appear between rings in the concentric circles object.

•	If the object is smaller than the specified distance, not all rings are drawn.

•	If the object is larger than the specified distance, the rings are spaced as specified with extra space at the center of the object.

•	If you type zero, Canvas draws the number of circles or ovals specified, with equal space between all the rings.


Crop tool

The Crop tool is an image-editing tool that lets you select a rectangular part of an image to crop temporarily or permanently. You can also use the tool to add space around an image. The Crop tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

Using the Crop tool to temporarily remove part of an image results in a “soft crop.” When you edit a soft-cropped image, Canvas restores the cropped area. When you finish editing and deselect the image, Canvas soft-crops the image again.

To apply a soft crop

1.	Select the Crop tool. Point to the paint object to crop. When the pointer shows the crop icon, click. A crop rectangle appears. The rectangle defines the crop boundary.

2.	To position the crop rectangle:

 •	Drag a corner to resize it.

 •	Drag a side to move it. The pointer changes to a hand when you can move the crop rectangle.

3.	Press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to soft-crop the image. You can also complete the crop by clicking when the pointer is a gavel. (To cancel the crop, click outside the paint object.)

To remove a soft crop

1.	Click the paint object with the Crop tool. The full image appears with the crop rectangle.

2.	Drag the corner handles of the crop rectangle so it surrounds the entire image.

3. 	Press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows).

To crop permanently

1.	Select the Crop tool and point to the paint object.

2.	When the pointer is a Crop icon, Command-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows). A rectangle shows the crop area.

3.	Position the rectangle so it frames the part of the image you want to keep.

 •	Drag a corner to resize the rectangle. Drag to enlarge the rectangle if you want to add space to the image.

 •	Drag a side to move the rectangle. The pointer changes to a hand when you can move the crop rectangle.

4.	Press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to crop the image. You can also complete the crop by clicking when the pointer becomes a gavel. (To cancel the crop, click outside the image area.)

To hard-crop with the Selection tool

1.	Select the paint object to crop.

2.	Point to a selection handle. The pointer becomes a small cross.

3.	Press Ctrl and begin dragging the selection handle. Release the Ctrl key. Move the handle inward to crop the image or outward to add space around it.

•	Press Shift to constrain the crop area to a square.

•	Press Command (Mac) or Alt (Windows) to keep the crop area proportional.

•	Press Ctrl to define the crop area from the center. You can combine this constraint with the proportional or square constraint.


Curve tool

The Curve tool draws precise paths with straight and curved segments. The tool draws with the current stroke, pen ink, and fill ink. The Curve tool is in the Path toolbar.

When you draw curve segments, you place an anchor point and a tangent line at the start of each segment.

1.	Select the Curve tool. Where you want the path to begin, do one of the following:

 •	Click to set the anchor point and, before releasing the mouse button, drag to position its tangent line.

 •	Click to set the anchor point without creating a tangent line. When you release the mouse button, the anchor point appears.

2.	Where you want the segment to end, do one of the following:

 •	Drag to simultaneously set an anchor point and position a tangent line.

 •	Click to set the anchor point without creating a tangent line.

3.	Repeat the previous step to draw additional segments.

4.	To complete the path, use one of the following options:

 •	For an open path, after you place the last anchor point, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows). You can also double-click to place the last anchor point.

 •	For a closed path, click the starting anchor point, and then press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows). You can also double-click the starting anchor point.

Constraining and editing curves

To move an anchor point as you place it: Instead of clicking to place an anchor point, press the mouse button, and without releasing the mouse button, press the Spacebar. Now, you can drag the mouse to move the new anchor point.

To place an anchor point at a 45-degree angle to the previous one: Press Shift as you set the second anchor point.

To create a straight segment: Press Command (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) as you click to set the segment's endpoint.

To remove the last segment: Press Delete. You can continue to remove segments in the reverse order you created them, until you delete the entire object.

To create a corner point: Press Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows) and click to set the anchor point.

To force a tangent line to move in 45-degree increments: Press Shift as you drag the tangent line.

You can also draw straight paths by clicking with the Curve tool, similar to the way you use the Polygon tool. See Drawing polygons.


Dimensioning tools

The dimensioning tools add dimensions to an illustration. The tools are in the Object toolbar.

A. Horizontal	B. Horizontal Chain	C. Horizontal Baseline
D. Vertical	E. Vertical Chain	F. Vertical Baseline
G. Oblique	H. Oblique Chain	I. Oblique Baseline
J. Perpendicular	K. Object Side	L. Angle
M. Radius	N. Diameter	O. Center
P. Area	Q. Perimeter

The dimensioning tools use the default stroke (pen), text, and arrow settings. Note: If you remove all the preset arrows from the Arrow tab in the Strokes palette, you can’t create dimension objects with arrows.

1.	Select a dimensioning tool in the toolbox. When you move the pointer into the document, a prompt appears at the pointer.

2.	To begin dimensioning, position the pointer and click as directed by the prompt. The prompt varies, depending on which dimensioning tool you use. Refer to Dimensioning procedures for details on what you should do when each prompt appears.

3.	When the “Anchor" prompt appears, move the pointer to position the dimension. If you drag away from the measurement points, the witness lines extend and the text follows the pointer.

4.	To anchor the dimension in place, click once.

5.	For chain and baseline dimensions, you can click additional measurement points and anchor each part of the dimension object. After you anchor the last part, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to finish the object.

Related topics

Setting up the Dimensioning tools

Attributes of dimension objects

Linking dimensions to measured objects


Attributes of dimension objects

When you create a dimension object, Canvas uses the current ink and stroke settings, which are shown by the pen ink, fill ink, and stroke icons in the toolbox. The dimension text uses the current text settings, as indicated in the Text menu by a check mark.

You can change the current ink, stroke, and text settings for new dimension objects, and you can change these settings for existing dimension objects.

To change the type attributes of a dimension object

Select the dimension object and use the Text menu or the Type palette to choose the font, size, style, and other attributes of the text.

To change the appearance of a dimension object

Select the object and use the Inks and Strokes palettes to select ink color, pen size, and arrows for the dimension object.

To change attributes for new dimension objects

Make sure that no objects are selected in the document, and then use the Text menu (or the Type palette), and the Inks and Strokes palettes to change the current settings for new objects and text.


Dimensioning procedures

Tool	Prompts	Procedure
Horizontal, Oblique, and Vertical	Click 1st Point, Click 2nd Point	Click the start point for the measurement, then click the end point and anchor the dimension object.
Baseline and Chain (Horizontal, Oblique, and Vertical)	Click 1st Point, Click Next Point	Click the start point and then click the end point for the first measurement; anchor the first part of the dimension object. Click the next measurement point and anchor the next part of the dimension object. Continue until finished, then press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows).
Angle	Click 1st Line, Click 2nd Line	Click the start point for the angular measurement, then click the end point.
Perpendicular	Click Line, Click Point	Click the line to measure from, then click a point anywhere to take a perpendicular measurement from the line to the point.
Object Side	Click Object Side	Click the side of the object to be measured.
Radius, Diameter, and Center	Click Arc/Ellipse	Click anywhere on the arc or ellipse and then anchor the dimension object.
Area and Perimeter	Click Object	Click anywhere on the object to be measured and then anchor the dimension object.


Setting up the Dimensioning tools

The Dimensioning dialog box lets you adjust many aspects of the Dimensioning tools. You can also use this dialog box to edit existing dimensioning objects.

To set up Dimensioning tools

1.	Make sure that no dimension objects are selected, then double-click a dimensioning tool icon to open the Dimensioning dialog box.

2.	Choose the type of dimensions you want to configure in the Dimension Type pop-up menu. (If a dimension object was selected, the object type appears in the pop-up menu).

Select this type	To configure these dimensioning tools
Angular	Angle
Radial	Radius, Diameter, Center
Linear	Horizontal, Vertical, Side, Horizontal Baseline, Vertical Baseline, Horizontal Chain, Vertical Chain, Perpendicular
Object Info	Area, Perimeter

3.	In the Style area, adjust the settings for arrow placement, text position, and text framing.

4.	Choose the text alignment method in the Text Display pop-up menu.

5.	To configure leaders for linear and radial dimension objects, select one of the following options in the Leading Character pop-up menu:

None: Does not include a leader

Left: Includes a left-pointing leader

Right: Includes a right-pointing leader

Automatic: Applies only to radial dimension objects. Includes a leader pointing left when dimension object is left of the object's center, and a leader pointing right when dimension object is aligned with or right of the object's center.

6.	To configure radius and diameter symbols for radial dimension objects, select one of the following options in the R,D Symbols pop-up menu:

None: Does not include any symbols.

Leading: Places symbols before the dimension text.

Trailing: Places symbols after the dimension text.

7.	To set the dimension precision, choose an option in the Precision pop-up menu. The options tell Canvas to use fractions or the specified number of decimal places in dimension text.

8.	To specify the format of tolerance data in dimension objects, choose one of the following options in the Tolerance pop-up menu, and type the numbers you want to use in the text boxes.

None: Does not include any tolerance amount.

One: The tolerance amount from the first text box, with ± and the dimension text.

Two: The numbers from both text boxes. To use a negative number, type a minus sign (-) before it.

Limit: Displays two dimensions, calculated from the actual dimensions and the two tolerance values.

9.	To set a custom scale for dimension objects, turn Custom Units on. This overrides the measurement units specified for the document rulers. Choose a measurement unit in the adjacent pop-up menu and type the actual measure in the first text box. Type the scaled measurement in the second text box. Choose the scale measurement unit in the adjacent pop-up menu.

10.	Click OK to close the dialog box and implement the settings.

Related topics

To change the settings for dimension objects

Using industry standards for dimension objects


To change the settings for dimension objects
Changing the settings for dimension objects

The Dimensioning dialog box lets you change the settings of dimension objects that are already in the document.

To change the properties of regular dimension objects

Double-click the dimension object to open the Dimensioning dialog box. To change multiple dimension objects, select them and then double-click one of the objects.

To change the properties of chain and baseline dimension objects

Select the dimension object and choose Ungroup in the Object menu. Then, double-click one of the dimension objects to open the Dimensioning dialog box. You can also double-click a dimension object with the Direct Selection tool to open the dialog box without ungrouping the objects first.


Using industry standards for dimension objects

To use standard settings for dimension objects or create custom standards, click Standards in the Dimensioning dialog box to open the Dimension Standards dialog box.

You can choose several industry standards in the Current Standard pop-up menu. You can also use these standards as the basis for custom standards. When you adjust a setting in the Dimension Standards dialog box and click OK, Canvas asks you to type a name for the new standard. When you save custom standards, you can select them from the Current Standard pop-up menu.

To save a new dimension standard

1.	Adjust the settings in the text boxes for the various aspects of dimensioning to create a new set of settings.

2.	Choose Save Standard As” from the pop-up menu at the lower-left corner of the Dimension Standards dialog box, or click OK. The New Standard dialog box appears.

2.	In the New Standard dialog box, type a name for the new standard and click OK. You return to the Dimension Standards dialog box with the new standard selected in the Current Standard pop-up menu.

To delete a custom dimension standard

1.	In the Dimensioning dialog box, click the Standards button to open the Dimension Standards dialog box.

2.	Choose Delete Standard from the pop-up menu at the lower-left corner of the Dimension Standards dialog box. The Delete Standard dialog box appears.

3.	Select the name of the custom standard you want to delete from the Name pop-up menu. You can select only custom standards you have created, you cannot delete the built-in dimension standards.

4.	Click OK to delete the standard.


Saving and deleting custom dimension standards

If you customize the settings in the Dimension Standards dialog box, you can save the settings as a custom standard. Press the triangle button at the bottom-left corner of the Dimension Standards dialog box to display a menu for saving and deleting dimension standards.

When you save and delete standards, they remain saved or deleted whether you click OK or Cancel to close the Dimension Standards dialog box.

To save the settings as a new standard

In the pop-up menu, choose "Save settings as" and type a name for the custom standard in the dialog box that appears. Click OK. The new standard will appear in the Current Standard pop-up menu.

To delete a custom standard

In the pop-up menu, choose "Delete standard." In the dialog box that opens, choose a custom standard in the pop-up menu and click OK.


Linking dimensions to measured objects

Because dimension objects aren't attached to the objects they measure, dimensions do not change when you resize objects you have measured. However, you can group a dimension object and the object that it measures. When you do this and then you resize the object, the dimension changes accordingly.

To group an object and a dimension object

Select the dimension object and the measured object and choose Group in the Object menu.


Direct Selection tool

The Direct Selection tool (hollow arrow) lets you select objects in a group object, without ungrouping. The tool is in the Selection toolbar.

To use the tool, click the object you want to select.


Dodge tool

The Dodge tool is an image-editing tool that lightens pixels it touches. This is the digital equivalent of the darkroom technique called “dodging,” which reduces exposure of a photographic print to lighten an area.

The Dodge tool lets you choose a brush size for dodging and adjust other aspects of its operation. The Dodge tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To dodge an image

1.	Select the Dodge tool and put the paint object in edit mode.

2.	In the Brushes palette, choose a brush shape.

3.	Adjust the Exposure value by dragging the slider or entering a value from 1 to 100 in the text box. Increasing the exposure setting increases the lightening effect of the tool. Decreasing the setting decreases the effect.

4.	Choose Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights in the Mode menu in the Brushes palette. The Dodge tool affects pixels in the selected tonal range.

5. 	Drag the Dodge tool in the image. To constrain the tool to a horizontal or vertical line, press Shift and drag.

Dodge tool options

Double-click the Dodge tool to open the Dodge dialog box. To decrease the size of the Dodge tool brush stroke as you drag, choose Size in the Fade area. To decrease the lightening effect as you drag, choose Exposure in the Fade area.

If you select a Fade option, enter the “Fade within” distance in the text box. The distance is measured in steps that are relative to the brush size and spacing.

If you have a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Exposure in the Pressure Varies area to let the pressure of the stylus affect the fade of the Dodge tool.

After configuring the Dodge tool, click OK to close the dialog box.


Eraser tool

The Eraser tool is a painting and image-editing tool. The Eraser uses the current brush shape and applies the background color to an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To use the Eraser

1.	Double-click a paint object with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	In the Brushes palette, choose a brush shape.

3.	Drag the Eraser tool in the image to apply the background color.


Freehand tool

The Freehand tool draws vector paths based on the movement of the pointer. It draws using the current stroke, pen ink and fill ink. The tool is in the Path tools toolbar.

1.	Select the Freehand tool in the Paths tools toolbar.

2.	Position the pointer where you want the path to begin.

3.	Drag to create a path. To create a closed path, release the mouse button when the pointer is back at the starting point of the path.

Controlling the Freehand tool

You can adjust the operation of the Freehand tool to create smoother or more exact paths by changing the Freehand Tolerance setting.

To change the Freehand tool tolerance

1.	Double-click the Freehand tool in the Paths tools toolbar. The Freehand Tolerance dialog box appears.

2.	In the “Set Tolerance To” box, type a number from 1 to 5.

•	Type a lower number to make the path drawn by the tool match the movement of the pointer more precisely. Type a higher number to make smoother paths that don’t precisely follow the movement of the pointer. A lower number results in more anchor points in the path, and a higher number results in fewer anchor points.

3.	Click OK to implement the new setting.


Gallery tool

The Gallery tool opens the Gallery palette, which gives you access to object drawing macros and Canvas clip art. The tool is in the Object toolbar.

1.	Press the Gallery tool in the Objects toolbar and drag the Gallery palette away from the toolbar to make the palette floating.

2.	Click the Macros tab to save and place macro objects.

•	Macros are document-level objects. In other words, if you switch between two open document windows, each using a different macro set, you will see the thumbnails in the Gallery palette switch between the two macro sets.

3. 	Click the Art tab to browse clip art files, search clip art indexes, and place Canvas clip art in the document.

Creating, deleting, and placing macro objects

You can convert any Canvas object into a macro object by dragging it to the Macros tab of the Gallery palette.

To create a Macro object

1.	Create the illustration that you want to use as a macro.

2.	If necessary, press the Gallery tool in the Object toolbar to open the Gallery palette. Drag the palette away from the tool box and select the Macros tab.

3.	Drag the object into the window on the Macros tab. In the dialog box, type a name for the macro in the text box and click OK. A preview of the macro appears in the Gallery palette.

To delete a macro

On the Macros tab in the Gallery palette, select the macro you want to delete. Press the arrow button on the bottom-right of the tab and choose Delete in the pop-up menu. The macro is removed from the palette but copies in the document aren't affected.

To place a macro object

In the Macros tab of the Gallery palette, select the macro you want to place.

 •	To place the macro at its original size, click in the document where you want the top-left corner of the macro to appear.

 •	To scale the macro as you place it, drag the pointer to set the size of the bounding box of the object you are placing. Canvas scales the object to fit the bounding box you specified.

Related topics

Using macro sets

Editing macro objects

Adding clip art to Canvas documents

You use the Gallery tool and the Art tab of the Gallery palette to select and place clip art from the Canvas clip art collection.

The Canvas package includes an extensive collection of clip art. The clip art files are in Canvas file format on two CD-ROMs. Because CDs are read-only, if you want to save an edited clip art file, you must save the file on another disk (a local hard or floppy disk or a network volume).

When a Canvas clip art CD-ROM is loaded on your system and you select the Art Tab on the Gallery palette, Canvas loads the CD's index file and displays all clip art previews. After you search for clip art by keywords, choose Clear to again view all of the previews in the index.

To change preview sizes

You can switch between large and small previews of clip art in the Gallery palette. To change the preview size, choose Toggle Cell Size in the pop-up menu on the Art tab. Canvas enlarges or reduces the preview size by a factor of nine.

To place clip art in a Canvas document

1.	Click a preview in the Art tab of the Gallery palette to select the illustration.

2.	To place clip art at its original size, click in the document where you want to place the upper-left corner of the illustration.

3.	To scale clip art as you place it, drag the pointer to set the bounding box size. Canvas fits the illustration to the bounding box.

To browse clip art in a specific folder or directory

1.	On the Art tab of the Gallery palette, press the right-arrow button and choose View Directory in the pop-up menu.

2.	In the dialog box, select any Canvas file in the directory or folder you want to browse and click Open. Thumbnails of the clip art in the folder appear on the Art tab. Most clip art images display color preview images.

 •	For files with small elements spread around the page, previews might be difficult to see clearly.

 •	For Canvas art you create yourself, save the file with a preview image (select the Create Preview option in the Save As dialog box on Mac; on Windows, the preview is created by default) if you want the file to display a preview in the Gallery palette.

To search for clip art using keyword searches

1.	Insert a Canvas clip art CD-ROM in the CD drive of your computer.

2.	Double-click the Gallery tool to open the Gallery palette and select the Art tab, if necessary.

3.	Canvas loads the index file from the CD and displays previews of all the clip art.

4.	To search the index, click the triangle button at the lower-left of the palette and choose one of the following search options:

Matches: Exact matches of the name you type

Contains: Any name with the text you type

Starts with: Any name that begins with the text you type

Ends with: Any name that ends with the text you type

5.	In the text box, type keywords to search for.

 •	You can type multiple keywords, separated by spaces, to find images that match on or more keywords.

 •	You can tell Canvas to find art with all or any of the keywords by changing the “Search using And criteria" setting. For example, you can type “car tree." With this setting off, Canvas searches for clip art of either cars or trees. With this setting on, Canvas searches for art of both cars and trees.

6.	To begin searching, click Search. Canvas displays thumbnail images of clip art that meet the criteria.

7.	To remove the current search criteria so you can enter new criteria, click Clear.

Note: On the latest editions of the Canvas clip art CD-ROMs, the index on each disk covers all clip art files in the collection. On earlier editions, the index on each disk covers the clip art on that disk only.


Using macro sets

You can save macros in named sets for use with specific projects or types of illustrations. Using this feature, you can load only the macros that you need at the time.

To save all macros in the palette as a set

On the Macros tab of the Gallery palette, choose Save Set in the arrow button pop-up menu. In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the set, specify a location to save the set, and click Save.

To load a macro set into the palette

On the Macros tab of the Gallery palette, choose Append Set in the arrow button pop-up menu. In the dialog box that appears, specify the file name and location of the macro set you want to load, and click Open. The macro set is added to any macros already in the palette.


Editing macro objects

If you want to update all copies of a macro in a document, you can replace the original in the Macros tab of the Gallery palette. If you want to replace a macro with a copy based on that macro, you must first unlink the copy from the original.

To edit the path of a macro copy, first select the copy and then choose Path > Convert to Paths in the Object menu or unlink the object; both methods let you edit the object as a path, but they also unlink the object from the original macro.

To replace a macro in the Gallery palette

1.	Create an object you want to use to replace the macro.

2.	Drag the new object to the Macros tab and drop it on the macro you want to change. Canvas changes all copies of that macro to the new object.

Unlinking macros

By unlinking placed macros, you can prevent some placed macro objects from changing when the macro in the Gallery palette is modified. You also make it possible to use a placed macro to modify its parent macro and to use path-editing techniques.

To unlink a macro copy

1.	Select the object you want to unlink.

2.	Choose Unlink in the pop-up menu on the right of the Macros tab.


Grid Maker tool

The Grid Maker tool draws grids of rows and columns. This tool is in the Object tools toolbar.

To draw a grid

1.	Select the Grid Maker tool in the toolbox.

2.	Drag the tool diagonally to define the grid's bounding box. To create a square grid, press Shift and drag. To draw the grid out from the center, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and drag.

To separate a grid into lines

You can adjust the individual lines that comprise a grid by converting it to a path and then ungrouping it.

1.	Select the grid object and choose Path > Convert to Path in the Object menu.

2.	Choose Ungroup in the Object menu. The grid object separates into individual lines.

Grid Maker tool options

The Grid Maker dialog box lets you configure the Grid Maker tool and edit existing Grid Maker objects.

To configure Grid Maker options

1.	Double-click the Grid Maker tool to open the Grid Maker dialog box.

2.	Set the number of boxes comprising the grid and click OK.

•	If you set Boxes Across to 1, the grid has no vertical lines.

•	If you set Boxes Down to 1, the grid has no horizontal lines.

3.	After configuring the settings in the dialog box, click OK.

To change the configuration of a grid object

Double-click the grid object to open the Grid Maker dialog box. Change the number of boxes and click OK.


Hand tool

The Hand tool changes the view of the current Canvas document by panning or scrolling the document. Using the Hand tool is like sliding a piece of paper on a desktop. The tool is located in the View tools toolbar.

1.	Select the Hand tool from the toolbox. You can quickly switch to the Hand tool at any time by pressing and holding the down the Spacebar. When the Hand tool is active, the pointer becomes a hand.

2.	Drag to make the document follow the pointer. For example, to move a document up so you can see the bottom, drag toward the top of the screen.


Lasso tool

The Lasso tool is an image-editing tool that lets you select non-rectangular areas in an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use the Lasso dialog box to set options for making selections with the Lasso tool, including making selections while excluding background pixels.

To select image areas

1.	Select the Lasso tool in the Painting tools toolbar.

2.	Point to the image you want to edit. If the object is not in edit mode, the pointer becomes a hand. Click the object to start editing. The pointer becomes a lasso.

3.	Drag to outline the area you want to select. Canvas connects the endpoints of the outline with a straight line.

To make a “rubber-band” selection

You can make the Lasso tool follow straight lines by pressing Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows) and clicking points in an image. The Lasso connects the points you click with straight lines to form a selection area.

To add to a selection

Press Shift and the pointer displays a crosshair with a '+' to show that it adds to the current selection. Drag to create an additional selection area.

You can add to a selection in any part of the image; the new selection area doesn’t have to touch or overlap an existing selection.

To subtract from a selection

Command-drag (Mac) or Ctrl-drag (Windows) in the image. The pointer displays a '-' to show that it subtracts from the current selection.

To cut into an existing selection

To reduce an existing selection so only the part you drag over remains selected, press Shift+Command (Mac) or Shift+Ctrl (Windows) and drag in the image. This removes from the existing selection any parts that are not inside the new area you enclose with the Lasso pointer.

Lasso tool options

You can feather, anti-alias, and omit specific pixels when creating a lasso selection. To set these options, double-click the Lasso tool.

•	To feather the selection soften the selection edge, enter a value greater than zero in the Feather Radius text box.

•	To anti-alias a selection, turn on the Anti-Alias option.

•	To leave pixels that match the current background color out of the selection, turn on “Omit Background Color.”


Line tool

The Line tool draws vector lines using the current stroke and pen ink. The tool is in the Line toolbar.

In Canvas, lines are defined by a starting and ending point. A line has no interior and does not accept a fill ink.

1.	Select the Line tool in the toolbox.

2.	Drag from the starting point to the ending point in any direction

Constraining the Line tool

To draw lines at a 45° angle (horizontal, vertical, or diagonal), press Shift and drag from the starting point to the end point.

To draw lines out from the center, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and drag in the document.


Magnifying Glass tool

The Magnifying Glass tool is a viewing aid. The tool zooms in, or magnifies, and zooms out from a document. Using the tool changes your view of the document, but doesn’t change the size of objects in the document. The Magnifying Glass tool is in the View tools toolbar.

To change magnification

1.	Select the Magnifying Glass in the toolbox. The pointer becomes a magnifying glass with a plus sign.

2.	Click the center of the area you want to magnify. Canvas doubles the magnification level and centers the view at the point you clicked. If a paint object is in edit mode when you click, Canvas zooms to the next higher integral magnification level (At 72 ppi, for example, Canvas zooms to even multiples of 100% magnification).

3.	To reduce rather than magnify, Shift-click the area you want to center on screen at reduced magnification.

To magnify an area to fill the screen

With the Magnifying Glass tool, drag a box around the area you want to magnify.


Marker tool

The Marker tool is a painting tool that applies the current foreground color with a hard-edged brush stroke. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

The Marker dialog box has options that let you adjust how the Marker tool paints.

To paint with the Marker tool

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a foreground color in the Color tab in the Inks palette.

3.	In the Brushes palette, choose a brush shape.

4.	Choose an Opacity setting in the Brushes palette.

5.	Choose a transfer mode in the Brushes palette Mode pop-up menu.

6.	Drag the Marker tool in the image to paint.

Constraining the Marker tool

To constrain the Marker tool to a horizontal or vertical line as you drag, press the Shift key while dragging.

Marker tool options

Use the Marker dialog box to adjust options for painting with the Marker tool. Double-click the Marker tool to open the Marker dialog box.

You can set the following options in the Marker dialog box and click OK to implement the settings:

Fade Size: To decrease the size of the Marker brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area.

Fade Opacity: To make the color of the stroke fade to transparent, choose Opacity in the Fade area.

Fade Within: If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

Pressure settings: If you use a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Opacity in the Pressure Varies area to vary either the tool’s effective size or the stroke transparency through stylus pressure.


Marquee tool

The Marquee tool is an image-editing tool that lets you make rectangular selections in an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To select rectangular areas

1.	Select the Marquee tool and click the image to place it in edit mode.

2.	Drag diagonally in the image to make a selection rectangle. The selected area is surrounded by a flashing marquee.

To add to a selection

You can add to a selection in any part of the image; the new selection area doesn’t have to touch or overlap an existing selection.

1.	Press Shift and the pointer displays a crosshair with a '+' to show that it adds to the current selection.

2.	Drag to enclose the area you want to add to the selection.

•	To constrain the selection rectangle to a square, release the Shift key and press it again to constrain the rectangle as you drag the pointer.

To subtract from a selection

Command-drag (Mac) or Ctrl-drag (Windows) in the image. The pointer displays a '-' to show that it subtracts from the current selection.

•	To drag the selection rectangle out from the center, release the Command key (Mac) or Ctrl key (Windows) and press it again to constrain the rectangle as you drag the pointer.

•	To constrain the selection rectangle to a square, press the Shift key as you drag.

To select an intersecting selection

To reduce an existing selection so only the part you drag over remains selected.

1.	Press Shift+Command (Mac) or Shift+Ctrl (Windows) The pointer displays an ‘x’ to show that you are selecting the intersection of two selections.

2.	Drag in the image to make a selection rectangle. This removes from the existing selection any parts that are not inside the new area you enclose with the Marquee rectangle..

To constrain the selection rectangle to a square, release the Shift key and press it again to constrain the selection rectangle as you drag.

To drag the selection rectangle out from the center, release the Command key (Mac) or Ctrl key (Windows) and then press the key again as you drag the pointer.


Multigon tool

The Multigon tool draws all types of multi-sided vector objects, including triangles, hexagons, pentagons, octagons, stars, circular starbursts, and similar shapes. The tool is in the Object tools toolbar.

The Multigon tool draws with the current pen ink and fill ink. You can use the Multigon dialog box to adjust the number of sides and other shape options for the Multigon tool. After you draw a star, you can use special editing features to twirl the star’s points and reshape the star.

To draw a multigon

1.	Select the Multigon tool in the Objects tools toolbar.

2.	Drag diagonally to define a bounding box containing the multigon.

Constraining the Multigon tool

To make the bounding box square, press Shift as you drag the tool. To draw a multigon out from the center, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) as you drag.

Multigon tool options

You can use the Multigon dialog box to configure the Multigon tool. Double-click the Multigon tool icon to open the dialog box.

Use the Multigon dialog box to set the multigon style, as described in the following table, and other options, and then click OK to implement the settings.

Style	Appearance
Frame	No interior lines
Framed Star	Combination of Frame and Star objects
Spoke	No sides connecting the spoke points
Star	Points connected by interior lines
Star Outline	Multiple points with no interior lines
Wheel	Combination of Frame and Spoke objects
Multigon dialog box options

The available options in the Multigon dialog box depend on the selected multigon style as described in the table (above).

Points: For stars, framed stars, and star outlines, enter the number of star points from 3 to 100 in the Points text box. For other styles, enter the number of sides from 3 to 100 in the Sides text box.

Min - Max: Drag the slider to change the interior area of stars, framed stars, and star outlines.

Smooth: Turn on Smooth in the Multigon text box to smooth the object's angles.

Points: For stars, enter a value of more or less than 0 degrees to bend the points. Negative values bend the points counterclockwise. You can also edit star multigons interactively.

Saving and deleting Multigon tool settings

You can save Multigon tool settings so you can use them later. In the Multigon dialog box, press the triangle at the lower-left to save, select, and delete custom multigon styles.

When you save and delete styles, they remain saved or deleted whether you click OK or Cancel to close the Multigon dialog box.

To save a multigon setting

1.	In the Multigon dialog box, press the triangle at the lower-left  and Choose Save Shape from the pop-up menu.

2.	Type a name for the shape and click OK. You can then select this saved style from the pop-up menu.

To delete a saved setting

1.	In the Multigon dialog box, press the triangle at the lower-left and Choose Delete Shape from the pop-up menu.

2.	In the dialog box, choose the shape name you want to delete and Click OK. You can't delete any of the built-in styles.


Editing star multigons

You can interactively edit star multigons (framed star, star, and star outline styles) to adjust the twirl and radius of the object's points. The following procedures do not apply to frame, spoke, or wheel multigon objects.

To edit a star multigon

1.	Double-click the star multigon to put it in interactive mode. An outer handle and an inner handle appear on one point of the star.

 •	To change the length of the star points, drag the outer handle inward or outward from the center of the star.

 •	To twirl the points, drag the handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

 •	To change the position of the inner points, drag the inner handle inward or outward from the center.

2.	To end interactive editing, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows), or double-click outside the object.


Painting two-toned Neon strokes
Neon tool

The Neon tool is a painting tool that applies a neon-tube brushstroke, using the foreground color on the inside of the paint stroke and the background color outside on the outside of the stroke. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use the Neon dialog box to modify the operation of the Neon tool when you use a pressure-sensitive stylus.

To paint a neon stroke

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a foreground color and background color in the Color tab in the Inks palette.

3.	In the Brushes palette, choose a brush shape.

4.	Choose a Glow setting in the Brushes palette. The Glow setting adjusts the color ratio of the brush stroke.

5.	Drag the Neon tool in the image area you want to edit.

Constraining the Neon tool

To constrain the Neon tool to a horizontal or vertical line as you drag, press the Shift key while dragging the tool.

Neon tool options

You can use the Neon dialog box to set the Neon tool to work with a pressure-sensitive stylus.

If you are using a pressure-sensitive tablet, double-click the Neon tool icon to open its dialog box. Turn on the Size option to make the stylus pressure affect the size of the Neon brush stroke.

When this option is on, less pressure on the stylus decreases the size of the Neon brush stroke as you drag in the image.

After configuring the Neon tool the way you want, click OK.


Oval tool

The Oval tool draws ovals and circles using the current stroke, pen ink, and fill ink. The tool is in the Oval and arcs toolbar.

To draw ovals and circles

1.	Select the Oval tool.

2.	Drag diagonally to define a bounding box around the oval.

 •	To draw a circle, press Shift and drag.

 •	To draw from the center outward, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) as you drag.


Paint Object Creator tool

The Paint Object Creator tool creates new, blank paint objects. This tool lets you set the image mode, resolution, and background for new paint objects. The Paint Object Creator tool is located in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use other painting tools to create new paint objects. You can select any painting tool (except Crop) and drag in the document to create a paint object. The Paint Object Creator tool’s settings for mode, resolution, and background apply to paint objects you create with any painting tool.

To create a paint object

1.	Select the Paint Object Creator tool or another painting tool.

2.	Drag diagonally to create a rectangular paint object. To create a square paint object, press Shift and drag.

3. 	Release the mouse button. The image is in edit mode and you can begin painting within it. To leave edit mode, press Esc.

Paint object settings

To set mode, resolution, and background for new paint objects, press the Paint Object Creator tool icon in the toolbox. Choose settings from the pop-up menu.

•	To set the image mode, choose a mode in the menu. Not all modes are available for new paint objects.

•	Choose Opaque Background or Transparent Background. Opaque Background creates an image made of white pixels. Transparent Background creates a clear image with a visibility mask.

•	To set resolution, choose a preset resolution. Or, choose Custom, type a resolution from 1 to 2,540 pixels per inch, and click OK.


Paintbrush tool

The Paintbrush tool is a painting tool that applies the current foreground color with a soft (anti-aliased) brush stroke. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use the Paintbrush dialog box to modify the operation of the Paintbrush tool.

To paint with the Paintbrush

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a foreground color in the Color tab in the Inks palette.

3.	Select a brush shape and mode in the Brushes palette.

4.	Enter a percentage in the Opacity text box in the Brushes palette to set the transparency of the applied color.

5.	Click or drag the tool in the image.

Constraining the Paintbrush tool

To paint a stroke at a horizontal or vertical angle, press Shift and drag the Paintbrush tool.

Paintbrush tool options

Use the Paintbrush dialog box to adjust options for painting with the Paintbrush tool. Double-click the Paintbrush tool icon to open the Paintbrush dialog box.

You can set the following options in the Paintbrush dialog box and click OK to implement the settings:

Fade Size: To decrease the size of the Paintbrush brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area.

Fade Opacity: To make the color of the stroke fade to transparent, choose Opacity in the Fade area.

Fade Within: If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

Pressure settings: If you use a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Opacity in the Pressure Varies area to vary either the tool’s effective size or the stroke transparency through stylus pressure.


Path Text tool

The Path Text tool lets you align type on a vector object path. The tool is in the Text toolbar.

When you use the Path Text tool, the baseline of the text you type follows the path. Canvas adjusts the vertical orientation of each character to match the path. The type is “bound” to the vector object, so that they move together. If you reshape the path, the type conforms to the new shape.

When you select the Path Text tool and position the pointer on an object with a path that type can follow, the pointer becomes a I-beam. You cannot type on the path of objects drawn with the Concentric Circles, Spiral, or GridMaker tools.

You can use the Path text tool only once on a particular vector object. To bind additional text to the same path, create the text separately and use the Bind Text command to bind it to the path.

To type text on a path

1. 	Select the Path Text tool in the toolbox and point to the vector object you want text to follow. The pointer becomes an I-beam.

2.	Click the path of the vector object. An insertion point appears.

3.	Type the text. The type appears bound to the path. When you finish typing, press Esc. The type appears in a bounding box and the special bind position handles appear in red.

Flowing text

As you type text on a path, if you reach the end, you can flow text to another path. Click the overset symbol at the end of the text object. Then, click the next vector path at the point where you want the over-set text to start flowing. You can continue typing to enter additional text.

If you don’t want to flow overset bound text, you can resize the path so that all the bound text can flow along it. If no text is overset, the overset symbol does not appear at the end of the text object.

You can also use the Text Link tool to link text to another path. Select the Text Link tool in the Text toolbar. The pointer displays the number “1.” Click the first text object. The pointer changes to the number “2.” Click the object you want the text to flow to. When you finish, press Esc.

Editing text on a path

Select the Path Text tool in Text toolbar and click the text or vector object with the crosshair pointer. An insertion point appears in the bound text. Edit the text as you would edit text within a paragraph.

You can reposition text bound to an object using the special bind position handles that appear when you select the text.

Reverse Flow handle: Click the square to switch the vertical orientation of type relative to the object path and reverse the flow direction.

Alignment handle: Drag the right triangle to set the point where you want type to align. For example, center-justified type will be centered on the location of this handle.

Baseline Shift handle: Drag the left handle to change the elevation of the baseline relative to the path of the object. As you drag the handle, you see an outline of the path change position, indicating where the type baseline will be aligned. Use this handle to insert space between the type and the vector object.


Pencil tool

The Pencil tool is a painting and image-editing tool that applies color to a single pixel or paints a one-pixel wide stroke. The Pencil tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To use the Pencil tool

1.	Select the Pencil tool in the toolbox. Click the paint object you want to edit to place it in edit mode, if necessary.

2.	Drag in the image to apply the foreground color. At higher magnification levels, you can click individual pixels to change their color.

•	If a pixel that you click with the Pencil tool is a different color than the foreground color, the Pencil applies the foreground color.

•	If the pixel matches the foreground color, the Pencil changes the pixel to the background color.

•	To paint a straight line, Shift-drag the Pencil tool to confine the line to 90-degree angles.

Note: Although the Brushes palette is available when the Pencil is selected, the only brush available is a 1-pixel, hard edged brush.


Polygon tool

The Polygon tool draws paths with straight segments using the current pen ink, fill ink, and stroke settings. The tool is in the Path tools toolbar.

To draw a polygon

1.	Select the Polygon tool in the toolbox.

2.	Click to set the first anchor point. The first point appears as a small square.

3.	Click where you want to place the second anchor point. By pressing the pointer instead of clicking, you can display the segment and drag to position it. Release the mouse button to complete the segment.

4.	Repeat the last step to draw more segments.

•	To constrain placement of a segment to 45-degree intervals, press Shift while drawing the segment.

•	To remove the last segment drawn, press Delete while drawing.

5.	To complete the polygon:

 •	For an open polygon, after you place the last anchor point, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows), or double-click to place the last anchor point.

 •	For a closed polygon, click the starting anchor point, and then press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows), or double-click the starting anchor point.

Related topic

Smoothing polygons


QuickDraw 3D tool
QuickDraw 3D tool (Mac only)

The QuickDraw 3D tool lets you place QuickDraw 3D graphics in a document. You can use it to rotate, light, and change colors of a object. This tool is optional and is currently available for Mac OS only. The tool is located in the Object tools toolbar.

To place a QuickDraw 3D object in a document

1.	Select the QuickDraw 3D tool in the Object tools toolbar.

2.	Click where you want to place the object in the document. A directory dialog box opens.

3.	Locate the QuickDraw 3D file that you want to place in the document and click Open. Canvas places the graphic in the document.

4	To change lighting and display options, double-click the QuickDraw 3D graphic with the Selection tool; four buttons appear at the bottom of the object.

5.	To move the 3D graphic, click a button and drag inside the bounding box of the graphic.

6.	To use the options dialog box, click the Options button. Configure the settings you want in the dialog box and click OK.


QuickTime tool
QuickTime tool (Mac OS only)

The QuickTime tool lets you place and play digital movies in Apple Computer’s QuickTime format. This tool has a movie camera icon in the Object Tools toolbar.

You must have QuickTime software, available from Apple Computer, installed on your system to use QuickTime movies in Canvas. If this software is not installed, Canvas alerts you at startup and disables the QuickTime tool.

To place a QuickTime movie

1.	Select the QuickTime tool. Click where you want to place the upper-left corner of the movie object, or drag to define a box to contain the movie object.

2.	A directory dialog box appears. Select the QuickTime Movie and click Open. Canvas places the movie preview (if available) in the document.

You can also place other files, such as JPEG images, using this procedure. If you select a non-movie file that can be placed, the "Open" button changes to "Convert."

After you place a movie object, you can move it by dragging the object, or selecting it and using the keyboard arrow keys. When it's selected, you can resize the movie object by dragging one of its handles.

To play a movie: Double-click the movie object, then click the Play button on the control bar. To stop playback, click in the movie object or use the control bar. To end playback mode, double-click outside the movie object.

If a movie file is not available in its original location, Canvas asks you to locate the file when you try to play it.

QuickTime movie options

You can select options for the QuickTime tool before you place a QuickTime movie.

1.	Double-click the QuickTime tool. The QuickTime dialog box appears.

2.	To display a Controller bar below movie objects that are not in playback mode, select Show Controller. To set movies to play repeatedly, select Loop. In the Loop menu, select Normal for forward playback, or Back and Forth for forward and reverse playback.

3.	Click OK to implement the settings. The QuickTime tool will use the current settings when you place movie objects.


Rectangle tool

The Rectangle tool draws rectangles and squares using the current stroke, pen ink and fill ink. The tool is in the Rectangle tools toolbar.

To draw a rectangle

1.	Select the Rectangle tool in the toolbox.

2.	Drag diagonally from one corner of the rectangle to the opposite corner. To draw a square, press Shift and drag. To draw outward from the center, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and drag.


Remote Move tool

The Remote Move tool is an image-editing tool that lets you move a selection without obscuring the selection. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To move an image selection

1.	Select an area in an image with the Marquee, Lasso, or Wand tools, or use the Color Range command or other method to make an image selection.

2.	Select the Remote Move tool in the toolbox and drag anywhere in the drawing area. Canvas moves the selection in the direction you move the pointer.

3.	When you finish moving the selection, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows).


Rounded Rectangle tool

The Rounded Rectangle tool draws rectangles and squares with rounded corners, using the current stroke and pen ink. The tool is in the Rectangle tools toolbar.

To draw a rounded rectangle

1.	Select the Rounded Rectangle tool in the toolbox.

2.	In the document, drag from one corner to the opposite corner of the rectangle’s bounding box.

•	To draw a square with rounded corners, press Shift and drag from one corner to the opposite corner.

•	To draw rounded rectangles or squares out from the center, press Option (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and drag the tool in the document.

To edit the corner radius

1.	Select the rounded rectangle.

2.	Do one of the following:

 •	Drag the circular handle that is near the bottom-right corner of the rectangle’s bounding box. Drag away from the object to increase the radius and make corners more rounded. Drag inward to decrease the radius. If you drag far enough into the object, the rounded corners invert and curve into the rectangle.

 •	Choose Object > Object Specs and click the Data tab. In the "Diag." Box, enter a positive or negative number to set the corner radius. Higher positive values produce more ronded corners. Higher negative values produce more rounded and inverted corners.


Cloning areas of an image
Rubber Stamp tool

The Rubber Stamp tool is an image-editing tool that lets you “clone,” or copy areas within images. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

To clone an image area

1. 	To configure options for the Rubber Stamp tool, double-click the tool to open its dialog box. Adjust the settings and click OK.

•	To fade the brush size or opacity of the cloned image, turn on the appropriate option in the Fade area and enter a number of pixels in the “Fade within” text box to tell Canvas the distance in which to complete the effect.

•	Select an option (described below) in the Style pop-up menu.

•	With a pressure-sensitive tablet, you can make the stylus pressure affect size and opacity by turning on the appropriate option in the “Pressure Varies” area.

2. 	Select the Rubber Stamp tool and click an image with the hand pointer ( ) to put it in edit mode, if necessary.

3. 	Choose a brush shape, mode, and opacity setting in the Brushes palette.

4.	Option- click (Mac) or Alt- click (Windows) in the image to set the reference point for sampling an image area.

5.	Drag in the image to paint a copy of the sampled area around the reference point.

Cloning styles

The effect of the Rubber Stamp tool in an image depends on the cloning option you choose in the Style pop-up menu of its dialog box. To open the Rubber Stamp tool’s dialog box, double-click the tool in the toolbar.

Clone (aligned): The first time you drag the Rubber Stamp tool in the image after setting the reference point, Canvas establishes a fixed direction and distance from the reference point to the pointer. The Rubber Stamp tool copies any area of the image that is this distance and direction from the pointer.

Clone (non-aligned): Dragging the Rubber Stamp tool always begins copying the image from the same reference point.

Impressionist: This option smears pixels to create an impressionistic effect. You don’t need to set a reference point to use this effect.


Scissors tool

The Scissors tool is a path-editing tool. Use the tool to open a closed path and divide a path into two objects. Splitting a path opens the path at the point where the scissors clip the path. The tool is in the Effects toolbar.

1.	Select the Scissors tool in the toolbox. The pointer changes to a pair of scissors.

2.	Point to the path where you want to split it (you don't need to select the object first). The pointer becomes a crosshair when it is on a point or segment that can be split.

3.	Click the path when the crosshair is displayed. Canvas adds two endpoints where you click the path and the path opens.

4.	If the path is closed and you want to split it into two paths, click the path again where you want to split it.


Selection tool

The Selection tool (solid arrow) is used to select objects and text. The tool is in the Selection tools toolbar at the top-left of the toolbox.

To select an object: With the Selection tool, click an object.

To select multiple objects: Shift-click each object you want to select. For Windows only, you can also hold down the right mouse button and click multiple objects to select them.

With the Selection tool, you can also drag a selection box around objects to select them. Canvas selects all objects inside the selection box.

Selection options

To select	Do this
Objects using a selection box	Drag a box around the objects with the Selection tool.
All objects touched by a selection box	With the Selection tool, press Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows) and drag out a box that touches the objects.
An object behind another object	Ctrl-click the object's location until it is selected.
Unfilled object	Click the object's border, or press Tab and click inside the object.
An object on a layer other than the current layer, or an object on a master page	Ctrl + Tab-click the object with the Selection tool.
All objects created by a particular tool	Select the tool, then choose Select All in the Edit menu.


Sharpening areas in an image
Sharpen tool

The Sharpen tool is an image-editing tool that increases contrast between pixels where you drag the tool. You can use the Sharpen dialog box to modify the operation of the Sharpen tool.

To sharpen image areas

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a brush shape in the Brushes palette.

3.	In the Brushes palette, select a transfer mode.

4.	Enter a percentage in the Pressure text box in the Brushes palette. A setting of 1 affects the image slightly; 85 dramatically sharpens the image.

5.	Drag the Sharpen tool in the image area you want to edit.

Constraining the Sharpen tool

To constrain the Sharpen tool to a horizontal or vertical line as you drag, press the Shift key while dragging the tool.

Sharpen tool options

Double-click the Sharpen tool to open the Sharpen dialog box. To decrease the size of the Sharpen brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area. To decrease the sharpening effect as you drag in the image, choose Pressure in the Fade area.

If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

If you have a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Pressure in the Pressure Varies area to let the pressure of the stylus affect the fade of the Sharpen tool.

After configuring the Sharpen tool the way you want, click OK.


Smart Lines tool

The Smart Lines tool draws dynamic links between objects using the current stroke and pen ink. When you resize or move a Smart Line, the linked objects move according to the type of Smart Line used. The tool is in the Line tools toolbar.

To draw Smart Lines

1.	Press the Smart Lines tool icon to open the Smart Lines palette. You can drag the palette away from the toolbox to keep it open.

2.	Select one of the Smart Lines types in the palette.

Basic:	Smart Lines change length and angle to maintain connection to the linked objects
Fixed Length:	Maintains a set length and linked objects move to maintain the length
Fixed Angle:	Maintains a set angle and linked objects move to maintain the angle
Kinked:	Uses only horizontal and vertical segments. Linked objects move to maintain the segments. You can set the first and last segments to always be vertical.
Locked:	Smart Lines do not change length or angle and linked objects move as a group
4.	Drag from one object to another object. When you release the mouse button, Canvas creates the Smart Line.

Editing smart lines

You can use the Smart Lines dialog box to edit a Smart Lines object.

1.	Double-click a Smart Line to open the Smart Lines dialog box. You can choose a different type of Smart Line in the pop-up menu.

Type of link: The link types correspond to the icons in the Smart Lines palette.

Length: For Fixed Length Smart Lines, you can specify the length of the selected Smart Line by entering a number in this text box.

Fixed Angle: For Fixed Angle Smart Lines, you can type an angle in degrees to specify the angle of the selected Smart Line.

Vertical Start/Vertical Stop: For a Kinked link type, you can select Vertical Start to make the Smart Line start with a vertical segment and select Vertical Stop to make the Smart Line end with a vertical segment.

2.	After configuring the Smart Lines object’s settings, click OK.


Smudge tool

The Smudge tool is an image-editing tool that pulls color from one area into adjacent areas of an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use the Smudge dialog box to modify the operation of the Smudge tool.

To smudge in an image

1.	Double-click the image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select a brush shape in the Brushes palette.

3.	Adjust the Pressure setting in the Brushes palette. A setting of 1 affects the image slightly; 85 drags the color through many pixels.

4.	Drag the Smudge tool in the image area you want to edit.

Smudge tool options

To configure the Smudge tool, double-click the Smudge tool icon. In the dialog box, adjust the following settings and click OK.

 •	To set the distance the tool pushes color as you drag, type a number of pixels in the Distance text box.

 •	To gradually diminish the brush size, turn on Size; to reduce the smudge effect, turn on Pressure in the Fade area.

 •	To smudge a dab of foreground color into the image, turn on the Finger Painting option.

 •	If you use a pressure-sensitive tablet and want stylus pressure to affect size and pressure, turn on Size and Pressure in the Pressure Varies area.


Spiral tool

The Spiral tool draws a smooth, spiraling curve. The tool is in the Object tools toolbar. You can use the Spiral dialog box to modify the Spiral tool’s operation.

To draw a spiral

1.	Select the Spiral tool in the toolbox.

2.	Drag diagonally to specify the size of the spiral curve. To create a circular spiral, press Shift and drag.

To change the number of spirals in an object: Double-click the object to open the Spiral dialog box. Change the number of spirals and click OK.

Spiral tool options

Use the Spirals dialog box to set the number of “turns” in spiral objects.

1.	Double-click the Spiral tool to open the Spiral dialog box.

2.	Type a number from 1 to 35 in the Number of Spirals box.

3.	Click OK to implement the setting.


Sponge tool

The Sponge tool is an image-editing tool that increases or decreases color saturation in pixels it touches in an image. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can set options (described below) to modify the operation of the Sponge tool.

To change color saturation with the Sponge

1.	Double-click an image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Choose a brush shape in the Brushes palette.

3.	Choose a Pressure setting in the Brushes palette. Increase the pressure to increase the rate at which the Sponge tool adds or removes gray from an image.

4.	Choose Saturate or Desaturate in the Brushes palette pop-up menu. Saturate removes gray content in pixels that the Sponge passes over. Desaturate increases the gray content.

5.	Drag the Sponge tool over the image area you want to edit.

Constraining the Sponge tool

To constrain the Sponge tool to a horizontal or vertical line as you drag, press the Shift key while dragging the tool.

Sponge tool options

Double-click the Sponge tool to open the Sponge dialog box. To decrease the size of the Sponge brush stroke as you drag in the image, choose Size in the Fade area. To decrease the saturating or desaturating effect as you drag in the image, choose Pressure in the Fade area.

 •	If you turn on a fade option, enter the "Fade within" distance in the text box. The "Fade within" distance is measured in steps; the size of a step is relative to the brush size and the Spacing setting in the Brush Options dialog box.

 •	If you have a pressure-sensitive stylus, choose Size or Pressure in the Pressure Varies area to let the pressure of the stylus affect the fade of the Sponge tool.

After configuring the Sponge tool the way you want, click OK.


Text tool

The Text tool lets you create text objects and type text in a document. The tool is in the Text toolbar.

When you create a blank text object with the Text tool, the depth of the object will shrink and expand to fit the amount of text you type. If you want to create blank text objects that don’t change size (such as for a document template with newsletter columns), use the Text Object tool.

1.	Select the Text tool in the toolbox. The pointer becomes an I-beam.

2.	Click the I-beam in the document and begin typing. Canvas expands the right margin to fit the widest line of text you type.

3.	To exit text editing mode, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows), or select another tool.

To set column width before typing

1.	Select the Text tool in the toolbox. The pointer becomes an I-beam.

2.	Drag the I-beam to specify the width of the column you want to create, and begin typing. Text wraps to the next line when it reaches the right margin. You don't need to set the length of the column, because Canvas contracts and expands the bottom margin of the text object to fit the text you type.

3.	To exit text editing mode, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) or select another tool.

Double-click the Text tool icon in the toolbox to open the Type palette and configure font, paragraph, and spacing settings.


Text Link tool

The Text Link tool creates text flows between text objects. The tool is in the Text toolbar.

Use the Text Link tool to link existing text objects, so that text that can’t fit in the first object in the chain will flow to the next linked text object. You can break a text link with the Text Unlink tool.

To create text links

1.	With the Text or Text Object tool, create at least two text objects. The columns can be on different pages or slides.

2.	Select the Text Link tool in the toolbox. The pointer becomes the text link pointer; this is text linking mode.

3.	Click the first text object - the object you want to flow from. The bounding box of the text object appears thicker.

4.	Click the next text object-the object you want to flow to. (If you click anything but a text object, Canvas cancels the linking operation.) Canvas flashes an arrow to show the flow direction.

5.	To add another text object to the chain, click the first text object again, then click the text object you want to add. Canvas links the text object to the last linked object in the chain.

6.	When you're done, double-click an empty area of the layout, or press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) to end text linking mode.

Note: If you link text objects created with the Text tool, the text object no longer shrinks or expands to fit the text in the object. It remains a fixed length, like objects created with the Text Object tool.

To temporarily display text flow arrows

Select the Text Link tool and press a text object; if the text object is linked, arrows appear to show the flow direction. The arrows disappear when you release the mouse button.


Text Unlink tool

The Text Unlink tool lets you break a text flow. You can stop the flow at any linked text object you select.

To remove a text link:

1.	Select the Text Unlink tool from the Text tools toolbar. The pointer changes to the Text Unlink icon.

2.	Click the linked text object where you want the text flow to end. Canvas removes the links from this object so no text flows from it. All flowed text becomes part of the object that you clicked. The other text objects following in the series become empty.

Note: If you use the Text Unlink tool to click an object that does not have text flowing from it, Canvas beeps.


Text Object tool

The Text Object tool lets you add empty text blocks to page layouts. Columns created with the Text Object tool keep their width and length. The tool is in the Text tools toolbar.

To use the Text Object tool

1.	Select the Text Object tool in the toolbox. The pointer becomes an I-beam.

2.	Drag to define the width and length of the column.

3.	Drag the I-beam in another location to create more text columns or begin typing in the new text object.

4.	To exit text editing mode, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) or select another tool.

To create a text layout in a publication document

You can use the Text Object tool as described above, and you can also simply click with the I-beam between column guides. Clicking with the I-beam creates a column that runs the full width of the column guides and extends from the position where you click to the bottom margin of the page. If the column guides are outside the printable area, the column remains inside the printable area.


Vertical Text tool

The Vertical Text tool lets you type text in vertical columns. In vertical text columns, the text characters run from top to bottom, and the text lines run from right to left in the columns. This looks the same as text created with the Text tool and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise.

The Vertical Text tool is designed to let you create vertical columns of text in languages that use vertical text, or when you work on a publication in which text runs across a page.

Enabling the Vertical Text tool

The Vertical Text tool is not available unless you select the Enable two-byte script preference, and then restart Canvas. The Vertical Text tool then appears in the Text tools toolbar in the toolbox.

If the “Enable two-byte text” preference isn’t selected, you can create vertical text by creating a regular text object with the Text tool, and then rotating the text 90 degrees with the Rotate command.

To create empty text objects, such as for a document template, to contain vertical text, you can use the Vertical Text Object tool.

To define a column for vertical text

1.	Select the Vertical Text tool in the toolbox. The pointer changes to a horizontal I-beam, which indicates that text characters will run from top to bottom in a text object.

2.	Drag to set the size of the column, and then begin typing. When the text reaches the bottom edge of the text object, it wraps back to the top and onto the next line to the left.

3.	To exit text-editing mode, press Esc.

To type vertical text directly

1.	Select the Vertical Text tool in the toolbox. The pointer changes to a horizontal I-beam.

2.	Click in the document to place the text insertion point, and then begin typing. Because the text will run from top to bottom, Canvas will expand the bottom of the column to fit the text you type, and will not wrap the text to a second line.

3.	To exit text-editing mode, press Esc.


Vertical Text Object tool

The Vertical Text Object tool lets you create empty text blocks for vertical text. Text objects created with the Vertical Text Object tool maintain their width and length.

Enabling the Vertical Text Object tool

The Vertical Text Object tool is available only when you select the “Enable two-byte script” preference, and then restart Canvas. The Vertical Text Object tool appears in the Text tools toolbar in the toolbox.

To create text objects for vertical text

1.	Select the Vertical Text Object tool in the toolbox. The pointer changes to a horizontal I-beam, which indicates that text in the text object will flow from top to bottom.

2.	Drag to define the width and length of the text object. You can then drag in other locations to create more text objects, or begin typing in the new text object.

In a Publication document, you can click between column guides to create a text object.

3.	To exit text-editing mode, press Esc.


Wand tool

The Wand tool is an image-editing tool that selects areas based on color. The tool is in the Painting tools toolbar.

You can use the Wand dialog box to modify the operation of the Wand tool.

To make selections with the Wand tool

1.	Double-click the image with the Selection tool to put it in edit mode.

2.	Select the Magic Wand tool in the Painting tools toolbar.

3.	Click the color area you want to select. Canvas selects all contiguous pixels of similar color.

To add to a selection

Shift-click the Magic Wand in the image. The pointer displays a '+' to show that it adds to the current selection.

To subtract from a selection

Command-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows) the Magic Wand in the image. The pointer displays a wand with a '-' to show that it subtracts from the current selection.

Wand tool options

Before using the Wand tool, double-click the tool icon to open the Wand dialog box.

Tolerance: Type a tolerance value from 0 to 255. The higher the value, the broader the range of colors selected. A tolerance of zero selects only pixels of exactly the same color as the pixel clicked.

Anti-Alias: To smooth the edges of the selection, turn on the Anti-Alias option.

After entering the settings you want, click OK.


Putting images in edit mode
Image-edit mode

To place an image in edit mode so you can paint or edit within it, do one of the following:

 •	Double-click the paint object with the Selection tool.

 •	Select a painting tool; the pointer becomes a hand when you point to a paint object. Click the paint object to put it in edit mode.


Loading external tools with the ToolPicker

By default, Canvas will load all its "external tools," which are program modules that provide various capabilities. In some cases for diagnostic purposes, you can use the ToolPicker to change the current set of tools. However, for normal operation, it's recommended that you load all Canvas external tools.


Saving and deleting tool sets

To save a tool set

In the ToolPicker dialog box, select the tools you want and click Save. In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the tool set and click OK. The new tool set name appears in the Tool Sets pop-up menu.

To delete a tool set

In the Tool Sets pop-up menu, choose the name of the set you want to remove and click Delete. Canvas asks you to confirm that you want to delete the tool set; click OK to delete the set and close the dialog box.

Note: If you choose a tool set in the pop-up menu, then modify the list of selected tools and click OK, Canvas loads the currently selected tools and not the saved tool set. Also, the modifications you make to the scroll list of tools do not change the saved tool set unless you delete the tool set and save it again using the same name. You can't save a tool set using an existing tool set name.


Object properties: inks and strokes
About inks and strokes

Inks and strokes are the visible attributes of vector object and text in Canvas.

An ink is a solid color or colored pattern that you apply to vector objects. You can apply inks to the interiors and outlines of vector objects and text characters.

 •	The pen ink is applied to the outline or stroke of an object.

 •	The fill ink is applied to the interior of an object.

A stroke is a line centered on the path or outline of vector objects and type. You can define the stroke shape with standard or calligraphic pens, parallel lines, and “neon tube” effects. You can also add dashes and arrowheads to strokes.

When you draw a vector object, Canvas applies the current ink and current stroke settings. The inks and stroke icons in the toolbox show a preview of the current settings. You can change these attributes before or after you draw an object.

Related topics

Types of inks

Applying inks

Types of strokes

Applying strokes

How inks affect strokes


Types of inks

The Inks palette contains five types of inks on separate tabs. Each tab has preset inks and a manager you can use to customize inks.

Color inks are solid colors. You can use CMYK, RGB and HSL color systems, and commercial color reference systems, to define color inks.

Gradient inks are smooth blends between two or more colors.

Hatch inks are patterns of lines. Hatch inks can incorporate other pen and fill inks.

Symbol inks are patterns of vector objects. Symbol inks can include any other ink as a background.

Texture inks are patterns of raster images. Texture inks can include other inks as backgrounds.

You can apply inks to two areas of vector objects and text: fill inks cover the interior of objects and text characters; pen inks cover the outline stroke of objects and text characters. You can apply one fill ink and one pen ink to an object and to a text character.

You can apply different types of inks to an object - a gradient fill ink and a texture pen ink, for example. If an object has neither a pen ink nor a fill ink, the object is not visible.

Related topics

Creating and customizing inks

Default and current inks


Default and current inks

By default, Canvas applies white fill ink, black pen ink, and a 1-point pen stroke to new vector objects. For new text, Canvas applies the current fill ink (solid color only), no pen ink, and no stroke to the text characters.

The current inks are the inks that Canvas applies to new vector objects you draw. The squares in the pen ink and fill ink icons in the toolbox display the current inks. When you apply inks to existing objects, the current inks do not change.

To change the current pen or fill ink

Make sure no objects are selected in the document, then press the pen ink or fill ink icon to select a current ink in the Inks palette.

To use the Color Dropper to select a current ink

Select the Color Dropper tool [image] in the Effects Tools toolbar. Click an object to use its ink as the current fill ink. Option-click (Mac) or right-click (Windows) an object to use its ink as the current pen ink. In vector objects and text, the Color Dropper can pick up multi-colored textures, gradients, hatches, and symbols as inks; in paint objects, the Color Dropper selects only the solid color of the pixel you click.


Using the Inks palette

You use the Inks palette to apply inks to objects, select the current inks for new objects, and create new inks. To open the Inks palette, press the pen or fill ink icon at the bottom of the toolbox; the palette appears next to the tool box. When you release the mouse button (Mac) or click again (Windows) the Inks palette closes.

To keep the Inks palette open, press either ink icon in the toolbox and drag the palette away. The palette remains open in a floating window. At the bottom of the floating palette, you can click the pen ink icon or fill ink icon to select which ink you want to change.

Related topics

Applying preset inks

Changing the Inks palette

Creating and customizing inks

Identifying inks

Creating color inks

Loading and Saving inks files


Selecting custom ink colors

When you choose colors in a Canvas dialog box or palette, you use a pop-up palette of solid color inks. To open the palette, you press a pop-up color ink icon. The pop-up palette appears in several places, including the Channel Options dialog box, the Extrude palette, and the Gradient manager.

The pop-up color inks palette contains the same preset inks as those stored on the Color tab in the Inks palette. If the color ink you want isn’t already in the Inks palette, you can create a new color on the fly by using the Custom button.

The custom color feature is useful when you want to use a color for a specific purpose, but don’t want to clutter the color palette with colors you’ll only use once.

To select a custom color

1.	In a color ink pop-up palette, drag to (Mac) or click (Windows) the Custom box to open the Color Editor dialog box.

Note (Mac only): To quickly select a custom color, Option-click the color palette icon to open the Color Editor dialog box.

2.	Use the Color Editor dialog box to create the color you want. The controls in this dialog box are nearly identical to the Inks palette’s Color manager.

4.	To specify that you want the color you define to be a spot color, make sure the color name appears in the text box. Turn on the Spot Color option.

5.	When you have the color you want, click OK. The Color Editor dialog box closes and the custom color appears in the palette icon.

Important:  If you plan to export a Canvas document to another application in EPSF format and produce spot color separations, make sure the names of spot colors in Canvas exactly match the names of the spot colors defined in the other application. Any variation can cause problems with colors appearing on the correct color separation plates.

Where you can select custom colors

The Custom box appears the following pop-up color palettes:

Inks: Gradient manager, Hatch manager (pen color pop-up only)

Strokes: Neon manager, Parallel manager

Layers: Layer Options dialog box

Color calibration: Gamut Warning dialog box

Image editing: Duotone Options dialog box, New Channel dialog box, Channel Options dialog box, Create Image dialog box.

Effects: Extrude palette


Applying preset inks

You can apply preset inks when the Inks palette is attached to the toolbox, or when the palette is in a floating window. If you leave the palette attached to the toolbox, the ink icon (pen or fill) determines whether the ink you choose affects the inside or outline of objects. If the palette is floating, you can use the pen ink and fill ink icons at the bottom of the palette to choose how you want inks to apply.

With the Inks palette open, select a tab (Color, Gradient, Hatch, Symbol, or Texture). A grid on each tab displays preset inks that you can apply as pen or fill inks. The white tile with a line through it is the “no ink” setting. This tile makes the insides or outlines of objects transparent. You can also apply this setting to a selected paint object to make white pixels appear transparent (also called “Or mode,” a non-PostScript specification used for onscreen display and output to some non-PostScript printers).

To apply inks to existing objects

Select the objects, then open the Inks palette and select an ink in the grid. Use the scroll bars in the palette if all the preset inks aren’t visible. You can also use drag and drop to apply inks; drag an ink from the palette to an object’s outline (for a pen ink) or the inside of the object (for a fill ink).

To change the default inks that Canvas applies to new vector objects

Deselect all objects, then use the Inks palette to choose pen and fill inks. The ink icons in the toolbox show the current inks.


Changing the Inks palette

You can do the following to customize the Inks palette:

•	Delete preset inks you no longer want to use.

•	Add new inks to the palette.

•	Save the preset inks on each tab in an inks file.

•	Load inks from a file to replace the preset inks.

•	Append inks from a file to add them to the palette.

When you add or delete inks in the palette, the changes are recorded in a Canvas Settings file, not in the Canvas document, so the palette contents remain the same the next time you use Canvas.


Saving, loading, and clearing preset inks

Press the button at the bottom-right corner of the palette and choose a command in the pop-up menu. The commands include the name of the current ink tab, so the command on the Color tab is Load Colors, for example.

You can save, load, and append inks on one tab at a time in the Inks palette. When you load or append inks, if you select a file that doesn’t contain inks from the current tab, Canvas won’t load the inks.

Load...  Loads inks from a palette file, replacing the tab’s preset inks. In the dialog box, select a file and click Open.

Append...  Adds inks from a palette file to the preset inks on the current tab. In the dialog box, select a palette file and click Open.

Save...  Saves the current tab’s preset inks to disk. In the dialog box, select a location, type a file name, and then click Save.

Clear... Removes the preset inks (except “no ink”) from the current tab. On the Color tab, Canvas restores black and white (CMYK) inks after clearing all the preset inks.

Note to Windows users: The following file extension names are used to save Canvas ink palettes. The extension must be part of the file name or Canvas won’t recognize the file.

Palette type	Extension
Texture	.TXR
Symbol	.SBL
Hatch	.HTC
Color	.PAL
Gradient	.GRD
To remove an individual ink from the palette

Drag the ink you want to remove to the trash can icon in the Inks palette.


Creating and customizing inks

If preset inks don’t meet your needs, you can use the Inks configuration managers to create your own inks.

Managers are sets of controls at the bottom of the tabs in the Inks palette. You can flip open the managers to create inks, adjust inks in objects, and change the palette’s preset inks.

Using Inks managers

The Inks palette must be in a floating window to use the managers. With the Inks palette floating, click the triangle at the bottom left of the palette to flip the managers open or closed. The manager shows you all the options available for editing inks on that tab.

Each tab’s manager includes a preview window  and an Apply button. The preview window changes as you modify an ink; when you are ready to use the new ink, click the Apply button. If you selected any vector or text objects before modifying the ink, the ink applies to the selected objects. Otherwise, it becomes the current ink. You can also drag the ink from the preview box to objects to apply the ink.

To store the custom ink as a preset, drag the preview window to the grid of preset inks at the top of the tab.

To edit a vector object’s ink

Click the pen or fill ink icon, then select an object. The object’s ink and other settings appear in the manager. Use the options in the manager to modify the ink, then click Apply to change the object.

To edit a text object’s ink

For text objects, you can design the ink in the manager, select the text object, then click Apply. You can also select the text object first, then configure the ink in the manager and click Apply. When you select a text object, the text inks do not appear in the ink manager. To pick up an ink from text, you can use the Color Dropper  to sample the ink.

To make a new ink

Use the manager to customize the current ink; you can give the new ink a name by typing in the text box at the top of the manager. Then do any of the following:

• 	To add the ink to the palette, drag from the preview box  to the grid of preset inks.

• 	To make the ink the default, click the pen or fill icon, then click Apply.

• 	To apply the ink to an object that isn’t selected, drag from the preview box to the inside or outline of the object.

When you create a new ink, be sure to add it to the palette or drag it to an object before selecting anything else. Otherwise, the selection’s ink replaces the new ink in the manager.

If you want to create a color ink but not add it to the Inks palette, use the Custom color feature in the various pop-up color ink palettes.


Choosing color systems

When you define colors in Canvas, you can use CMYK, RGB, and Grayscale color systems. Or, you can use a color matching system to select colors for commercial printing.

CMYK colors

The CMYK color system is used in four-color process printing. In this system, you define colors as mixtures of Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K) printing inks. For example, to create green, you mix cyan and yellow. The CMYK system is appropriate for illustrations that will be separated for commercial printing.

RGB colors

The RGB color system is used in computer monitors. In this system, you define colors as mixtures of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) light. For example, to create purple, you mix red and blue. The RGB system is appropriate for graphics displayed on a monitor, such as presentations and web pages. You should avoid RGB colors in documents intended for commercial printing. Canvas will convert RGB colors to CMYK colors if you output color separations.

The HSL models in the Color manager let you define RGB colors using Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Lightness (L) values. This way of defining colors is familiar to artists. HSL models let you adjust saturation and lightness, without changing a basic hue, such as red or green.

Grayscale colors

The Grayscale model lets you define shades of gray. Grayscale colors are neutral when used with RGB or CMYK colors. For example, in RGB Color images, grayscale colors are equal amounts of red, green, and blue. In image channels, Grayscale colors are pure gray. In vector objects, text, or CMYK Color images, Grayscale colors are percentages of black. In color separations, Grayscale colors appear as percentages of black.

Tip: Colors displayed on a monitor can only approximate the appearance of printed colors. Be sure to discuss color reproduction with your commercial printer and obtain accurate proofs for color projects.

Specifying tints

You can specify a tint color and amount in the CMYK or RGB system. Tinting with white screens the original color. The screen percentage is 100 minus the tint value. For example, 80 percent white tint results in 20 percent of the original color.

For other tint colors, Canvas multiplies the tint values by the difference between the original and tint color values, and then adds the result to the original color values.

Commercial color reference systems

You can use commercial reference system colors for process and spot colors. You can choose PANTONE, Toyo, and Trumatch color systems in the pop-up menu in the Color manager.

Remember that the appearance of a commercial color on screen can differ from its appearance when printed. To view the printed appearance of a commercial color, consult your manufacturer’s reference documentation. For more information on process and spot color printing, see the Color Printing Guide.

PANTONE

The PANTONE System includes hundreds of spot colors designed to be printed with special inks. You should select the correct color group for the paper stock on which the colors will be printed. For example, the PANTONE CVC colors are calibrated for printing on coated paper stock. The PANTONE Pro-Sim colors are not spot colors. These colors are designed to be printed with standard process inks.

Toyo

 The Toyo Ink system provides more than 1,000 colors in nine sets for process-color printing on various paper stocks.

Trumatch

Trumatch is a four-color process matching system, which means that its colors are not spot colors that must be printed with special inks. Trumatch lets you select more than 2,000 colors based on 50 hues and tints and shades of each hue, in addition to four-color grays.

Related topics

Identifying inks

Creating color inks

Color reference systems


Gamut warning

When specifying RGB or HSL colors in the Color manager of the Inks palette, Canvas lets you know if the current color can’t be printed with CMYK inks. A  warning symbol and color box [image] appear above the color preview windows in the Color manager. The color box provides an approximation of the CMYK result using the current RGB or HSL values. Click the color box to replace the current color with this CMYK color.

Related topic

Gamut Warning display mode


Color reference systems

When you choose a PANTONE, Toyo, or Trumatch reference system color set in the Color manager, you can search for and select colors by name. To search for a color by name, first select a color system in the pop-up menu in the inks manager. If the color you want appears in the color list, you can select it in the list. You can also scroll through the list to find the color.

If you know the name of the color, you can locate it quickly by using the Find button in the manager. Click the Find button to open a dialog box; type the color name or number and click OK. Canvas selects the color (if it can be found) in the color list.

Tint Values for PANTONE colors

For PANTONE colors (except process colors), you can enter a screen percentage in the Tint value text box in the Color manager of the Inks palette. Use 100% for solid color and lower values for screens of the solid color.

Spot Color option

Available with some color systems, this option lets you specify colors to use as spot colors in separations.

Related topic

Choosing color systems


Creating color inks

You can create new inks to expand the preset inks selection and convert inks from one color system to another in the Inks palette.

Note: If you want to create a color ink but not add it to the Inks palette, use the Custom color feature in the various pop-up color ink palettes.

To create a color ink in the Inks palette

1.	If necessary, open the Inks palette. Select the Color tab and open the Color manager. The current ink appears in the preview box.

2.	Choose a color system and model in the pop-up menu.

3.	Use the Color manager controls to change the ink’s color values. To restore the original ink, click the left preview box (the preview boxes are at the upper-right of the Color manager).

4.	To name the ink, type the name in the text box at the top of the Color manager. To define it as a spot color, check the Spot Color box, if the option is available using the current color system.

5.	To add the ink to the palette, drag it from the preview box to the grid at the top of the tab. Canvas adds the color to the end of the preset inks grid.


Creating gradient inks

A gradient is a blend (or “ramp”) from one color to another. Use the Gradient tab in the Inks palette to apply gradient inks.

The Gradient manager at the bottom of the tab lets you customize gradient inks.

Gradient styles

When you create or edit a gradient ink, choose an option in the Style menu in the Gradient manager.

Radial: Colors sweep in a circle around the center. To move the center point, drag the open handle. To set the starting angle, drag the solid handle or enter the angle (0 to 360 degrees) in the text box.

Directional: Linear gradient in which colors blend in the direction you specify. To set the gradient orientation, drag the solid handle, or enter an angle from 0 to 360 degrees in the text box.

Shape: Gradient conforms to basic object shapes. To move the gradient center, drag the rectangle. To resize the center area that contains the end color, drag the solid handle and resize the rectangle.

Rectangular: Rectangular-shaped gradient. To move the gradient center, drag the rectangle. To resize the center area that contains the end color, drag the solid handle and resize the rectangle.

Elliptical: Elliptical-shaped gradient. To move the gradient center, drag the oval. To resize the center area that contains the end color, drag the solid handle and resize the oval.

You can drag handles in the box to adjust settings such as gradient shape, angle and center.

The preview area shows the current gradient, based on the gradient style and the color bar. The preview changes as you edit the gradient. When you click the Apply button, Canvas applies this gradient.  You can drag the gradient from the preview box to objects.

To save the current gradient, drag it from the preview box to the grid at the top of the tab.

Adjusting colors in a gradient

In the Gradient manager, the gradient color sequence appears in the bar. Each pointer below the bar represents a color and shows the color’s relative position in the gradient. One pointer is always selected, and the pointer’s color appears in the color palette icon. A gradient can have two or more colors.

The pointers at the ends of the bar represent the start and end colors of the gradient. These pointers can’t be moved or deleted, but you can change their colors.

Click a pointer to select it; a selected pointer appears highlighted. To add an intermediate color, double-click in the bar and a new pointer appears that represents the color of the gradient where you clicked.

To adjust color spacing, drag an intermediate pointer. To delete a color, drag its pointer to either end of the bar.

Choose a color for the selected pointer from the color palette.

Angle: For Radial and Directional styles, enter the angle of the gradient axis, or drag the solid dot in the edit box to set the angle.

360º. When Radial style is selected, select this option to blend the gradient through 360 degrees around the center. If this option isn’t selected, the blend runs through 180 degrees in both directions, creating a mirror image around the blend axis.

When 360º is selected, a button appears. Click the button to reverse the gradient direction.

Rainbow: Select this to add all hues on the color wheel between the colors you set in the gradient. Click a direction button to select a clockwise or counter-clockwise path around the HSL color wheel, which sets the sequence of hues.


Creating hatch inks

Hatch inks are patterns made of groups of lines. You use the Hatch tab in the Inks palette to apply hatch inks. The Hatch manager lets you customize hatch inks. You can specify the number of line groups and the angle, offset, and origin of each group. You can assign a pen size, color, and dash to each line group, and you can select a fill ink to be the background of the hatch ink.

Hatch inks are often used in illustrations to distinguish different materials in cross sections, machine diagrams, and maps.

Tip: If a hatch pattern overlaps the edges of an object, change the Pen value in the Hatch manager to make the width of the hatch lines smaller than the pen size of the object’s stroke.

To select a line group for editing

When you use the Hatch manager to create a new hatch ink, you can use the preview box to select line groups to edit. Simply click a line in the preview window, and Canvas displays selection handles on all lines in the group.

Line group attributes

You can set the following attributes for each line group in a hatch ink. To change an attribute, select the line group you want to change, and then enter a new value in the appropriate text box.

Pen: The width in points (1/72 inch) of each line in the selected line group.

Angle: The angle in degrees (relative to vertical) of the selected line group. When you add a line group, the angle of the new group is initially zero degrees.

Offset: The horizontal starting position of the line group, measured in points from the left edge of the preview box. Increasing this value moves the line group to the right.

Origin: The vertical starting position of the line group, measured in points from the top of the preview box. Increasing this value moves the line group downward.


Creating symbol inks

A symbol ink is a pattern of vector objects. You use the Symbol tab in the Inks palette to apply symbol inks. The Symbol manager lets you customize symbol inks. You can control the spacing and position of the objects in a symbol ink.

You can create a symbol ink from vector and text objects in a Canvas document. You can use any of the Canvas drawing or text tools to create vector objects for a symbol ink. You can apply inks and strokes to the objects before bringing them into the Symbol manager to create a new symbol ink.

To create a symbol ink

1.	Select the vector or text objects you want to use in a symbol ink. You can select more than one object, including group objects.

2.	Drag the selected objects from the document into the preview box in the Symbol manager.

3.	Adjust the symbol spacing and position settings for the symbol ink in the Symbol manager. You can use the zoom controls below the preview window to help you determine spacing and position.

4.	Choose a backdrop ink using the pop-up color palette.

5.	To store the new symbol ink in the palette, drag the ink from the preview box to the grid area at the top of the Symbol tab.

Symbol spacing and position settings

In the Symbol manager, you can adjust the following settings to fine-tune a symbol ink.

Spacing. These values set the distance between objects in the symbol pattern as a percentage of the size of the original objects. For example, a spacing value of 100 percent makes the distance between the objects equal to their size.

X Spacing is the horizontal distance between objects.

Y Spacing is the vertical distance between objects.

Stagger: A positive value offsets the second row of objects horizontally relative to the first row. To keep all objects aligned, set Stagger to zero. To align alternating rows of objects, enter a higher Stagger value. To create a pattern in which the objects are spread out and objects in alternating rows are aligned with the gaps in the rows above, set the X Spacing and Stagger values to 100 percent.

Rotation: The amount of rotation, specified in degrees from vertical, that Canvas applies to the symbol pattern.

Scaling: The percentage of the original object size for the symbol ink. A value of 100 percent maintains the original object size. To reduce the objects, enter a value smaller than 100 percent. To enlarge the objects, enter a value greater than 100 percent.

Align To Object: Moves a symbol pattern with an object, so the same area of the symbol ink is visible in the object. When this option is off, the symbol ink remains in place as the object moves, so a different area of the symbol ink appears when you move the object.


Creating texture inks

A texture ink is a pattern of raster images. You use the Texture tab in the Inks palette to apply texture inks. The Texture manager lets you customize texture inks. You can control the spacing, scaling, rotation, and offset of the images in a texture ink.

Canvas assembles a texture ink by repeating an image in rows and columns, as if it were a grid of rectangular tiles. If you enter spacing values that spread the images apart, you create gaps between the image tiles; you can specify a background ink that will show through the gaps.

To create a texture ink

You can create a texture ink from any raster image object.

1.	Drag an image from the document into the preview box in the Texture manager in the Inks palette.

2.	Adjust the spacing and position settings for the texture ink in the Texture manager. You can use the zoom controls below the preview window to help you determine spacing and position.

3.	Choose a backdrop ink using the pop-up color palette.

4.	To store the new texture ink in the palette, drag the ink from the preview box to the grid area at the top of the Texture tab.

Texture spacing and position settings

In the Texture manager, you can adjust the following settings to fine-tune a texture ink.

Spacing: These values set the distance between tiles in the texture pattern as a percentage of the size of the original image. For example, a spacing value of 100 percent makes the distance between the objects equal to their size.

X Spacing is the horizontal distance between tiles.

Y Spacing is the vertical distance between tiles.

Stagger: A positive value offsets the second row of tiles horizontally relative to the first row. To keep all tiles aligned, set Stagger to zero. To align alternating rows of tiles, enter a higher Stagger value. To create a pattern in which the tiles are spread out and tiles in alternating rows are aligned with the gaps in the rows above, set the X Spacing and Stagger values to 100 percent.

Align To Object: Moves a texture with an object, so the same area of the texture is visible in the object. When this option is off, the texture remains in place as the object moves, so a different area of the texture appears when you move the object.


Applying fill inks to open and closed paths

Whether a vector object path is open or closed affects the appearance of its fill ink. In a closed path, the ink completely fills the object’s interior; in an open path, the ink fills the path as if the path were closed by a straight segment between its endpoints.


Types of strokes

Canvas has three basic types of strokes that you can use to create unlimited variations. Canvas groups stroke settings on three tabs in the Strokes palette.

Pen Strokes made of a single line. You can specify the width, shape (standard or calligraphic), type of line joins, and shape of end caps.

Parallel Strokes made of two or more lines. You can specify width, dashes, colors, and spacing.

Neon Strokes shaded like glowing tubes. You can specify width, colors, tube shape, line joins, and end caps.

Arrows and dashes can be applied to strokes for additional effects. Two tabs in the Strokes palette contain settings for these attributes.

Arrow You can use preset or custom arrowheads that appear at the endpoints of each path segment stroke.

Dash You can apply preset or custom dash sequences that divide solid strokes into solid and blank segments.


How inks affect strokes

You define the colors that apply to strokes separately from the stroke settings. The pen ink (specified in the Inks palette) and the stroke settings together produce the appearance of an object’s outline. The pen ink is the color (or pattern) that “paints” the object’s stroke. Therefore, the object must have a visible pen ink for the stroke to be visible. Conversely, the object must have a stroke for the pen ink to be seen.

Some inks can make strokes invisible. If the pen ink is set to “no ink,” the stroke won’t be visible. Also, if the pen ink is set to white or a color that matches the background, the stroke could disappear against the background.


Current stroke

The strokes icon in the toolbox shows a sample of the current stroke, the stroke that Canvas applies to new vector objects you create. For example, if the current pen stroke is 3 points wide, new objects you draw will have a 3-point pen width.

To change the current stroke, simply deselect all objects and apply the stroke you want; the stroke icon in the toolbox shows the new current stroke. If you select an object and change its stroke, however, the current stroke for new objects does not change.

When you first install Canvas, the current stroke defaults to a 1-point pen stroke without dashes or arrowheads.


Applying strokes to text

You can apply strokes to text the same as to vector objects, in most cases. For information about selecting text objects and text characters, refer to the Text and Typography chapters in this manual.

When you first type or import text into a document, Canvas applies a 1-point pen stroke to the text, but does not assign a pen ink, so the text doesn’t have a visible stroke.

To make text strokes visible

Select the text or text objects and apply a visible pen ink using the Inks palette. If you select a text object, Canvas applies a stroke to all the text it contains. If you select specific characters within a text object, Canvas applies the stroke to those characters only.

You can apply pen, parallel, and neon strokes to text. You can also apply dashes to text that has a pen or neon stroke.

Note: The appearance of a parallel stroke applied to text might not appear as you expect, especially on characters with hollow centers (such as “O” and “P”) and characters with tight corners or paths that meet or cross (including “G” and “X”).

Also, removing a neon or parallel stroke from text (by choosing “no stroke” on the Neon or Parallel tab) does not remove the stroke entirely. Instead, the stroke reverts to a 1-point pen stroke.


Applying preset strokes

The Strokes palette contains preset strokes and properties that you can apply to objects and to the current stroke. Using presets can help you save time and ensure graphic consistency.

Presets for pens, parallel lines, neon strokes, arrows, and dashes are displayed in scrolling lists on the associated tabs in the Strokes palette. You can use the Strokes icon in the toolbox to apply preset strokes.

You can also create custom strokes, arrows, or dashes and add them to the presets on the appropriate palette tab so you can use them again.

To apply preset strokes to objects

Use the following general procedure to apply a preset stroke to one or more objects.

1.	Select the objects for which you want to change strokes.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox to open the Strokes palette. You can use the palette when it’s attached to the tool box, or you can drag the palette away from the toolbox to keep it open while you work.

3.	Depending on the type of stroke you want, choose the Pen, Parallel, or Neon tab.

4.	Choose a stroke in the preset strokes list. If necessary, use the scroll bar or window resize button to view additional strokes. Canvas applies the stroke you choose to selected objects.

To make a preset stroke the current stroke

You can choose a preset stroke as the current stroke to apply to new objects you create.

1.	Deselect all objects in the current document. To deselect all objects, press Enter (Mac) or Esc (Windows) a few times, or until no bounding boxes are visible.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox and choose the Pen, Parallel, or Neon tab, depending on the type of stroke you want.

3.	Choose a stroke in the preset strokes list. Use the scroll bar to view additional strokes. The Strokes icon in the toolbox shows the current stroke.

Related topics

Current stroke

Applying custom strokes

Customizing strokes

Loading and Saving strokes


Floating Strokes palette

You can “tear off” the Strokes palette from the toolbox. Press the Strokes icon, then drag the palette away from the toolbox. The Strokes palette appears in a floating window that you can keep open.

When the Strokes palette is floating, you can use additional options not available when it is attached to the toolbox. For example, you can save and load strokes from files on disk; create custom strokes using the configuration managers; and remove and add presets to the palette.


Customizing strokes

Each tab in the Strokes palette has a configuration manager, an area that can be rolled down at the bottom of the palette to reveal options for customizing strokes.

You can use the configuration managers to

•	display the strokes settings of selected objects

•	create custom pen, parallel, and neon strokes

•	create custom arrowheads and dash sequences

•	apply custom settings to objects or the current stroke

•	store custom strokes as presets in the palette

To use the configuration managers

You must tear off the Strokes palette from the toolbox to use the configuration managers.

1.	To open the Strokes palette, press the Strokes icon and drag the palette away from the toolbox. The Strokes palette opens as a floating palette. You can drag the palette by its title bar to move it.

2.	Click the tab you want to use to bring it to the front, if necessary.

3.	Click the triangle button at the bottom left corner of the palette to open the configuration manager for the front tab.

The configuration manager stays open as you click other tabs in the palette, and the display changes to reflect the available options for the tab.

To roll up the configuration manager

When the configuration manager is open, click the down-facing triangle button at the left of the palette to close it.

Choosing settings to customize

You can use the configuration managers to customize the settings of an object’s stroke, the current stroke, or one of the preset strokes or stroke attributes. You can also create custom strokes.

•	To customize an object’s stroke, select the object and open the appropriate manager in the Strokes palette.

•	To use a preset stroke as the basis for a custom setting, apply the preset to an object and then select the object. This displays the settings in the manager on the appropriate tab. You can also simply choose the preset in the scroll list, however, this also changes the current stroke or the stroke of any selected objects.

Related topics

Floating Strokes palette

Customizing arrows

Customizing dashes

Customizing neon strokes

Customizing parallel line strokes

Customizing pens


Adding custom settings to the palette
Adding custom strokes to the palette

You can add custom strokes, arrows, and dashes to the Strokes palette. When you add custom items, they become presets that you can use the same as default preset items. You can apply a customized preset to objects or make it the current stroke.

To make a custom stroke a preset

After using the configuration manager to design a stroke, drag from the preview window at the bottom of the manager to the presets list at the top. The settings become the last preset in the list.

To add stroke settings from an object to the palette

With the Strokes manager open, select the object. Its stroke settings appear in the appropriate configuration manager of the Strokes tab. Drag from the preview window in the manager to the presets list at the top of the palette.

When you end a Canvas session, the program stores each tab’s presets with the program. Because Canvas stores the preset strokes and inks, the same presets can always be available, whether you work with new documents, documents you created, or documents created by another Canvas user.

If you create a custom stroke and want to apply it to more than one object, and especially if you want to use it in a later work session, you should store the custom settings in the presets area of the palette.


Removing preset strokes from the palette

You can remove default and custom presets from the Strokes palette. When you delete a preset, Canvas permanently removes it from the palette, unless you save it to disk and load it again; see Saving and loading strokes settings.

To remove a preset from the palette

Drag the preset to the trash can icon below the presets scroll list. The trash can appears only when the Strokes palette is floating.

Note: If you delete all arrowheads from the palette, dimension objects will not have arrows.


Applying custom strokes

You can apply custom settings from the Strokes palette to an object in two ways:

•	Select one or more objects before you begin adjusting the settings in the configuration manager. Change the stroke settings, then click Apply to change the strokes of selected objects.

•	If you customize the settings before selecting objects, you can apply the settings to objects by dragging from the preview window in the manager to an object.

Note: If you adjust the settings in a configuration manager, and then select an object, the settings will change to reflect the object’s settings. If you don’t want to lose custom settings when no objects are selected, add them to the palette, or apply them to an object.

You can also make a custom setting the current stroke by deselecting all objects before creating a new stroke. Then, after you creating a stroke, click Apply. It becomes the current stroke.

Related topics

Customizing strokes

Current stroke


Using standard pen strokes
Using preset pen strokes

The most common type of stroke is a standard pen stroke, a solid line of uniform width. This type of stroke is used for many situations, such as technical illustrations, flowcharts, callout lines, arrows, and dashes.

By default, the width of pen strokes is measured in points (one point is 1/72 of an inch). Pen stroke widths from 1 to 20 points appear in the Pen tab’s presets list.

To change the current pen width: Deselect all objects, then select a preset stroke on the Pen tab of the Strokes palette.

To change the stroke width of specific objects: Select one or more objects, then select a preset stroke on the Pen tab.

Related topics

Customizing pens

Customizing strokes


Customizing pens

In the Pen manager, you can choose from the following options:

•	standard or calligraphic pen styles, or “nibs.” Standard pens have a uniform width. Calligraphic pens have a separate width, height, and angle setting.

•	bevel, miter, or round line joins

•	flat, round, or square end caps

To create a custom pen width

In the Pen manager, choose Standard in the pop-up menu, and set the width in the Width text box. Choose line join and end cap styles using the pop-up menus at the bottom of the manager. The preview window at the bottom of the manager shows the current settings; drag from this window to the scroll list to add the pen width to the presets.

To create a calligraphic pen

The calligraphic option lets you create a pen stroke with a custom height, width, and angle. The shape of a calligraphic stroke varies depending on the stroke’s path.

1.	In the Pen manager, choose Calligraphic in the pop-up menu. Height, Width, and Angle text boxes and an editing box appear in the configuration manager.

2.	To set the width of the pen, enter a value in the Width text box, or drag the thick blue arrows in the edit window. The width is the maximum thickness of the stroke when it is perpendicular to the pen angle.

3.	To set the height of the pen, enter a value in the Height text box, or drag the thin red arrow in the edit window. The height is the maximum thickness of the stroke when it is parallel to the pen angle.

4.	To set the pen angle, enter a value in the Angle text box or drag an arrow in the edit window.

5.	Choose line join and end cap styles using the pop-up menus at the bottom of the manager.

For the most calligraphic effect, the height and width values should be dissimilar (at least by a factor of three or four) and the angle set to approximately 45 degrees.

Related topics

Using preset pen strokes

Choosing line joins and end caps


Choosing line joins and end caps

Pop-up menus in the Pen manager let you specify the type of line joins and end caps. Line joins determine appearance of two path segments that meet at a corner. End caps specify the shape of the endpoints of an open path.

Line joins

Canvas has three types of line joins: miter, round, and bevel. For preset pen strokes, Canvas indicates the type of line join in the scroll list on the Pen tab.

Miter: Joins path segments with sharp corners that extend to a single point. When you choose miter joins, an additional pop-up menu lets you set the miter limit in degrees (2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 degrees).

The miter limit setting tells Canvas which corners are too tight to miter; Canvas bevels these corners instead. In other words, if the miter limit is set to 6 degrees, and two path segments join at an angle of 5 degrees, Canvas bevels the corner rather than creating a miter join. The miter limit lets you prevent long, spiked corners that might result as a combination of a wide pen size and a small angle.

Round: Smoothes corners, so the joint is rounded instead of pointed or flat.

Bevel: Squares off path segment corners, so that the joint appears flat rather than rounded or pointed.

End caps

Canvas has three types of end caps. For preset pen strokes, Canvas indicates the type of end cap in the scroll list on the Pen tab.

Flat: The end of the stroke is flush and square with the end of an open path or dash. By default, end caps use this setting.

Round: A semi-circular cap extends half the pen width beyond the endpoint of an open path or dash.

Square: The stroke tip is square, similar to the Flat option, but extends half the line width beyond the endpoint, like the Round option.


Changing the color of a pen stroke

The color of a pen stroke comes from the object’s pen ink color. The pen ink can be a complex multi-color pattern or gradient, or a simple, solid color.

Note: For neon and parallel line strokes, you specify the colors in the Strokes palette.

1.	Select one or more objects whose pen ink you want to change.

2.	Press the Pen Ink icon in the toolbox. The Inks palette opens from the toolbox; if you like, you can drag this palette away from the toolbox to keep it open.

3.	On one of the tabs in the Inks palette, choose a color, gradient, hatch, symbol, or texture in the presets grid.

“Invisible” inks

A pen ink is one or more colors that Canvas uses to apply color to pen strokes. The pen ink can be set to “no ink,” or to a color that blends into the background, which renders a pen stroke invisible.

In some situations, you might want to set an object’s pen ink to “no ink,” rather than remove the object’s stroke. This can be useful to temporarily hide the stroke without removing the dash, arrow, and other stroke settings, for example.

To set an object’s pen ink to “no ink”

This procedure removes the pen ink and makes the stroke invisible.

1.	Select the object and press the Pen Ink icon to open the Inks palette.

2.	On the Color tab of the Inks palette, choose the first item, a box crossed by a diagonal line. If colors are listed by name, select “no ink” at the top of the list.

Related topic

Applying preset inks


Adding preset arrows to strokes

You can use preset arrowheads to create pen, parallel, and neon strokes with arrows. You can apply strokes with arrows to lines and open paths, such as those created with the Curve tool. Arrowheads can appear at one or both endpoints of a path.

You can also create custom arrowheads that you can add to the preset arrowheads.

To add arrows to strokes

Use the following procedure to apply preset arrows to objects or the current stroke:

1.	Depending on how you want arrows to apply, do one of the following:

•	To add an arrow to the current stroke, deselect all objects.

•	To add arrows to specific objects’ strokes, select the objects.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox to open the Strokes palette; select the Arrow tab.

3.	The buttons at the top of the tab let you choose between starting, ending, and double-sided arrowheads. To select a placement click a button; the chosen button appears recessed. The arrows in the scroll list preview the selected arrowhead.

4.	In the scroll list, choose the arrow that you want to apply. The arrow applies to selected objects or to the current stroke.

Related topic

Customizing arrows


Customizing arrows

You can create starting, ending, or double-sided arrowheads using the Arrow manager. You can create double-sided arrowheads that are identical or entirely different. Canvas has several preset arrowhead styles that you can use and edit, or you can use any vector, paint, or text object as an arrowhead.

To create a custom arrowhead

1.	Create a vector, text, or paint object to use as an arrowhead. You can also edit a preset arrowhead or an arrowhead style of an existing object by selecting the preset or object.

2.	With the Strokes palette floating, select the Arrow tab and roll down the Arrow manager.

3.	To choose whether you want to create a starting or ending arrowhead, or both, click a button at the top of the tab. The sample windows at the bottom of the configuration manager show or hide, depending on the button you click.

4.	For double-sided arrowhead styles, click a sample window to choose which arrowhead you want to work with. To edit both sides simultaneously, turn Mirror on.

5.	Drag the object you want to use as an arrowhead to the edit window in the configuration manager.

6.	Configure the arrowhead settings described below.

Arrow manager

Use these options to create a custom arrowhead or edit a preset arrowhead.

A	You can drag objects to this edit window to use them as arrowheads. A preview of selected presets or objects also appears here.

B	Use these zoom buttons to magnify the edit window view. Changing views does not change the arrowhead’s actual size.

C	Shows the starting arrowhead, and isn’t visible when using only ending arrowheads. When working with double-sided arrowheads, click this window to select the starting arrow.

D	Previews the ending arrowhead and isn’t visible when using only starting arrowheads. When working with double-sided arrowheads, click this window to select the ending arrow.

You can also move and resize the object in the edit window to fine-tune the arrowhead.

E	Drag these control points to resize the arrowhead.

F	Indicates the horizontal axis of the path’s endpoint.

G	Indicates the vertical axis of the path’s endpoint.

Center: Click the buttons to align the center of the arrowhead horizontally and vertically on the path’s endpoint.

Flip: Click the buttons to flip the arrowhead horizontally and vertically.

Mimic Pen: Turn size and color on to apply the pen width and ink of the path to the arrowhead.

Place on segments: Turn this option on to add arrows to each segment of an object.

Mirror: Turn on to make double-sided arrowheads mirror images of each other.


Adding dashes to strokes

You can add a variety of preset dash sequences to pen and neon strokes. You can apply a stroke with dashes to most objects, including lines, open and closed Bézier curves, polygons, rectangles, ovals, and stars.

Parallel line strokes can also includes dashes. However, you select dashes for parallel lines when you customize the stroke on the Parallel tab.

To add dashes to pen and neon strokes

1.	Depending on how you want dashes to apply, do one of the following:

•	To apply dashes to the current stroke, deselect all objects.

•	To apply dashes to an object that has a pen or neon stroke, select the object.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox to open the Strokes palette. Choose the Dash tab.

3.	Choose the dash sequence that you want in the list of presets.

Related topic

Customizing dashes


Customizing dashes

Dashes are composed of alternating solid and blank segments. Using the Dash manager, you can customize the length of up to 13 segments to create new, complex dash sequences.

You can design dashes interactively using the edit window. To precisely set the length of each dash segment, you can also specify an exact length. The ruler in the Dash manager displays inches; however, you can enter dash lengths in inches, points, millimeters, or picas; see Measurement unit preferences for details.

Dashes in the Strokes palette always appear as 1-point wide, black and white segments. However, when you apply these dashes to an object’s pen, the black segments adopt the color and size of the pen, and the white segments become transparent.

To create a custom dash sequence

With the Strokes palette floating, select the Dash tab and open the Dash manager. Use the edit window and length text box to design the sequence.

•	Click the ruler scroll buttons to move the edit window view left and right. Click the zoom buttons to increase or decrease magnification of the dash preview window in steps from 100% to 1000%.

•	To change the length of a segment, drag a dash segment editor to the length you want. You can also type a number in the Length text box. When you select or drag a segment, Canvas highlights it.

•	To add new segments, drag from segment editor (appears blue on-screen) to the left. This segment editor remains at the right of the window until you create the thirteenth segment. Because you cannot create more than 13 segments, this segment editor then acts like the others.

•	The window at the bottom of the Dash manager displays a sample of the current settings.

•	Select Proportional to tell Canvas to scale the length of the segments to match the pen width of the object. The length of segments in the Dash manager are based on a 1-point line. Therefore, if the pen width is 6 points and Proportional is selected, Canvas multiplies the lengths by six.

Related topic

Adding dashes to strokes


Customizing neon strokes

You can create custom neon strokes using the Neon manager in the Strokes palette. You can specify the width, colors, line joins, and end caps for neon strokes.

To create custom neon strokes

1	With the Strokes palette floating, select the Neon tab and open the Neon manager, if necessary.

2	To specify the width of the neon stroke, enter a value in the Width text box. The preview windows reflect the current settings. You can use the magnification buttons below the preview window to get a close look at the neon effect. Keep in mind that low width settings might make it difficult to see the neon effect.

3	To specify colors for the neon stroke, use the Inside color and Outside color pop-up menus. Canvas blends these colors together to create the neon effect. To make the stroke appear round, experiment with lighter inside colors and darker outside colors. The placement of the colors depend on the Full/Partial setting.

4	To place the inside color in the center of the stroke and the outside color on the edges, choose Full. To place the inside color on one side of the stroke, choose Partial.

5	To choose line join and end cap styles, use the pop-up menus above the sample window at the bottom of the manager.


Customizing parallel line strokes

You can create custom parallel line strokes using the Parallel manager in the Strokes palette.

To create custom parallel line strokes

With the Strokes palette floating, click the Parallel tab to bring it to the front and open the Parallel manager, if necessary.

1.	Enter the number of parallel lines you want in the Total Lines box.

2.	Choose a number in the pop-up menu under the preview area to select a line to edit (“1” is the bottom line). You can also click a line in the preview window to select it for editing.

3.	Use the Pen pop-up palette to specify the weight of the line. Use the Color pop-up palette to select a color. Use the Dash pop-up palette to set a solid line or dash pattern.

4.	Select from the following options to customize the placement and spacing of the lines:

Identical: Turn this option on to give all parallel lines the same pen size, color, and dash as the selected line.

Spacing: Enter a number to specify the distance between the selected line and the one below it. For Line #1, this setting defines the space between this line and Line #2.

Equidistant: Turn on this option to apply the spacing setting for the selected line to all lines.

Orientation: Choose Centered, Above, or Below to specify the placement of parallel lines relative to the path of the object.

Use Pen Ink: Select this option if you want the object’s pen ink to override the color assigned in the Parallel manager.


Removing arrows, dashes, and strokes

You can remove a selected object’s stroke, or set the current stroke to “no stroke,” so you can create objects that have no stroke. An object that has no stroke has no visible outline. Objects drawn with the Line tool become invisible without a stroke; other objects are still visible if they have a visible fill ink.

You can also remove dashes and arrows from a stroke. Because arrows and dashes are attributes of strokes, you can remove them without removing the entire stroke.

Removing arrows, dashes, and strokes involves the same procedure as changing from one preset stroke to another.

To remove arrows or dashes

You can use the following procedure to remove arrows from pen, parallel, and neon strokes, and to remove dashes from pen and neon strokes. Removing dashes from parallel strokes requires a slightly different procedure.

1.	Depending on how you want to remove arrows or dashes, do one of the following:

•	To remove stroke attributes from an object, select the object.

•	To remove stroke attributes from the current stroke, deselect all objects.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox to open the Strokes palette. Choose the Dash or Arrow tab, depending on the attribute you want to remove.

3.	Choose “no arrow” on the Arrow tab to remove arrows from a stroke. Choose “no dash” on the Dash tab to remove dashes.

To use “no stroke” settings

You can remove strokes entirely from objects, or use “no stroke” as the current setting for new objects.

1.	Depending on how you want to remove strokes, do one of the following:

•	To remove the stroke from an object, select the object.

•	To make “no stroke” the current setting, deselect all objects.

2.	Press the Strokes icon in the toolbox and choose “no stroke” on the Pen, Neon, or Parallel tabs.


Using the Brushes palette

The Brushes palette contains preset brush shapes and options (such as opacity) for painting tools.

	The Brushes palette is available in the toolbox when a painting tool is selected and a paint object  is in edit mode. The Brushes palette icon replaces the Strokes palette icon.  Two paintbrush icons appear in paint edit mode. The icon shows the foreground color and the bottom icon shows the background color for painting.

You open the Brushes palette to select a preset brush shape. To use all the options in the Brushes palette, open the palette and drag it away from the toolbox.

To select a preset brush

With a painting tool selected, press the Brushes palette icon and drag to the brush shape you want. If the Brushes palette is open, click a brush in the palette to select it.

Brushes palette painting options

You can change some brush options using controls under the brush shapes in the Brushes palette. The palette must be floating for you to use these controls.

For many painting tools, you can set the transparency level of the paint color using the Opacity slider. At 100% opacity, the paint color completely replaces the original image color.

Related topics

To remove a brush shape from the palette

Creating new brush shapes

Modifying brush shapes

Saving and loading brushes

Using a selection to define a brush shape

Using painting modes with painting tools


To remove a brush shape from the palette

Select the brush you want to delete. Press the right-arrow button in the lower-right corner of the Brushes palette and choose Delete Brush in the menu. You can also Command-click (Mac) or Alt-click (Windows) a brush to remove it.

Note: If you think you might want to use the brush shape again, you should first store it in a brushes file so you can later load it back into the palette. See Saving and loading brushes  for more information.


Using painting modes

You can select painting modes in the pop-up menu in the Brushes palette. Painting tools apply color using the current mode.

Normal: Paints color to every pixel the brush touches. 100% opacity replaces the original color.

Dissolve: Applies color randomly within the brush shape, creating a spotted effect. To work properly, opacity must be set to less than 100 percent.

Multiply : Darkens pixels the brush touches. Paint with darker colors to increase the affect. Painting with black results in black; painting with white does not affect the original image.

Screen : Lightens pixels the brush touches. Paint with lighter colors to increase the affect. Painting with black does not affect the original image; painting with white results in white.

Overlay: Paints color without destroying the highlights or shadows of the original image.

Soft Light: Lightens or darkens pixels depending on the applied color's brightness value. If it is less than 50%, the brush lightens pixels. If greater than 50%, the pixels are darkened.

Hard Light: Lightens or darkens pixels depending on the applied color's brightness. It is similar to Soft Light. However, painting with black produces black; painting with white produces white.

Darken: Applies color if it is darker than the original color.

Lighten: Applies color if it is lighter than the original color.

Difference: Compares the brightness of the original and applied colors, subtracts the brightness value of the darker pixel from the lighter one, and applies that value to the original image.

Hue: Changes the hue of the original color to the hue of the applied color without changing the saturation or luminance values.

Saturation: Changes the saturation of the original color to the saturation of the applied color, without changing the hue or luminance values. Applying gray does not affect the original image.

Color: Changes the hue and saturation of the original color to the hue and saturation of the applied color, without affecting the shadow, highlights, or midtones of the original image.

Luminosity: Changes the lightness of the original color to the lightness of the applied color, without affecting the hue or saturation values.


Creating new brush shapes
Creating brush shapes

To create a brush shape

1.	With a painting tool selected, press the right-arrow button in the Brushes palette and choose New Brush.

2.	In the New Brush dialog box, enter the settings you want.

Diameter: Enter the diameter in pixels of the new brush.

Hardness: Enter a percentage to tell Canvas how much of the brush shape is solid.

Spacing: This percentage sets the amount of brush overlap when you drag a painting tool. Turn off Spacing to make the brush velocity-sensitive, so it skips pixels when dragged fast.

Roundness: Enter 1 to 100. To create a circle, enter 100.

Angle: Enter a number to rotate the brush shape.

3.	After entering the settings you want, click OK. The new brush shape appears in the Brushes palette.

Related topics

Using a selection to define a brush shape

Saving and loading brushes


Using a selection to define a brush shape

You can make a new brush shape from a selection in an image. This lets you create non-elliptical brush shapes.

1.	Select all or part of an image using the method of your choice.

2.	Press the right-arrow button in the lower-right corner of the Brushes palette and choose Define Brush in the pop-up menu. The selection becomes a preset in the Brushes palette. Canvas uses the shape and lightness value of the selection to define the brush. Brush shapes do not contain color.


Modifying brush shapes

You can edit any brush shape. For brush shapes created from selections, you can change only the spacing.

1.	In the Brushes palette, double-click the brush shape you want to modify.

2.	In the Brush Options dialog box, adjust the settings you want and click OK.

Diameter: Enter the diameter in pixels of the new brush.

Hardness: Enter a percentage to tell Canvas how much of the brush shape is solid.

Spacing: This percentage sets the amount of brush overlap when you drag a painting tool. Turn off Spacing to make the brush velocity-sensitive, so it skips pixels when dragged fast.

Roundness: Enter 1 to 100. To create a circle, enter 100.

Angle: Enter a number to rotate the brush shape.

To modify a brush tip, you can use the text boxes to enter values, or drag the axis lines in the Brush Tip area to change the angle and roundness of the brush tip visually.

A: Drag this axis to change the brush tip roundness.

B: Drag the arrowhead to change the brush tip angle.

C: View a preview of the brush tip in this area.


Saving and loading brushes

You can save brushes to disk and load brushes back into the Brushes palette.

To save brushes in a file

1.	In the Brushes palette, add or remove brushes until you have the collection you want to save.

2.	Press the right-arrow button in the lower-right corner of the palette and choose Save Brushes in the pop-up menu.

3.	In the directory dialog box, type a name for the brushes file, select a location, and click Save (Mac) or OK (Windows).

To load brushes from a file

When you load a brushes file, you can replace the current set of brushes with the contents of the file, or add the brushes in the file to those currently in the palette.

1.	In the Brushes palette, press the right-arrow button in the lower-right corner of the palette.

2.	Choose one of the following in the pop-up menu:

•	To reload the original presets shipped with Canvas, choose Reset Brushes. A dialog box gives you the option of replacing the current presets or appending the original presets to the current set.

•	To replace the current brushes with those in the brushes file, choose Load Brushes.

•	To add the presets in the brushes file to those currently in the palette, choose Append Brushes.

3.	In the directory dialog box, locate the brushes file you want to open and click Open (Mac) or OK (Windows).


Cube tool

The Cube tool in the Object Tools toolbar draws 2D cubes using the current object attributes. The tool is in the Object tools toolbar.

To draw a cube

1.	Select the Cube tool.

2.	Drag to draw the rectangular back face of the cube. To constrain the faces of the cube to perfect squares, hold down the Shift key while drawing the back face.

3.	Release the button when the back face of the cube is set as you want; an unanchored cube then follows the pointer’s movements.

4.	Position the cube so it appears at the length and angle you want, and then click to anchor it. To give the cube a perspective effect by enlarging the front face, hold down the Command key (Mac) or the Ctrl key (Windows) before you anchor the cube.

Editing cubes

To change the height or width of a cube, click the cube to select it, and then drag a corner handle.

To reshape a cube by moving a side, double-click the cube to place it in edit mode. A black circular handle appears on each of the six faces of the cube. When you point to a handle, the outline flashes on the corresponding side of the cube. You can drag the handle to move that side. Click outside the cube to leave edit mode.


Custom color in pop-up palettes

When you choose colors in a Canvas dialog box or palette, you use a color icon that opens a pop-up palette. This color icon appears in several places such as the Channel Options dialog box, the Extrude palette, and the Gradient manager.

When you use the color icon, you see the palette of preset colors from the Color tab of the Inks palette. If the color you want isn’t in the pop-up palette, you can select a new color without adding it to the palette first. To create a new color, drag to the Custom button (Mac) or click the Custom button (Windows) to open the Color Editor dialog box. Use this dialog box to create the color you want.

To quickly select a custom color (Mac OS only), Option-click the color icon to bypass the pop-up palette and open the Color Editor.

This custom box in the color pop-up palettes lets you use new colors immediately, without having to switch back and forth between a dialog box and the Inks palette. It’s also useful when you want to use a color for a specific purpose, but don’t want to clutter the color palette with colors you’ll only use once.

The Custom button appears in pop-up color palettes in the following:

Inks: Gradient manager, Hatch manager (pen color pop-up only)

Strokes: Neon manager, Parallel manager

Layers: Layer Options dialog box

Color calibration: Gamut Warning dialog box

Image editing: Duotone Options dialog box, Channel Options dialog box, Create Image dialog box.

Effects: Extrude palette

To create a custom color in a pop-up palette

1.	In the pop-up color palette, choose the Custom option to open the Color Editor dialog box. This dialog box is almost identical to the Color tab in the Inks palette.

2.	To use a different color model or color system, choose an option in the pop-up menu. Depending on which option you choose, the dialog box shows a different set of controls; see "Color manager controls" on page 135 of the User's Guide for more information.

3.	Use the color controls to create a custom color.

4.	To specify that you want the color you define to be a spot color, make sure the color is named in the text box at the top, then turn on Spot Color.

5.	When you have the color you want, click OK. The color appears in the palette icon.

Important:  If you plan to export a Canvas document to another application in EPSF format and produce spot color separations, make sure the names of spot colors in Canvas exactly match the names of the spot colors in the other application. Any variation will cause problems.


Identifying inks

You can display symbols that identify the color inks that are stored on the Color tab in the Inks palette. To identify color inks, choose Show Color Icons in the palette’s pop-up menu. To hide the symbols, choose Hide Color Icons in the pop-up menu.

Note: If the Color tab contains only CMYK colors, no symbols appear when you choose Show Color Icons.

The Color tab can contain color inks defined with RGB, CMYK, grayscale, and spot colors.

The symbol that identifies RGB color inks has tiny red and blue triangles and a green square. The symbol appears at the upper-left of RGB color tiles.

The symbol that identifies spot color inks is a white triangle. The symbol appears at the lower-right of spot color tiles.

No symbol appears on tiles of CMYK and Grayscale inks.


Arc Radius and Arc 3 Points tools
Arc Radius tool and Arc 3 Points tool

The Arc Radius tool draws an arc based on a center point and radius that you set. The Arc 3 Points tool draws an arc through three points that you set. Both tools draw arcs with the current fill ink, pen ink, and stroke.

The Arc Radius tool and Arc 3 Points tools are located with the oval and arc tools in a toolbar that pops out of the toolbox.

To draw arcs by 3 points

1.	Select the Arc 3 Points tool. Click in the document to set one endpoint of the arc.

2.	Move to the second endpoint of the arc. A line extends from the first endpoint. Click to set the second endpoint.

3.	Move to a point on the perimeter of the arc. A line indicates the chord from the second point, while the arc expands or contracts as you move the pointer.

4.	Click to set the perimeter point and finish the arc.

To draw arcs by radius

1.	Select the Arc Radius tool. Click in the document to set the center of the arc.

2.	Move to one endpoint of the arc. A line extends from the center and indicates the arc’s radius. Click to set the endpoint.

3.	Move to the second endpoint of the arc. An arc segment extends from the first endpoint and indicates the arc’s length.

4.	Click to set the second endpoint and finish the arc.


Circle Radius and Circle 3 Points tools
Circle Radius tool and Circle 3 Points tool

The Circle Radius tool draws a circle from a center point and a radius that you set. The Circle 3 Points tool draws a circle through three points that you set.

Both tools draw circles with the current fill ink, pen ink, and stroke.

The Circle Radius and Circle 3 Points tools are located with the oval and arc tools in a toolbar that pops out of the toolbox.

To draw circles by 3 points

1.	Select the Circle 3 points tool. Click in the document to set a first point on the circle’s circumference.

2.	Move to a second point on the circle’s circumference. A line indicates the chord from the first point as you move the pointer. Click to set the second point.

3.	Move to a third point on the circumference. A line indicates the chord from the second point, while the circle expands or contracts as you move the pointer.

4.	Click to set the third point and complete the circle.

To draw circles by radius

1.	Select the Circle Radius tool. Click in the document to set the center of the circle.

2.	Move to anywhere on the circumference of the circle. A line extends from the center and indicates the radius, while the circle expands or contracts as you move the pointer.

3.	Click to set the circumference and complete the circle.


Text Info tool

The Text Info tool lets you check text flows in a document. You can use the tool to display arrows showing the flow of text among linked text objects. The Text Info tool is in the Text toolbar.

To check a text flow

1.	Select the Text Info tool.

2.	Point to a text object. Press and continue holding down the mouse button to display flow arrows.

If the text object is part of a linked text flow, arrows show the flow sequence. Flow arrows are displayed until you release the mouse button. If the text object is not linked, no flow arrows appear. A flow arrow starts at the lower-right corner of the first object in a flow, and points to the upper-left corner of the next object in the flow, and so on throughout the flow. With the Text Info tool selected, you can use the same procedure to display flow arrows.


Section tool

You can drag the Section tool in a document to create a section. You can also use the Section tool to move and modify sections. The Section tool is in a toolbar with other text tools in the toolbox.

To create a section with the Section tool

1.	Select the Section tool, and then drag in the document to set the width and height of the section.

2.	In the Column Guides dialog box, select options for the section. You can select preset column guides or specify a custom setup.

3.	Click OK to create a new section with the current settings. You can use the Section tool to move, resize, and modify sections.

Moving sections

To move a section, drag it with the Section tool. When you move a section, text objects contained in the section move with the section. You must use the Section tool to move or resize a section. Unlike vector, paint, and text objects, you can’t use the Selection tool to modify a section.

Resizing sections

To change the width of a section, drag one of its sides. To change the height of a section, drag the top or bottom border of the section. To change both dimensions at once, drag a corner of the section.

To adjust the width of columns in a section, use the Section tool to drag column guides. The Fixed Widths and Fixed Gutters options in the Column Guides dialog box limit how sections can be resized. If both options are selected, you can’t drag the sides, columns, or gutters to resize a section; you can drag the top or bottom to make it longer or shorter.

Modifying sections

To change the configuration of a section, including the number of columns and their widths, double-click the section with the Section tool. This opens the Column Guides dialog box. Change the settings in the dialog box and click OK to apply the settings to the section.

To delete a section

Double-click the section with the Section tool. In the Column Guides dialog box, choose Delete Section in the pop-up menu and click OK.

Related topic

Column Guides command


Gradient Vector tool

The Gradient Vector tool lets you drag in a document to set the shape, angle, and center of a gradient. You can use the tool to apply gradient inks interactively to selected vector objects and text. The Gradient Vector tool is located in the Effects toolbar.

The Gradient Vector tool applies gradients based on the settings in the Gradient manager in the Inks palette. You can select gradient colors and styles in the Gradient manager. The Gradient Vector tool applies the gradient as a fill ink or a pen ink according to which icon is selected on the Gradient tab in the Inks palette.

The Gradient Vector tool applies gradient inks to selected objects. If more than one object is selected, the gradient flows across the selected objects as if they were one object.

To use the Gradient Vector tool

1.	Select the objects that you want to apply a gradient ink to.

2.	On the Gradient tab in the Inks palette, select the pen ink or fill ink icon to specify which ink to apply.

3.	Use the Gradient manager to configure the gradient. You can apply the current settings without opening the Gradient manager.

4.	Select the Gradient Vector tool, and then drag in the document to position the gradient. As you drag, a vector indicates the gradient style and position, and the gradient appears on the selected objects.

You can drag inside or outside selected objects. For example, if you are applying a directional gradient, you can “stretch” the gradient by dragging across the object, starting and finishing outside the object. This places the start and end colors farther apart than if you drag a shorter distance within the object only.


Knife tool

You can divide vector objects into separate pieces using the Knife tool. The Knife tool is located in the Effects toolbar.

When you drag the Knife tool, it draws a cutting path. If the cutting path divides an object into two parts, the result is two new objects. If the cutting path crosses itself, the area inside the path becomes a new object.

To use the Knife tool

1.	To configure the Knife tool, double-click the Knife tool icon. Select one of the following options and click OK.

Cut Only selected objects: Select this option to make the Knife tool slice only vector objects that are selected and intersected by the cutting path. This setting can prevent unintentional changes to nearby objects.

Cut All Objects: Select this option to make the Knife tool slice any vector objects that the cutting path intersects, whether the objects are selected or not.

2.	Select the Knife tool. Drag in the document to draw a cutting path that intersects the objects you want to divide. The cutting path must intersect at least two points on an object’s perimeter.

Making partial cuts

If you stop dragging before the cutting path intersects a second point on an object's perimeter, the cutting path appears but the object stays intact. To use this cutting path to divide the object, you can drag a second cutting path so it intersects the perimeter of the object and the first cutting path. Or, you can intersect the cutting path with other cutting paths to create a closed shape. The part of the object that falls within the closed shape becomes a separate object.

Cutting holes in objects

You can cut out pieces of a vector object by dragging inside of the object and creating a closed path. The parts of the object that fall within the closed cutting path become separate objects. To create a closed cutting path, the path must cross itself.

Gradient inks

If an object’s fill ink is a gradient, and the style is Radial, Directional, Rectangular, or Elliptical, the gradient remains intact across the separated objects. However, if the gradient style is Shape, the gradient fills each divided object separately.


 Vector Transparency tools

The Vector Transparency tools can make objects transparent by applying vector masks to them. The Vector Transparency tools make it easy to create effects such as vignettes and fades.

To use Vector Transparency tools

1.	Select a text, paint, vector, or group object.

2.	Select the Radial, Directional, Rectangular, or Elliptical vector transparency tool in the Effects toolbar.

3. 	Drag near or over the selected object. As you drag, a vector line or shape shows the vector transparency effect.

4.	To adjust the effect, drag a handle. When you finish, press Esc to leave edit mode.

To edit a vector transparency effect

1.	Select the object to edit.

2.	Select the Vector Transparency tool that created the effect. The transparency vector appears on the selected object.

3. 	Drag a handle to adjust the transparency vector. When you finish, press Esc to leave edit mode.


Oval Marquee, Row Selection, Column Selection tools
Oval Marquee tool, Row Selection tool, Column Selection tool

You can use the Oval Marquee, Row Selection, and Column Selection tools to select areas in images.

•	The Oval Marquee tool selects oval areas.

•	The Column Selection tool selects a single vertical column of pixels.

•	The Row Selection tool selects a single horizontal row of pixels.

The Oval Marquee, Row Selection, and Column Selection tools are located in a toolbar that pops out from the Painting toolbar.

To select oval areas

1.	Select the Oval Marquee tool. If the paint object isn’t in edit mode, click it.

2.	Drag diagonally in the image; an oval expands as you drag away from the starting point. When you release the mouse button, a dashed border outlines the selected area.

To make a circular selection: If no selection exists, press Shift and drag the Oval Marquee tool in an image. If a selection exists in the image, pressing Shift adds to the selection.

To expand a selection marquee from the center: If no selection exists, press Ctrl and drag the Oval Marquee tool (on Mac, press Ctrl after you begin dragging). You can press Ctrl+Shift to constrain the selection marquee and expand it from the center.

To select single rows or columns

1.	Select the Row Selection tool or the Column Selection tool. If the paint object isn’t in edit mode, click it.

2.	Click a single pixel to select all pixels in the same row or column in the image. A dashed border outlines the selected row or column. Or, press and hold the mouse button to see a selection outline, and move the pointer to position the selection outline. Release the mouse button to set the selection, and a dashed border outlines the selected row or column.


Sprite tool

The Sprite tool lets you make objects transparent and edit transparency effects. It’s a tool version of features in the Transparency palette and the Transparency Mask submenu.

The Sprite tool is in the Effects tools toolbar.

To create a channel mask: With the Sprite tool, click an object. Canvas applies a channel mask to the object. The mask resolution matches the resolution of a paint object. To set the resolution for masking other objects, double-click the Sprite tool. Enter a resolution (1 to 2,540) and click OK.

To edit a mask: With the Sprite tool, click the masked object. Canvas places the object in edit mode so you can edit the channel mask or vector mask.


Selection tools

Selection tool: Selects any object that you click or drag a box around.

Direct Selection tool: Selects individual objects in group objects.


Line tools

Line tool: Draws lines at any angle; snaps to 90 degree intervals with Shift pressed.

SmartLine tools: Draw five types of dynamic lines that connect objects and move with them.


Rectangle tools

Rectangle tool: Draws rectangles, and squares with Shift pressed.

Rounded Rectangle tool: Draws rectangles with rounded corners, and squares with Shift pressed.


Oval tools

Oval tool: Draws ovals, and circles with Shift pressed.

Arc tool: Draws sections of ovals, or circles with Shift pressed.

Circle 3 Points: Draws a circle through 3 points

Circle radius tool: Draws a circle from the center with a defined radius.

Arc 3 Points: Draws an arc through 3 points.

Arc Radius: Draws an arc from the center with a defined radius.


Object tools

These tools draw special objects, including grids, cubes, stars and multigons, concentric circles, spirals, dimensions, Colada buttons, Colada Sounds, Colada animations, macro objects, and placed clip art.


Painting tools

This toolbar contains tools for painting and image editing.

•	Painting tools include the paint brush, marker, airbrush, rubber stamp (clone), blend, neon, pencil, bucket, and eraser tools.

•	Image-editing tools include crop, dodge, burn, blur, sharpen, and smudge.

•	Tools for making selections in images include the marquee, oval marquee, row selection, column selection, and magic wand.


Text tools

Text tool: Lets you type text where you click.

Path Text: Lets you type text along an object's path.

Text object tool: Creates empty text objects.

Text Link, Text Unlink, Text Info: Create links, remove links, and display links between text objects.

Section tool: Defines sections with text columns


Path tools

Curve tool: Draws Bezier curves.

Polygon tool: Draws polygons and paths with straight segments.

Freehand tool: Draws freehand paths.


View tools

Magnifying glass: Click to zoom in, Shift-click to zoom out.

Hand tool: Drag to scroll the document.


Effects tools

Sprite tool: Applies and edits masks for transparency.

Color Dropper: Selects and applies colors.

Vector Gradient tool: Applies gradients with directional control.

Vector Transparency: Four tools that create masks for transparency.

Knife tool: Slices through vector paths where you drag.

Scissors tool: Cuts open a vector path where you click.


Opacity slider

Click the icon to open the Opacity slider. Click or drag the slider to change the overall opacity of selected objects. When the slider is closed, the scale shows the selected object's opacity.

At 1% an object is almost completely transparent.

At 100% an object  is opaque.

Drag the slider away from the toolbox to float the Transparency palette on the desktop.


Inks palette icon
Inks palette icons

These icons open the inks palette. For painting and image editing, the foreground and background paint colors replace the inks icons.

Pen ink: Colors the strokes (outlines) of vector objects and text

Fill ink: Fills the inside of vector objects and text.


Strokes palette icon

This icon opens the Strokes palette. Use it to apply strokes to lines and the outlines of vector objects. You can select pen sizes, parallel strokes, neon strokes, dashes and arrows.

Drag the palette away from the toolbox to float it on the desktop.

For painting and image editing, the Brushes icon replaces the Strokes icon.


Exchanging data
Exchanging graphics and documents

You can use a variety of methods to exchange graphics with users of other programs:

•	Use a file format that both programs support to exchange files. You can use Image > Acquire and Image > Export to transfer raster image files.

•	Use Copy and  Paste to transfer selected objects between documents.

•	Link objects using Publish and Subscribe (Mac) or Object Linking and Embedding (Windows).

Saving work in Canvas format

Canvas file format saves all the objects, properties, and effects you create in Canvas. You should always save your work in Canvas format, even if you also export files in other formats.

What do you want to do?

  Save a Canvas document

  Save a copy of a document

  Change a document's name or location

  Open and place files

  Save files in other formats


Saving Canvas documents

The Save and Save As commands in the File menu will save a Canvas document in a file.

The Save command updates an already saved file on disk with the current version of the document. The Save As command lets you create a copy of the open document and specify the name and location of the saved file. The first time you save a document, you can choose either command.

To save a new Canvas document:

1.	Choose File > Save. A directory dialog box appears.

2.	Select the folder to save the file in and type a file name.

3.	Select options for saving the file.

4.	Click Save to save the document file.

Saving changes to documents

Choose File > Save to update a saved document file on disk with the current version of the document you are working on.

IMPORTANT: You should save your document often, especially if you do not have a power protection device. Canvas does not save documents as you work unless you choose the Save command.


Saving document copies

The Save As command lets you save a copy of the current Canvas document. You can use Save As to change a document's name and save a file in a different location. Save As also lets you save Canvas documents in other file formats, including Canvas 5 format.

To save a document copy

1.	Choose File > Save As. A directory dialog box appears.

2.	The default file format is Canvas 6 (CNV). If you want to save a copy in Canvas 5 format, select Canvas 5 (CV5) in the format menu.

3.	Select a folder to store the document file in and type a file name.

4.	Select options for saving the document in the new file.

5. 	Click Save to save the document copy


Changing a document's name or location

When you edit a Canvas document that has already been saved, you choose the Save command to update the document file on disk.

To save a copy with a different name or location: Choose the File > Save As command. Type a name and select a location, and click Save.


Save options

When you save a document the first time or use the Save As command to save a copy, a directory dialog box appears. You can select what to save and other options.

Some options are not available when you save a Canvas document that does not contain layers or a current selection, and when you use another file format. For some file formats, including Colada Web format, a dialog box of options appears after you click Save.

Select what to save

You can select one option for the parts of the document to save:

•	To save the entire document, click Save Entire Document. This is the default setting.

•	To save only selected objects, click Save Selection.

•	To save specific layers, click Save Layers, and then click the Layers button to select the layers to save. If you select all layers, this is the same as saving the entire document.

Select save options

You can select options for previews, compression and file name extension.

•	Select Create Preview to store a small preview of the Canvas document in the file. This is the default and is not an option in Windows.

•	Select Use Compression to compress the saved file. This provides smaller files but can increase the time used to open files. For some non-Canvas formats, compression options are available in a separate dialog box.

•	Select Use Extensions to append a three-character DOS file type extension to the file name. This is the default and is not an option in Windows.

•	Select Use Preview Icon to use a document preview as the file's icon. This option is available on Mac only.


Opening and placing files

Use the Open command to import a file into a new Canvas document. Use the Place command to import a file into an existing Canvas document.

Canvas can open most graphics and image files. The supported file formats are in a pop-up menu in the Open dialog box.

To open or place a file

1.	Choose File > Open or File > Place.

2.	In the directory dialog box, choose a file type in the pop-up menu.

•	To show all files Canvas can open (Mac only), select All in the pop-up menu.

•	To show every file in the current folder, even files that Canvas can't open, Select "All Files" in the pop-up menu (Windows), or select the "Show All Files" check box (Mac).

•	To show files matching one file format, select the file format in the pop-up menu.

3.	Select a file in the file list and click Open or Place (or double-click the file name). For some file formats, a dialog box of options appears. Configure the options and click Open or Place.

4.	If you are placing the file, a Place pointer appears. If the file has multiple layers, a dialog box lets you select the layers to place. Other Place options depend on the type of file you are placing

5.	To place the file at normal size, click in the document to place the top-left corner of the file. To set the size, drag to create a bounding box to contain the file.


Place options

When you place a file, the Place Options dialog box lets you specify how the placed file should be added to the current document.

When you place one Canvas document type (Illustration, Publication, or Presentation) into another document type, Canvas converts the placed pages, sheets, or slides to the format of the current document. Document pages (and sheets or slides) can be added to the current document, along with their layers.

In the Place Options dialog box, you can select the following options, and then click OK to place the document.

Place on Current Layer

Places the file’s objects on the current layer of the current page. No pages or layers are created in the current document.

Show Place Cursor

Select this option if you want to set the position or size of placed items on the current page. After you click OK in the Place Options dialog box, a place pointer appears. Click to set the position of the upper-left corner of the placed items, or drag to enclose an area in which you want the placed items to fit.

Add Layers to Current Page

Places the document’s layers as new layers on the current page in the current document.

Add New Pages

Places  the document’s pages and layers as new pages and layers in the current document.

Select

Click to choose specific pages or layers to place. A dialog box lists the available items. Shift-click two items to select a range. Command-click (Mac) or Ctrl-click (Windows) to select multiple items and toggle selected items. Click OK to close the dialog box.


Saving files in other formats

You can use the Save As command to convert entire documents or selected objects to non-Canvas file formats.

Some issues to consider when you use other file formats:

•	Saving in other formats can change objects and attributes, or exclude them from the saved file.

•	You might not be able to edit objects saved in other formats.

•	Saving in a raster file format converts objects and text to pixels, which you must edit with painting tools.

•	Some formats support one color mode, such as RGB. Canvas supports several color modes, which might be lost by saving in another format.

What happens to the current document? Saving a document in a non-Canvas format creates a file on disk. The Canvas document remains open. If you try to close it and haven’t saved changes in Canvas format, a message asks if you want to close the document without saving. It’s a good idea to always save documents in Canvas format for editing.

To save a file in any format

1.	You can choose what to save by doing the following:

 •	To save some objects, select the objects.

 •	To save some layers of a document, make the layers visible.

2.	Choose File > Save As.

3.	In the directory dialog box, select a file format in the "File Format" menu (Mac) or "Save as type" menu (Windows).

•	If a format is not available, it does not support the type of objects in the document.

•	When you select a non-Canvas format, Canvas asks you to confirm the choice. On Windows, a message appears after you select the format. To continue, click Yes. On Mac, a message appears after you click Save. To continue, click Save.

4.	Select options for saving the document in the new file.

5.	Type a file name, select a folder to save the file in, and then click Save.

7.	If a file format has additional options, a dialog box appears. Select the options you want and click OK.

Related topics

Exporting images

Saving Colada web documents


Rendering images when saving files

Saving a file in a format that supports raster images only causes all objects to be rendered, which converts them to a raster image.

For example, if you save a document in GIF format, Canvas renders the document as one raster image because GIF files support raster images only.

Rendering options

The Render Image dialog box lets you specify resolution and other settings for rendering objects, depending on what the selected format supports.

The dialog box appears before Canvas saves a raster image file. Select the options you want, then click OK to render and save the file.

Dimensions: The actual width and height of the rendered image. Select inches, centimeters (cm), points, or picas for these dimensions.

Mode: Choose the image color mode. You can select modes that the selected file format supports.

Width and Height: Enter a number of pixels in either box to set the image resolution (shown in the "Res" box). Resolution is number of pixels divided by distance, so more pixels equals higher resolution. When you change width or height, Canvas adjusts the other value to maintain the original dimensions.

Res.: Choose pixels per inch or pixels per centimeter for the image resolution value. To change the resolution, enter a different value. Width and Height will change in proportion to the resolution.

Size: The amount of data in the image, calculated from the image mode, resolution, and dimensions. The actual space required on disk can differ, depending on compression and disk formatting.

Anti-Alias: To make text and objects appear smoother in a rendered image, select the check box and choose Fine, Medium, or Coarse. Coarse uses 16 shades for anti-aliasing and is the fastest option. Medium uses 64 shades for anti-aliasing. Fine uses 256 shades for anti-aliasing.

Mask: When you render objects in Canvas, you can use this option to apply a channel mask or a visibility mask to the rendered image. At this time, other file formats do not support these features. However, you can use the Visibility option to include an alpha channel when you are saving in Photoshop format.

To include an alpha channel in the image, select the Mask check box and click Visibility. The alpha channel will reflect the rendered objects and the background area. You can use the alpha channel to select the background area of the image after you open the saved file in Photoshop.


File formats summary

By using a common file format, you can bring files created in other programs into Canvas documents, or transfer Canvas documents to other programs.

When you use a non-Canvas file format, you can avoid problems such as lost information and printing errors if you know the capabilities and limitations of the file format. For example, some formats support only one type of data (vector, raster, or text) or one color mode. Below are brief descriptions of each file format that Canvas supports. Click the links for more information about options.

Adobe Illustrator

This proprietary format supports vector objects, raster images, and formatted text. The files use the extension AI. Canvas can open and save files in AI format.

Amiga IFF

IFF format originated on the Amiga computer. The AccuSoft filter used in Canvas supports up to 24-bit color images. Canvas can open and save IFF files.

BMP (Windows Bitmap)

A common raster image format for Windows, BMP format supports 8-bit and 24-bit color. Canvas can open and save files in BMP format. When you save a BMP file, a dialog box lets you specify compression for some image formats. To save without compression, choose None.

Brooktrout

A black and white fax format (CCITT Group 3) associated with proprietary faxing hardware and software. Canvas can open Brooktrout files, but does not save files in this format.

CALS

CALS is a file format that supports black and white raster images with Fax Group IV compression. These files use the extension CAL. Canvas can open and save files in CALS format.

Canvas

The native file format of Canvas 6, these files use the extension CNV. Canvas file format supports Canvas document types, text, vector objects, raster images, specialized objects, layers, pages, sheets, slides, slide transitions, Colada web objects, and transparency effects. Even if you plan to export your work, you should always save your documents in Canvas format so you can edit them in Canvas.

Canvas 5

This is the native file format of Canvas 5 on Mac and Windows systems. These files use the extension CV5. Canvas 6 can open and save files in Canvas 5 format. Special features in Canvas 6, including transparency effects, are not saved in Canvas 5 format. Objects that have reduced opacity, channel masks, or transparency masks in Canvas 6 documents lose these effects and become opaque when saved in Canvas 5 format.

Canvas 3.5, artWORKS

These are native file formats used by Canvas 3.5 (Mac and Windows) and Deneba artWORKS (Mac only). These files supports vector objects, raster images and text. On Windows, Canvas 3.5 files use the extension CVS. Canvas 6 can open Canvas 3.5 and artWORKS files.

Canvas Image File

The Canvas Image File format was created by Deneba Software. It supports all of the color modes, resolutions and editing features of images (paint objects) in Canvas. It does not support effects applied to objects outside of image edit mode (rotation, skewing, stretching, and flipping).

Canvas can open and save CVI files. Canvas Image Files can be linked to Canvas documents using image proxies.

Canvas Template

This format is identical to the Canvas document format, except that it is used to create new documents. You can select Canvas Template documents from the pop-up menu in the New dialog box. Like regular Canvas documents, template documents can be Illustration, Presentation, or Publication templates. These files use the extension TPL.

CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile)

CGM is an ANSI standard format for vector and raster graphics and text, CGM supports RGB color images. Canvas can open and save files in CGM format.

Colada Web format

Colada is a Java-based technology that translates Canvas documents for publishing web pages on the internet. You can create special Colada sound and Colada animation objects and save vector objects, images, and text in Colada format.

CorelDraw

This is a proprietary format of the CorelDRAW! graphics program. Canvas can open Corel Draw files on Mac OS and Windows systems, but does not support saving files in this format.

Corel Exchange

This Corel file format is used to store presentations. It supports vector objects and 24-bit raster images. Canvas can open but not save files in Corel Exchange format. When you open a Corel Exchange file, objects are imported but transitions and other presentation effects are not imported.

DCX

(Windows only) This file format stores multiple PCX format images in one file. Canvas can open and save files in DCX format.

AutoCAD DWG

AutoCAD DWG is the native format of AutoCAD. The DWG import filter in Canvas lets you import DWG files from AutoCAD release 14. When you open or place an AutoCAD DWG file, Canvas scales the drawing to a document size of 8.5 by 11 inches.

DXF (Drawing Interchange Format)

This popular metafile format supports plain text, 2-D and 3-D geometric data, and 8-bit color. Canvas can open and save files in DXF format.

EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format)

EPS format supports single-page PostScript-based illustrations, including vector objects, raster images, and text. EPS files are commonly used to place illustrations in page-layout applications. EPS supports Grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. EPS files can also include a preview image, although previews are not compatible with all programs and platforms. Canvas can open and save files in EPS format.

EMF (Enhanced Metafile format)

(Windows only) EMF is a Windows format that supports vector objects, images, and text, and up to 24-bit color. Canvas (Windows only) can open and save files in EMF format. When you save a Canvas document in EMF format, text is converted to polygons and CMYK colors are converted to RGB colors.

Gem IMG

The Gem IMG format was originated by Digital Research, Inc. for applications in the Gem operating system. The format was widely used for storing monochrome raster images, although it supports up to 8-bit indexed colors. Canvas can open GEM Image files but does not save files in this format.

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

GIF format is widely used for indexed (256 color) raster images, especially for web page graphics. Canvas can open and save images in GIF 87a and GIF 89a formats.

Halo CUT

The Halo CUT format was created by Media Cybernetics, and is used by DOS-based painting applications. These files store 8-bit raster image data. Canvas can open but not save files in this format.

HPGL (Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language)

HPGL is a file format for vector plotter files. HPGL supports 8-bit color. These files use the extension .PLT. Canvas can open and save files in this format.

Icon

Icon is a Microsoft Corp. format for storing bitmap icon images. Icon supports 1-bit to 24 bit images in uncompressed device-independent format. These files use the extension ICO. Canvas can open and save files in this format.

IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification)

IGES is a 2-D and 3-D vector graphics format used in CAD and rendering applications. IGES supports 8-bit color. These files use the extension IGS. Canvas can open and save files in IGES format. When you save a document in IGES format, some attributes, such as textures and fill colors, are not saved.

IOCA

IOCA is a raster image format for faxing. It supports CCITT G3, CCITT G4, and MMMR 1-bit images. These files use the extension ICA. Canvas can open but not save files in this format.

JPEG

JPEG is a raster image format used to store and compress images from continuous-tone sources such as photographs (the format name is from the Joint Photographic Experts Group, a standards organization). JPEG offers selectable compression and supports 24-bit color. JPEG compression can reduce file size significantly, but does so by discarding data, which can degrade images. JPEG files use the extension JPG or JFIF. Canvas can open and save files in JPEG format.

When you save a JPEG file, the Export JPEG dialog box lets you specify a Quality value from 1 to 100 percent. Higher values produce less compression of image data. Process (CMYK) colors are converted to RGB colors in the JPEG image.

MacDraw Pro

(Mac OS only) MacDraw Pro is a graphics format developed for Macintosh. Canvas can open but not save MacDraw Pro files. Canvas does not import raster images in MacDraw Pro files. Also, line endings of text objects can change because of the way MacDraw pro sizes text. For example, a single line of text might change so that one word wraps to the next line. You can fix this in Canvas by dragging the right handle to enlarge the text object.

MacPaint

MacPaint is a raster image format that supports 1-bit images at 720 x 576 pixels. Canvas can open MacPaint files, but doesn't save files in this format.

Micrografx Draw

This proprietary format supported by several Micrografx products can include vector objects, text, and 8-bit color. These files use the extension DRW. Canvas can open and save files in this format.

When you open a DRW file, the objects it contains are grouped into one object. Text is converted to outline objects, and extruded objects become separate rectangle, circle, oval, polygon, or multigon objects.

Microsoft Paint

(Windows only) This file format supports 1-bit images with run-length compression. These files use the extension MSP. Canvas can open Paint files, but doesn't save in this format.

PCX

PCX is an image format developed by ZSoft Corp for PC Paintbrush, an image-editing program. PCX supports 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, and 24-bit color images. DCX format is a variation that stores multiple PCX images in one file. Canvas can open and save PCX and DCX files.

Photo CD

A Photo CD file is a read-only file containing a photographic image encoded in a specialized YCC color format. In Windows, files use the extension PCD. Photo CD files can be created on proprietary Kodak hardware only. When importing Photo CD files, a special acquisition module converts colors to RGB mode.

To acquire a Photo CD image in Canvas, you can use the included Kodak Photo CD acquire module. Choose Image > Acquire > Kodak Photo CD v3.0. The Kodak Photo CD acquire directory dialog box appears. Select a Photo CD file and click OK to import the image into the current Canvas document.

Photoshop

This is the native Adobe Photoshop file format that supports raster images with color information from 1 to 32 bits. Canvas can import Photoshop files and will preserve Photoshop layers as individual paint objects with transparent visibility masks. Canvas can also save files in Photoshop format.

PICT

PICT is the name (not an abbreviation) of the Macintosh metafile format. PICT supports vector objects, images at 72 ppi resolution, and formatted text. On Windows, these files use the extension PIC. In Mac OS, Canvas can open and save files in PICT format. In Windows, Canvas can open PICT files but doesn't save in this format.

Acrobat PDF (Portable Document Format)

Acrobat PDF files contain graphics and text encoded in a portable, condensed PostScript format. PDF files can be viewed with the freely available Adobe Acrobat Reader software. Canvas can open and save PDF files. However, you might not be able to open very large PDF files in Canvas, depending on the available system resources and complexity of the PDF file. To open large PDF files, and edit pages, security settings, bookmarks, and other PDF properties requires the Adobe Acrobat Exchange program.

PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

PNG format is designed to store compressed graphics for applications such as web pages and network file transfer. PNG format supports indexed and RGB color images. Canvas can open and save files in PNG format.

PostScript

A computer language for graphics, text, and page layout, "PostScript" refers to types of graphics files as well as the PostScript printing technology.

You can create a PostScript file by printing to a file using a PostScript printer driver. Canvas can open regular and Encapsulated PostScript files and embed them in a document or convert them to Canvas objects.

Power Point

This is the native file format of the PowerPoint presentation program. PowerPoint files support 24 bit color images. Canvas can open files in PowerPoint format.

QuickDraw 3D Metafile (3DMF)

(Mac only) This is a Mac OS file format that supports 3D objects. If you have the required Mac OS QuickDraw 3D extensions installed, you can open, place, and save QuickDraw 3D graphics. The QuickDraw 3D tool, located in the Object toolbar, is used to place and manipulate QuickDraw 3D objects.

QuickTime Movie

(Mac only) QuickTime Movie is a file format developed by Apple Computer for storing compressed animated images. Compressing and decompressing QuickTime files requires that you have QuickTime software installed on your system. Canvas can open and save files in QuickTime format.

RTF (Rich Text Format)

RTF is a text-only format that can include formatting and layout information. Canvas can open RTF files but does not save files in RTF format.

Targa

Targa is an image format developed by Truevision Inc. for video and image-processing applications. Targa files support 24-bit color and use the extension TGA. Canvas (Windows) can open and save files in Targa format. Canvas (Mac) can open but not save files in Targa format.

TIFF (Tag Image File Format)

This widely used raster image format supports high-resolution RGB and CMYK color images. Non-standard tags from some programs can cause compatibility problems when files are opened in other programs. Canvas can open and save files in TIFF format.

Text

Files containing only text, without additional formatting, are often called plain or ASCII text files. Text files can be opened or placed in Canvas, and text can be copied into Canvas document using the Clipboard. Text files use the extension TXT.

WMF (Windows Metafile)

(Windows only) Windows Metafile is the common file format of Windows 3.x. This format has been replaced in 32-bit Windows applications by the Enhanced Metafile format (EMF). WMF files support vector objects, images and text, but don’t support layers or high-resolution raster images. Canvas  can open and save files in WMF format.

WPG (WordPerfect Graphics)

WPG is a proprietary format for clip art. Canvas supports WPG files containing raster images only. Canvas can open WPG files, but does not save files in WPG format.


Save Colada Web

To save a document in Colada Web format, choose File > Save To Web.

A directory dialog box appears and Colada format is selected. Type a name for the Colada web file (it's best to use all lowercase characters with no spaces), and then click Save.

The Colada Web dialog box appears with options for saving in Colada format. Select the options you want and click OK to save in Colada web format.


Acrobat Portable Document Format

Acrobat PDF (Portable Document Format) lets you create files that can be viewed on any platform with Adobe Acrobat Reader software, which is available free from many sources on the Internet and on-line services. Acrobat Reader lets you display and print PDF documents.

In Canvas, you can open PDF files created in other programs, and you can save Canvas documents in PDF format.

Saving in PDF format

When you save a Canvas document in PDF format, colors in the document are converted to the RGB color model. Canvas groups all the objects in the Canvas document and places this group at the upper-left corner of the PDF document.

If a Canvas document contains texture inks, these inks are not saved in a PDF file.

To save a Canvas document in PDF format, use the Save As command. See Saving files in other formats for information.

Options

When saving in Acrobat format, you can select screen or printer resolution for images saved in the file. Click an option in the dialog box that appears before the file is saved.

Screen saves images at a maximum 72 pixels per inch (ppi). If necessary, images are downsampled to 72 ppi.

Printer saves images at a maximum 300 ppi. If necessary, images are downsampled to 300 ppi. An image’s resolution is not increased if it is less than 300 ppi.

Opening PDF files

When you open a PDF file, Canvas places the file at the upper-left corner of a new Canvas Illustration document. Vector, text, and image objects in the file are grouped into one object. You can reposition this group object, and then use the Ungroup command to separate the group into individual objects.

Note: Acrobat Exchange software can create original PDF files with password protection, which can prevent Canvas from opening the file. Also, some PDF files can’t be imported successfully by Canvas. If Canvas can’t import the file, it displays the following message: “Filter could not interpret the file successfully. The file possibly contains some invalid data.”


Drawing Interchange format

Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) is a format for exchanging data with AutoCAD and other drawing applications. DXF format provides platform-independent storage of 2-D and 3-D technical drawings, and it supports multiple layers.

Canvas supports DXF files containing ASCII data, but doesn’t support binary data or 3D objects in DXF files.

Note: If you want to export Canvas dash strokes to DXF files, clear the Proportional option when you create the dash strokes. See Adding dashes to strokes for information.

  Related topics


Save DXF
Saving DXF files

To save a Canvas document in DXF format, choose File > Save As and select DXF format in the directory dialog box. See Saving files in other formats for more information.

Before saving a document in DXF format, Canvas displays the DXF export dialog box.

•	Choose Macintosh, Unix, or DOS, depending on the system that will be used to open the DXF file.

•	Click the options you want to use for exported lines and circles.

Canvas converts the following Canvas objects and attributes to DXF objects and attributes.

Canvas objects / attributes	DXF objects / attributes
Paint (raster) image objects	Not converted
Pen and fill patterns	Solid pens and fills; fill colors are not exported
Calligraphic pen strokes	Fixed-width pen strokes
Continuous dashes	Dashes start in each segment
Layer names with spaces or non-uppercase characters	Spaces removed and characters become uppercase
Grayed layers	Objects appear in original colors
Arcs	Polylines


Open DXF
Opening DXF files

The DXF import filter scales the contents of a DXF file to 11 inches by 8.5 inches. Canvas makes the following conversions from DXF objects to Canvas objects:

DXF objects	Canvas objects
3-D lines	2-D lines
3-D Face	2-D polygon
Traces, Solids, and Quadratic polylines	Polygons
B-spline Polylines	Bézier curve paths
Shapes and Blocks	Groups
ATTDEF and ATTRIB	Text objects

Note: The DXF Import Options dialog box described in the first edition of the Canvas 6 User's Guide no longer appears when you import DXF files.


Computer Graphics Metafile

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) format is a standard for exchanging 2-D graphics and text. Like many “standard” formats, CGM has format variations and extensions to the “standard” that can create incompatibilities when opening and saving files. Canvas lets you set options for CGM compatibility when you save a document in CGM format.

Saving in CGM format

When you save a Canvas document in CGM format, Canvas tries to preserve all the document objects in the CGM file. Some objects are converted to other types of objects;

•	Text is converted to individual polygons in the CGM file.

•	Texture inks in a Canvas document are not saved in a CGM file.

•	Arrows applied to an object’s stroke appear as separate polygons in a CGM file.

•	Process (CMYK) colors are converted to RGB colors in CGM format.

To save a Canvas document in CGM format, use the Save As command. See Saving files in other formats for more information.

When you choose CGM format and click Save in the Save As dialog box, Canvas displays the CGM Export dialog box. Use this dialog box to set options for the CGM file that Canvas saves.

Opening CGM files

When you open a CGM file, Canvas displays the CGM Import Options dialog box. You can set options for the way Canvas converts CGM objects into Canvas objects in this dialog box.

Use the Font Match button to open the Font Matching dialog box. You can select fonts that are available on your system to substitute for fonts encoded in the CGM file.

When Canvas opens a CGM file, it creates a new Canvas Illustration document and places the CGM file at the upper-left corner of the Canvas document. The objects in the CGM file are grouped. You can reposition this group object, and then use the Ungroup command to separate the group into individual objects.


Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)

Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) is a raster image format that uses compression and color optimization to achieve small file sizes. GIF is an appropriate format for computer generated graphics, like vector illustrations, but its compression method is not as effective for storing photographic images.

GIF format supports grayscale and 8-bit (256-color) images. This format is often used for graphics on the Internet. Canvas can open and save images in GIF 87a and GIF 89a formats.

Saving in GIF format

When you save a Canvas document in GIF format, the contents of the document are converted to a raster image. Canvas offers several controls that can help you obtain the smallest file size and the best image quality.

To save a Canvas document in GIF format

1.	Choose the Save As command in the File menu. The Save As dialog box appears.

2.	Type a name for the document you’re saving in the “File name” text box (Windows) or the “Save Current Document As” text box (Mac). Next, choose a location on your hard disk to save the file.

3.	In the “File Format” pop-up menu (Mac), or the “Save as type” pop-up menu (Windows), choose “GIF.”

•	 If you’re running Windows 95 or Windows NT, a message appears. Click Yes to continue. To save the document in GIF format, click Save. If the document you’re saving contains an indexed image only, proceed to step 5 below. If the document you’re saving contains a Grayscale image only, Canvas saves the document in GIF format and you don’t have to do anything else.

•	If you’re running the Mac OS, click Save. A message appears. To save the document in GIF format, click Save. If the document you’re saving contains an Indexed image only, proceed to step 5 below. If the document you’re saving contains a Grayscale image only, Canvas saves the document in GIF format and you don’t have to do anything else.

4.	Unless the document contains a single, Indexed image, Canvas opens the Render Image dialog box after you click Save. If this dialog box appears, configure the rendering options, and then click OK.

You can select Indexed or Grayscale color mode for the image, and set its size and resolution. GIF does not support CMYK Color, RGB Color, LAB Color, or Duotone image modes.

5.	The Indexed Color dialog box appears. Configure the options you want, and then click OK. See Converting an existing image to index mode for more information.

6.	The Export GIF dialog box appears. To save the document in GIF format, configure the options in the Export GIF dialog box, and then click OK. Canvas saves the document in GIF format.

Note: When saving documents in GIF format, you can’t choose alpha channels in the “Transparency From” pop-up menu in the Export GIF dialog box, even if the document has only an Indexed image that contains alpha channels. To choose alpha channels in the pop-up menu, you must first choose GIF in the Export submenu in the Image menu.

Exporting in GIF format

Using the Export command to save an image in GIF format lets you preserve alpha channels in the image. Using the Save As command to save a document in GIF format does not preserve alpha channels.

To export an image in GIF format

1.	Select an Indexed or Grayscale image to export. If you don’t select an Indexed or Grayscale image, the GIF command isn’t available in the Export submenu.

2.	Choose Image > Export > GIF. A directory dialog box appears. To save the file, type a name in the text box and select a location.

3.	Click Save.

•	If you’re exporting an Indexed image, Canvas displays the Export GIF dialog box. Configure the options, and then click OK.

•	If you’re exporting a Grayscale image, the Export GIF dialog box doesn’t appear; Canvas just saves the GIF file.

Related topics

GIF options

Rendering images when saving documents


GIF options

The Export GIF dialog box lets you set color and transparency options if you’re exporting an Indexed image, or saving a document in GIF format.

The Export GIF dialog box contains a preview of the image or document being exported and a Hand tool for moving the preview. It also shows the number of colors in the color palette, and the number of colors that will be used when the image is exported. You also have the ability to set transparency by color or alpha channel.

Hand tool

Use the Hand tool to move the preview in the window. By dragging with the Hand tool, you can preview the entire image you’re exporting, if the image is larger than the preview window.

To use the Hand tool, select its icon in the dialog box. Position the pointer over the preview to change the pointer to a hand, and then drag to reposition the preview in the window.

Dropper tool

The Dropper tool lets you select colors in an image to make one or more colors completely transparent.

1.	Choose Selected Colors in the Transparency From pop-up menu. This selects the Dropper tool when you position the pointer over the preview window or the grid of color swatches below the Transparency From pop-up menu.

2.	Position the pointer over the preview window, or the grid of color swatches. The pointer changes to the Dropper tool.

3.	Click or drag in the image preview or the grid of color swatches to select colors for transparency. When you select a color, it becomes highlighted in black in the color grid. To switch between the Hand tool and the Dropper, press the Spacebar.

When using the Dropper tool on the preview, you can toggle the state of the pointer by pressing Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows). When the pointer displays a plus sign (+), any color you click becomes transparent. When the pointer displays a minus sign (-), any color selected to be transparent becomes opaque when you click it. As you use the Dropper tool, the changes you make appear in the preview window. If you see results you don’t like, click Reset.

You can’t use the Dropper tool if an alpha channel’s name or “None” is selected in the Transparency From pop-up menu.

Interlaced

Select the Interlaced checkbox to save the image as an interlaced GIF. Interlacing divides the image data for faster initial display in Web browsers that support interlaced GIF images. In other words, the image appears progressively in the Web browser.

If the Interlaced checkbox is not selected, and the Transparency From pop-up menu is set to None when you click OK, the image is saved in GIF 87a format. Otherwise, the GIF 89a format is used.

Transparency From

Select an option in the pop-up menu:

None: No transparency

Selected Colors: Selects the Dropper tool. This lets you select colors to be transparent in the image. You can use the Dropper tool to select colors in the grid of color swatches below the menu, or in the preview window.

“Channel names”: To use an alpha channel as a transparency mask, select its name in the list. This option exists only if you have alpha channels in the image. The “Channel names” option stands for each alpha channel listed at the bottom of the Transparency From pop-up menu. To see the result of choosing different channels, look at the preview window. Remember, you can select alpha channels only when using the Export command to create a GIF file. If you use the Save As command to create a GIF file, the document and all its information will be rendered, and any existing alpha channel information in the document will be lost.

Transparency Color Index

Use the pop-up palette to select a transparency indicator color. This option is not available if you select “None” in the Transparency From pop-up menu. The selected color appears in the image preview window in the transparent areas of the image. When an application other than Canvas does not support GIF transparency, the indicator color you select appears in place of transparent colors. The default indicator color is white.

Reset

Click Reset to reset the dialog box to its initial state, with all transparency options deselected.

Color table

The swatches below the Transparency From pop-up menu display all the colors in the image; this is called the color table, or palette, for the image. Under the swatches, the number of colors in the palette, and the number of colors used in the image are listed; the numbers change as you select and deselect colors for transparency.


Kodak Photo CD format

Photo CD is a format developed by Kodak for storing photographs on CD-ROM. The format stores each photo in an “Image Pac,” with 5 versions of the photo at different resolutions. Color data is encoded in the YCC color model at 24 bits per pixel. You can convert Photo CD images to RGB Color, CMYK Color, or LAB Color mode for editing.

Acquiring files in Kodak Photo CD format

You can acquire a Kodak Photo CD image in Canvas for Mac OS and Windows.

Rather than use the Open command (as with other file formats) to import a Photo CD image, you must use the Acquire submenu in the Image menu and select Kodak Photo CD 3.0.

The Kodak Photo CD Acquire module lets you select an input file from a CD on your system or a network location. When you select the file and click OK, the Kodak Digital Science Acquire Module dialog box opens.

Use the dialog box to select basic color correction, resolution, and rotation for importing the Photo CD image. You can select different source and destination image profiles by clicking the Source and “Dest” buttons. To see details about the image, such as scanning method and color correction, click the Info button. To see a larger preview of the image, click the Preview button.

To import the image into the current Canvas document, click OK in the Kodak Digital Science Acquire Module dialog box.


Photoshop

Photoshop is the native format of the Adobe Photoshop program. Photoshop files store raster images. Native Photoshop files can also include layers, which Canvas “flattens” (combines) when opening a Photoshop file. You can open and save files in Photoshop format.

Photoshop uses image modes similar to those supported by Canvas. Because Photoshop format does not support vector objects or text, all objects must be rasterized when saving a Canvas document in Photoshop format.

Photoshop is a format (in addition to EPSF and TIFF) that can retain CMYK colors when you export a Canvas document.

Opening Photoshop files

You can open, acquire, or place a Photoshop image in Canvas.

Using Acquire: You can use the Acquire > Photoshop command in the Image menu to import a Photoshop file as a paint object in the current Canvas document.

Using Open or Place: You can use the Open command in the File menu to create a new Canvas document from a Photoshop file. You can use the Place command in the File menu to insert the file into the current Canvas document.

Saving files in Photoshop format

You can use Save As or Export commands to create a Photoshop file. Use Export if you want to preserve alpha channels contained in a Canvas paint object.

Using Save As

Choose File > Save As and select Photoshop format  in the directory dialog box. When you click Save, Canvas renders the document if necessary before saving it as a Photoshop file.

Using Export

Select a paint object to export and then choose Image > Export > Photoshop. The paint object must be the only object selected in the document. Otherwise, Export > Photoshop is not available.

  Related topics


PICT

PICT is the Mac OS native file format. PICT 2, the current version, supports vector graphics, color images, and formatted text. PICT is roughly equivalent in Mac OS to the Metafile format in Windows.

PICT is nearly universal in the Mac OS world and has gained support on other platforms. In the same way that almost every Mac application can copy text and objects to the Clipboard to exchange data, nearly every Mac program can also read and write PICT files.

PICT has some limitations. Some application-specific variations, called PICT comments, can cause translation problems. PICT supports only 72 dpi integer coordinates, so it’s not well suited for high-resolution graphics. PICT raster images can use transfer modes (including Or, And, and Xor) for transparency effects, but these effects usually can’t be printed on PostScript printers.

PICT files can use Apple Computer’s QuickTime software to compress images using JPEG compression. You must have QuickTime installed to display a PICT file that uses JPEG compression.


PostScript file formats

PostScript is a programming language used to encode document pages for printing. PostScript supports vector objects, text, and images. It’s used in desktop printers and high-resolution imagesetters.

To print a document on a PostScript printer, an application program sends data to a software component called a printer driver. The printer driver creates a description of the document using PostScript commands, and sends this PostScript program to the printer. The printer (or a separate raster-image processor) interprets the PostScript program to print the document.

You can create PostScript files in Canvas, and you can open and save graphics in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format.


EPS format
Encapsulated PostScript format

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a file format used to save individual PostScript graphics. It is one of the most common formats used to exchange high-quality vector art, text, and raster images among programs.

Unlike PostScript files, which can store entire pages and multi-page documents, EPS files do not include page size or document information, because they are intended to be placed in illustrations or page layouts and printed from these documents.

If  a document contains an EPS graphic, and the printer you use does not support PostScript, Canvas and other programs print the graphic’s preview image, if one is available. The result is usually inferior to the output from a PostScript printer.

What do you want to do?

  Open an EPS file

  Save an EPS file


Opening EPS files

When you open or place an EPS file, a dialog box asks you to choose an import method. Choose an option and click OK. Canvas imports the file as an EPS object or as editable Canvas objects.

Create EPSF Object: Imports the EPS file as an EPS object. This object can be rotated or scaled, but you can’t select or edit parts of the graphic. Canvas displays a preview image if the file contains a preview in a supported format. Canvas prints EPS graphics correctly even if it can’t display a preview image.

If you print to a non-Postscript printer, Canvas attempts to print the graphic’s preview image, if one is available. You might get better results by importing the EPF file as Canvas objects when you print to a non-PostScript printer.

Canvas Objects: Interprets the EPS file’s PostScript code to convert the EPS graphic to editable Canvas objects. Raster images become Canvas paint objects and vector objects are maintained as vector objects. Text is imported as one or more text objects. The EPS preview image is not imported. Specialized objects and attributes that have no Canvas equivalent might not be imported.

Opening Illustrator EPS files

Canvas supports converting EPSF files to Canvas objects for EPSF files created in Adobe Illustrator version 3.0. If an EPSF file was created in an Illustrator version later than 3.0 and you want to edit the objects in the file, select the Adobe Illustrator file format (not EPSF) in the Open dialog box.


Saving EPS files

To save a file in EPS format, choose File > Save As. In the Directory dialog box, select EPSF format.

When you save in EPS format, a dialog box presents options described below. Select the options you want and click OK to save the file.

Transparency effects are rendered and stored as images in EPS graphics, using the rendering method you select. Rendering preserves the appearance of transparency effects, but objects are not actually transparent in an EPS file.

EPSF Type

Choose EPS to create a composite (not separated) EPS file.

Choose DCS (Version 2) to create a single, pre-separated EPS file that conforms to DCS version 2.0 format. You can use a DCS file to output color separations from programs that support this format.

Preview

Select a format to store a preview image in the EPS file. Canvas and other programs that support EPS previews will display the preview when the EPS file is placed in a document. The image format and color mode you select are applied to the preview image, not the entire EPS file.

Windows: Choose None for no preview, or choose a color mode to save a preview image. Preview images are saved in TIFF format. A preview will not appear in programs that support only WMF or EMF previews.

Mac OS: Choose None for no preview. Choose a color mode to save a preview in TIFF format. Or, choose a PICT option to save a preview in PICT format. Use PICT for files to be imported into Word 98 on Mac OS, and other programs that don’t support TIFF previews.

Image format

In the Image menu, select the format for storing raster image data.

Binary is the most compact non-compressed format. ASCII encodes raster data as text, the least compact format. Level 2 ASCII is somewhat more compact than ASCII format. RLE compresses binary data and makes the most compact EPS files.

Other programs might support only one EPS image data format. To save EPS files for Photoshop or Illustrator, use Binary format.

Image Color

Select the color mode for raster images. The available modes correspond to RGB, CMYK, Grayscale, and Black & White modes for paint objects. The selected mode is applied to all images saved in the EPS file; the effect is the same as if you applied the modes to the images in Canvas.

Render mode

Select the method you want Canvas to use for rendering transparency effects. These options are the same as the rendering options available for printing.

To render transparency effects, choose either Transparent Areas, Transparent & Overlap, or All Objects. If the document contains no transparency effects, choose any option.

Transparent Areas results in rendering the smallest area necessary for a transparency effect. Transparent & Overlap renders the minimum area, plus any object that touches the rendered area. This setting can prevent a slight color shift between rendered and not rendered areas of an object. All Objects renders the entire graphic as an image.

If you choose No Transparencies, transparency effects won’t be rendered, and all transparent objects will appear completely opaque in the EPS file.

Resolution

Select the resolution for rendering of transparency effects. It's best to select the same resolution you use for images in the document. For high-quality print reproduction, image resolution should be between 1.5 and 2 times the halftone screen frequency that will be used in printing.

Include Fonts

Select this option to embed fonts in the file, so text maintains its appearance even if the required fonts aren’t available on the system used to print the file.


Creating PostScript files

To create a PostScript file, you use a PostScript printer driver and “print” your document to a file. This type of file is called a "PostScript printer file" to distinguish it from an EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) file.

PostScript printer files are downloaded to output devices using download utilities. EPS files are usually embedded in documents and printed by graphics and page layout programs.

To save a PostScript file

1.	Select a PostScript printer driver.

2.	Choose File > Print. In the Print dialog box, select the “Print to file” or “Save” option, then click OK, Print, or Save.

3.	A directory dialog box appears. Select a location and type a file name, and click OK or Save to print the document to a PostScript file.

Note: On some systems, you must have a PostScript printer actually connected to the system before you can select a PostScript printer driver. On other systems, a physical printer isn't required, only the PostScript driver software is.

Opening PostScript files

Canvas can open Postscript printer files as EPS graphics or PostScript code (text).

1.	Choose File > Open. In the directory dialog box, select All Files to display files in the selected folder. Select a file to open, and then select the import format to use:

•	Select EPSF format to import or embed PostScript graphics.

•	To display the file's PostScript code, select Text format.

2.	Click OK. When you use EPS format, a dialog box lets you select the import format. See Opening EPS files.

On Windows, Canvas can not use EPS format to open PostScript files that begin with PostScript Job Control codes. If you create a PostScript file on Windows and want Canvas to be able to interpret the file as EPS, deselect the option to insert the job control codes if possible.

If a PostScript file that you open as Canvas objects contains multiple pages, Canvas creates additional pages as needed for the file's contents.

Some options available for creating PostScript files can make the files difficult or impossible for Canvas to interpret. You might want to try different options, or save graphics in EPS format, if Canvas can't open a PostScript file.


QuickDraw 3D
QuickDraw 3D (Mac only)

You can open, place and save QuickDraw 3D graphics in Canvas documents. After you open or place a QuickDraw 3D graphic, you can use the QuickDraw 3D tool to rotate, light, and change its colors.

Note: To open, place, and save QuickDraw 3D graphics, you must have the QuickDraw 3D extensions installed and active on your Mac OS system.

To use QuickDraw 3D graphics

1.	Select the QuickDraw 3D tool in the Object Tools toolbar.

2.	Click where you want to place the object in the document. A directory dialog box opens.

3.	Locate the QuickDraw 3D file that you want to place in the document and click Open. Canvas places the graphic in the document.

4.	To change lighting and display options, double-click the QuickDraw 3D graphic with the Selection tool; four buttons appear at the bottom of the object.

5.	To move the 3D graphic, click a button and drag inside the bounding box of the graphic.

6.	To use the options dialog box, click the Options button. Configure the settings you want in the dialog box and click OK.


QuickTime
QuickTime Movie (Mac only)

QuickTime software is an extension included with Mac OS System 7.5 and later. QuickTime is required to use the QuickTime Movies format to save a Canvas presentation as a movie file.

Saving QuickTime movies

You can save a Canvas presentation document as a QuickTime movie. The slides of the document become the movie's frames.

1.	Choose File > Save As.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select QuickTime Movie format. Select a folder and type a file name for the movie file.

3. 	Click OK. A QuickTime Options dialog box appears. Set the time for each frame to appear and the number of colors to use. In the Maximize menu, select Animation Quality, Image Quality, or Compression depending on which is most important. Click OK.

When you save a document using QuickTime Movie format, Canvas updates the links to any movies that are in the Canvas document. If Canvas can’t find an original movie file, a message asks you to locate the file. Use the directory dialog box to select the movie file and click Open. If you can’t locate the file, click Cancel to continue saving and Canvas saves only the movie’s “poster” preview.

Placing movies

You can use the QuickTime tool in the Object Tools toolbar to place and play QuickTime movies in Canvas documents.


TIFF (Tag Image File Format)

TIFF is raster image format. Although it's considered a “standard” format, many TIFF variations exist. The variations, including different resolutions, color systems, previews, and compression schemes, make the format flexible but also cause compatibility problems.

TIFF files are often used for high-resolution images in desktop publishing. Large, high-resolution images require large amounts of memory, so make sure your system has enough memory available if you have problems trying to open TIFF files. You might also need to check free disk space if the system uses a virtual memory disk file.

If you have problems opening TIFF files created by other programs, try saving the files again using the default settings for TIFF export.

Opening TIFF files

You can open, acquire, or place a TIFF file in Canvas.

Using Acquire: You can choose Image > Acquire > TIFF to import a TIFF file as a paint object in the current Canvas document.

Using Open or Place: You can choose File > Open to create a new Canvas document from a TIFF file. You can choose File > Place to insert a TIFF file into the current Canvas document.

Saving files in TIFF format

You can save or export images into TIFF files.

Using Save As: When you choose File > Save As, you can select TIFF format in the directory dialog box. When you click Save, Canvas renders the entire document if necessary. See the Render Image dialog box for more information.

Using Export: You can choose Image > Export > TIFF to export a selected paint object to a TIFF file. The paint object's mode can be RGB Color, CMYK Color. LAB Color, Indexed, Grayscale, or Black & White. The paint object must be the only object selected in Canvas. Otherwise, the Export > TIFF command is not available.


Text file format

In general, “text” refers to characters of the alphabet, numerals, punctuation, and a few common symbols. Although text is encoded in files by various methods, the most common encoding for western text is ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) format.

For compatibility, a text file, also called an “ASCII text” or a “plain text” file, should contain only ASCII-encoded text. This is in contrast to word processing file formats, which store text but also contain formatting information, special symbols, and other codes that makes it difficult to translate the text to a different program or computer platform.

Opening text files

There are a few differences even among text files created on different systems, such as Mac OS and Windows. Special characters, including invisible line endings and tabs, special typographic symbols such as trademarks (TM), curly quotes, and accented characters can be lost in the translation from one platform to another.

When you open a text file, Canvas creates a new Publication document. For general information about opening files, see opening and placing files.

To insert text into a document or a section created with the Section tool, you can use the Place command.


Select files to acquire

When you acquire image files, a directory dialog box lets you select individual files or multiple files.

To acquire images from files

1.	Choose Image > Acquire > file format, where file format is the name of the image file format.

2.	A directory dialog box appears. Navigate to the folder that contains the files to acquire. Files that match the format you selected will appear in the files list.

3.	To select files to acquire, do either:

Mac: Double-click a file or select it in the list and click Add, and then click Done. Selected files appear in the lower box. You can select multiple files before you click Done.

Windows: Double-click a file, or select it in the list and click Open. Selected files appear in the Files to Acquire box. To acquire multiple files, select each file, click Add, and then click Done.

Acquiring multiple files

In the directory dialog box, you can specify multiple files to acquire at once.

Add: Click to add a selected file to the list of files to acquire. The Add button is available when you select a file.

Add All: Click to add all the displayed files to the list of files to acquire.

Remove: Click to remove a selected file from the list of files to acquire.

Remove All: Click to remove all files from the list of files to acquire.


Acquiring Photoshop files

When you acquire a Photoshop image that contains layers, the Photoshop Image dialog box appears. Select Load Layers or Load Merged Result, and then click OK.

Load Layers: Imports layers as separate objects and stacks them in the document. Layers that have transparency are imported with visibility masks. Canvas creates an alpha channel and a channel mask for a Photoshop layer mask. Canvas also imports alpha channels.

Load Merged Result: Imports the image as a composite image. Layer masks, alpha channels, and transparency effects are not imported. The imported paint object has an opaque background.


Acquiring images as proxies

When you acquire images with some Image > Acquire commands, you can use the Acquire as Proxy option to import a low-resolution proxy. The proxy image will be linked to the original image file.

The Acquire as Proxy option appears in the directory dialog box when you acquire TIFF, JPEG, and CVI files. The option is selected by default for the CVI file format.

You can edit acquired proxies the same as other proxy images. However, some changes you might make, such as adding image channels, are not supported by JPEG or TIFF files. In this case, when you save the file, Canvas asks whether to save the image in Canvas Image format to preserve the changes.

1.	Choose Image > Acquire and choose a file format in the Acquire submenu. To acquire a proxy, you must choose JPEG, TIFF or Canvas Image formats.

2. 	In the directory dialog box, select the Acquire As Proxy option. Select one or more image files to acquire as proxies, and then click Done.

3.	The Make Proxy dialog box appears. Type the proxy resolution in the “Make…Times Smaller” box. The larger the number, the lower the resolution of the proxy image in the document.

4.	Click OK. Canvas places the selected proxy images in the document.


Exporting Canvas Image files

You can export any image from a Canvas document to a Canvas Image File. You can then create proxies linked to the Canvas Image File.

This procedure does not create a link from the Canvas document to the image file on disk, or place a proxy in the document.

To export an image to a Canvas Image File

1.	Select the paint object to export and choose Image > Export > Canvas Image File.

2.	A directory dialog box appears. Select a location and type a name for the image file, and then click Save. Canvas exports the image to a Canvas Image file on disk.


Exporting images

When you use one of the Image > Export > commands, you create a file on disk from a selected paint object in a Canvas document.

When a paint object is not selected in the current document, the  commands in the Export submenu appear dimmed and are not available.

To export an image to a disk file

1.	Select a single paint object to export.

•	Be sure the paint object is not in edit mode. A selected paint object has square handles; in edit mode, crop marks appear at the image corners.

•	When you select a paint object, the status bar reports the image mode and resolution. For example, if you select a paint object containing a 72 ppi resolution image in RGB Color mode, the Status bar says “RGB (72 ppi).”

2.	Choose Export > “Image format” in the Image menu, where Image Format is one of the raster image formats in the Export submenu.

•	If a format you want to use is dimmed, the selected paint object can’t be exported to that format. This happens if you select an RGB Color mode object to export to GIF or another 8-bit file format. You must first convert the paint object to the appropriate image mode. See the list of supported image modes in the table below.

3.	In the Export dialog box, type a file name, select a location for the export file, and Click Save.

•	(Mac OS) Don’t remove the file extension (the three-character code) that Canvas adds to the file name if you want to use the image file on a Windows system. If you remove the extension, the file won’t be recognized in the  Windows environment.

•	(Windows) Canvas adds the correct file extension when you save the file. The extension appears in the “Save As Type” and File Name text boxes.


Acquire image commands

The Image > Acquire submenu lists image formats that you can acquire (import) into the active Canvas document.

The Acquire submenu also contains commands to use TWAIN scanners.

To acquire an image file

1.	With a Canvas document open, choose the image format to acquire in the Image > Acquire submenu.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select the file to acquire and click Open. Canvas inserts the image into the active document.

Related topics

Acquiring multiple images

Acquiring proxies


Using Object Linking and Embedding

In Windows, Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) lets you easily exchange graphics among programs. Because Canvas provides full OLE support, objects you exchange retain their full functionality and are editable with all the tools of the original application.

Windows programs provide various levels of OLE support. In OLE parlance, Canvas is a fully capable object and container application. Briefly, this means Canvas can transfer objects to and from other programs through OLE.

In the world of OLE, objects created in Canvas are identified as “Canvas Drawing” objects. If you use the Insert Object command in another application, you should be able to select “Canvas Drawing” as a type of object to insert.

Related topics

Inserting objects into Canvas documents

Differences between linking and embedding


Inserting objects into Canvas documents

You can use three methods to insert objects in a Canvas document: the Clipboard, drag-and-drop, and the Insert Object command. The objects you insert can be either linked or embedded.

Using the Clipboard

When you copy Canvas objects to the Clipboard, Canvas places OLE formats, as well as lower-fidelity formats, on the Clipboard. When you paste into another program, that program receives the highest-fidelity format it can accept. If the other program is an OLE container, pasting creates an embedded OLE object. The same applies when pasting into Canvas; Canvas creates an embedded OLE object if OLE formats are available on the Clipboard.

Using drag-and-drop

In Windows 95, you can drag objects from Canvas documents to almost any destination on the Desktop (including local and network folders) to create a “scrap” file containing the objects. You can also drag Canvas objects into other documents, and drag objects, such as scrap files and other program’s objects, directly into Canvas documents. When you drag an object to another program, it creates an embedding.

You can copy an object when you drag it by pressing a modifier key. Normally, dragging moves the object. If you want to copy the object, rather than move it, Ctrl-drag the object to another document. This copies the object and creates an embedding.

Insert Object

The Insert Object command in the Edit menu opens a dialog box in which you can choose any registered OLE object type to insert into a document. You can create a new object or choose a file as the source of the embedded object.

To embed objects

When you embed an object in another document, you can use the original program’s tools and commands to edit the object.

Note: Not all programs support OLE and can create embeddings.

1.	Select the objects you want to embed in another document.

2.	Choose Copy in the Edit menu. Canvas puts the selection on the Clipboard.

3.	Switch to the document where you want to embed the selection and choose Paste in the Edit menu. The object is embedded into the document.

To link objects

If you want an object to be updated when it changes in the original document, you can create a link to the object.

Note: Not all OLE programs support OLE linking.

1.	Select the objects to link and choose Copy in the Edit menu.

2.	Switch to the document where you want to paste the linked object and choose Paste Special in the Edit menu.

3.	In the dialog box, Canvas Drawing format is selected and you can click Paste Link to link the object.

To manage linked objects

You can use the Links command to check the source file of a linked object and repair a broken link if a source file has been moved.

1.	Select a linked object in a document.

2.	Choose Links in the Edit menu. The Links dialog box displays the link type and update method. To change the update method, choose the Automatic or Manual option.

3.	Use the buttons to update or change the linked object:

•	To update the object from its source, click Update Now.

•	To open the source document, click Open Source.

•	To select a different source document, click Change Source.

•	To remove the link so changes to the source do not affect the linked object, click Break Link.

Related topics

Insert Object

Links

Differences between linking and embedding

Using Object Linking and Embedding


Differences between linking and embedding

When you insert an object into a Canvas document, or insert an object from Canvas into another program’s document, you create an association between the object and its application. Linking and embedding create different types of associations.

Linking

When you link an object, the object remains in the file where it was created. Only a link (reference) to the source object winds up in the document, which makes linking an efficient method of storing commonly-used objects and files. Linking makes a dynamic connection between an object and all documents in which it appears. When you edit the object, changes are automatically sent to linked instances of the object in all documents.

Because the object is linked by only a reference to another file, if any of the linked files change locations, the link will be disrupted. To move linked files without disrupting the references, you must move all linked files as well as the entire directory structure so that the relative locations of the files don’t change.

When you edit a linked object, the object’s application opens in a separate window. When you finish editing, you close the application to return to the document containing the link.

Embedding

When you embed an object in a document, the object itself (not just a reference) is copied into the document. Therefore, document can be moved to another computer without losing the object.

When you edit an embedded object, the source application’s   tools, palettes, and menu commands take over the window until you finish editing and select another object in the document.

Related topics

Using Object Linking and Embedding

Inserting objects into Canvas documents


Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Publish and Subscribe is a Mac OS technology that lets you share information within Canvas and between Canvas and other Mac OS programs.

Publish and Subscribe is useful when you want to be able to update an object, such as a logo, photograph, or chart used in several documents, whenever you change the original.

To share an object, you designate it a “publisher.” This creates an intermediate file, called an edition. To place the object in other documents, you “subscribe” to the edition file. Subscribing creates a “subscriber.” The subscriber is the object in your document that is linked through the edition to the original object.

Publish and Subscribe creates dynamic links between documents, unlike moving data through the Clipboard. When you change a publisher, Canvas can update the edition automatically. When the edition changes, its subscribers can be updated automatically. You can turn off automatic updating and then update changes manually.

To publish a selection

When you publish a selection, Canvas creates an edition file containing a copy of the published selection. You can subscribe to the edition from other documents. You can use the same procedure to publish information in another program and subscribe to it in Canvas.

1.	Select the objects in Canvas that you want to publish.

Note: The Publish command is not available if a QuickTime movie object is selected (Mac only).

2.	Choose Publishing > Create Publisher in the Edit menu.

3.	In the Create Publisher dialog box, select a location and type a name in the text box for the edition file, and then click Publish. Canvas creates the edition file on disk and displays a rectangular shaded border around the published selection.

Related topics

Publisher borders

Publisher options

Updating publishers and subscribers


Publisher borders

The rectangular border Canvas displays around a publisher is like a window into the document. Canvas sends objects that are within the border to the edition file. You can resize and move the border and move objects into and out of it to change the contents of the edition.

Related topics

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Publisher options

Updating publishers and subscribers


Publisher options

The Publisher Options command lets you specify when to update a publisher’s edition file. It also lets you update the edition manually and cancel the link between the publisher and edition. The command is available once you save the document containing the publisher.

To set options for updating editions

1.	Click the publisher object border to select it.

2.	Choose Publishing > Publisher Options in the Edit menu.

3.	To update the edition immediately, click Send Edition Now. Canvas updates the edition file. Whether subscribers to this edition also get updated depends on their update setting; see “To set subscriber options” below.

4.	To specify when Canvas should update the edition file, choose an option in the Send Editions area.

On Save. Tells Canvas to update the edition file whenever you save the publisher document.

Manually. Tells Canvas not to update the edition. If you select this option, Canvas shows the time of the last publisher change.

5.	When you finish setting publisher options, click OK.

To break the link between publisher and edition

Click Cancel Publisher in the Publisher Options dialog box. This breaks the link to the edition. However, canceling the publisher does not delete the edition file or affect documents that subscribed to the edition.

To subscribe to a published selection

After you publish a selection, which creates an edition, you can subscribe to the edition file to place the published selection in as many documents as you want.

1.	In the document in which you want to place the published objects, choose Publishing > Subscribe To in the Edit menu.

2.	In the directory dialog box, select the edition file for the published selection and click Subscribe. The published information appears in the subscriber document within a non-printing gray rectangle. You can move and resize the subscriber border.

To set subscriber options

You can make changes to an edition file appear automatically in subscriber documents or update the subscriber manually. To set these and other options, use the Subscriber Options command.

1.	Click the subscriber border to select it and choose Publishing > Subscriber Options in the Edit menu.

2.	To update the subscriber now from the edition, click Get Edition Now. To specify when the subscriber should get changes from the edition file, choose an option in the Get Editions area:

Automatically. Tells Canvas to update the subscriber when you open the document and whenever the edition changes.

Manually. Tells Canvas not to update the subscriber. If you select this option, Canvas shows the time of the last update.

3.	When you finish setting subscriber options, click OK.

To break the link between a subscriber and edition

Click Cancel Subscriber in the Subscriber Options dialog box.

To open the publisher document

Click Open Publisher in the Subscriber Options dialog box.

Related topics

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Updating publishers and subscribers

Publisher borders


Updating publishers and subscribers

When you work on a document containing publishers or subscribers, you can update all the linked items in the document at once.

To update all edition files

Choose Publishing > Send All Now in the Edit menu. Canvas updates all editions that are linked to the publishers in the document.

To update all subscribers in a document

Choose Publishing > Get All Now in the Edit menu. Canvas gets updates from all editions that are linked to the subscribers in the document.

Related topics

Sharing information through Publish and Subscribe

Publisher borders

Publisher options


Loading file filters

Canvas uses file filters to translate files to or from the Canvas native document format. Many of these filters are separate software modules, called "external tools."

The file formats provided by external tools appear in the format menus in the Open and Save As dialog boxes. If a file format does not appear in these dialog boxes, be sure that Canvas has loaded the necessary external tool.


A visibility mask creates a clear background in a paint object. If you render vector objects and text, the resulting paint object has a clear background in place of white areas.

Canvas supports clear backgrounds in paint objects, but most programs do not.


Colada Button tool

With the Colada Button tool you can create and place java-enabled buttons in Colada web pages. Colada buttons can be linked to URLs, sounds, and animations. You can use text, vector objects, and images as button components.

A Colada button can include three stages, so it changes appearance when the pointer touches it and when the button is clicked. Colada buttons require that you view Colada web pages in browsers that support Java. In a browser that doesn’t support Java (or when Java is disabled), Colada buttons appear as empty frames.

The Colada Button tool opens the Colada Buttons palette and places Colada buttons in documents. The Colada Button tool is in the Object tools toolbar.

To open the Colada Buttons palette: Double-click the Colada Button tool. The Colada Buttons palette floats so you can place it anywhere on screen. Stored Colada buttons appear in the scrolling area at the top of the palette.

Creating Colada buttons

A Colada button has three states: when the pointer is not on the button, when the pointer touches the button, and when the button is pressed. When you create a Colada button, you can use a separate object or image for each of the button’s states.

For example, to make a circular button that changes from red to blue when you point to it, and then changes to green when you click it, you could use circles filled with red, blue, and green.

You can’t use a Colada button, Colada animation, or Colada sound as a component of a Colada button. Also, null objects can’t be used in Colada buttons or Colada animations. A null object is an object that has its pen ink and fill ink set to “none.”

To create a Colada button

1.	Open the Colada Buttons palette, if necessary.

2.	Drag the object for the button’s “Up” state (when the pointer is not on the button’s bounding rectangle) into the Up box in the Colada Buttons palette. The object appears in the box.

3. 	Drag the object for the button’s “Over” state (when the pointer is on its bounding rectangle) into the Over box.

4.	Drag the object for the button’s “Down” state (when the button is clicked) into the “Down” box. You can drag objects into the Up, Over, and Down boxes in any order.

To add a Colada button to the palette: To store a button in the palette, drag from the preview box which appears above the Up, Over, and Down state boxes to the scrolling area at the top of the palette.

To delete a Colada button from the palette: Drag the button you want to delete from the scrolling area to the trash can in the palette. Canvas removes the button.

Adding sounds to Colada buttons

You can attach sounds to the Over and Down states of a Colada button. The Over sound plays when the user moves the pointer over the button, and the Down sound plays when the user clicks the button.

You can attach separate sounds to a button’s Over and Down states. Use the pop-up menu over the Over or Down box to do one of the following:

•	Choose a preset sound. The menu contains a variety of built-in sounds you can assign to a button state.

•	Choose Other and select an “AU” sound file, and then click Open.

•	Choose None to remove a sound from a button state.

After attaching a sound to a button state, you can store the button in the palette and place it in documents, as described under “To create a Colada button.”

Placing Colada buttons in a document

Use this procedure to place Colada buttons in a Canvas document. If you want to place multiple copies of the same button, use this procedure once, and then see “Placing copies of Colada buttons.”

1.	Double-click the Colada Button tool to open the Colada Buttons palette. If the palette is already displayed, select the tool.

2.	At the top of the Colada Buttons palette, select the button to place. The selected button appears in the preview box.

3. 	Do one of the following to place the button:

• Click where you want to place the button’s top-left corner.

• To scale the button, drag to create a bounding rectangle.

When the Colada Buttons palette is closed, you can use the Colada Button tool to place the last selected button. Or, if the Colada Button tool is not selected but the palette is open, you can drag a button from the palette into the document.

Editing Colada buttons

When a Colada button has been placed in a document, you can select the button and drag a handle to resize its bounding rectangle. You can’t edit its attributes, such as pen ink, fill ink, and stroke. You can, however, change the objects that make up the button, and then replace the button.

To change a button’s Up, Over, or Down object, drag the object from the palette into the document. Modify the object’s attributes, and then drag it back into the palette. Place a new copy of the button in the document, and store the modified button in the palette if you want to use it again.

Testing Colada buttons

Before storing a new button in the palette, you can test it in the Colada Buttons palette. When the pointer is not in the preview box which is above the Up, Over, and Down boxes, you can see how the button will look on a web page when the pointer is not on the button’s bounding rectangle. To see the button’s appearance when the pointer is on its bounding rectangle, move the pointer into the preview window. To see the button’s appearance on a web page when the button is clicked, click in the preview box.

Testing Colada buttons in a document

After you place a Colada button in a document, you can test it before you save the document in Colada Web format. To do this, you use the Colada Buttons palette’s “play” mode.

When you click “Start Play Mode” in the Colada Buttons palette, Canvas puts Colada button objects in the document in “play” mode.

When you move the pointer over a button, or click it, you see the effects in the document. When you finish, click “End Play Mode.”

It’s recommended that you click “Start Play Mode” only to test Colada buttons. You shouldn’t work in Canvas while play mode is active. Be sure to click End Play Mode before starting other work. Otherwise, you might not be able to select objects or change tools.

Linking Colada buttons

By using the URL Attachment palette, you can link Colada buttons to URLs, Colada sounds and animations.

Saving Colada buttons

Canvas stores information about Colada buttons in the Canvas Tool Settings file in the Preferences folder in the System Folder (Mac OS), or the cv6tool.set file in the User folder (Windows). When you add a Colada button to the palette, it’s available in all Canvas documents. When you save a Canvas document that contains Colada buttons to create a web page, be sure to choose one of the Java options (Java only, Java and JPEG, or Java and GIF) in the pop-up menu at the top of the Save Web Document dialog box.

Saving and loading buttons files

You can save in a file all the buttons that are stored in the Colada Buttons palette. You can load buttons back into the palette from these files.

To save buttons: In the palette’s pop-up menu, choose Save Buttons. Type a name for the file and click Save.

To load buttons: To replace all buttons in the palette with those saved in a file, choose Load Buttons in the pop-up menu, select a buttons file, and click Open. To add to the buttons in the palette, choose Append Buttons from the pop-up menu, select a buttons file and click Open.

To clear buttons: To remove all buttons from the Colada Buttons palette, choose Clear Buttons from the palette’s pop-up menu.


Colada Sound tool

You can use the Colada Sound tool to place sound objects in Colada web pages. Colada sound objects play sounds imported from “AU” (Sun Audio format) sound files.

To place a Colada sound object

1.	Select the Colada Sound tool in the Object tools toolbar, and then click where you want to place the upper-left corner of the sound object. Or, drag to set the size of the sound object.

2.	In the dialog box, select an AU sound file, and then click Open. The sound file you assign must have an “AU” extension.

To set Colada sound options

After placing a Colada sound object in a document, you can set options for the object. You can control whether the object will be visible in the Colada web page and specify a playback method.

1.	Double-click a Colada sound object.

2.	Choose a playback method in the Play Type pop-up menu:

• On Click  plays the sound when the sound object is clicked.

• On Load  plays the sound one time when the web page loads.

• URL Linked  establishes no playback method for the sound object. Choose this method if you want to use another object, such as a button, to play the sound.

3.	Click OK to apply the settings to the sound object.

Colada sound files

Colada supports AU (Sun Audio) sound files. You can use various utilities to convert sound files to AU format. It’s important to use the correct settings when you create sound files for use with Colada. The Java language used by Colada supports sound files that are recorded with single-channel sound at a sampling rate of 8,012 Hz (cycles per second) with μLAW compression.


Colada Animation tool

You can create animations to play in Colada web pages. Colada animations can include most types of objects, including images, vector drawings, and Colada sound objects. You can make animations run continuously, play when you click them, or play when a page loads. Colada animations comprise multiple frames, which are displayed in sequence, like movies or cartoons.

Creating Colada animations

A Colada animation is a sequence of frames. The frames contain objects—drawings, images, or text. When you assemble an animation, you create frames by dragging objects into the Colada Animation palette. The only objects that can’t be inserted into animation frames are Colada animations themselves and Colada buttons.

To create a new animation

1. 	Double-click the Colada Animation tool to open the Colada Animation palette, if necessary. This selects the Colada Animation tool, so that if you click in the document and an animation is selected in the palette, you place the animation in the document where you click.

2. 	If an animation is selected in the palette, click Clear to empty the frame list. If the palette contains no animations, skip this step.

3. 	Do one of the following to fill animation frames:

Drag a single object to the preview box to create a new frame containing the object. The new frame appears at the end of the animation.

Drag multiple objects to the preview box to create new frames for each object. Canvas adds frames starting with the back object and moving forward in the stacking order.

4. 	Repeat the previous step to create as many frames as you want. The total number of frames appears in the Frames text box.

5. 	Do any of the following to use the current animation:

To store the animation in the palette: Drag from the preview box to the scrolling area at the top of the palette. This area shows the first frame of each animation stored in the palette.

To place the animation in the document: Drag from the preview box into the document.

To change a frame’s content: Select the frame you want to modify by clicking in the frame list or typing the frame number in the Frame text box. The frame appears in the preview box. Press Shift and drag an object to the preview box to replace the frame’s contents. The replacement object appears in the preview box and the frame list. If you do not press Shift when you drag an object to the preview box, you create a new frame.

To delete an animation frame: Select the frame you want to delete by clicking in the frame list or typing the frame number in the Frame text box. Click the “Del” button to delete the frame. The next frame appears in the frame box.

To set the playback duration: In the Duration text box, type the number of seconds in which you want the animation to play. Set the Duration for an entire animation, and then adjust frame intervals; all intervals are reset when you change the Duration value.

To set the time interval for a frame: Select the frame (either click in the frame list or type a number in the Frame text box). Type the display interval amount in seconds in the Interval text box.

Duplicating and arranging frames

In the Colada Animation palette, you can arrange, duplicate, and copy the contents of frames in the current animation. You can drag a frame up or down in the frame list to change its place. To copy the contents of a frame into a document, drag from the frame list into the document. To duplicate a frame, drag it into the document, and then drag the frame’s contents into the preview box to create a new frame.

Adding sound to animations

You can drag a Colada sound object into the preview box to insert a sound into an animation. The sound plays when the animation reaches the frame containing the sound object.

Animation playback method

To set the playback method, choose an option from the pop-up menu in the Colada Animation palette before you save or place the animation in a document.

Loop Plays the animation continuously once the web page loads.

On Click Plays the animation when it is clicked.

On Load Plays the animation one time when the web page loads.

Placing and storing Colada animations

When you create an animation, you can place it in a Canvas document immediately, and you can store animations in the Colada Animation palette for use later. When you store an animation, its duration, interval, and playback settings are stored with it.

To place a new animation in a document: Drag from the Colada Animation palette’s preview box and drop the animation into the document. The animation’s first frame appears in the document.

To store an animation in the palette: Drag from the Colada Animation palette’s preview box to the scrolling area at the top of the palette. Stored animations are represented by their first frames.

To place stored animations

1.	Double-click the Colada Animation tool (in the Object Tools toolbar) to open the Colada Animation palette, if necessary.

2.	Click a stored animation at the top of the palette to select it.

3.	Do one of the following:

• Click in the document where you want to place the upper-left corner of the animation object.

• Drag in the document to place the animation and set its size.

To place an animation at normal size, you can also drag it from the Colada Animation palette and drop it into the document.

To change animation options

You can change the settings of an animation stored in the Colada Animation palette or one that is selected in a Canvas document.

1.	Select an animation by doing either:

• Click a stored animation in the Colada Animation palette.

• Click an animation object in a Canvas document.

The selected animation appears in the frame list, and its first frame appears in the frame box.

2.	Select new settings for the options you want to change. You can change the duration or interval settings, or the playback method. You can also delete frames, and rearrange frames in the frame list.

3 .	To apply the changes to a selected animation object, click Apply.

4. 	To store a modified animation in the palette, drag from the frame box to the scrolling area at the top of the palette.

Saving and loading animation files

You can store the animations in the Colada Animation palette in a file. You can load animations into the palette from animation files.

To save animations: In the Colada Animation palette pop-up menu, choose Save Animations. Type a name for the animation file and click Save.

To load animations: To replace all animations in the Colada Animation palette, choose Load Animations from the palette’s pop-up menu, select an animation file and click Open. To keep the animations in the palette, choose Append Animations from the pop-up menu, select an animation file and click Open.

To clear animations: To remove all animations from the Colada Animation palette, choose Clear Animations from the pop-up menu.

Previewing Colada animations in Canvas

Colada animations are meant to be viewed on Colada web pages in a web browser. To use the Colada Animation palette to preview animations, select an animation and click the Play button. The animation plays in the current frame box at the bottom of the palette.

Viewing Colada animations with a web browser

You can view Colada animations in a web page with a browser that supports Java, including Netscape Navigator 4 and Internet Explorer 4 (and later). If you do not have a browser that supports Java, Colada animations appear as empty frames on a web page.

If your web browser’s preferences allow you to turn off Java, make sure you have Java compatibility turned on if you want to view Colada animations.

Saving documents containing Colada animations

When saving a Canvas document that contains Colada animations, be sure to choose Java only, Java and JPEG, or Java and GIF in the Save Web Document dialog box. If you do not choose one of these options, the resulting web page will not display Colada animations.


URL Tag command

The URL Tag command displays the URL Attachment palette. Use this palette to create and manage hyperlinks in documents you design for Colada web pages.

To assign a URL to an object

1.	If the URL Attachment palette is not displayed, choose Object > URL Tag to display it.

2.	Select the hyperlink object or text. If the selection has a hyper-link, the link text appears in the URL Attachment palette.

3.	Do one of the following to enter the hyperlink URL:

•	Type a URL (including http, ftp, or mailto), or a local web page file name in the text box at the top of the palette.

•	Use the URLs pop-up menu to enter a URL.

•	Use the Browse button to select a web page file on disk.

•	Use the pop-up menu to select a page in the document.

4.	Click Assign to assign the URL to the selection.

Note: You can’t assign a URL or action to objects on layers or pages that are locked. You should type URLs using all lowercase letters, because some servers do not accept uppercase characters in URLs.

To remove an assigned URL

1.	Select the object that has a URL link that you want to remove. The object’s URL appears in the text box.

2.	In the URLs pop-up menu, choose “Unassign URL from selection.” This command appears in the pop-up menu only if the selected object has a URL assigned to it.

Updating URLs assigned to objects

You can use the Update button in the URL Attachment palette to change the URL assigned to a selected object. The difference between the Assign button and the Update button is that Update changes all the objects in the document that have the same URL assigned to them; Assign changes only the selected object.

For example, if you have a “Home” hyperlink on each page of a Publication document and you want to change the URL for “Home,” you can use the Update button to change all the “Home” hyperlinks in the same document at once.

1.	Select an object whose hyperlink you want to change. The hyperlink text appears in the URL Attachment palette.

2.	Edit the text as desired.

3.	Click Update. A dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to replace the existing hyperlink with the new hyperlink text.

4.	Click OK to replace all occurrences of the old hyperlink text in the document.

Finding objects assigned to a URL

You can use the Find button in the URL Attachment palette to search for and select objects that have specified hyperlink text attached. When objects are found, you can see the object type, object number, and whether an object assigned to a URL is part of a group. For text objects, you can see the number of characters linked, where in a text object the linked characters start and end, and the linked text itself.

1.	Click Find in the URL Attachment palette. The URL Search dialog box appears (if the document contains at least one URL).

2.	To specify the text to find, choose a URL in the URLs pop-up menu or type a URL in the text box.

3.	Click Find. The URL Search Results dialog displays information about objects that have the specified hyperlink text attached.

4.	To select an object listed in the URL Search Results dialog box, click the object’s name and then click Go To.

Related topic

Attaching hyperlinks to text

Creating sound and animation links


Attaching hyperlinks to text

You can select any amount of text — from one character to whole paragraphs or entire text objects — and use the URL Attachment palette to make the text selection a hypertext link to a web page, ftp address, or e-mail address.

Many web browsers display underlining or colors on hypertext. You can use the URL Attachment palette to apply styles and colors when you assign a URL to a text selection.

Making hypertext links in Canvas lets you design the equivalent of image maps that can be easily edited. To do this, place text on images (or vector objects), and then link the text to the appropriate URLs. Later, if you want to change the illustration, you can edit the text, images, and objects separately in the original Canvas document.

To create a hypertext link

1.	Choose Object > URL Tag to open the URL Attachment palette, if necessary.

2.	Make a text selection in the Canvas document. The selected text appears highlighted.

3.	Do one of the following to define a link for the selected text:

•	Type a URL (including http, ftp, or mailto) or a web page file name in the text box at the top of the palette.

•	Use the URLs pop-up menu to enter a URL.

•	Use the Browse button to select a web page file on disk.

•	Use the Pages/ Slides pop-up menu to select a page or slide.

4.	To apply styles or color to the text, select the Link Styles check box. The text style buttons and a pop-up color palette appear. Select a solid color ink from the color palette, or choose the Custom button to use the Color Editor.

5.	Click Assign to assign the URL and the selected Link Styles to the text selection.


Creating sound and animation links

The commands Play, Sound On, and Sound Off in the URLs pop-up menu let you assign sound and animation actions to objects on a web page.

Play: The Play command lets you create “play” buttons for Colada animations and sounds on web pages. You assign the Play command to an object such as a web button, and specify the animation or sound object to be played. When you click the button, the specified sound or animation plays on the web page.

Sound On / Sound Off: These commands let you disable or enable sound playback for animations that contain Colada sounds. You can attach the Sound On or Sound Off command to an object such as a web button, and specify the object number of the animation that you want to control. When you click the button on the web page, it enables or disables sound playback for the specified animation.

Sound On and Sound Off do not affect sound playback while an animation is running. If the sound is disabled, the Sound On command enables sound; the sound is heard the next time the animation is played. If sound is enabled, the Sound Off command disables sound; the sound is not heard the next time the animation is played.

To create a sound or animation control object

Use the following procedure with the Play, Sound On, or Sound Off commands to create a control button.

1.	Select the object you want to use as a control object, such as a Colada button, vector object, image, or text object.

2.	In the URL Attachment palette, choose a command in the URLs pop-up menu. The command appears in the text box. Choose Play to play a Colada sound or animation. Choose Sound On to enable an animation’s sound. Choose Sound Off to disable an animation’s sound.

3.	A dialog box lists the sound and animation objects in the document. Select the object you want to control and click OK, or double-click the object’s name in the list.


Saving web documents

You can use any objects to design web pages in Canvas. To export a document as one or more web pages, you save the document using the Colada Web file format.

You should save your documents as you normally would in Canvas format before you export the document in Colada Web format.

To save a document in Colada Web format

1.	Open the Canvas document that you want to save as a web page, and then choose File > Save As. Choose Colada Web in the File Format pop-up menu (Mac OS) or the “Save as type” pop-up menu (Windows).

2.	Select a location to save the web page files. Type a file name; the name will be used for all files associated with the web page.

3.	Click Save. In the Save Web Document dialog box, specify the desired options. Click OK to create the Colada web page.

Note: You can’t use the Save Selection option when saving Colada web pages.

How Colada handles images

Colada uses compression and color reduction to optimize images for faster display on web pages. Colada exports RGB Color and CMYK Color images as RGB (24-bit) images using JPEG compression.

Indexed mode images, which use a maximum of 8 bits of color information per pixel, are exported in GIF format. Black and White images are exported as Indexed (8-bit) images. Colada exports Grayscale images as Indexed 8-bit images or JPEG-compressed RGB images, using the format that it determines will produce the best results.

Save Web Document options

The Save Web Document dialog box lets you set options when you save a Colada web page.

Create folder

This option organizes files for a web page by placing them in a new folder in the location you specify. The name you assign to the web page file is used for the folder name. Do not deselect this option unless you want to combine all the files from several web pages together (which can make management of the web site difficult). If you deselect this option, Canvas places the files loose inside the folder you specify when you save the web page.

Choosing formats for saving web pages

The pop-up menu at the top of the Save Web Document dialog box lets you specify Java support and image formats for a Colada web page.

Java only: This option creates a Java-based web page for display in browsers that support Java. Web browsers that do not support Java will not be able to display a web page saved with this option.

Java and JPEG: This option creates a Java-based web page for web browsers with Java support, and also makes a JPEG image of the page, which is displayed by browsers that don’t support Java.

Java and GIF: This option creates a Java-based web page for web browsers with Java support, and also makes a GIF image of the page, which is displayed by browsers that don’t support Java.

JPEG Image with links: This option does not create a Java-based version of the web page. Instead, Colada creates an image of the entire page in JPEG format. Although the page does not use Java features, Colada does preserve hyperlinks in the JPEG image. You can use this option to save a page for browsers that do not support Java.

GIF Image with links: This option does not create a Java-based version of the web page. Instead, Colada creates an image of the entire page in GIF format. Although the page does not use Java features, Colada does preserve hyperlinks in the GIF image. You can use this option to save a page for browsers that do not support Java.

Exporting multiple pages

The checkbox labeled “Export all pages / slides…” in the Save Web Document dialog box is available when the Canvas document you are saving contains multiple pages.

If your document contains multiple pages, select the “Export all pages / slides…” check box if you want Canvas to create a separate web page from each page in the document. When Canvas does this, it uses the name of each page or slide for the name of the file it creates for each web page.

If you used the pop-up menu in the URL Attachment palette to create links between a document’s pages or slides, be sure to select the “Export all pages / slides” option, so you create Colada web pages from all the pages or slides in the document.

If you do not select this option, Colada exports only the current page as one Colada web page.

Encapsulating documents

If you choose the “Export all pages / slides” option when you save a document that contains multiple pages/slides, a set of Colada web pages that correspond to all the document’s pages or slides is created.

Colada also encapsulates the original document’s pages or slides in a single Java-based Colada web page, which lets you view the entire document in a browser, without having to create links between the individual pages or slides.

To view the encapsulated document, open the HTML file that has the same name as the original Canvas document (with an “htm” extension). The first page or slide appears in the browser window. Two buttons that appear above the document let you move through the document’s pages or slides in sequence, and a pop-up menu lets you jump to any page or slide.

Two things to keep in mind if you want to create encapsulated documents:

You must choose the “Export all” option, and choose one of the Java formats in the Save Web Document dialog box; you can’t create an encapsulated document if you choose “JPEG image with links” or “GIF image with links.”

The browser must have support for Java and Java Script enabled. Without Java Script support, the navigation buttons won’t appear.

Background color

Use the pop-up color palette to select a color that will appear in blank areas of the web page (where no objects appear). The default color is white.

Update URL folder

Colada uses this option to determine the path to use for relative links you have assigned. If you do not select this option, Colada uses the path that you specify in the Destination Folder text box in the “Directories for Server Aliases” dialog box. If you do select this option, Colada refers to the folder where you save the web page file as the basis for relative links.

If you do select the “Update URL folder” option, and you save a Colada Web page in a folder that is not the Destination folder specified in the “Directories for Server Aliases” dialog box, Colada will update the URLs used in the file to match the actual location in which you save the Colada Web page.

However, in some cases, Colada cannot update the URLs in a web page. This happens if the folder in which you save a Colada Web page is higher in the directory structure than the Equivalent Root folder that you specified in the “Directories for Server Aliases” dialog box. In this case, a message tells you that the URLs in the file can’t be updated to match the actual location you have selected for saving the page. If this happens, click OK in the message box to continue saving the web page.

Put images in subfolder

To help organize files, Colada creates a subfolder to hold the image files it creates for a page. This folder appears inside the folder in which you save a Colada Web page. However, with some web browsers, the Java interpreter can’t use image files that are in a subfolder. Therefore, to ensure compatibility, you should not select the “Put images in subfolder” checkbox.

Options for handling type

Two options in the Save Web Document dialog box affect the way that Colada exports type (text characters and text objects) when creating web pages.

Converting to paths: Colada can convert type in a document to objects (also called paths) when you save in Colada Web format. You can specify a type size in the Save Web Document dialog box. Colada will convert to objects any text in the Canvas document that is larger than the point size you specify. For best results, specify a type size of 48 points or larger for converting type to paths. At smaller type sizes, text converted to paths can appear jagged.

To specify the maximum size for type: Enter a size in points in the text box labeled “Text larger than convert to path.” Colada will convert type that is larger than this size to objects; type that is smaller than this size will be rasterized and displayed as images on the web page.

In any case, all type in the original Canvas document remains editable; Colada converts type to objects or images in the Colada Web files, not in the original Canvas document.

Text font: Colada can export some or all of the text in a document as text, without converting it to paths or images. This text will appear with the text display settings specified in the browser.

In the Text font pop-up menu, choose a font that you want to export as text. Choose “All fonts” if you want to export all text as text.

Choosing this option will not preserve the appearance of formatted text in a document. The Text font setting takes precedence over the “Convert to paths” setting.

Set All Text as Keywords

This option lets you specify that all text should be tagged as keywords on the web page. Selecting this option is equivalent to selecting all text in the Canvas document and then selecting the Tag As Keyword checkbox in the URL Attachment palette. Usually, in a Java-based web page, text on the page is not searchable. This means that search engines can’t “read” the text. However, by specifying that text be tagged as keywords, you can make the text visible to search engines. If you want all the text in the document to be searchable, select Set All Text as Keywords.